Home

HVAC

1. u _ a of ft r 2 Laii PE Parr F nm Pr ma mams Se eo m 1 va mier amr a i om e r oe m wa m Be _ te 5 ee i ease nres E wa mre EEr mom ce oe e r ee Fian oP io oe m as f e m as a a i M 7 ae i ao ne 1a GALI na raa u i e r e ee as nres a ere oo ronf tafi Gal e t ee rr ma e e as be e eae or um mr a r wei er o am si mrem ua mear ma rear eF i e Pf a ma _ a r e mrm Gel ur erer ee e u rr e O rame nrm va mi C mi m Gal reii m a _ O o l M b e e nren ra mi oe rim mmm Gaal n erer qmr ma Eia wa Krme em i man a m z e e a U M iT Se a lt oe em r a rme mas m oea r mm ner us ooo oo im ad a e e lt a er en sm n op e S mer 1m mr i me ma om eii pie oma m mai ne ie ori ine ranr muan m as a a ne e e ii nw e l e i _ nee m are SS see a ere ea am neam os ree mim om w ni ea m a oe r n O es _ i we e lt nrm a i maar ur nr omme w pi omm Fian a nen a monr 2 Se a a e oe e e oe a eT m M iE Se
2. SC HVAC gt Unlock Part HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Unlock Part Toolbar Distributed Systems Utilities gt E Command SCUNLOCK Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Lock a Duct page 180 Unlocks a part SC HVAC gt Toggle Transform Mode HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Toggle Transform Mode Toolbar Distributed Systems Utilities gt ie Command SCTRANSFORMMODE Permissions None Procedure Toggle Transform Mode page 181 SC HVAC gt Toggle Constrain Enforcement HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Toggle Constrain Enforcement Toolbar Distrubuted Systems Utilities gt 48 Command SCCONSTRAINMODE Permissions Allow bent duct creation without constraints Procedure Loggle Constrain Enforcement page 190 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference Toggles the Constrain Enforcement mode SC HVAC gt Transfer Parts HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Transfer Parts Toolbar Distrubuted Systems Utilities gt er Command SCHEPTRANSFERPARTTODRAWING Permissions None Procedure ransfer parts to another drawing unit page 193 Transfers selected HEP parts from one drawing unit to another drawing unit 409 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt HVAC Drawing Options HVAC Ribbon Tab gt Main Panel SC HVAC gt
3. cecscsesessccsessssssssessrssesssseserseeseserseesaeseseeseesassesersaesaserseesatsesersansates 469 Drawing Options gt Pipe Drawing OptiOns csessessssssssssssrsssssssessrscsesersesessesersassesseseesaesesersaesassesersanseseesersatsesensansates 469 Drawing Optons HVAC Drawing ODEOMS dncinusaisnearseonn dines nenwadiv amiss nevn ATA A AAAA ARA 469 Drawing Options gt Equipment Drawing Options csssssssscsssrssrsssssserssesesseserseesessesensaeseserseesassesersansesersersatsesersansates 469 Drawing Options gt Hanger and Support Drawing Options cecscscsssessssssesssrsssssserseeseseserseesasseseesaesaserseesatsesensansates 470 Drawing Options Save Drawing Options Muisuninndnoniiaani naa MAA 470 Drawing Options gt Load Drawing OPTIONS ica cuicassicsninsassenarenaseanivnssinienctissinieds ieickabstinaetivationctinsesntiusucedsicuintucuantaieenintal 470 NV OT OE OMENS AA A V AAA A TATA A A A A A A tc ae lr A A vin AA A 470 Viewport Display Options gt Sei ccsniennnansasnonsh na aaan a a aaan aan EN 473 Viewpornt DisSpla yV ODUONS Save aus siteciantens Mhocuintont ha uidanane neta inane Mae N 473 VIEWDOIE DISD ay Opt ONS gt LOaO nonini a EE E 474 BOM Upda EBOM Sinana EAEE AANE AATA AA A A 474 xiii Contents BOM SINSCRE BOM TADIG asteisia anssnagt ha dues vase une sane uuutiads way atsieae iuasne eniduneee dadiuncabadeuaesleatneutvansam wens 474 BOM Edit GO lll SEO ODEON S si sosvaieventeatovdnsoteatealannlaase
4. BOM Definitions Master List Master List BOM Def 1 BOM Def 2 4 EE mem ary PARTNO oescReTon E users Collector A Collector B Collector C soe Viewport Viewport ae Viewport Viewport Layout 1 Layout 2 Layout n Production Drawing 212 Production Concepts One master list exists per BOM definition The first time a BOM table is inserted in a drawing its master list is created Subsequent table insertions all reference the initial master list BOM content is determined at the time of BOM update Collectors specified by the BOM definition organize the objects in the drawing into relevant groups for example Pipe Accessories and Spools and process the BOM data into data blocks The data blocks are then compiled into the master list with the tables being updated to reflect the master list data The order of the items listed in the BOM depends on primary and secondary factors The primary order is determined by the collector Each collector provides its own formatted data block Within each data b
5. Center offset Edge and center offsets branch part on the left header part on the right running into the page e Flip offset To reverse the direction of the current center or edge offset type FL for FLip offset e Rotate90 To rotate the branch part about its own end axis by 90 degrees type R for Rotate90 e World plane To align the NavAid to the world coordinate axes type W for World plane and press Enter e Initial plane To align the NavAid to the UCS that was current when the command started type for Initial plane and press Enter e Part plane To align the NavAid to the plane the header part lines in and the direction of its centerline closest to the saddle end type RT for paRT plane and press Enter e Align to part To rotate the NavAid within its own plane so that its zero angle is aligned with the nearest point on the header part s center line type A for Align to part and press Enter e Forward To set the direction of the orienting end as close as possible to forward type F for Forward and press Enter e Aft To set the direction of the orienting end as close as possible to aft type A for Aft and press Enter e Port To set the direction of the orienting end as close as possible to port type P for Port and press Enter e Starboard To set the direction of the orienting end as close as possible to starboard type S for Starboard and press Enter e Up To set the direction of the
6. Throat Length Throat Side Branch 2 Length Side Branch 1 Length Main Body Branch Offset Side Branch 1 Branch Offset Side Branch 2 Reducing Cross and Double Reducing Cross Trunk Length The overall length of the trunk main body End 1 End 2 The ends of the trunk e Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties e Throat Length The additional length applied to the end of the duct e End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 131 HVAC Library Setup 132 Side Branches Profile The profile of each end of the branch See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties Throat Length The additional length applied to the end Branch Offset How much the branch is offset from the first end of the main body End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the branch See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length End 2 Throat Length Side Branch 1 Length Trunk Branch Offset Side Branch 2 l Branch Offset Side Branch 1 Throat Length Length End 1 g Side Branch 2 Two Segment Cross and Double Two Segment Cross Main Body Length The length of the main segment End 1 End 2 The ends of the trunk e Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a descri
7. BOM Definitions The list of BOM definitions broken down into each production drawing type Pipe Spool drawings have special BOM Definitions for Bending Tables Cutlist Corner Point Location Tables and Global Position Location Tables Export Checkbox to indicate if which BOM Definitions to export when Export XML is chosen Definition Name Name of the BOM definition Title Title to display in the AutoCAD table Note Only tables using table styles that contain the Title section will display the Title text Acad TableStyle AutoCAD tablestyle to use for BOM tables If the specified tablestyle is not found at the time of insertion then the STANDARD style is used Label Style ShipConstructor label style to use for labeling from the BOM This style can be overridden by the Collectors gt Label Style Row prefix text Precedes item number with text in both table and label New Creates a new BOM definition If the Default Collectors checkbox is checked then a hardcoded default list of collectors is added Copy Create a new BOM definition from the currently selected BOM The collectors and fields will be the same as the selected BOM definition Delete Deletes the selected BOM definition If the BOM definition is in use it cannot be deleted Default Collectors If selected any new BOM definitions will include reasonable collectors for the current production drawing type You can modify the collectors and their order after
8. Command SCEQUIPPELCREATEALLPARTSINPRO ECT Permissions Equipment gt Project Equipment List gt Project Equipment List Items Create Procedure See the Equipment Manual for details Creates all PEL parts SC HVAC gt Edit Part none SC HVAC gt Edit Part Toolbar SC HVAC gt f9 Command SCEditHvacPart Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Details Edit Part page 179 Edits an already placed part 398 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Manager HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Spool Panel SC HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Manager None Command SCHvacSpoolManager Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Details Spool Manager Reference page 510 Launches the Spool Manager letting you to create edit and modify the spool breakdown for the current HVAC model SC HVAC gt Spools gt Set No Spool Toolbar Command SCSetNoSpool Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure No Spool Items page 195 Sets a part as a No Spool item SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove No Spool HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Spool Panel SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove No Spool Toolbar Distributed Systems Utilities gt wy Command SCRemoveNoSpool Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure No Spool Items page 195 Removes the No Spool status SC HVAC gt Spools gt Add Spool Break Toolbar Distributed Systems Utilities gt 5 Com
9. Note In ShipConstructor you are constrained to working with branches Therefore to set the current system you must select a branch under the system you want To set the current system 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Systems gt System Manager to open the System Manager 2 Select the branch you want to make current 3 Click OK to close the System Manager OR 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set System From HVAC Part 2 Select an HVAC part from the current drawing 3 The current system is now set to be the same as the system of the part selected in step 2 OR Start routing a new HVAC part Place first end connected to an existing HVAC part that is in a different system You will be prompted to change the current system to that of the part you are connecting to Click Yes YT Change the System for Ducts To change the system for ducts 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set System 2 Select all the ducts for which you want to change the system and press Enter The System Manager window appears 151 HVAC Modeling Select a branch to which you want these ducts to belong Click OK A log file will be produced if any of the selected ducts cannot be set to the selected system The log file will display which ducts cannot have their system changed and why they cannot change systems Set Up HVAC Defaults Display and Performance Display Options for Ducts To change the display options Choose SC HVAC gt HVAC Drawing Opt
10. UCS 207 208 209 350 438 activate 52 intersections 208 209 select viewpoint 53 unit create 59 delete 60 setup 59 unit drawing 87 user permissions 302 user defined attributes 49 307 assign 50 create 50 User Defined Attributes 101 V viewport 470 views 24 W windows 26 X XML file 297 Index
11. Union Weldolet Coupling Cross Elbows Flange Laterals Penetration Components Wl Redurers E 3 The Adjust the Collector options as necessary Note you will be notified if the BOM that you selected has no configurable Collector options Shiploanstructar A selected BOM contains no collectors with options to edit Set Up Viewports Each viewport can contain annotations such as labels that point to parts containing the text from a BOM Viewports can be set up to label from specific BOM tables For assembly drawings there is an additional option Show KeyMap will show the keymap xref geometry The keymap drawing typically contains an outline of the vessel s hull to indicate where the assembly is in the overall vessel To set up viewports 1 Inthe template drawing activate paper space except for plate nest and profile plot drawings Getting Started with Production 2 Choose Viewport Options page 470 to open the Viewport Options window EJ viewport Options keMap L Show keptlap Labelling Label items from all BOMs BOM Definition Assembly BOM Bill of Material Minimum leader length Label 5 pacing rea 3 To enable labeling of parts in the viewport choose Label items from all BOMs or check individual Label checkboxes for each BOM you want to label from 4 Click OK Set Up Drawing Options Drawing options control the look of parts in all d
12. and clicking Usage Log Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Materials page 302 to open the Materials window Select the material or grade Click Delete m a e 31 Library Setup View Material Usage It is possible to see a list of all the stocks that use a selected material grade A check mark in the In Use column indicates that the material grade is being used by stocks To list all stocks using a specific grade 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Materials page 302 to open the Materials window 3 Select the grade you want 4 Click Usage Log ShipConstructor displays a list of all stocks using the selected grade a Material Grade galv Usage 23 04 2013 10 53 19 tet Notepad Administrator File Edit Wiews Settings SAHA Aaa Aal Ele eA Ee LAERE STEERER E EALA EERTE EESTE AEAEE PAP EPEPPP PEPE PAPEL ED SAPP EPPA AP 2 Shipconstructor 2014 Manager 3 Usage Report for Material Grade galw 4 Log Date 23 04 2013 10 53 19 5 PARESE EPE SEREA RAEES AEE AEP PPPS AEE AEE ERA E EEEE E EAEE EAEE E EP 6 7 HAC End Treatment 9 LINDAB BLIND 10 PL RECT 11 DUCT FLANGE FL 20 12 LINDAB PL 13 LINDAB TAKE OFF L4 CABLE 15 DUCT FLANGE FL 30 16 LINDAB ee 18 Pipe stack Branch 20 TEE 8 73x73 gt 1 6 sTga lv LORO x Double sacket TEE with amp 7 deg angle 21 TEE RED 70 102x73x2 0 STgalvw LORO Double socket REDUC
13. 4 I uoi _Free I E uo1_Fres I voi _Frzo E vo1_Frvi I u01 _FR72 E u01 _FR72 170 E u01 _FR73 E u01 _FR74 4 I voi _FR75 4 E u01 _FR7E6 4 E u01 FRF IE uoi_Frze 4 I u01 _FR79 I uoi _Freo 4 I vo1_Frei I uo1_Frez 4 V2 ui _FRres C L uo1_Fre3_m C L u01 _FRe3_P 10 C L uo1_Fre3_p 9 C L 001 _FR83_0_ETO C uoi_Fre3_u_etisoo C uoi_Fre3_u_et2so0 C L 001 _FR83_0_BT4 C uoi_Fre3_u_et4so0 C 001 _FR83_0_BT 570 C 001 _FRS3_U_6T750 3633828 C voi _FRe3_u_BT 835 5 M L uo FRES U wLO Mm Display UCS Main UCS s Only AIUCS s Marking Type Dimension Dimension Style PIPE SPOOL Label Label Style Assembly Label Preview ke Distancex gt lt 2DirectionT o gt lt ZUCSN amey 4Distancey a gt lt 40irechonloy 4 lt SUCSN amer gt 4Distance lt 4 gt lt 2Direchonloa lt lt gt lt SUCSN amed Select Closest Planes Select Datum Planes sss a Cancel f fe Current Unit Orly Dimension Offset 50 Save Global Dimension Style Load Global Dimension Style Delete Global Dimension Stile Edit Distance 4 Direction Tao Direction From To l From s UCS Mame Distance Direction Tao Direction From l To Y l From UCS Mame Y Distance Z Direction To Z Direction From 2 l To Z l From Z UCS Mame 2 To
14. Bent duct with extracted centerline moved for display 403 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Add HVAC UCS Intersection HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Add HVAC UCS Intersection None Command SCHvacUCSIntersection Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Add HVAC UCS Intersection page 208 Creates an intersection point where a selected duct end and the current UCS intersect and draws a line between the intersection point and the duct end SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Toggle Highlight on all HEP UCS Intersection HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Toggle Highlight on all HEP UCS Intersection None Command SCHepUCSIntersectionHighlight Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Toggle UCS Intersection Line page 209 Toggles displaying the dotted line between the UCS intersection point and the duct end SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Erase HEP UCS Intersection HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Erase HEP UCS Intersection None SCHVACUcsIntersectionDelete Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Erase HVAC UCS Intersection page 209 Erases the UCS intersection on the selected end SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Erase All HEP UC
15. Click Finish 5 The Modified Part Information window appears 248 Getting Started with Production Modified Part information Part Name Source Type Source Name Last Revision Type LastRevisionUser LastRevision Date A056 F73 P02 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 5 2010 10 25 10 PM A057 F73 P01 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 5 2010 10 25 10 PM A057 F73 P02 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 5 2010 10 25 10 PM A057 F73 P04 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 5 2010 10 25 10 PM A057 F73 P05 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 6 2010 3 18 14 PM A058 F73 P08 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 5 2010 10 25 10 PM O Color 90 ee WE colori70 C WB color 10 id g A057 F55 P12 Drawing G906_FR55 Modified ShipConstructor 3 23 2010 9 31 46 AM f E Color 32 g r A057 F55 S03 Drawing G906_FR55 Modified ShipConstructor 3 23 2010 9 31 46 AM P ERW CS_04 0_80_A53 A 004 Drawing 906 Gray Water Modified ShipConstructor 7 19 2010 4 34 01 PM E E color 254 m Drawing G906_FR55 906 Gray Wate Modified ShipConstructor 7 29 2010 1 44 11 PM Show Preview Checked Parts Refresh Preview 6 You can use the Modified Part Information window to inspect parts that have changed during this update Click OK to continue the update process 7 The Bill of Materials BOM in this drawing will now be updated Depending on the size of your drawing and the BOM definition this may take
16. PL Aluminum 30 Circular 10 PL Aluminum 30 20 GA AL 3003 DU 08 AL 21 Circular 8 PL Aluminum 30 Circular 8 PL Aluminum 30 20 GA AL 3003 DU F020 x8 Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 20 GA AL 3003 DU F020 ka Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 Flattened Oval PL Aluminum 30 20 GA AL 3003 DU FO24 10 Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 20 GA AL 3003 DU Fatx Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 20 GA AL 3003 FEA Apply Filter Button This will apply all filters that you have defined in the Filter Row and the hidden filter that is created if you had selected a connection using the Connects To button a Clear Filter Button Will clear all filters that you have defined in the Filter Row and it will temporarily disable the hidden filter created if you had selected a connection using the Connects To button The Filter Row This is the empty row that is located just below the column headings To use this filter simply type in the string you would like to filter by under the correct column and click the Apply Filter button The filter when applied will show only those stocks that match the string typed in for that specific column Other Columns The select stock list can be configured to show only those columns you want This setting is remembered for the next time you op
17. Structure gt Model Drawings Create Delete Permissions Structure gt Model Drawings Edit Creates a new planar group See the Create Planar Group Drawings section in the Structure manual for more information Properties Permissions Structure gt Model Drawings Edit Opens the Edit Properties window letting you edit the properties of the selected planar group drawing Right Click Menu Lets you open delete or modify the properties of the selected structural drawing or create a new structural drawing Open New Properties Delete Delete Permissions Structure gt Model Drawings Create Delete Permissions Structure gt Model Drawings Edit Deletes the selected planar group drawing and all the parts in it Distributed Systems Page The Distributed Systems page Is a grouping page for all the Distributed Systems pages 315 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 316 Pipe Page The Pipe page lets you create open and modify pipe model and pipe arrangement drawings See the Pipe manual for details Open Permissions Pipe gt Modeling gt Pipe Models Edit OR Permissions Pipe gt Pipe Arrangements Edit Opens the selected drawing New Permissions Pipe gt Modeling gt Pipe Models Create Delete Permissions Pipe gt Modeling gt Pipe Models Edit OR Permissions Pipe gt Pipe Arrangements Create Delete Permissions Pipe gt Pip
18. 498 Appendix Production Command Reference Clear All BOMs This immediately erases all references to BOM definitions yet leaves the current BOM tables intact Unlink All BOMS Removes linked BOM references Note that auto linked BOMs will have their linkages reinstated the next time a BOM is inserted into the drawing 499 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference SC Spool Drawing Menu The SC Spool Drawing menu appears in spool drawings SC Spool Drawing gt Rotate Dimension SC Spool Drawing gt Rotate Dimension Toolbar Spool gt 4 Command SCROTATEDIM Permissions Pipe gt Spools gt Spool Drawings Edit Procedure Rotate a Dimension page 285 Invoke a utility that aids in the fine tuning of linear dimensions SC Spool Drawing gt Align Dimension Text to Current View Permissions Pipe gt Spools gt Spool Drawings Edit Procedure Align Dimension Text to View page 286 Rotate and orient all text labels in the drawing to face the user SC Spool Drawing gt Re Dimension SC Spool Drawing gt Re Dimension y Toolbar Spool gt 4 Command SCREDIM Permissions Pipe gt Spools gt Pipe Spools Edit Procedure Re dimension a Spool Drawing page 286 Automatically regenerates the dimensions for the spool Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference SC Spool Drawing gt Label Connecting Spool Assemb
19. Copy Creates a copy of the selected location group and places it at the bottom of the list Export Exports the location group to a LOC file Delete Deletes the selected location group Skewed Plane Shows the window to edit the properties of the skewed plane for skewed location groups SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Create Production tab gt Production Utilities panel SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Create SCRLINE License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Permissions Edit production drawing if in a production drawing or edit model drawing if in model drawing Procedure Create a Reference Line page 79 Creates a reference line with the current reference line style The reference line is created in the current UCS and along a selected primary axis The reference line spans the extents of the drawing The reference line is movement locked unless it s in a MarineDrafting drawing If you want to move the line use the middle point grip to retain the correct locations SC Utilities gt List Item within Block Xref SC Utilities tab gt Visual panel SC Utilities gt List item within Block Xref SCLISTSUBENT Permissions None Procedure Display Information for an Object within an MLinked Drawing page 56 Displays LIST information for an object within an mlinked or other XREFed drawing SC Utilities gt Check Local Interferences SC Utilities tab gt Tools pane
20. Distributed Systems Supports gt Construction Drawings Edit Renames the selected support construction drawing Delete Permissions Distributed Systems Supports gt Construction Drawings Edit Deletes the selected support construction drawing Equipment Page The Equipment page lets you create open and modify equipment model and equipment arrangement drawings See the Equipment manual for details Open Permissions Equipment gt Equipment Parts in Drawings Edit OR Permissions Equipment gt Equipment Arrangements Edit Opens the selected drawing New Permissions Equipment gt Equipment Parts in Drawings Edit OR Permissions Equipment gt Equipment Arrangements Edit Creates a new drawing Show Out of Date Shows a iM next to each equipment arrangement drawing that has parts in it that have changed or parts that have been added or removed Right Click Menu Lets you open reattach rename or delete the selected drawing or create a new drawing Open New Rename Delete Reattach New Rename Delete 321 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 322 Reattach Permissions Equipment gt Equipment Arrangements Edit Reattaches an existing drawing to a registered equipment arrangement drawing that has its drawing file missing The selected drawing is checked to ensure it is an equipment arrangement drawing Rename Permissions Equipment gt Equipment
21. Moves the selected server down in the list e Port The default port is 3960 You should not need to change this value unless there is a port conflict with another program If you change the port number you must also change the port number on all license servers e OK Saves the list and refreshes the modules list in the Licensing window Refresh List Refreshes the module list This option is useful when locks are moved or license servers are added If new locks are attached they will be recognized and loaded Module Shows which modules are available based on available locks The grayed out modules are not available Use the check boxes to obtain a license for certain modules Parts The number of parts used in the current project for each module Level Max Parts The license level and the maximum number of parts you can have in a project for each module If you have more than one level available or different options then you will see the ellipsis button bad Clicking this button will show a table of the available levels If a row is disabled then that license level is not selectable and the reason is displayed in the status column e For Structure ManualNest AutomaticNest ProfileNest and MarineDrafting the number of structure parts per level is 750 For example Level 3 allows you to work on projects with a maximum of 2 250 structural parts e For Product Hierarchy the number of parts per level is 1 950 For example Le
22. PLO9 2050 U01 TT 06 HP120 7 Uo1_TT 1400 Um_TT 1400 3050 U01 TT D1 PLO9 2050 U01 TT 05 HP1207 Uo1_TT 1400 UD_TT 1400 L3 1 7 PLOF 3050 U01 L2500 11 PLOF U01_L2500 PS UD _L2500 Ps S050 U01 TT 02 PLO9 2050 U01 F71 01 PL11 U01 TT 1400 UD _FR71 S050 U01 TT 02 PL03 2050 U01 TT 06 HF1207 UD_TT 1400 Uoi_TT 1400 S050 U01 TT 02 PL03 2050 U01 TT 06 HF1207 UD_TT 1400 Uoi_TT 1400 E a co OF Oe to Po gt 6 To havea better view of an interference in the drawing turn on Center right click on the interference and choose View ShipConstructor hides all solids except for those involved in the interference You may need to move the Interference List window to see them Click the L and L buttons to zoom in and out 7 To display the properties of an interference right click on it and choose Solution 85 Checks 86 solutions Physical Properties Solution CG of Interference TTOP plate thickness should be 10 not L 42604mmn 14 T mm Yo 1330mm Yolume 75600 00 mm 3 Dii The Solutions window displays the Physical Properties of the interference and lets you enter a suggested Solution For example Shorten Stiffener 8 To generate an interference report in the Interference List window select the interferences to include in the report and click Report to open the Interference Report window ka Interference List Bs First Fart Second Part Solution First Daag Second Dwg Run Check 30
23. Production Utilities gt Update All Keywords Production tab gt Production Utilities Menu Update All Keywords Command SCUP DATEALLKEYWORDS Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Update All Keywords page 250 Updates all keywords in paper space in the drawing 467 Appendix Production Command Reference Drawing Options gt Edit All Drawing Options Production tab gt Main panel Drawing Options gt Edit All Drawing Options SCDWGOPTIONSALL Permissions None License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Displays all the drawing options site Edit All Drawing Options Option Structure Part General Show Bevel Solid stiffener Green Plate Part Production Bevel Texk Cuts Marks Marking Text Profile Part Start and End Labels Hangers Geometry Show 20 Geometry Show Show 30 Geometry Show Hanger Colors Hanger Color Ea Bw Laver Hanger Color Type alobal olor Pipe 2D 3D Wireframe Draw Line Mode Icons Line Mode Icon Override Stock Double Lines Solid Display Show or hide Piecemarks Cancel 468 Appendix Production Command Reference Drawing Options gt Structure Drawing Options Production tab gt Main panel Drawing Options gt Structure Drawing Options SCDWGOPTIONSSTRUCT P
24. Start Command SCSPM Permissions None Procedure None Starts the performance monitoring diagnostic tool Performance monitoring is an internal command that aids in determining the bottlenecks You should not need to use this command unless instructed to do so Performance Monitor End SCEPM Permissions None Procedure None Stops the performance monitoring See Performance Monitor Start page 374 Performance Monitor Display SCDPM Permissions None Procedure None Outputs the performance monitor data to an Excel spreadsheet and opens Excel DataManager Dump Permissions None Procedure None This is an internal command that outputs cached in memory data to an XML file You should not need to use this command Appendix B HVAC Command Reference Appendix B HVAC Command Reference HVAC Ribbon Tab Please see Main Panel page 454 for details on that panel HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel Anchor See SC HVAC gt Anchor Part page 408 UnAnchor See SC HVAC gt Unanchor Part page 408 Lock See SC HVAC gt Lock Part page 408 UnLock See SC HVAC gt Unlock Part page 409 2 Connect See SC HVAC gt Connect page 407 amp a Disconnect See SC HVAC gt Disconnect page 407 R Create Saddle See SC HVAC gt Saddles gt Create Saddle page 401 375 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference HS Remove Saddle See SC HVAC gt Saddles gt Remove
25. Unassigned Structure Assembly To copy an existing product hierarchy 1 Open the Product Hierarchy palette Select the Product Hierarchy you wish to copy From the menu select Tools gt Product Hierarchy gt Copy Provide the name of the new Product Hierarchy If you want to copy part assignments to Assemblies select Copy Part Locations Click OK oS a ee To copy an existing product hierarchy from the command line 1 Run the SCProductHierarchyCopy command 2 Provide the name of the Product Hierarchy that you want to copy 3 Provide the name of the new Product Hierarchy 4 Indicate if you want to copy the Assembly and Parts hierarchy yes or just the Assembly hierarchy no A new Product Hierarchy will be created and can be viewed in the Product Hierarchy palette Export a Product Hierarchy to another ShipConstructor project A product hierarchy can be exported to an xml file for importing into another ShipConstructor project To export an existing product hierarchy 1 Open the Product Hierarchy palette 2 Select the Product Hierarchy you wish to export 3 From the menu select Tools gt Product Hierarchy gt Export 4 Provide the name of the xml file for saving the export data To export an existing product hierarchy from the command line 1 Run the SCProductHierarchyExport command 2 Provide the name of the Product Hierarchy that you want to export 3 Provide the name of the xml file for saving the exp
26. ae El Eile General Structure Piping VAC Space Allocation Electrical Equipment Penetrations Weld Management Standard Sasernbhy Database Utilities a Window Jei gt olera BTA LbIS paN il Label Styles ee Esport In Use Label sive Wane reerten Mode DLBbe stye BLBbe See in leader Acad Dineren Style un Savard eb Closest Horeontal Bubble yes STANDARD DEFAULT Closest Horconte Bubble 1 5 Hvac Arrgt Bubbles Closest Horizontal Bubble 5 Hvac Agt Cies Cipsesk Horgontal ingie 10 Hier SPOL Closest Horzontel Bubble 5 Pips Arg Bubbles Closest Horizontal Bubble Pipe Amg Circles Closest Hor ontal Cide POPE SAHL Closest Horizontal Bubble Pips Spool Corners Closest Horgontal Bubble Pipe Spool Cuts Bem Closest Horcontel Circe Plates Chost Horzenkel Square Standard Closest Horeontal Bubble Sbffeners Closest Horcontel Triangle Support Conshructio Closest Horzontal Bubble Li 4444444 TEEETTERE LE ee Pd LS JASON _PETAIC_I2R2 The actual dimension style should exist in the production drawing If it doesn t the Standard dimension style will be used The dimension style in the production drawing must be named exactly the same as the field in the Label Styles catalog in Manager a 3 Constructor anager LOSOM_METRIC_12R2 Label Shes co E File General Structure Piping HVAC Space Allocation Electrical Equipment Penetrsbons Weld Management Standard Assembly Database Uti
27. gt Edit Stringers AND Permissions Hull gt Create Delete Drawings OR Permissions Hull gt Edit Pin Jigs Opens the selected drawing New Permissions Hull gt Edit Lofting AND Permissions Hull gt Create Delete Drawings OR Permissions Hull gt Edit Pin Jigs Creates a new drawing Right Click Menu Lets you open copy rename or delete the selected drawing or create a new drawing or folder Open New Rename Delete Open New Copy Rename Delete New New Folder New Rename Delete New Folder Permissions Hull gt Create Delete Drawings OR Permissions Hull gt Edit Pin Jigs Creates a new folder as a subfolder of the hull or pin jig root folder Subfolders of these folders are not allowed Copy Permissions Hull gt Create Delete Drawings OR Permissions Hull gt Edit Pin Jigs Copies the selected drawing prompts for the new drawing name and registers the new drawing with project Rename Permissions Hull gt Create Delete Drawings OR Permissions Hull gt Edit Pin Jigs Renames the selected drawing or folder 332 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Delete Permissions Hull gt Create Delete Drawings OR Permissions Hull gt Edit Pin Jigs Deletes the selected drawing or folder Space Allocation Page The Space Allocation page lets you create open and modify space allocation drawings See the Space All
28. m Vea Aah Linemode icons left to right Vertical line Filled Rectangle Rectangle None Cross Filled Circle Circle and Socket To create a linemode icon 1 Open the LineMode Icon window See End Treatments page 94 2 Click New to create a new linemode icon 3 Entera name for the linemode icon and press Enter 4 Select a shape for the icon under the LineMode Icon drop down list 5 Check the Fill check box if you want the icon to be filled Note Only the circle and rectangle icons can be filled 6 Set the scale properties Fixed The icon will be a fixed size when in single linemode Enter a fixed size in the box below Relative The icon will be a relative size to the end profile of the HVAC part Enter a relative size in the box below Scale to Paperspace When checked the size of the icon will be in paper space units 7 Click Done to save your changes and close the window 97 HVAC Library Setup 98 Create an End Treatment You must create an end treatment type before you can create an end treatment To create an end treatment type ae a ee i a Open the Edit EndTreatment Types window See End Treatments page 94 Click New to create a new end treatment type Enter a name for the end treatment type and press Enter Select a LineMode Icon for how the end treatment will appear in single linemode Select a Style for the end treatment type to display in wireframe mode Click OK to save the changes and close
29. or PlanarGroup Plane Every PlanarGroup Plane has a UCS However you can make new UCSs that will not create PlanarGroup Planes is UCS has an associated PlanarGroup Plane Ik UCS only wists Activate UCS Activate from list N Hew Out of Plane UCS Name WoT L500 SBM Move lt WIO1_ L2500 SB_P6 SSS aa UD L FED SE M Activate tram Ubject U0I_L1500 FS_M U01 L1500 56 M World Rename Delete Add Curent UCS o o poe a p G New Out of Plane Creates a new UCS out of plane with the current UCS You define the new plane by picking two or three points New Parallel Creates a new UCS parallel with the current UCS TR Plane Distance 1000 Pik blove Direction Measurement Pott Relative Starboard 0 Absolute Cancel Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Activate from Object Sets a named UCS to be the current UCS or creates a UCS from a selected object For most objects there is only one possible UCS Selecting a plate part brings up the following selection window If the throw of the plate is centered then there are three options Activate UCS Activate Fron Part Plane Starboard Mold side Fort Thickness side Selecting a stiffener part will bring up the following selection window Stittener UCS Select the button beside the UCS icon wou want Stifhener End Stark End Add Currrent UCS Adds the currently selected UCS to the da
30. or cone The plane the body icons are drawn in will adjust based on the current view Valve Handles The geometry used to draw the valve handles is defined by the user see Create a Valve Handle 2D drawing The 2D valve handles will be scaled to the same length as the valve handle 524 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Part List A WF SHIPCONSTRUCTOR A SHIPYARD IMC Soret UIA Ba 001 006 fo r Spool Drawings Penetrations Penetrations will be displayed in the spool drawing if the show penetrations option is selected in the spool styles see Spool Styles Reference page 519 The penetrations will be marked using an X and placed on the Pens layer If the penetration is a watertight penetration and contains component parts the component parts will be displayed in the spool drawing the BOM s Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Baseline dimension Penetration height Mark Ere ee Penetration Component Part The penetration component parts will be included in the BOM s if either the penetration collector is added to the BOM or if the pipe collector and or the structure collector options are edited to include penetration component parts The penetrations will be dimensioned from the penetration mark to the end of the pipe run to the end or to the break point selected in the spool styles The baseline dimension height in the specified dimension style will be used to stack th
31. 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator page 311 to open Navigator 2 Select the Output page ca shipConstructor Navigator 2006 186 6906 Drawing Last Modified Date Preview ESC Output Distributed Systems EQ MarineDrafting Bag ar ge Pipe Sa HVAC a baw Skewed t p Ee gt Support O aE Cambered Deck 31 2013 11 19 26 AM l Ai Pipe Spool oF Bh 3 25 2013 4 01 11 PM Ye HVAC Spool Ba Partial 3 21 2013 4 11 13 PM e Support Construction A S06 simple 3 12 2013 1 47 40 PM wee Si Foward oE Midbody p SS FS Pipe Link Files Haf Blackwater System 3 8 2013 1 22 14 PM F Read Only Hew Output Show Out of Date Space Allocation Hew Marne Drafting Output Nest Profile Plat Templates 3 Click New Output to bring up the Create Output Drawing Wizard Note The folder selected will be preselected in the wizard 255 Getting Started with Production Step 1 of 3 Please enter a name and select a folder for the new Output drawing P TestB P Afew modules P Pipe COnn P Testa P Test Ass Source P Test Ass Source2 T Test Ass Sources P Test Ass Source T Test Ass Sources P Test Ass Sourceb T Test Ass Source P Test Ass Sources 4 Select a folder for the Output drawing enter a valid name and click Next 256 Getting Started with Production Step 7 of 3 Please select an Output drawing template Prod Templ 5 Select a Template drawing and click Next 257 Getting Sta
32. 103 for a description of the profile properties End Treatment 1 End Treatment 2 The treatment that is applied to the ends of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Side Branch 1 Side Branch 2 Double Tee Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length The additional length applied to the end Branch Offset The amount the branch is offset from the first end of the main body 117 HVAC Library Setup 118 Throat Length Main Length Branch Offset Reducing Tee and Double Reducing Tee Trunk Length The overall length of the trunk main body End 1 End 2 The ends of the trunk e Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties e Throat Length The additional length applied to the end of the duct e End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Side Branch 1 Side Branch 2 Double Reducing Tee Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties End Treatment The end treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length The additional length applied to the end Branch Offset The amount the
33. 174 6 Enter the extra material length If the branch part s end location needs to be adjusted to achieve the desired length the branch part is moved using a multi part transform on its end see Multi Part Transforms page 183 If there is more than one possible connection you are prompted to select one The branch part s end treatment in combination with the selected connection determines the saddle s end treatment If there is only one possible connection it is used automatically If there are none an error is reported and the saddle creation is aborted 7 Unless only one possible connection exists and was used automatically select the desired connection and click OK The saddle end and connection are created Remove a Saddle To remove a saddle 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Saddles gt Remove Saddle page 401 2 Click the saddle you want to remove Create a Pants End A pants end lets you connect several ducts to a single rectangular duct end See Pantsify page 436 for more information on creating pants To create a pants end 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Pantsify End 2 Select the end you want to pantsify The Edit Pants window appears Divide the end into smaller ends as needed and click OK See Edit a Pants End page 174 Edit a Pants End The HVAC Edit Pants window shows a cross section of the pants duct Vertical and horizontal divisions can be added modified and deleted HVAC Modeling HVAC Edit Pants Add
34. 2_ Firefighting and Deckwash JOU FRAL Ud Fel EPI Equipment Equipment Fei eatin J01_ FR 2 U01 _FF 724170 t _ Electrical Electrical 4 z E J01 FR S WU0l FR s sel pena J01_FR 4 Wi FRFd4 7 uoz Woz JO1_FR7S U01_FR75 _ _ Space Allocaton Space Allocation Joi FRE Lo FEFA J01_ FRY U0l FR S70 pods 5300 Lavers overrice con licts Naxt Choose all sources and their destination layers that you want to generate your arrangement drawing from see also Create Arrangement Drawing Wizard Reference page 268 There are four possible sources e Drawings Bac ITSncel e Systems e Assemblies e Spools Click on any sources you want to include in your drawing and select a layer from the drop down list or enter the destination layer in the text field of the drop down box Any number of sources can be included in an Arrangement drawing The items in the drop down box are the layers in the template drawing that was selected plus the default value of the source name and you can also enter any text for a destination layer as well All selected sources and their layers appear on the right hand side of the window You can later change these sources by updating the arrangement drawing See Update A Production Drawing page 246 Note If you select different sources that include the same part the part will only show up once in the arrangement drawing This could happen if you include a system model drawing as well as t
35. AA AAAA 23 ODJET ENADE farinn aa a a aaa a O a Aa 24 VOWS a Siheaenns saree abacund nana i noninan toe hibalidudaia Mbatal Nanda ihodushidaadt tha id teatel Naat dibelu Mesos hicetistbaset alban 24 WINJOWS AG CIEON S wesc eaters ete ae ia a bono fede a e era ae ah eaten ented 26 Structural Design WOrk IOW amro es nae concernant nda aR 26 Library Setup 28 NEM EW iri nett ini edes neu tated etek nedvbud neaned sealed annvbud toad nadsund ond nednud nad nndeand ond anand ned nniand ood aninud udanniundouduedits 28 SUPPEA LIDAN E Shes csr setanaci yesenccactstucaitiecen cua iecnacst vuden due eaonselvesoudel ieataculledsaciavaceneil sutonaul veseusepuesbaceieaeacueunsbneuivuaaadane 28 CaO UDN O Meee tT Ree tere ne eereee teerety Mra te cnr errr AA 28 PFO ECT oet S ranae E N A E E N O TE N EAA 28 SEPTICE CCN eae E I easel cane EE E 28 Contents MPOT PROVE SOUTH GS S enginn a Dani Beran Raundetanuitoeandaniieaitiis 28 EDON a INGS Aia 29 OS SSM ON A A a 29 Maco r T O en ree ee 30 create a MIENE aaea TAN NAAT TEAT ETETA EE 30 DEEE ES A E E A A T T E E T 30 Rename a Matena OFF Gilg CS taian AA RAAR AAA AA 31 MOO Materials and Grades aperon R E R E A R E ese eteconsnads 31 EXON IM ACSI Al S and Grade S saa IEE EEIT 31 Delete a Maternal OF Graders AAAA AAA AAA AAAA 31 View Material WS AG Eksesais inais daemon cts EEE deta el ie beta etn se awaited KEAR ec des eee amen 32 Manufacturera tnt terre trier err a eter tr rte E E err tre rerrter terre err rt 32 C
36. B Interference weld Management Composite wi Approval Export Hew HVAC Show Out of Date E Hull 7 Space Allocation LA Nest fy Profile Plot Templates shipconstructor Open Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling OR Permissions HVAC gt HVAC Arrangements Edit Opens the selected drawing New Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Model Drawings Create Delete Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling OR Permissions HVAC gt HVAC Arrangements Create Delete Permissions HVAC gt HVAC Arrangements Edit Creates a new drawing Show Out of Date Shows a A next to each HVAC arrangement drawing that has parts in it that have changed or parts that have been added or removed Right Click Menu Lets you open reattach rename or delete the selected drawing or create a new drawing Open New Rename Delete 317 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 318 Reattach New Rename Delete Reattach Permissions Pipe gt HVAC Arrangements Create Delete Reattaches an existing drawing to a registered HVAC arrangement drawing that has its drawing file missing The selected drawing is checked to ensure it is a HVAC arrangement drawing Rename Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling OR Permissions HVAC gt HVAC Arrangements Edit Renames the selected drawing Delete Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Model D
37. BEE EEO Te TEERADA BPP ARSEE PEAS Po Command Line a E T Zz amp ie T F E a i F E W lir B L E The ShipConstructor menu SC Utilities menu and SC Advantage Pack menus are always available Other menus are also available depending on the type of drawing you have open oe Navigator gr Manager Report Project gt has Model Link Planar Group d Check Unit Check Project Penetration Manager Profile Nesting FlyThrough ShipConstructor Help d Licensing About ShipConstructor ShipConstructor menu Z 3D Viewpoint fh activate UCS it Hide Objects w Unhide Objects Unhide All Objects Jy 3D to 2D Orthographic Projection Remove Yertices Below Tolerance Convert Ellipse Spline to Polyline Layer Tool Path Y Fillet aly Mirror about Centerline SB Refresh drawing Create Quality Matrix List item within Block XRef Global Dimension to Point Snap Shipc aM SC Utilities menu New Project Copy Project Transfer Objects to Group Hull HVAC Pipe Equipment amp Penetrations Structure amp Nest gt em Activate Deactivate py Geometry to Co Move Geometry to gt Import Files Convert IGES to Mesh ShipConstructor The toolbars available to you when using ShipConstructor are controlled by the current AutoCAD Workspace you have loaded Toolbar buttons with a small black triangle let you access
38. C L u01 _FRS3_U_BT2500 C L u01 _FR63_0_BT4 C L u01 _FR83_0_ET4500 C L 001 _FR63_U_BT 570 C L u01 _FRS3_0_BT750 3633828 Select Closest Planes LJ 1 vo1_FrR83_U_BT 3835 5 ee mM 1 uoi FRS3 u who Select Datum Planes 0K Cancel To create a global dimension to point 1 Open the drawing you want to add the global dimension to 2 Choose Global Dimension To Point 3 Click the Marking Type option Dimension or Label This will change the preview to display the text that will be used for the global dimension If creating a dimension enter the dimension offset This value is the length of the extension 223 Getting Started with Production line for the dimension Select a style to be used for the global dimension The dimension and label styles are defined in Manager 4 Choose the UCS s to measure the dimensions from If necessary edit the display text to display the appropriate keywords 5 Click OK If a label is created select a point for where to place the label and press ENTER Creating a New BOM Definition Utilizing the BOM Definition Manager you can manage all the Bill of Material for your project To create a new BOM 1 Select the drawing type for which the BOM is intended 2 Optionally check the Default Collectors checkbox so that a reasonable subset of Collectors page 448 is included in when you create your BOM Press the New button Set the properties for the BOM in the BOM definitio
39. Change the Required and Default values as needed Required attributes must have default values and will be applied to each assembly in the product hierarchy To remove an user defined attribute l 2 3 From the Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 menu select Tools gt User Defined Attributes Select the attribute to be removed from a product hierarchy on the right side of the window Click the left arrow Kl to remove 69 Library Setup Set Up Assemblies Add an Assembly to the Product Hierarchy To add an assembly to the product hierarchy 1 Inthe Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 select an assembly to add a sub assembly to and choose Tools gt Assembly gt New This option is also available if you right click on the assembly The New Assembly window appears EJ New Assembly Praperhie User Defirnec Attrbite Name Bese Humber 7 a Interval Attribute Erakled Required value Cezcrptone Levels STAGE STAGE PIFIMG cy STEM ERANLA Finishes FHrnzhes puue SSlechec Finkhes 2 Set the options e Name The name of the new assembly e Number To create more than one assembly enter the number of assemblies to create If you set Name to FR122 and set Number to 3 ShipConstructor will create assemblies FR122 FR123 and FR124 To create one assembly set Number to 1 e internal If Number is greater than 1 Interval is the interva
40. E 14 23 2013 3 16 07 PM Log file R Projects ssr Tutorial Logei les uol InterferenceySAMPLe 2013 04 23 15 16 07 txt created by shipconstructor 2 3 4 5 Parti Drawingl Part2 Drawing wolume Cima 3 LCG TCG vG solution 6 3050 U01 FF1 1 PL11 UOL_FRFL 3050 U01 TT 0O3 PL09 UOL_TT 1400 139163 0376 42594 5000 1613 3169 1389 5289 7 3050 U01 TT 01 PLOD UD1_TT 1400 3050 U01 TT 06 HPL20x7 uo1l_TT 1400 75600 0000 42603 5000 0 9000 1389 5000 TTOP plate th 8 3050 U01 TT O1 PLO UOL TT 1400 3050 U01 TT O6 HP1L20x7 UOL_TT 1400 75600 0000 40203 5000 0 0000 1389 5000 3 3050 U01 TT 01 PL09 O1_TT 1400 3050 U01 TT 06 HP1L20x7 uo1_TT 1400 75600 0000 43803 5000 0 0000 1389 5000 10 3050 U01 TT O1 PLOG O1_TT 1400 3050 U01 TT 06 HP1L20x 7 UOL_TT 1400 75600 0000 42003 5000 0 0000 1389 5000 11 3050 u01l TT 01 PLO UOI TT 1400 3050 U01 TT 06 HP120x7 uo1l_TT 1400 75600 0000 40803 5000 0 9000 1389 5000 12 3050 U01 TT O1 PLOG O1_TT 1400 3050 U01 TT 06 HP1L20x7 UOL_TT 1400 75600 0000 41405 5000 0 0000 1389 5000 13 3050 U01l TT 01 PLO O1_TT 1400 3050 U01 TT 05 HPL20x7 uol_TT 1400 75600 0000 39003 5000 0 9000 1389 5000 14 3050 U01 TT O1 PLO O1_TT 1400 3050 U01 TT 06 HP120x7 UOL_TT 1400 75600 0000 43203 5000 0 0000 1389 5000 p Lni 35 Coll Sel0 5 24 KB ANSI CR LF INS Default Text Check Local Interferences You can also check for interferences in a single planar group drawing without creating an int
41. End Labels HYAL HY AC Solid Layer lt Source Layer gt 23 30 Wireframe Double Line Solid Display Part Centerline lt Source Layer gt Centerline Color Show Insulation Show Thickness Ends Free End Arrow Color Free End Arron Size Free End Arrows lt Source Layer gt OK Lancel Change any options and click 267 Getting Started with Production Ein Save As G a H Libraries Organize Ur Favorites Libraries Ml Desktop Open a library to see your files and arrange them by folder date and other properties my Downloads a Recent Places Documents a Music Sep bay gt library 3 Libraries Pictures int Videos Documents B j Ep Library Library a Music E Pictures E Videos JE Computer E Local Disk C ga dev D af File name ASO7STUFF_Export dwq Save as type AutoCAD Drawing Hide Folders Cancel 4 Select a folder and enter a drawing name for the exported drawing 5 To load a previously saved configuration use the Load button and select the configuration file to read To export a drawing without windows 1 Enter the command SCEXPORTDWGSILENT Enter filename Config lt C Export MyAssemblyDrawing_Export dwg gt 2 The export will use the ShipConstructor display settings of the current document if you want to use other settings enter Config will allow you to enter an optional file name on the command
42. End Tr X Dele Ga Import Export XML lt e Under Show check the check boxes for the Types of end treatments to show e Under Show select a Material from the drop down list to only show end treatments made from that material To open the end treatment types window 1 Open the End Treatment window 2 Click the Edit Types button to open the Edit EndTreatment Types window EW Edit EndTreatment Types of i Flange Fa Slipon of i Plain To open the linemode icon window 1 Open the Edit EndTreatment Types window 2 Click the LineMode button to open the LineMode Icon window 96 HVAC Library Setup 5C LineMode Icon LineMode Icons In Use Mame Fill Icon y ees meoo P ia v an E oe Relative yf Slipon F Circle Scale to Paperspace Per Delete Create a Linemode Icon Linemode icons are used for displaying end treatments when only centerlines are being drawn e g in spool drawings Example icons are shown below These are actually half icons when ducts are connected the two halves form a full icon For example the circle linemode icon shows up as a semicircle on one end of a duct but when that duct is connected to another duct that has the same end treatment a full circle is shown The two half icons are drawn flush to each other even when the end treatment geometry is not exactly flush i e when connections have gaps or the two ends only meet within an angular tolerance L
43. F Unassigned Equipment Unassigned Supports m Unassigned Structure F Unassigned Standard A m WF Unassigned Cable Supp m F Unassigned Cable i P 0101 aM 0102 Lower Side Assem i e Po Shell SST 0102 P01 P01 wW SSI 0102 P01 P02 F S5L0102 P01 501 M roz M Pos M Pos M Pos M Pos Por 4 rn Show Current Unit Only Product Hierarchy Level PART Selected Parts 1 2 Choose Tools gt Product Hierarchy gt New ES new Product Hier a Please enter the Product Hierarchy name Alternate OK 3 Enter a new Product Hierarchy name and click OK All parts will be assigned to the appropriate unit assembly of the new product hierarchy Each product hierarchy has its own levels Copy Product Hierarchy This feature allows you to create a new Product Hierarchy from an existing Product Hierarchy You can choose 1f you want to copy Assembly and Part hierarchy or just the Assembly hierarchy Library Setup What is copied e Assemblies e Assembly Levels e Assembly User Defined Attributes e Finishes e Part locations if you choose to copy Assembly and Part hierarchy Notes If you are copying the Primary Product Hierarchy Units and Standard Assemblies will become Assemblies in the new Product Hierarchy If you choose to copy only the Assembly hierarchy parts will be located in their default Unassigned Assembly For example Structure parts would be located in the
44. Fart ho General Part Gee Import Export SML ee 7 HYAC Connection Accessories J PA Mo iren copy x Delete lt a 4 Selecta BOM definition 5 Click Next 6 Enter the options for the BOM table 228 Getting Started with Production led 20M Defirition Wizare Ctep 2 of 2 Set 30H and lcbeliag opiicrs Tale Opliur olurr w dih R o height Yaman namber of ows per bable 15 00 PS urila TS Lires CDA E indcales ro marina Lst ictal List Qaly isitle WTF able wrap cirection Right Spacing 6 35 roanles urtz lahel ptinee 1 Wiewpork sclected Select y ewpgt Highigat selected 7 Click Select viewports Select viewport Select the main viewport in the paperspace layout Click Finish 10 Select the location of the empty BOM Edit BOM Collector Options This command allows the user to alter a Bill of Materials Collector options For example the Pipe Collector allows the user to select which object types to include exclude By using this command you can adjust the filtering of object types to suit your needs To change the BOM collector options 1 Choose BOM gt Edit Collector Options page 477 Select Table 2 Select the BOM table 229 Getting Started with Production 230 H Detail BOM Collector Options El fae Misc W Caps Ej Connectors VY Misc Threadolet
45. G Unspooled Pipe m F Unspooled HVAC m UnassignedPipe m F Unassigned HVAC pi Unassigned Equipment Unassigned Supports l Unassigned Structure pil F Unassigned Standard A M Unassigned Cable Supp m 7 Unassigned Cable H H i J P o101 aM o102 Lower Side Assem aM p roi Shell E see C a 551 0102 P01 P02 P a 55I 0102 P01 501 Poz POS P04 POS P06 PO 4 rm Show Current Unit Only Product Hierarchy S51 Level PART Selected Parts 1 67 Library Setup Note When the Product Hierarchy palette is open you can continue to perform commands in the drawing such as changing your view changing the shading mode and so on You can also dock the palette to the AutoCAD window The tabs represent different product hierarchies The default product hierarchy is Build Strategy To select a different product hierarchy click its tab To create a new product hierarchy choose Tools gt Product Hierarchy gt New and enter a name for the product hierarchy To delete a product hierarchy click its tab and then choose Tools gt Product Hierarchy gt Delete To rename a product hierarchy click its tab and then choose Tools gt Product Hierarchy gt Rename Choose Tools gt Edit Levels to open the Edit Levels window ead Edit Levels for PRIMARY co 1 oe Mew Delete Levels PROJECT UNIT S Tse STAGE PIFIMG SYSTEM BROW O cil IO This window lists the
46. HVAC gt Penetrations gt Insert Penetration ccssssssrssssssssssrsssssssrssrsssesersrsaeseserseesacseserseesessesersansesersersansasensensatees 405 SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Swap Construction LING csssssesssssssssrsssssessssrssrsssesersesasseserseeseseesersaesesrseesatsesersensatees 406 SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Add Construction LING ccscesssssssssrsssssssrssrssssessrsersessesersesassesersersasesersasseseesersansesensensasses 406 SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Remove Construction LING ccsceccessssssrssrsssssssrsersassessrseesassessrsersatsesersanseseesersansesensensatees 406 SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Get Boundary LINGS cccessessssssssssrssessssrsseseesessessesaeseserseesasesersersaseesersansassesersatsasensensatees 406 SC AVAG gt Pantsi VENO asia ANAON 406 SC HVAG COMEC eien e E E E a a E E 407 SC HVAC DISC OM NSCE aoria veloute oes silt aloe tees calls atlantida danitidodeanntdnatiestbnate 407 SC HVAC gt Break DUCE aL DOIG ranira A AA AE A ETA EE 407 SC HVAC gt Toggle Close AVAC GMOs seier aAA AAA AAA 408 SCRHVAC SANCHON P AI aaneen ina E AT NEAT OAOT EET a 408 SC AVAC gt UNaNCNON Pale ainai E O A A T A ET EON 408 SC HVAC LOCK P anena TOTARA NATA Tainan 408 SC VAC UNIOCK Palt asagar a tibiae Dati aio Baleteuinidisdaibianibaiiniebwds ascites 409 SCRHYAC TOS Iran omn ONS ttt ete nee lao alee la lua leat REA IN 409 SC HVAC gt Toggle Constrain EnforceMment ccccecssssssssrsssssssrssr
47. Note If you do not see the New Type button click the down arrow beside the New Connection button and choose New Type 3 Enter a name for the connection type and press Enter 4 Click Apply Changes to save changes or Done to save changes and close the window To create a connection 1 Select the connection type in which you want to create a connection 2 Click New Connection to create a new connection or double click lt New Connection gt in the connection list Note If you do not see the New Connection button click the down arrow beside the New Type button and choose New Connection 3 Set the connection properties e End Treatment 1 End Treatment 2 The two end treatments required to make the connection e Gap The distance between the ends of the two ducts or fittings A positive value indicates a gap A negative value indicates an overlap 146 HVAC Library Setup e Angular Tolerance The maximum allowable angle between the axes of the two ducts or fittings e Connection Icon The icon displayed in single linemode drawings and spool drawings 4 Click Apply Changes to save the changes or Done to save the changes and close the window Add an Accessory Package to a Connection You can add or remove an accessory package to or from a connection To details on how to create an accessory package see Accessory Packages page 38 To add an accessory package to a connection 1 Open the HVAC Connections window See Connections pag
48. Offset How much the branch Is offset from the first end of the main body Rotation Angle The angle of the branch from the main body HVAC Library Setup Throat Length Side Branch 2 d Branch Offset Rotation Angle Side Branch 2 Side Branch 2 Trunk lt Throat Length Length a Branch 1 Rotation Angle Side Branch 1 Branch Offset Throat Length Side Branch 1 End 1 Two Segment Lateral and Double Two Segment Lateral Main Body Length The length of the main body segment End 1 End 2 The ends of the main body e Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties e End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 e Throat Length End 2 The additional length applied to the end e Cone Length End 2 The length of the cone segment Side Branch Side Branch 2 Double Two Segment Lateral Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length The additional length applied to the end of the duct Branch Offset How much the branch is offset from the first end of the main body Rotation Angle The angle of the branch from the main body 125 HVAC Library Setup Throat Length End 2 a
49. Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 1 Right click on a selection of spools in the Defined Spools category and choose Lock Spool from the right click menu OR 2 Click on the unlock icon beside a defined spool The icon should change to a lock OR 3 Click on a defined spool In the properties window at the bottom of the Spool Manager see Spool Manager Reference page 510 click the unlock icon to change it to a lock icon To unlock a spool Permission HVAC Spools Unlock There are three methods available to unlock a spool Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 1 Right click on a selection of spools in the Defined Spools category and choose Unlock Spool from the right click menu OR 2 Click on the lock icon beside a defined spool The icon should change to an unlocked icon OR 3 Click on a defined spool In the properties window at the bottom of the Spool Manager see Spool Manager Reference page 510 click the lock icon to change it to an unlocked icon Change Spool Properties You can change the name hierarchy level and finishes of a defined spool Permission HVAC Spools Edit To change the spool name 1 Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 7 HVAC Modeling Select the spool Make sure the properties section of the Spool Manager is open See Spool Manager Reference page 510 There are two methods to change a spool s name by changing the
50. Order 1 column then Sort Order 2 column is ordered a i Moves selected fields up in the listing order or toward the first column of the table r M Moves selected fields down in the listing order or toward the last column of the table Add Remove Adds or removes production fields or user attribute fields Production fields are those provided by ShipConstructor and that exist in every project Attribute fields are special fields that are defined by the user for the project All attribute fields are listed regardless of whether they logically make sense for the BOM definition Note The BOM Labeling procedure extracts the text contained in the first column of the table Typically the Item field would be the first field but you could for instance use a field such as Spool Name etc 447 Appendix Production Command Reference 448 Field List Al Choose BOM Fields Production Fields Attribute Fields FEL User Attributes Include Field Field Types Description E Angle Angle The angle of the H AC or pipe elbow stock curvature F Approval tatus String The approval status of the spool Area Alea The area of one side of the part Area with Green Alea The area of the part including green Assembly EL EGI H P 5 String The name of the assembly in the Guild strategy in which the part resides Bend 5 String ls the profile Straight Bent or T wished Branch EQ H P String The name of the system bra
51. Parts in Drawings Edit OR Permissions Equipment gt Equipment Arrangements Edit Renames the selected drawing Delete Permissions Equipment gt Equipment Parts in Drawings Edit OR Permissions Equipment gt Equipment Arrangements Edit Deletes the selected drawing Electrical Page The Electrical page lets you create open and modify electrical cable model electrical wireway model and wireway arrangement drawings See the Electrical manual for details Open Permissions Electrical gt Cable Model Drawings Edit OR Permissions Electrical gt Wireway Model Drawings Edit OR Permissions Electrical gt Wireway Arrangement Drawings Edit Opens the selected drawing New Permissions Electrical gt Cable Model Drawings Create Delete Permissions Electrical gt Cable Model Drawings Edit OR Permissions Electrical gt Wireway Model Drawings Create Delete Permissions Electrical gt Wireway Model Drawings Edit OR Permissions Electrical gt Wireway Arrangement Drawings Create Delete Permissions Electrical gt Wireway Arrangement Drawings Edit Creates a new drawing Show Out of Date Shows a A next to each electrical wireway arrangement drawing that has parts in it that have changed or parts that have been added or removed Right Click Menu Lets you open reattach rename or delete the selected drawing or create a new drawing Open
52. Reducing Tee page 391 es Double 2 Segment Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double 2 Segment Tee page 391 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference Appendix B HVAC Command Reference 380 Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Cross page 393 Rect Radial Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Rect Radial Cross page 393 x Reducing Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Reducing Cross page 393 oS 2 Segment Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt 2 Segment Cross page 393 Double Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double Cross page 394 Double Reducing Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double Reducing Cross page 394 Double 2 Segment Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double 2 Segment Cross page 394 Transition See SC HVAC gt Transition gt Transition page 395 Reducer See SC HVAC gt Transition gt Reducer page 395 by Curved Reducer See SC HVAC gt Transition gt Curved Reducer page 396 Offset See SC HVAC gt Transition gt Offset page 396 a Curved Offset See SC HVAC gt Transition gt Curved Offset page 396 Wye See SC HVAC gt Wyes gt Wye page 394 s Rect Wye See SC HVAC gt Wyes gt Rect Wye page 395 p Rect Radial Wye See SC HVAC gt Wyes gt Rect Radial Wye page 395 J View Finishes See SC HVAC gt Insulation and Finishes gt View Finishes page 402 iN Apply Finishes See SC HVAC
53. Segment Cross HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double 2 Segment Cross Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Cross Flyout gt ce Command SCHvacDbl2SegCross Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a double two segment cross duct SC HVAC gt Wyes gt Wye HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Wyes gt Wye Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Wye Flyout gt E Command SCHvacWye Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a wye duct 394 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Wyes gt Rect Wye n HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Wyes gt Rect Wye Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Wye Flyout gt ie Command SCHvacRectWye Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a rectangular wye duct SC HVAC gt Wyes gt Rect Radial Wye HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Wyes gt Rect Radial Wye Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Wye Flyout gt w Command SCHvacRectRadWye Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a rectangular radial wye duct SC HVAC gt Transition gt Transition HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Transition gt Transition Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Transition Flyout gt i Command SCHvactTransition Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings
54. Standard Assembly J Electrical J Electrical J Envelope J Envelope Checking 107 interernces between 109 solids b linimumn Interterence Volume 100 rom This check may take a few minutes Cancel The two Solid Object Types lists let you control which types of objects to check for interferences Below the two lists is the number of possible interferences that ShipConstructor will check The Minimum Interference Volume lets you ignore very small interferences that might be due to computer rounding errors or are So small that they would not be noticed during construction 5 Click OK to start the interference check The check may take several minutes ShipConstructor lists interferences in the Interference List window Ea Interference List First Fart Second Part Solution First Dg Second Dwg Run Check 3050 U01 F71 17 PL11 S050 01 TT 03 PLOS Uo1_FRTI Um_TT 1400 F Center 3050 U01 TT D1 PLO9 2050 U01 TT 06 HP120 7 Uo1_TT 1400 Um TT 1400 Pv 3050 U01 TT D1 PLOS 2050 U01 TT 06 HP1207 Uo1_TT 1400 UM_TT 1400 Zoom l l 3050 U01 TT 01 PLOS 3050 U01 TT 06 HP120x7 U01_TT 1400 UDI TT 1400 Show 3050 U01 TT D1 PLO 2050 U01 TT 06 HP120 7 U01 TT 1400 UDI TT 1400 Only Int 3050 U01 TT 01 PLOS 32050 U01 TT 06 HP12047 UD_TT 1400 Uot_TT 1400 gt All 3050 U01 TT 01 PLOS 2050 U01 TT 06 HF1207 UD_TT 1400 Uod_TT 1400 3050 U01 TT D1 PLO9 2050 U01 TT 05 HP120 7 Uo1_TT 1400 Um_TT 1400 Repot 3050 U01 TT D1
55. Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Deletes all SConLabel objects and leader distribution lines from the current layouts This command Is used when complete relabeling is needed Label gt Label on Visible Edge On Off Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Label on Visible Edge On Off SCLABELONVISIBLEEDGE Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Set Up Labeling Settings page 233 Turns labels automatic label generation from label to piecemark to label on visible part edge By default the project setting is used Production Drawings gt Automatic Labeling gt Labels point to visible edges Label to piecemark Label on visible edge On label on visible edge Off 480 Appendix Production Command Reference Label gt Curved Plates in Visible Edge Detection On Off Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Curved Plates in Visible Edge Detection On Off SCLABELREMOVECURVEDPLATEHLR Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Curved Plates in Visible Edge Detection On Off page 245 Turns on option to include curved plates in hidden line calculation when label on visible part edge is on Label gt Adjacent Part Edge Tolerance Production tab gt Labe
56. Tee Flyout gt Ge Command SCHvacDbIRedTee Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a double reducing tee duct SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double 2 Segment Tee HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double 2 Segment Tee Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Tee Flyout gt d Command SCHvacDbl2SegTee Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a double two segment tee duct SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Lateral HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Lateral Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Lateral Flyout gt Command SCHvacLateral Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a lateral duct SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Reducing Lateral HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Reducing Lateral Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Lateral Flyout gt A Command SCHvacRedLateral Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a reducing lateral duct 391 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Laterals gt 2 Segment Lateral HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Laterals gt 2 Segment Lateral Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Lateral Flyout gt amp Command SCHvac2SegLateral Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a two Segment lateral duct SC HVAC gt Lat
57. Test size 0 1 Text Laver TET Mate Layer MAT ATS Precision Curent Units Dimension Point Picked Paints Points Projected to Current UCS x Click the points on the assembly that you want to include dimensions between For example click points on one plate part to generate a quality control matrix for that panel Update BOMs To update all BOM tables 1 Choose BOM gt Update BOMs page 474 2 All the BOM tables are updated from the objects contained in the drawing Viewport Clipping ShipConstructor includes functionality to create precise viewport clipping planes Unlike standard AutoCAD clip planes ShipConstructor clipping lets you pick the front and back point to define the clip planes To clip a viewport Note Before running the command you need to switch to the viewport in which the clipping plane is to be applied 239 Getting Started with Production Clip Clip Plane Plane Invisible Invisible 1 Choose Clip current view from the SC Utilities menu 2 If the drawing is in paper space it will prompt you to select the viewport to make active 3 The command line prompts you to Enter Point on Plane 1 Choose a point on one of the clipping planes to be used whether it is the front or back clipping plane will be determined by ShipConstructor 240 Getting Started with Production Before clipping After clipping 241 Getting Started with Production 4 The command line pro
58. a Flyout toolbar containing more tools Ds Jae ae erTren TY You can also access certain ShipConstructor tools by clicking the right mouse button The menu that appears depends on the type of object you select or click on These menus are called right click menus or sometimes shortcut menus ShipConstructor Repeat Activate Layer Group Recent Input 55 Cut CTEL S Copy CTRL C Copy with Base Point CTRL 5HIFT gt Paste CTRL Undo Activate layer group Quick Select OuickCalc abe Find Qiptions You can also use many of AutoCAD s tools when working on a ShipConstructor project Some ShipConstructor tools run independently of AutoCAD Navigator One of the most frequently used tools is Navigator Navigator lets you open and create drawings and is found at ShipConstructor gt Navigator page 311 Getting Started shipConstructor Mavigator Tutorial UDI Drawing Last Modified Date Preview FACS Assembly 3s keymap 1418 2012 5 49 25 PM 4722 2013 1400 25 PM FEFTTEFFTI EC ETT EFF FR ear Equipment 5 Electrical vs Ba Product Hierarchy al Interference e open Read Only MI Composite Approval Create Show Out of Date Esport ee 4 Hull Space Allocation Update Keymap Output so Mest Profile Plot J Templates Getting Started This section describes how to start running ShipConstructor and how to perform basic administrative tasks in ShipConstr
59. a a 81 Checks 82 check Iten erences sc carsvancwrieiaiisedneaeicdeuacaiteseeeiteseateteteiteacilteseaeateseiare ebeiteaealteseaea enewaredeieiluaaetesearilesmaaneieontewecseatn 82 Create Si intenerence Deg 1G visien leaves oe deeded le i lalallala a 83 checking INTE CFENCES arannana nani cnena muni nMaN nN hI C IAA AE 84 CHECK LOCAl INGE MOFENCES eusesctse csticreseussicosnses senesaye ctssadstcesuucstutsldeyn ries ied REE Ra dae ail atsaiiadeteuaeasatsldae dausuaperatnieunieesiaelsetics 86 Check Product FICK ACY ersin a nduentedevedtdtiuedtnditesttadttnchtedacudtts latndstedaives 87 NEE arc SL al Nene rene ene CER SCE ene nT ncn ee a ne en a ne en A AAE a 87 Update Model and System DrawindS ccescssssssssssssssssssssssssssssssesseserssessessesesesesesseseseeseesrsrsensersersenses 88 HVAC Library Setup 91 VEG WY pacts tenni a pita ha vad tata aati data a a a a a a a a 91 MOCE 166 Os E E T E E E 92 create SMECE SOCK panse nennintn nonn aA AA E AN AA 93 Rename Sheet SEOCK seisne iiia iiaia aa E eaa ET EARE AARE cadet ai cs dest Eaa Aaa EEEN 93 aoln SS E A AA EA A let eee AT EANA AA AT AT EANA A E AT A E A T AT AE 93 EO ONE SNESE STOCKS anionin anaana a aa eat uate ce a a aa a aa a enon eed a aera seu aiuenates 94 Delete Sheet STOCK iiriosnis innnan a a AEN EE EEEE 94 End TMeatmentS eri a a a a a a e a a 94 create a Linemode ICON raioniin enaa REEE E EEEE Eea EEEREN AEAEE e AERE 97 Create dir ENG TALI SIME arinaa aaa a a 98 Edit End Tr atMmeN
60. a line that can be used to easily align and move labels as a group This leader distribution line is a non printed line 484 Appendix Production Command Reference Set Leader Insertion Mode Production tab gt Labeling panel Set Leader Insertion Mode SCDISTLINESETINSERTIONMODE Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Set Leader Insertion Mode page Error Bookmark not defined Adjusts the insertion mode of all labels on line The four possible modes are Left Right Center closest Horizontal The closest horizontal mode will use the left or right alignment depending on which one is closer to the leader point Redistribute Leaders Production tab gt Labeling panel Redistribute Leaders Command SCLABELREDISTRIBUTE Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Redistributing Leaders on a Distribution Line page 264 Redistribute leaders on the leader distribution line in one of the three distribution modes Nearest Center and Equidistant All leaders will be automatically uncrossed and distributed on the line Transfer Leaders to Other Line Production tab gt Labeling panel Transfer Leaders to Other Line SCTRANSFERLEADERS Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Univ
61. a new Division Editan existing Division Click on the diagram to insert anew division Top Leg Width mm Bottom Leg Height mm To add divisions 1 Select either a vertical or horizontal division by clicking one of the buttons under Add a new Division 2 Click inside the pant s cross section to divide the section in half 3 Edit the dimensions of the two ends in the Edit an existing Division area by changing the values of the Left Leg Width and Right Leg Width 4 You can continue adding divisions until there are up to six ends To modify or delete divisions 1 Select the division you want to edit or delete by clicking on the division line The selected line will be shown in red and the two ends that it splits will be shown in blue 2 Edit or delete the selected division by changing the values in the two leg boxes or by clicking Delete Division Offset Routing Offset routing lets you route a duct or fitting by specifying where it is relative to other geometry in the model During typical use of offset routing you specify offset values for a duct and then click on Object snap points of other geometry in the model for example structure parts other ducts or construction lines A routing offset is specified as an X and Y value in a coordinate system perpendicular to the centerline of a duct 175 HVAC Modeling Bottom Right Bottom B ottom Left You can enter values separately for the X and Y offsets with t
62. all drawings in the list Reload All XRefs Reloads all mlinked drawings based on the latest saved version into the current drawing For example if changes have been made to mlinked drawings you may want to Reload them into the current drawing ShipConstructor gt Planar Group gt Transfer Objects to Group See the Structre manual ShipConstructor gt Penetration Manager See the Pipe manual 339 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 340 ShipConstructor gt Check gt Check Project Button Ribbon SC Utilities tab gt Check panel ShipConstructor gt Check gt Check Project SCCHECKP RO ECT Permissions Structure gt Modeling Procedure Check a Unit page 87 Runs the Check Unit command on all units in the project The option to repair errors or just log errors is displayed before the check is run See Procedure Check a Unit Check Project will also check all template drawings Repair Errors will confirm that the registered files exist and that all files found of those types are registered ShipConstructor gt Check gt Check Unit SC Utilities tab gt Check panel ShipConstructor gt Check gt Check Unit Command SCCHECKUNIT Permissions Structure gt Modeling Procedure Check a Unit page 87 Checks the 3D Unit drawing and all planar group model drawings within the unit An option to repair errors or log errors is displayed before the check is run If Repair Errors is not selected any modifi
63. an Orientation Icon into an Assembly Drawing Orientation icons are useful in displaying the directions when it is not clear how the assembly is oriented 236 Getting Started with Production 3D Orientation icon To insert an orientation icon into an assembly drawing 1 Choose Orientation Icon page 466 The 2D 3D Orientation Icon window appears t A Orientation Icon General Options 2000 Axis Size mm 200 Axis label Size rr Create Orrows Show in Current viewport Orl Gel 2 Select the type of icon 3D or 2D the length of the direction lines Scale and any other options 3 Click OK 4 Select the location for the icon Mark an Assembly s CG Position in an Assembly Drawing You can insert a mark into an assembly drawing indicating the assembly s center of gravity CG This can be important for lifting documentation and when you are planning to move heavy assemblies The CG position is located using a SConCGPoint object This object cannot be moved and will be updated if the drawing is updated If you need to rotate the assembly in the assembly drawing See Rotate an Assembly in an Assembly Drawing page 238 then you first need to mark the assembly s CG position and explode the SConCGPoint To mark an assembly s CG position 1 Inthe assembly drawing make sure you are in model space 2 Choose CG Point page 467 ShipConstructor inserts a SConCGPoint object at the CG point Change the View in an Assembl
64. anchor symbol is statically defined by you entered in the Size field Locks Show Locks When checked will show the lock symbol for ducts that are locked Color The color of the lock symbol Size e Relative to Part The size of the lock symbol is relative to the part e Fixed The size of the lock symbol is statically defined by you entered in the Size field Split and Merge Override Color for Split Part When checked split ducts are drawn in the selected color instead of the default split color 427 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference The Routing Tab Ei Pipe Drawing Options Display Navid Transform Routing Behaviour Constraints Show Flow Direction Show Al Arrow Color D coor 241 140 mm Flow Direction Show Flow Direction When checked will display the flow direction symbol on all bent HVAC parts if their individual Show Flow Direction flag is Set Show All When checked will display the flow direction symbol on all bent HVAC parts regardless of whether or not their individual Show Flow Direction flag is set Color The color of the flow direction symbol Size The size of the flow direction symbol is statically defined by you entered in the Size field 428 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference The Behavior Tab lt i Hvac Drawing Options E Display NavAid Transform Routing Femeviour Stock Length Enforcement C Automatically cut bo stock length Ask
65. ar lt nren oF eS m m ona me m e nan wa Jan ma a a m a h oee rer ma Bip m lt lt mner w araar erer re mi oo wei mr a lt om em msi neen ua me r mian m ea a m ar ma _ 5 r Bis ma c5 _ e lt nem Gl 1m a mr er mn w r om mz me m mir P oom mim weii eir i i am wa e mie a i e oo e amp lt m mre o mir em om e r on Fian wa uan nere wm oo O O O r Ten umi m Prf n m ua ol eee iis i lt hi m m ri Pe en m oem va mrar a mr ere e f e o m a ao lt Bis y te T e e merun va mrar rer etme roa m e m a mem m o na oer 1 as f o a m mz _i TE m T ae e nem 1a m om ram u i e re a mz nrm i om er i e f e m mai Te Production output Note ShipConstructor consists of several modules that you can purchase separately This document describes features in various ShipConstructor modules If you do not have a license for all ShipConstructor modules you may not be able to use some of the features described in this document For more information on ShipConstructor modules and licensing visit www ShipConstructor com Projects Models Drawings and Libraries All work in ShipConstructor is done on a specific project A project represents a sing
66. at the end of the specified trial period b the Licensee shall return the Hardware Key to SSI immediately upon expiry of the specified trial period and in any event within 28 days of the expiry of the specified trial period c in the event that the Licensee does not return the Hardware Key in accordance with Section 2B b above SSI shall be entitled to invoice the Licensee for and the Licensee shall pay for the costs of the Hardware Key plus all shipping and handling expenses and SSI administrative charges and d in the event that the Licensee elects to and does acquire a License the terms and conditions of this Agreement excluding Section 2B herein shall continue on and apply 3 Ownership All rights title and interests in and to the Licensed Materials and related documentation shall remain the sole property of SSI Licensee shall not remove or alter any proprietary rights notices on the Licensed Materials and the documentation and shall reproduce such notices on any copies that it makes Licensee shall be liable for the security of the Licensed Materials and the documentation in its possession 4 Expertise Required Licensee is responsible for evaluating whether the Licensed Materials meets Licensee s requirements and for operating the Licensed Materials and the results obtained The Licensed Materials are intended for ship modeling and construction purposes only and must be used by a person who has expertise and knowledge
67. at the target assembly with that number then it will look at all the identical parts for the part and try use their autonumbers and if none of those are available then it will use the next available number First Available will make the parts use the lowest autonumbers possible If the part has identical parts with generated names already at the target assembly then find the lowest autonumber from that group and use that number for the part being moved If the part doesn t have identical parts at the target assembly or none of the identical parts have generated names then find the next available autonumber and use the lower between the next autonumber and the part s current autonumber If that number is unavailable then it will use the autonumber of an identical part if it has any 75 Library Setup Miscellaneous Geometry Tasks 76 Toolpath The Toolpath command connects objects such as lines arcs and polylines to a closed toolpath The function eliminates duplicate objects and corrects small gaps If a gap is discovered that exceeds the GAptol shown on the command line an error window appears An error window can look like this Tool Path Error Tool path is not closed 4 connected to toolpath 0 unused invalid Distance i 26 0125 Circle F adius Create Circles Do Not Create Circles Click the Create Circles button to create end circles that make it easy to find the problem For example Create a Close
68. before implementing the new version While it is SSI s intention that the Revised Licensed Materials shall be backward compatible with the immediately prior version of the Licensed Materials SSI does not guarantee or warrant that this shall be so and SSI shall have no liability whatsoever to the Licensee for any failure of the Revised Licensed Materials to be backward compatible with any prior version of the Licensed Materials Modifications requested by the Licensee shall be subject to prior written agreement as to scope and fees payable Ownership of all Licensed Materials modifications Shall vest in SSI SSI does not warrant guarantee or otherwise commit to Supporting Licensed Materials that has been superseded by Revised Licensed Materials 21 Confidential Information Each party will not use the confidential information of the other party for any purpose except for the purpose described in this Agreement and Shall not disclose it to any other person except on a confidential basis to its employees and representatives who have a need to know the confidential information for such purposes This Section 23 shall not apply to confidential information which a is or has become readily available to the public in the same form other than by an act or omission of the receiving party b was lawfully obtained in the same form by the receiving party from a third party not under an obligation of confidence to the disclosing party c was in the receiv
69. branch is offset from the first end of the main body HVAC Library Setup Throat Throat Length Length Side Branch 2 Trunk pi ner Length Side Late 2 Branch Offset Side Branch 1 Throat Length Side Branch 13 Two Segment Tee and Double Two Segment Tee Main Body Length The length of the main body segment End 1 End 2 Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length End 2 The additional length applied to the end of the duct Cone Length End 2 The length of the cone segment 119 HVAC Library Setup 120 End 2 Throat Length End 2 Cone Length Main Body Length Branch Offset Branch Throat Length Side Branch Side Branch 2 Double Two Segment Tee Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length The additional length applied to the end Branch Offset How much the branch is offset from the first end of the main body Branch Fittings Laterals There are several defined types of laterals 1 Lateral A normal lateral HVAC Library Setup fo 2 Reducing Lateral A lateral where the main body is reduc
70. checks the drawing type to determine the permission Add Edit Revisions is linked to permissions in the following table 459 Appendix Production Command Reference Output Production gt Output Drawing Revisions Add Edit Pipe Arrangement Pipe gt Pipe Arrangement Drawing Revisions Add Edit Pipe Spool Pipe gt Spools gt Spool Drawing Revisions Add Edit Pipe Support Construction Distributed System Supports gt DS Support Construction Dwg Revisions Add Edit Wireway Arrangement Electrical gt Wireway Arrangement Drawing Revisions Add Edit Revisions Remove Permission Many of the commands in production are common across all production drawing types In order to allow permissions based on production drawing type ShipConstructor checks the drawing type to determine the permission Remove Revisions is linked to permissions in the following table 460 Appendix Production Command Reference Output Production gt Output Drawing Revisions Remove Pipe Arrangement Pipe gt Pipe Arrangement Drawing Revisions Remove Pipe Spool Pipe gt Spools gt Spool Drawing Revisions Remove Pipe Support Construction Distributed System Supports gt DS Support Construction Dwg Revisions Remove Wireway Arrangement Electrical gt Wireway Arrangement Drawing Revisions Remove ShipConstructor gt Manage gt Volume Manager Button Ribbon ShipConstructor tab gt Manage panel Menu ShipConstructor gt Volume Mana
71. choose from a list of available names The name that you select appears in the spool name label If you leave the Use next available starting at check box then you may chose the number to be used when generating the spool name Changing the selected naming convention will update the preview name Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Select a Ware Seas 641 BLO O01 641 BLO O02 641 BLO O03 641 BLO 004 641 BLO 005 641 BL0 O06 641 BLO O0 641 BLO O08 641 6LOY 009 641 BLOY O10 Stark Ab 1 Number of Mames 10 J Remember Range mae tenes The dialog that appears after clicking the Pick Name button give you a list of available spool names to select You can alter the range of the displayed spool names by entering values in the text boxes The Start At field allows you to chose where the list starts If the number chosen is not available then the list will start at the next available spool after the number chosen The Number of Names field allows the user to specify the length of the displayed list After those values are chosen click the Get Names button to generate the names from the entered fields After highlighting a name in the list you can click OK to use that name Checking the Remember Range check box and clicking OK will save the value of the fields for the next time the dialog is shown Note Remember Range is an option because generating a list of names with a high starting value or high numbe
72. creates a drawing containing only AutoCAD entities from any ShipConstructor drawing To export a ShipConstructor drawing to an AutoCAD only drawing 1 Choose the SC Utilities gt Export gt Export to Dwg page 369 menu command 2 If any changes have been made to the current drawing you will be asked if you wish to save Click Yes to continue with the export 3 The Export To Drawing Configuration dialog will appear Select the part attributes in the drawing that are to be exported by selecting either Show or Hide under the Value column Define a layer name for the attribute by overriding the text in the Layer Tempate column By default the layer name that is curently assigned to the attribute is exported as indicated by the lt Source Layer gt text 5 7 Library Setup FI Export To Drawing Configuration So Load fA Save Reset Option Layer Template Structure Part General Show lt Source Layer gt lt Source Layer gt Bevel Solid Stiffener Green lt Source Layer gt Plate Part Production lt Source Layer gt Bevel Text Source Layer gt Cuts lt Source Layer gt Marks lt Source Layer gt Markline Text lt Source Layer gt Profile Part Start and End Labels HYAL HAC Solid Layer lt Source Layer gt 2B 3D Wireframe Double Lines Solid Dis play lays Park Centerline Show lt Source Layer Centerline Color E By Layer Show Insulation Showy Show Thickness Showy Ends Show
73. creation Fields Lets you customize aspects of the fields that appear in your BOM e Choose which fields to include in the BOM e Alias the field names to something appropriate for your company e List the order the fields will be displayed in e Specify sorting merging and visibility of the included fields e Specify properties specific to the type of field included be it a decimal length weight or other type of value Fields with manageable properties are indicated by a white background in the Field Props column Appendix Production Command Reference Field name The name of the field that is in the BOM table Alias The name of the column header to appear in the table Visible Is the column going to be visible in the table Invisible columns may be needed to sort in a specific desired order but the column won t be shown in the AutoCAD table Sort Details Is the column used for sorting rows in the table BOM Field Sorting Sort Sorting method Ascending Descending Sort Order i E Cancel Sort Checkbox to indicate the table uses the selected column to sort rows Sorting method Ascending Rows are sorted by ascending value in this column Descending Rows are sorted by descending value in this column Sort Order Sorting by multiple columns is possible The priority given to each column is determined by the Sort Order Sort Order 1 is sorted first If two columns have the save value for the Sort
74. decided where the unit breaks will occur you can set up and name the units in ShipConstructor When you create a unit in ShipConstructor you simultaneously create a unit drawing A typical unit Create Units To create a unit Note You can create a unit from within an empty drawing or from within a drawing that contains the sections for the new unit 1 Inthe Navigator select the Project page 59 Library Setup 2 Click New Unit to open the New Unit window kd Mew Unit Unit name E sisting Urata Destination folder A Projects4550 Tutorial Units Ce 3 Inthe Unit Name text box type a unit name 4 Select whether to create a blank drawing as a new unit drawing the default or use the current drawing as a new unit drawing 5 Click OK Delete Units There is no easy way to delete a unit because each unit is linked to so many other parts of a project To delete a unit 1 Use the Navigator to delete all planar group drawings pipe drawings HVAC drawings and equipment arrangement drawings for the unit 2 Use Windows Explorer to delete the folder for the unit 3 Use the Product Hierarchy palette to delete the unit Product Hierarchies 60 Product hierarchies are the sequence of grouping parts together The build strategy is the main product hierarchy The build strategy is the sequence that the parts in your project will be physically assembled in Product hierarchy is also referred to as pro
75. defined spool style or permission to define one Set Up Spool Naming Convention One of the first steps in creating a spool is to define a spool naming convention Spools cannot be defined without one To set up a Spool naming convention 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Naming Conventions to open the Naming Conventions window Distributed Systems Production Drawings E Naming Conventions Ce New O Delete of Set Active Manage Aliases ri Generate Mames UsageLog Name Conventions Elements InUse Name Conventions Active Element Type Summary Distributed System Supp Characters 44ubo Start Poink Beginning Gffset 0 TreeLevel Branch Supports Static Electrical AukoMumber Digts 3 Skartvalue 1 Increment 1 Cables Part Cable Supports i General Assembly Drawing Equipment Part H AC S sonst de Spool Stocks Penetrations Value Penetration Re Pipe Source System Parts Characters Auto Spool Start Point Beginning Pipe Spool Offset 0 Stocks Use as Mame Seed Yes Space Allocation TreeLevel Br anch Element Details Space Allocations Standard Assemblies Parts in Standard Sample Name Branch 001 Apply kK Cancel Under Name Conventions select HVAC gt Spool or Pipe gt Spool Click New Set up naming convention properties For a spool naming convention the database items that can be used are System and Assem
76. delete 6 Click Delete Note You cannot delete a sheet stock that is marked as In Use End Treatments An end treatment is a description of the end of a duct or fitting There are three styles of end treatment bar plain and Slip on 94 HVAC Library Setup From left to right Slip on Female Slip on Male Bar and Plain To ensure that end treatments have names that your company will recognize you can set up end treatment types An end treatment type has a name an icon for display in single linemode drawings and spool drawings and a style bar plain or slip on End treatment types help you organize your end treatments and let you filter the list of available end treatments To open the end treatments window 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose HVAC gt Stock Catalog to open the HVAC Catalog Stock Editor 3 Click the End Treatments tab End treatments are listed by style bar plain and slip on 95 HVAC Library Setup 7 HVAC Catalog Stock Editor End Treatments HVAC Stocks Connections Show Types v Flange ae m Plain Bar Export Types Thickness Height Units Material Description C Flange 3 mm 20 mm Metric Aluminum 3003 Plain Export Types Material Description F Plain Aluminum 3003 Slipon Export Types Length Outset Male Female Units Material Description Material All Types v Edit Types Anew
77. drawing if in model drawing License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Select mtext and then select new object to point the fields to Property Label gt Set Single Click Field Label Button Ribbon Production tab gt Property Label panel gt Set Single Click Field Label Property Label gt Set Single Click Field Label Command SCSETSINGLECLICKFIELDLABEL Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 or edit model drawing if in model drawing License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Toggles the ShipConstructor variable that determines whether first leader pick point is acquired by when the object is selected or whether it is determined by separate point selection Label Connecting Assembly Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Creates a label for an end of a pipe or HVAC that indicates the connecting assembly to the end similar to Label Connecting Spool Purge BOMs SCPURGEBOMS Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting This immediately purges erased BOMs from the drawing Normally it takes opening and closing the drawing twice to permanently remove all references to BOMs after the last table has been erased for a BOM
78. drawings Generally the appearance of HVAC and Pipe parts in production drawings will adhere to the HVAC or Pipe options and native AutoCAD rendering options just as for model drawings Note When plotting shaded viewports part centerlines if turned on are projected in front of the part geometry such that they are easily visible Furthermore remember that AutoCAD allows you to override a viewport s visual style when plotting see AutoCAD s SHADEPLOT setting for viewports Tip The Pipe or HVAC drawing options you set in template drawing will be inherited in the final output drawing We recommend that you disable all modeling aids such as free end arrows in order to produce the cleanest output drawings Distributed Systems Production Drawings 282 Part List 5050 641 BLO1 0 B3 wows 3050 641 BL01 004 dig Diana By timmy ES el ee eo A spool drawing as produced by ShipConstructor before any detail work has been done Insert a New Empty Spool BOM Table See Insert a BOM Table into a Production Drawing Template page 227 Spool Drawing Keywords See Insert Keyword into a Production Drawing Template page 226 Generate Spool Drawings Before being able to create a spool drawing the following conditions must be met Generating spool drawings is a multi step process To make this process easier there is a Create Spool Drawing Wizard See Create Spool Drawing Wizard Reference page 517 To generate a spool draw
79. ec sdecses a E E 161 LUC ke TT eT ee Te er eer errr er ere rr er ener erry 163 FS BUTT POET OLN S sc hewn reas alia ctl etd cecal iat eh oul ods adda 168 Creating Connections While Routing IN End MOde ccesssesssssrsssssssrssesessssrssesassessrseesaeseserseesassesersaesesrsersateasersensatees 169 saddles siana eee ee eee ree eer rere eee ee cee cee ec ee ere er eee er ees 169 Create aP AES ENO ceana na anise iene Bais Bie Baia Dili eR a Seige RRaloeRRAR 174 Fe Isl 1d tease AA A ete AA lea ae celta cae A A A A ca teal EA cabo A AT 174 OMSL ROUTING anano nai nana aaa naan Aaa ane 175 OD SCE S el OS exer esscsices eresscidate cate E eal ed eens eats Daae eB aiteenen eden Dn daBeniiadatteaitesades 177 CU TORT ODJECE AS hte teeta atl eta octet De tentacles data e ates Dh teatge otnlealos cea wale A vandal 177 MOGI BUC ee npeeeerer creer E eer arr nr caterer a reer eer I creme rere aera eer rere 179 EGE POM satin T eae ttc ae ae eed lt aie oa Sd CA Ua Ade adalat oe TE 179 PAI VEI VOM a OL heinn AA EA aa A T vader neve entadeueuea aiaeuea A 179 Unanchor a DUCE acne tnteinientialneiiaietene AA N A nadie A etnies ae A A 180 LOCK a DUC annn E N ced c8 ec aac BO aio ten BS to A Sica dt ARE EEEE aE E 180 Eee o pIe E EE E E E EE EE EEN E EENE NEEE EAEN E EENE ENN EENE NEEE AT 181 Toggle Manston MOU Ernanin AAAA AAA NT AAO NA ANANA RA 181 TOGOLE CONSTAN ENOrCEmMENE esiosan Ua Bal Bu eB O RTO 190 BS gM ae ate eet decedent a a a ac atend eles a leah econ e
80. ed GO06 A056 S04503 oem w ema e ate Enter fiter text Enter fiter text Enter fiter taxt Enter filter text 1277 9000 63 parts ET 2 Jf Updated Drawing James kirok 41201 39 57 19 Pl 1 Created Drawing zach quinko 63 parts 41 2013 9 52 20 Pl 7 Enter Hiter text Enter Hier text Enter Mer fe xf Enter HFer text Penetration Penetration PEN O04 Removed Penetration Penetration a FEN 005 Removed Penetration Penetration a FEH 006 Removed Structure atric ure Structure Structure Structure L h a Angle Stiffener Angle stiffener Angle Stiffener Angle Stiffener Angle Stiffener a la LC A0S6 F56 501 AlO Foo S03 4056 Fe6 S06 4056 Fe6 S0F 4056 F66 508 enS Teese Modified Modified Modified Modified Modified PRA iC n J View C Override All Part Colors Rieu BB screen m BB ee m E ped E color 254 a E Center E Highlight E Zoom hlodified Removed Production Drawing Revisions Unchanged 2 Select the action rows that have occurred since the drawing was last detailed 3 Click Override All Part Colors You can now visualize the parts that have changed and you can inspect any details that need manual changes Output Drawings Output drawings are drawings created from numerous sources to be used to create MarineDrafting or PipeLink drawings from 254 Getting Started with Production Generate Output Drawings To create output drawings
81. edit the text for a global dimension first select the global dimension type Dimension or Label The preview window will update to display the appropriate text Then click the edit button The preview window will change to display the keywords and text used to generate the global dimensions and a box with the available keywords will appear on the side To add a keyword to the text place the cursor where the keyword should be inserted and then double click on the keyword in the list Regular text can also be placed anywhere in the text To delete a keyword highlight the keyword and press the backspace button To finish editing press the edit button again This will close the keyword list and the preview will change to display the appropriate text The default button will place a default text in the preview box the default text is Distance DirectTo UCSName Appendix Production Command Reference To allow for multiple types of keywords to be used the global dimension styles can be saved out The style will save the global dimension type the label or dimension style and the keywords used To save a style click the Save Global Dimension Style button Enter a name for the style in the dialog that is displayed and click OK To load the style back click the Load Global Dimension Style button The list of stored styles will appear on the right side of the dialog Double click on the appropriate style and the stored values will be loaded To delete a saved s
82. em HVAC p Support ki Pipe spool shipconstructor tal HVAC Spool Support Construction SF Equipment Ete Product Hierarchy BS Interference weld Management i 0 UN Composite pen Read Only pp Approval Export Show Out of Date FE Hull t Space Allocation LA Nest fy Profile Plot Templates Open Permissions HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Drawings Edit Opens the selected HVAC spool drawing If you check the box Read Only you will not be able to modify or save changes to the drawing Create Permissions HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Drawings Create Delete Opens the Spool Drawing Wizard to create a spool drawing See Create Spool Drawing Wizard Reference in the HVAC manual for details Reattach Drawing Permissions HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Drawings Edit Reattaches an existing drawing that was detached and moved to the Deleted Spool Drawings folder This scenario can commonly happen as a result of adding spool breaks The selected drawing is checked to ensure it is a HVAC spool drawing The spool in the Navigator must not have a drawing to be able to use the Reattach drawing command 319 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Right Click Menu Open Delete Lock Unlock Spool Delete Permissions HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Drawings Create Delete Deletes the selected HVAC spool drawing Lock Unlock Spool Permissions HVAC gt Spools gt HVAC Spools Lock Unlo
83. error is reported and saddle creation is aborted aligned end axis picked free end A saddle aligned to an existing free end created by clicking the free end right after picking the header part 171 HVAC Modeling 172 Click a point to determine the direction or if you selected an object coordinate system on the header part enter a distance along its z axis If you clicked on an existing end skip to step 6 The branch part and NavAid appear at the selected point You are prompted to pick a point indicating the direction of the saddle end Please pick point or Center offset lt 0 gt Edge offset Flip offset Rotate90 World plane Initial plane paRt plane Align to part FOrward AFt Port Starboard Up Down plaNE XRotate YRotate ZRotate SNap lt on gt Optionally enter one of the keywords e Center offset To set an offset between the end axis of the branch part and the centerline of the header part the current offset is shown in lt angle brackets gt type C for Center offset and press Enter Type an offset value and press Enter e Edge offset To set an offset between the edge of the branch part s profile and the edge of the header part s profile the current offset is shown in lt angle brackets gt type E for Edge offset and press Enter Type an offset value and press Enter This option is only available when the header part has a consistent profile in the area local to the saddle end Edge offset d
84. fom Production Object naw sources new to existing SOUrCES removed fram existing sources or from removed sources Parts that were deleted from sources that are still present can be reinserted 277 Distributed Systems Production Drawings Distributed Systems Production Drawings There are two different types of production output drawings that you can create using the Distributed Systems modules You can create spool drawings and arrangement drawings Spool drawings are created from HVAC or Pipe spools that are a series of interconnected ducts or pipes Arrangement drawings can be created from Structure Pipe HVAC and Equipment drawings and Pipe and HVAC systems as well as assemblies Creating a Spool Drawing Several portions of ShipConstructor have to be configured correctly to produce spool drawings The more time and effort you put into setting up the required styles templates and settings the better the resulting automatically created spool drawings will look To create a spool drawing Before you can create a spool drawing you need five things 1 A valid active spool naming convention 2 Adefined and approved spool 3 An HVAC or Pipe Spool Template drawing Template drawings should have a Dimension and text styles pre set b A preformatted BOM inserted in the appropriate location c Keywords inserted in the appropriate location d Drawing options pre set Permission to create an HVAC or Pipe spool drawing A
85. gt Insulation and Finishes gt Apply Finishes page 402 Add Insulation See SC HVAC gt Insulation and Finishes gt Add Insulation page 401 HVAC Spool Panel Appendix B HVAC Command Reference Appendix B HVAC Command Reference 382 K7 Spool Manager See SC HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Manager page 399 ve Set No Spool See SC HVAC gt Spools gt Set No Spool page 399 Z Remove No Spool See SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove No Spool page 399 Add Spool Break See SC HVAC gt Spools gt Add Spool Break page 399 Remove Spool Break See SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove Spool Break page 400 Penetrations Panel i Insert See SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Insert Penetration page 405 see Manager See the Penetration manual for more information 3 Add Construction Line See SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Add Construction Line page 406 4 Remove Construction Line See SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Remove Construction Line page 406 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference 5 Get Boundary Lines See SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Get Boundary Lines page 406 Swap Construction Line See SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Swap Construction Line page 406 Revise Penetration See the Penetration manual for more information Toolbar The most common commands are located on the HVAC toolbars HVAC Toolbar g Straight See SC HVAC gt Straig
86. gt Manufacturers Toolbar Permissions General gt Manager gt Edit Manufacturers Procedure Manufacturers page 32 Opens the Manufacturers window letting you create and edit manufacturers 303 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands fs Manufacturers EREE In Use Manufacturer Mame a a Ei new ALLWEILER AG X Delete Barthel Armaturen Beltran K EAn ELK SMA DEFAULT DISCOM DLE VENTILATOR ERMET EUCARO H HERMAMN EHLERS SMBH HAMMOR THY WATER SYSTEM LTE HYUNDAI ele ISODEC 1 P SAUER amp 50NH E Canel SIRI KIS I In Use Indicates with a checkmark which manufacturers are currently in use in the project Manufacturer Name Lists manufacturers New Creates a new manufacturer Delete Deletes the selected manufacturer General gt Finishes Toolbar Permissions General gt Manager gt Edit Finishes Procedure Finishes page 34 Opens the Finishes window letting you create and edit finishes 304 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands a Finishes cre C Do E Export Finish Mame E Mew Type Paints TN Antifoul new Finish Primers Delete Base Primer a 2 Insulations EY Polyurethane E Impo rt E Export XML ai EE Cancel Export Checked finishes and finish types will be exported when you click Export XML Finish Name Lists finishes and finish types Right click on a finish or finish
87. gt Saddles Remove Saddle niinn inana AAE AAA EER 401 SC HVAC gt Insulation and Finishes gt Add INSUlAtION cccssessesssssssrsssssesssersersaesesrsersessesersersassesersaesassesensatsasensensatens 401 SC HVAC gt Insulation and Finishes gt View Finishes ecscsesssssssssrssrseesessrssrsseseserseesasseserseesessesersaesessesersatsesersensatees 402 SC HVAC gt Insulation and Finishes gt Apply FIniShes ccccssssssscssssrssrsssssssrssrssssessrssesessesersersessesersaesesersorsansesensensatees 402 SC HVAC gt Utis Merge 10 Bent iienaa eaaa aE rE EE ETEENI EE KENNEN 402 SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Mark all exceeding max length ccsssessesscsssessssssessserserssesesersseseeseserseeseseeseesaeseseesersansasensensatees 402 SC HVAC gt Utilities gt CUE TO Max Length annin A T A A A NOAE 403 SC HVAC gt Utilities Extract Center LING iinan TATAA ANATA AAO 403 SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Add HVAC UCS INterSection cccccsserssssssssrssssssssserssessserserssesesersersatsasersensatees 404 SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Toggle Highlight on all HEP UCS Intersection esssesssessnsesnrrrrrrirrrrnrererersrsns 404 SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Erase HEP UCS Intersection cccesessssssssssrssssssssssrssessseesersaesessesersatsesersensatens 404 SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Erase All HEP UCS INterSe ctions cccsssssssssssssssssrssrssssessrssesesersersatsasrsensatees 404 SC
88. gt Systems gt System Manager to open the System Manager a system Manager Hvac System Code i E gF Engine Room Under HVAC System select the system that you want the new branch to belong to Level Finish Insulation Airflow Parts Using System Click New Branch or right click on the system and choose New Branch Enter a name for the new branch and press Enter The name must be unique if the HVAC Unique Branch Name is set to yes in Project Settings Branch 1 Adhesive Emulsion System 2 Thermal Self Adhesive Branch ee i 470 0 HVAC Modeling 5 Set the branch properties See System Manager page 415 for details 6 Click OK to save and close the System Manager Modify the Properties of a System or Branch To modify the properties of a system or branch 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Systems gt System Manager to open the System Manager 2 Under HVAC System select the system or branch to modify 3 Modify the system or branch properties See System Manager page 415 for details 4 Click OK to save and close the System Manager Delete a System or Branch To delete a system or branch Note You cannot delete a system or branch if ducts have been assigned to that system or branch 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Systems gt System Manager to open the System Manager 2 Select the system or branch you want to delete 3 Click Delete 4 Click OK to close the System Manager Set the Current System
89. ic ES aa The first page of the wizard is where you select your HVAC spool template drawing 517 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Dreyt Spoo Drawing Etcp 2of3 Please Soheck a Spool Drawings a BF uo 8 J Structure O Hac oE Pipe g E E l_Bigz and ballast O E 3053 641 EL01 C03 H E g 3053 641 EL01 C04 H E g 3053 641 ELO1 COS o Ey 3053641 EL01 C09 oo E 2050 041 CLo1 C10 oo E g 3050484 1 ELOL C1L i no Tie Led TRE LET 1 Seleczed Sources Lancel The second page of the wizard is where you select all the spools that you want to generate spool drawings for You can select spools by navigating through your HVAC drawing systems or assemblies A list of all the spools selected is shown on the right side under Selected Sources 518 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference e ereate Spoo Drawing En Etcp 3of3 Please Soheck a Spool Sz ings Style pud Slrles Spud Slrle Properlics HvA EPIL PrE Mel Dimensioning Baseine Dimensioning Mo used Break Dimension a Brarches YES Break Dimension a Connections ro Break Dimension Seddles YES Cime sion O Pset irr C Cimension Style FIFE SOL Orientation ype Eestrit Labeling OKs and Fenecraton Lasel offset ravi LL ORs and Fenecraton Lavel style ARS lazel Radial Jimersian Angl YES Radial Jimersisn Kadis YES Radial mersin Arc Lencth YES Auto Wada7e Cia point ro Labe M
90. is a BOM table in a Pipe Arrangement drawing after creation The user defines a revision called A The empty Revision column is filled with this name Getting Started with Production tem Revision PEN OO8 Collar A F 90LR CS_02 0_ST A 44 001 E 9OLR CS_02 0_S 1 A2 54 009 P oo P ERW C3_14 0_380_Ad5 A 00 Then they update the drawing Some parts have been added and others have been removed The result looks like this tem i A oe F YULR Co_02 0_51 AzZ54 005 P ERW CS_02 0_ 360 Ad5 A O19 P ERW CS_07 0_30_Ad5 A O10 P ERW C5_027 0_60_Ad5 A O1 The changed parts have the A identifier The removed parts used strikeout text New rows are appended to the end continuing the item numbering and not re ordering it New Revision Revisions can be created at any time the user simply needs to provide a name and an optional description The new revision name must not be used in the layout or drawing if creating a revision for all layouts The revision saves the current user and the date and time of creation If this is the first revision in the drawing the empty Revision column for all BOM tables in the layout or drawing are changed to the revision name If it s not the first revision then all the rows with the identifier are changed to the new revision This way only items that have changed during the BOM updating are tagged as belonging to the ne
91. is mitered End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the base end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Center Branch Profile Since the shape of the cross is already defined there are not many properties to define for the profile e Width The width of the profile e Corner Radius Applies to the rectangle shape only The corner radius of the profile Throat Length The additional length applied to the end End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the base end of the branch See End Treatments page 94 129 HVAC Library Setup Throat Length Branch Throat Length Center Branch Throat Throat Length Padus Base Center Branch Width Side Branch Width Overall Height Cross and Double Cross Main Body Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties Length The length of the main body End Treatment 1 End Treatment 2 The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 130 HVAC Library Setup Side Branches Profile The profile of each end of the branch See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties Throat Length The additional length applied to the end Branch Offset How much the branch is offset from the first end of the main body End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the branch See End Treatments page 94
92. j j Cone t q Length d A ih Throat Main b Body x Length Length p Rotation Ange Branch Offset Branch Fittings Crosses There are several defined types of crosses 1 Rectangular Radial Cross A cross with two side branches that are curved 2 Cross A normal cross 3 Reducing Cross A cross with the main body reducing 126 HVAC Library Setup 4 Two Segment Cross A cross with the main body consisting of two segments 5 Double Cross Across that has double the number of side branches 6 Double Reducing Cross A double cross with the main body reducing 7 Double Two Segment Cross A double cross with the main body consisting of two segments 127 HVAC Library Setup SC New Cross l General Stock Name Description Measurements Sheet Stock Insulations oo Finishes weight cow Auto calculation Value l Vanes a Number of Vanes Motes l MainBody Length E Profile Ss Shape Diameter End Treatment 1 End Treatment 2 l Side Branch 1 E Profile Diameter Throat Length Branch Offset End Treatment l Side Branch f Profile E Shape Diameter Throat Length Branch Offset End Treatment HYAL Cross 7 Metric T3 5 9863665 kg S00 mm Circle 200 mm diameter Circle 200 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mmx 20 mm BR 457M 4 105 3 mm x 20 mm Circle 150 mm diameter Circle 150 mm 50 mm 150 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm x 20 mm Circle 150 mm diameter C
93. levels of the current product hierarchy Later you will assign parts and assemblies to the various levels A typical configuration for levels is e Project The top level of the product hierarchy e Unit Every project must have at least one unit A typical project consists of several units A smaller project may have only one unit Hull plus wheel house e Stages Often the final assembly is carried out using many stages that usually combine assemblies and panels A unit can contain several levels of stages in some cases there can be twenty levels of stages between the assembly and the unit e Assembly An assembly also known as a 3D assembly consists of several panels plus some individual parts A typical assembly might be a double bottom a wing tank or something similar e Panel A panel may be flat or curved and traditionally consists of one or more plate parts plus several stiffeners You can add delete or re order levels to suit your project To add a level select the level to create a new level under click New and enter a name for the level To delete a level select the level and click Delete To re order a level select the level and click the arrow buttons to move the level up or down Set Up User Defined Attributes You can create your own attributes for assigning values to Assemblies User defined attributes are assigned to a product hierarchy and each Assembly in that product hierarchy will have its own attri
94. line that represent locations and can be used for familiarization with the area of the vessel that is being shown or to dimension from Reference lines allow you to show two types of ticks primary and secondary Primary ticks are for locations you want to show the name of the location The name of the location comes from the locations in the location group Secondary ticks are to optionally show ticks for locations that you don t want to have names shown for FRES i FRO Primary Tick Secondary Tick Tick Alignment The alignment of the ticks relative to the reference line Possible values Centered Above Left Below Right Location Group Filter Locations can optionally be marked as ticks on the reference line This filter determines which location groups are shown in the Primary and Secondary Location Group lists Primary gt Text Height The height of the text labels of the primary ticks in modelspace units Primary gt Text Margin The distance of the text label to the primary tick in modelspace units Primary gt Text Style The AutoCAD text style to use for the primary tick text Primary gt Text Position The position of the text relative to the reference line Possible values Above Left Below Right Primary gt Text Orientation The rotation of the text Possible values Parallel to line Perpendicular to line Reverse Parallel to line Reverse Perpendicular to line Parallel is 0 degrees rotation relative to the r
95. manual MarineDrafting Panel gt Auto Create Views See MarineDrafting manual ct iid Update Views See MarineDrafting manual Open Output Drawing See MarineDrafting manual i Create a View See MarineDrafting manual a View Creation Settings See MarineDrafting manual fe View Generation Settings See MarineDrafting manual E List Source Part See MarineDrafting manual 5 Copy to 2D View See MarineDrafting manual ad Reverse View Direction See MarineDrafting manual ey Repair Property Label Fields See MarineDrafting manual Repair Link to Output Drawing See MarineDrafting manual PipeLink Panel Show PipeLink Manager See Pipe manual Appendix Production Command Reference A Generate PipeLink File for Drawing See Pipe manual A Export PipeLink File See Pipe manual Approval Drawing Panel See Structure manual Insert Group epn E3 Save As Bound Approval See Structure manual Commands Edit Production Drawing Permission Many of the commands in production are common across all production drawing types In order to allow permissions based on production drawing type ShipConstructor checks the drawing type to determine the permission Editing production drawing is linked to permissions in the following table Revisions Add Edit Permission Many of the commands in production are common across all production drawing types In order to allow permissions based on production drawing type ShipConstructor
96. non ShipConstructor objects Only a few objects have extended data attached to them Copy Product Hierarchy SCPRODUCTHIERARCHYCOPY Permissions General gt Product Hierarchy gt Product Hierarchy Edit License Universal or ProductHierarchy Procedure None This command creates a copy of an existing product hierarchy You may specify if you want to copy either the Assembly hierarchy or Assembly and parts hierarchy Export Product Hierarchy Permissions None License Universal or ProductHierarchy Procedure None This command exports an existing product hierarchy to an xml file Import Product Hierarchy Permissions General gt Product Hierarchy gt Product Hierarchy Edit License Universal or ProductHierarchy Procedure None This command imports a product hierarchy from an xml file that has been generated by the Export Product Hierarchy command 371 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 372 Part View Load via Extents SCPARTVIEWLOADBYEXTENTS SC Utilities gt PartView gt Load Extents SC Utilities gt PartViews gt Load By Extents SCPARTVIEWLOADBYEXTENTS Permissions none Procedure None Loads all supported ShipConstructor parts which reside in or intersect the specified WCS extents The jig for the extents selection works best if WCS is your current UCS and you are in an isometric view You may also type the desire extents in on the command line This command should work in all ShipConst
97. none Procedure None Deletes all Part Views in the current drawing Diagnostic Commands Command Trace Enable Permissions None Procedure None Records all the commands that are run and saves them to a log file This is sometimes useful in recording a long process of commands that help support staff reproduce a problem a user is encountering The log files are saved to the lt project gt TraceLogs folder These log files are ASCII text files that can be viewed with any text file viewer Command Trace Disable Permissions None Procedure None Turns off the recording of commands Recording is otherwise stopped when ShipConstructor is closed Debug Trace Enable Permissions None Procedure None Turns on the showing of internal warnings or errors to the AutoCAD command line You should not need to use this command unless instructed to do so Debug Trace Log Command SCENABLEDTLOG Permissions None Procedure None Generates a log file of the internal warnings or errors The warnings are also displayed on the AutoCAD command line The log files are saved to the lt project gt TraceLogs folder These log files are ASCII text files that can be viewed with any text file viewer Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 374 Debug Trace Disable SCENABLEDT Permissions None Procedure None Stops the debugging mode See Debug Trace Enable page 373 Performance Monitor
98. oF Cancel vw v v v v v vw vw vw vw v New x Create a User Defined Attribute To create a user defined attribute 1 Open the User Defined Attributes window See HVAC User Defined Attributes page 100 2 Click New 3 Enteraname for the attribute and press Enter 4 Click OK to close the User Defined Attributes window Assign a User Defined Attribute to a Part or Stock or Spool To assign a user defined attribute to a part or stock 1 Open the User Defined Attributes window See HVAC User Defined Attributes page 100 2 Select the attribute on the left side of the window 3 Select the type of part or stock or spool on the right side of the window 4 Click the right arrow The attribute is now listed beneath the part or stock type or spool Note To remove an attribute from a part or stock type or spool select the attribute on the right side of the window and click the left arrow 5 Click OK to close the User Defined Attributes window When you add a user defined attribute to stocks the attribute appears as an additional column in the Edit Stock Part window Delete a User Defined Attribute Note You cannot delete a user defined attribute that is in use To delete a user defined attribute 1 Open the User Defined Attributes window See HVAC User Defined Attributes page 100 101 HVAC Library Setup 2 Select the User Defined Attribute you wish to delete 3 Click Delete Import a User Defined At
99. of link is referred to as a model link or mlink When you mlink other drawings into the current drawing the objects in those drawings are visible in the current drawing However you cannot modify objects that are mlinked into the current drawing For example if you are modeling structural components you may want to see other structural elements equipment or piping by mlinking them into the current planar group drawing Similarly if you are modeling piping you may want to see a few key structural drawings by mlinking them into the current pipe drawing Mlinking lets you easily see the spatial relationships between drawings You can also use mlinks to control which drawings are included in a unit drawing In some cases it may take a long time for ShipConstructor to open the unit drawing because you have very complex planar group drawings If so you may want to temporarily remove certain mlinked drawings to allow the unit drawing to load faster In other cases you may want to use mlinks to include pipe and equipment in the unit drawing You can also use mlinks to create a composite drawing of the entire vessel See Set Up Composite Drawings page 16 Note It can take several minutes for ShipConstructor to mlink all unit drawings into a composite drawing For example it can take over thirty minutes to mlink all nine units of a reasonably sized project and pipe and equipment into a composite drawing To mlink drawings into the current dr
100. of spool styles When you click on a spool style in the list the properties are updated to reflect the properties of the selected spool style New Click this button to create a new spool style Delete Click this button to delete the selected spool style ARS and Penetration Label Style e Label Offset The label offset in millimeters used for penetration labels and ARS labels e Label Style The label style used for penetration labels and ARS labels This list is generated from the label styles set up in Manager ARS Label e Angle When checked the ARS label will display the angle of the corner e Radius When checked the ARS label will display the radius of the corner e Arc Length When checked the ARS label will display the arc length of the corner e Label Non Cutback Elbows When checked the ARS label will display the arc length of the corner Penetrations e Show Penetrations When checked penetrations will be marked in the drawing Note All penetrations will be marked in the spool drawing if selected but only watertight component parts will be displayed in the drawing and BOM s Note For watertight penetrations with component parts the penetration mark will be placed on the penetrator where the component part and the penetrator intersect CG Point e Display CG Point When checked a point will be drawn indicating the center of gravity for the spool Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Dimensi
101. or create a New Insulation In Use Indicates with a checkmark which insulation and insulation types are currently in use in the project New Type Creates a new insulation type New Insul Creates a new insulation for the selected insulation type Delete Deletes the selected insulation or insulation type Import Lets you import insulation and insulation types from another project from an XML file that was exported from another project or from a Common Parts Catalog CPC bulk import file Export XML Exports the checked Export insulation and insulation types to an XML file Usage Logs Generates a list of all parts using the selected insulation General gt Text Styles Permissions General gt Manager gt Edit Text Styles Procedure Text Styles page 37 Opens the Text Styles window letting you create and edit text styles Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands T Text Styles Sioa In Use Text Styles T Mey Text small Tabel title X lt Delete STANDARD UsageLog Usage Log Romans Text large Text middle 111 Tabel header Tabel data SNIAAAASN ancel General gt Accessory Packages General gt Accessory Packages None Permissions General gt Manager gt Edit Accessory Packages Procedure See Pipe manual Opens the Accessory Packages window letting you create and edit accessory packages See Accessory Packages in the Pipe manual for details General gt User D
102. page 163 Inserts a transition duct SC HVAC gt Transition gt Reducer HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Transition gt Reducer Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Transition Flyout gt i gt Command SCHvacReducer Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a reducer duct 395 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Transition gt Curved Reducer HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Transition gt Curved Reducer Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Transition Flyout gt Command SCHvacCurvedReducer Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a curved reducer duct SC HVAC gt Transition gt Offset 4 HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Transition gt Transition Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Transition Flyout gt Command SCHvacOffset Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts an offset duct SC HVAC gt Transition gt Curved Offset HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Transition gt Curved Offset Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Transition Flyout gt Command SCHvacCurvedOffset Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a curved offset duct SC HVAC gt Equipment gt Insert Equipment Multi Discipline Ribbon Tab gt Equipment Panel SC HVAC gt Equipment gt Insert Equipment Toolbar E
103. page 459 or edit model drawing if in model drawing License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Copies fields from one leader and creates new leader for another part Property Label gt Copy Field Label Quick Production tab gt Property Label panel gt Copy Field Label Quick Property Label gt Copy Field Label Quick SCFIELDLABELCOPY QUICK Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 or edit model drawing if in model drawing License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Copies mtext block and creates new leader using original leader geometry Also allows user to select new item to change the object references within the fields 497 Appendix Production Command Reference Property Label gt Edit Field Label mi Production tab gt Property Label panel gt Edit Field Label Property Label gt Edit Field Label SCEDITFIELD Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 or edit model drawing if in model drawing License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Select mtext and edit the text and fields Property Label gt Replace Object References BUCO So Ribbon Production tab gt Property Label panel gt Replace Object References Property Label gt Replace Object References SCREPLACEOB REFINFIELD Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 or edit model
104. pick point or Stock Next end lt 1 gt xXOffset YOffset Choose offset lt 0 0 gt ROtatie sAddle insulation If desired choose one of the available options see General Options page 168 for options not listed here e Next end Switches which end of the duct will be placed at the picked point e Rotate Rotates the duct around its own centerline the NavAid is not affected 3 Click anywhere in the model to select the start point of the duct You can connect to an existing unconnected duct end by clicking on its end point indicated by an arrow see Creating Connections While Routing In End Mode page 169 The NavAid appears at the selected point and the end point of the duct you are placing is anchored there 4 You are prompted to pick the second point or choose an option Please pick point or Forward Aft Port Starboard Up Down plaNE XRotate YRotate ZRotate SNap lt on gt See General Options page 168 for explanation of the available options Note If you created a connection to another duct by clicking on a free end or by creating a saddle several of the options shown above do not apply for example the direction options and are not available 5 Click anywhere in the model to select the end point of the duct If you connected the duct in step 3 any point you pick including OSNAPs is projected onto the axis of the end you connected to Bent Duct To insert a bent duct by picking points To route a bent duct with this
105. r 47 5 7 selec uiselec all piyhebrvark S retresh List Felase Dae Alan ent Server aud Luck Difu Server Lok Yane Lie e Epir y Dale Days dL Susser plio i Expiry Dale Type Sorver Sorver 12731 2013 260i 2131 2013 wicrlShare ShipConsk uctor q show the window during Projat Register TE Cancel Network Opens the Network License Settings window letting you set up a list of computers ShipConstructor searches for licenses ShipConstructor searches for licenses from the servers in the order they are listed in the Network License Settings window 346 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands P Network License Settings TCPIIP Address or Gomainy Computer License Server Local Computer Port 3960 2 New X Delete e LicenseServer The list of computers that have network locks attached to them Any computer with ShipConstructor installed can be a license server You can specify computers using TCP IP address computer name or DOMAIN computer The lt Local Computer gt address is equivalent to IP 127 0 0 1 Only network locks will allow licenses to be used across a network e New Adds a new license server to the list e Delete Deletes the selected license server from the list The list must have at least one computer in it If you try to delete all license servers the lt Local Computer gt item is added automatically e Move Up 4 Moves the selected server up in the list e Move Down Y
106. some time 8 The Layer Conflict Resolution window appears if there are any conflicts between destination layers of any parts in the drawing see also Layer Conflict Resolution Reference page 274 Layer Conflict Resolution Parts from the sources selected have multiple layers assigned tothem Select a layer fo each conflict to resolve this Layer Conflicts 641 BLO 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLO4 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLO3 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLOS 641 Bilge and ballast 641 BLO6 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLO8 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLO2 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLO1 641_ Bilge and ballast Yie F Center Highlight Zoorn 9 You can use the Layer Conflict Resolution window to sort out the destination layer for any conflicted parts 249 Getting Started with Production Update All Keywords To update keywords 1 Choose Update Drawing page 462 2 The keywords in the drawing update regardless of the status of the parts OR 1 Choose Production Utilities gt Update All Keywords page 467 2 The keywords in the drawing update without updating the parts OR 1 Select keywords you wish to update 2 Choose Update on the right click menu BOM Revisions When BOM tables are updated they are rebuilt each time to reflect the current state of the drawing This does not allow the user to see how the drawing changes affected the BOM tables It also may re
107. specified To create the spool list another BOM definition is created that only includes the pipe spool collector Both of these BOMs can exist in the same drawing Virtually all other aspects of a BOM can be customized including the following e Items included and their order e User defined column header text e Each field can be sorted ascending or descending in user defined sequence e Rows can be merged dependent or independent of equivalent field data e Field properties such as units display format decimals or fractions and rounding can be edited individually BOM Collectors Item rows in the BOM are determined by the collectors A collector gathers parts with specific properties Is it part of a sub assembly Is it a structure part If a part is not collected it remains for lower collectors to possibly gather Collectors can have collector options that apply to each instance of a BOM table in a drawing Collector options let you filter further down to a smaller subset of parts Labeling Labeling occurs on a per viewport basis Labeling of production drawings uses the first column of BOM tables as the text in the labels Labels are placed in paperspace and point to parts in the viewport Leader Distribution Lines Distribution lines are used to layout the labels so that they are aligned and easy to manipulate as a group Keywords Keywords are placeholders for fields that represent a property of the drawing Each production
108. styles are used in production drawings for dimensioning and for parameters to labeling The name of the dimension style in the project s dimension style must match the name in the dimension style in the drawing or else the label parameters are used from the Standard style You may want to setup separate dimension styles for each of the different production drawing types This will ensure that changes to one production drawing type s settings won t affect other types of production drawings However if you want to have a uniform style across many production drawing types then less dimension styles may be preferred To add a dimension style 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Production Output gt Dimension Styles page 445 to open the Dimension Styles window Getting Started with Production ed Dimension styles Dimension Styles HYAL SPOOL LABELS PIPE SPOL i IC Usage Log STANDARDO O x 3 Click New and enter a name for the dimension style 4 Click OK to save and close the Dimension Styles 5 Open the production drawing template and verify a dimension style exists with the same name Label Styles Label styles are used in production output drawings to label parts Labels in most production drawings reside in paper space so be aware of the scale of the paper when entering values To add a label style 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manag
109. tee by one end of its trunk the other end of the trunk is not useful to orient the tee with but the branch is If desired choose one of the available options see General Options page 168 for options not listed here e Next end for orientation Switches the end governing the orientation of the fitting 7 Click anywhere in the model to specify the direction of the orienting end 164 HVAC Modeling Pe e 3 x A cross that was placed by End 1 with points 1 and 2 and oriented with respect to End 3 with the 3rd input point Intersection mode You will typically use intersection mode to place a fitting or possibly multiple elbows where two non parallel duct runs will meet that is where their centerlines will intersect Intersection of 2 free end axes 165 HVAC Modeling 166 If you are placing the fitting before the duct runs on either side exist you will directly specify the location of the intersection point and then set the orientation of the fitting Intersection points on a double lateral If one of the other duct runs exists already you will align one end of your fitting with that run and then specify how far from that existing run the fitting is placed If both of the other runs exist already you will align one end of your fitting to one duct run and a second end of your fitting to the other run To insert a fitting in intersection mode when the connecting runs do not exist yet l Choose
110. that the new insulation will belong to Click New Insulation Type a name for the insulation and press Enter Rename an Insulation or Insulation Type To rename an insulation or insulation type l 2 3 4 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Insulation page 305 to open the Insualtion window Double click the insulation or insulation type to rename Type a new name and press Enter Import Insulation and Insulation Types To import insulation l 2 3 4 5 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Insulation page 305 to open the Insulation window Click Import to open a File Browser Select a project file PRO or XML file XML Click Open Export Insulation and Insulation Types To export insulation a ea SS Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Insulation page 305 to open the Insulation window Check the Export check boxes for the insulation and insulation types to export Click Export XML to open a File Browser Enter a name for the XML file Click Save Delete an Insulation or Insulation Type To delete an insulation or insulation type Note You cannot delete an insulation or insulation type that is currently in use in the project L 2 J 36 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Insulation page 305
111. the NWOPT settings 369 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands SC Utilities gt Snap SC Utilities tab gt Tools panel SC Utilities gt Snap Command None Permissions None Procedure None Opens the AutoCAD Drafting Settings window with the ShipCon Snap tab selected letting you set the ShipConstructor Snap options SC Utilities gt Random Color Structure Modeling tab gt Modeling Utilities panel gt Random Color SC Utilities gt Random Color SCRANDCOLOR Permissions None Procedure None Assigns a random color to each of the selected entities in the current drawing SC Utilities gt ShipCAM gt Import Files Button Ribbon None SC Utilities gt ShipCAM gt Import Files SCIN Permissions None Lets you import a 3D wireframe model from ShipCAM into the current drawing This utility function can be run in plain AutoCAD SC Utilities gt ShipCAM gt Convert IGES to Mesh None SC Utilities gt ShipCAM gt Convert IGES to Mesh IGES2MSH Permissions None Procedure None Converts an IGES file to a ShipCAM MSH file This function is made available because of issues with ShipCAM import of IGES files This utility function can be run in plain AutoCAD Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Command Line Commands Show Extended Data SC Utilities gt Show Extended Data SCXDATA Permissions None Procedure None Shows the some hidden ShipConstructor information that is tagged to
112. the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 2 Right click on the Undefined Spools category heading and choose Define All The Spool Properties window appears See Spool Properties Reference page 514 3 Choose a hierarchy level for the spools and click OK ShipConstructor minimizes the Spool Manager and displays a prompt Please Select 1 x Spool to define 4 Select any duct from the first spool that you want to define Note Spools are automatically named based on the order you select them 198 HVAC Modeling 5 Continue to select parts from each spool that you want to define in the order that you want the spools to be named Note To stop defining spools press Esc Spools that you have already defined will remain defined Spools that you have not yet defined will remain undefined 6 When you select a part from the last remaining undefined spool the Spool Manager returns to normal Note Initial defined spools appear in the Modified Spools category Once a spool has been approved it will move to the Defined category Tip Use Override Color to change the color of the defined spools within the drawing This makes it easier to see which spools you have not yet defined when using the Define All command Note When a spool is defined the spool will be put on a layer of the same name as the spool To undefine selected spools Warning You cannot undo this action and all information related to the spool database informatio
113. the accessories from all equipment parts Equipment Part Collects all equipment parts General Part Collects all parts and returns part level information for each Warning The general part collector can take a significant amount of time to process data on larger projects and should not be used often Global Point Collects free ends of Piping for listing the Cannot currently include other fields or distance to nearest planar group in the three change column ordering Typically links to primary directions and the connectivity of the Corner Point BOM in order to maintain free end consistent item numbering HVAC Connection Queries all HVAC HVAC connections and Accessories retrieves accessory package information from them HVAC Part Finds and returns information for all HVAC parts Lets you specify the type and spool status of the objects listed in the BOM HVAC Spool Gathers all HVAC objects and organizes them into their spools Returns information for each spool 449 Appendix Production Command Reference Penetration Queries all penetrations in the drawing and Accessories retrieves accessory package Information from them Penetration Gathers all Penetration component parts and Component reports information for the items contained in each Pipe Connection Queries all pipe pipe connections and retrieves Accessories accessory package information from them Plate Nest Finds and returns all objects in a
114. the first column in the BOMs assigned to the viewport If a part has multiple labels then those labels are stacked Labels are generated only once Subsequent running of Label All will e Update the label text and label styles of existing labels Labels are not moved e Add new labels for new parts Labels will be placed around existing labels e Delete labels for removed parts Even though labels are placed in Paper Space they now track the objects in Model Space so that if the user pans zooms or orbits in the viewport the labels track accordingly and remain synchronized to the objects that they represent Tracking can be turned off with Track Label Positions To label parts from BOMs 1 Choose Label gt Label All page 478 Manual Labeling Label parts individually with manual placement of the labels This is an alternative method to automatic labeling The label style and text contents are used from the BOMs associated with the viewport where the part was selected The number of leader segments follows the label style setting The command allows you to label a sequence of parts without having to restart the command If you select a part that has been previously labeled then the previous label is removed To manually label a part 1 Choose Label gt Manual Label page 477 2 The first column text in the BOM table will be used as the label text and label style of the BOM or in the corresponding collectors of the BOM will be used if spe
115. the remaining revisions will be available in Successive pages e Search Runs the query to fetch rows of revisions Other options e Filter Row After rows are fetched further filtering is performed in the filter row e Export Page A page can be exported to a file in these formats Text Microsoft Excel or HTML e Clear Filters Clears the filter row e Row right click Allows you to select search values using values in the currently selected row 345 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands ShipConstructor gt Licensing ShipConstructor tab gt Manage page Menu ShipConstructor gt Licensing Command SCLICENSE Permissions None Procedure Get Licenses page 11 Lets you obtain and change licenses for individual ShipConstructor modules Licensing Window Licens ng Modules Acqure Module Parcs Level Mas Parsi Lic Avail Lic Total Status of ALEcrmak chez 67C Urlimitac 10 1J 25 Electrical 272 Urlimit c 10 1J p LQuipment le Urhmitac 1u 1J Hull GFC Ui linil2L 10 1J ga HAL E Urlimik c 10 11 MarineCratting 67C Urliraitec 10 11 S Nest 67C Urlirait c 10 11 Penetrabons Urlinitsc 1u 1J H PAIC Desio aidal o C Un limikoe 10 11 iy Pipe 32 Urlirnitzc 10 13 a PipeLirk C Urliraik c 10 11 i Pipesupports 5z Urlirnit c 10 LI Ba ProductHierarciy SUS Uline 1U 1J Prufiehesl 67C Ut linilaL 10 11 H Structure OFC Urlimitsc 10 11 E wWaldManagemert 67C Urlimitac 10 11 F Ed riversad 145 Vrliraik
116. the selected end connects to To show a connected spool 1 Choose SC Spool Drawing gt Label Connecting Spool Assembly page 502 2 If there are no spools which are connected to the current one the command ends If there are connected spools the command will prompt to pick an end of the spool If the drawing is in paper space the largest viewport will automatically be made active Once an end is chosen that has a connected spool a label is placed Update Spool Drawings ShipConstructor spool drawings can be updated Drawings that need updating can easily be identified in Navigator Identifying Drawings that Require Updating Spool drawings that required updating because the parts contained in the spool drawing have changed are identified in Navigator To identify out of date spool drawings 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator to open Navigator 2 Select HVAC Spool or Pipe Spool in the component list 3 Click the Show Out of Date button ship Constructor Nawig ator Tutorial U01 Drawing Last Modified Date a Preview oy 3050 641 BLO8 004 NY 3050 641 BLO8 0005 NY 3050 64 BLO8 006 on 3050 64 BLO8 007 oN 3050 641 BLO8 0008 oN 3050 641 BLO8 0009 NY 3050 641 BLO8 070 NY 3050 641 BLO8 01 1 Ny 3050 64 BLO6 01 2 dar Equipment 5 Electrical ae Ta Product Hierarchy Ea Interference Weld Management Assembly NI Composite AE Approval Esport Hull Space Allocation Output Nest Profil
117. to each drawing that has parts in it that have changed or parts that have been added or removed MarineDrafting drawings and PipeLink files are out of date if their parent Output drawing Is out of date Right Click Menu Lets you open rename or delete the selected drawing or folder or create a new drawing or folder Open New Rename Delete New New Folder New New Folder Rename Delete New Folder Permissions Production gt Output Create Deleted Permissions Production gt MarineDrafting Create Deleted Creates a new folder as a subfolder of the selected folder Rename Permissions Production gt Output Edit Permissions Production gt MarineDrafting Edit Renames the selected drawing or folder Delete Permissions Production gt Output Edit Permissions Production gt MarineDrafting Edit Deletes the selected drawing or folder Nest Page The Nest page lets you create open and modify plate nest drawings See Plate Nesting in Structure manual Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands shipConstructor Mavigator Tutorial UDI Drawing Last Modified Date Preview FACS Nests ais DS Haa um aR PLIE 4 23 2013 10 10 50 AM oa a PLOS 4 23 2013 10 06 26 AM PA PLOS 4 23 2013 10 16 01 AM oY Pipe Spool g PLUH 4 25 2013 10 08 20 AM oe HVAC Spool Bag Uo E Support Construction hg PL 4 22 2013 2 50 43 PM eo Equipment 4 23 2013 3 57 47 PM 5 Electri
118. to open the Insulation window Select the insulation or insulation type Library Setup 4 Click Delete View Insulation Usage It is possible to see a list of all the parts that use a selected insulation A check mark in the In Use column indicates that the insulation is being used by parts To list all parts using a specific insulation 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Insulation page 305 to open the Insulation window 3 Select the insulation you want 4 Click Usage Log Text Styles Text styles let you control the appearance of plate part text marklines and piecemarks in production drawings To set up a text style you must set up both a ShipConstructor text style name which applies to the entire project and an AutoCAD text style with the same name that defines the appearance of the text which applies to an individual drawing Whenever you insert text of a certain style ShipConstructor formats it using the AutoCAD text style of the same name or using the Standard style if there is not an AutoCAD text style with the same name For example to standardize the appearance of piecemark text in assembly drawings you would do the following Set up a ShipConstructor text style named Piecemark and an AutoCAD text style named Piecemark in the assembly drawing template When inserting text in any drawing use the ShipConstructor text style Piecemark You do not necessarily need
119. to set up an AutoCAD text style named Piecemark in all drawings since it is the appearance of text in the assembly drawing that you are trying to standardize Conversely different modelers can set up their own AutoCAD text styles named Piecemark in their own drawings As long as they use the ShipConstructor text style Piecemark all text of that style will be formatted consistently in the assembly drawings Create a Text Style To create a text style 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Text Styles page 306 to open the Text Styles window 3 Click New 4 Enter a name for the text style and press Enter 5 Click OK to close the Text Styles window Delete a Text Style To delete a text style 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Text Styles page 306 to open the Text Styles window 3 Select the text style you want to delete 4 Click Delete 5 Click OK to close the Text Styles window 37 Library Setup Accessory Packages 38 An accessory package is a collection of accessories for example nuts bolts gaskets and washers that accompany a penetration package a pipe hanger a pipe connection or an HVAC connection Accessory packages are not displayed in drawings but are listed in BOMs and reports When setting up accessory packages you first define accessory types Accessory types are groups or categories of simila
120. type and it is set as required not deferrable and there are no plate parts created yet then the attribute does not need a default value However if some plate parts already exist a default value must be provided This is because an object cannot have a required attribute without a value all the existing objects will need a value for the new attribute This requirement prevents the User Defined Attributes window from closing if there are any missing default values A message window will appear listing the attribute name and the object type for that attributes Import a User Defined Attribute To export a user defined attribute 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt User Defined Attributes page 307 to open the User Defined Attributes window 3 Click Import UDAs 4 Browse to the selected xml or pro file 5 Click OK Part User Defined Attributes User defined attributes are values that can be associated with any part type The list is defined in Manager Those attributes can be assigned to each part type And then that attribute can be either be required or not required for the part type The required state has three levels to it required and deferrable required and not deferrable and required default deferred Deferrable attribute can be deferred for later therefore it s not required to provide a value during the creation or editing However a value will need to be pro
121. type of End Company that manufactures the Treatment inswlathen The catalog to which the insulation belongs eta ILE Naming Conventions A Bettina a number ot custan attributes that each Tyre of this stack will hawe i Greate custom mamin E conventions These atbribules all you bo alach any KN which allow you to automatically addilional data you may need toa P generate names tor naw stocks stock i Materlal f Finishes Material the sheet stock is mada out of The density is used to calculate the weight of the H i resulting duct Sheet Stocks HVAC stocks are made from sheet stock You must set up the sheet stocks you plan to use for HVAC stocks in the project The properties of the sheet stock will determine the weight of the ducts and fittings if the automatic weight calculation option is chosen To open the sheet stock window 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose HVAC gt Sheet Stocks to open the Sheet Stocks window 92 HVAC Library Setup Sheet Stock Export In Use Name Material Grade Thickness Description Manufacturer m oofa TOEN a a Create Sheet Stock To create a sheet stock 1 Open the Sheet Stock window See Sheet Stocks page 92 2 Click New to create a new sheet stock 3 Enter a name for the sheet stock and press Enter 4 Set the properties of the sheet stock Material Grade Thickness Description and Manufacturer See Materials page 30 and M
122. type to Rename it Delete it or create a New Finish or New Finish Type In Use Indicates with a checkmark which finishes and finish types are currently in use in the project New Type Creates a new finish type New Finish Creates a new finish for the selected finish type Delete Deletes the selected finish or finish type Import Lets you import finishes and finish types from another project from an XML file that was exported from another project or from a Common Parts Catalog CPC bulk import file Export XML Exports the checked Export finishes and finish types to an XML file Usage Logs Generates a list of all parts using the selected finish General gt Insulation Permissions General gt Manager gt Edit Insulation Procedure See the HVAC manual Opens the Insulation window letting you create and edit insulation Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 306 Insulation Export Insulations In Use Property Value Edit Catalogs Tough Guard Mame Type 200 1 E E t E Type 200 1 Type PacEdit Manuf Lie mese alan fvedit Material Material Description G Import Catalog DEFAULT Manufacturer a Export AML Order Number New Type 2New Insul x Delete Export Checked insulation and insulation types will be exported when you click Export XML Insulations Lists insulation and insulation types Right click on a insulation or insulation type to Rename it Delete it
123. you want to include in your arrangement drawing and the layers of where to put them You can select an arbitrary number of sources to include in your arrangement drawing A summary of all selected sources and their layers appears on the right side of the screen under Selected Sources While choosing sources for your drawing selecting a root node in the tree will also select anything underneath that node So if you want to create an arrangement drawing containing an entire system with all its branches simply click on the system When selecting assemblies you can avoid selecting the branches by using the Control key Control Click You may also choose to retain the layers of the part from its model drawing source at this step Choosing Retain Model Drawing Layers from the dropdown in the layer column will cause the layers from all model drawings containing parts in the current source to be copied into the arrangement drawing and the parts will be moved to the copy of the layer of their source This brings in all layers from the source not just ones used by parts in the given source If multiple model drawings to bring layers in from have layers with the same name the first one encountered will be taken and further layers of that name will be ignored 271 Getting Started with Production Ea Create Arrangement Drawing Step 4of4 Please select all the drawings from which you wish to import AutoCAD geometry and the layers to place them on Dr
124. 04 2 Select the duct end with the UCS intersection that you want to erase 3 Ifa UCS intersection exists on the end it will be deleted Erase All HVAC UCS Intersections To erase all HVAC UCS intersections in the current drawing choose SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Erase All HEP UCS Intersections page 404 209 Production Concepts Production Concepts Production Drawings Production drawings are designed to leverage AutoCAD s modelspace paperspace drawing layout The exception to this is plate nest and profile plot drawings which are model space only production drawings Stax Name BOM Table o a Leader Distribution Line Production Object Assembly We gh 62g Keywords fe stirconstRucToR ae ate cere a Kono 75300 906 4057 SO6S0SF65P01 d EV Dipoonstructor Drawings are created from template drawings Each type of production drawing has its own folder for template drawings Most of the setup Is done in the template drawings Production Objects Production drawings contain special read only versions of the parts Parts still show the same properties as they do in model drawings Parts still follow the drawing options available in model drawings allowing you to show the components of the parts that you want visible Parts can be moved around in the drawing to represent the assembly process However parts should not be moved because they are in the wrong position in the model Changes requir
125. 1 PM Manually deleted parts Check to re insert W colorio L O aos7 F55 P12 Drawing G906_FR55 Modified ShipConstructor 3 23 2010 9 31 46 AM l E coo O E r A057 F55 S03 Drawing G906_FR55 Modified ShipConstructor 3 23 2010 9 31 46 AM Cl P ERW CS_04 0_80_A53 A 004 Drawing 906 Gray Water Modified ShipConstructor 7 19 2010 4 34 01 PM E E color254 Ga Part Name Source Type Source Name Last Revision Type LastRevisionUser LastRevision Date Show Preview Checked Parts Refresh Preview The main table shows you a list of parts that are affected by updating this drawing The parts are split into several categories You can multi select any of the parts in this list and depending on the View options the parts will be highlighted centered and zoomed to Note If you are in one of the Paper space layouts and you do not have a viewport selected the largest viewport will be automatically chosen to highlight entities in If you want to use a different viewport simply activate it Reasons why parts are being updated e New Parts If an existing source Such as a system has had parts added to it the parts will show up here Or because you selected new sources in the drawing creation wizard e Removed Parts These are parts that will be removed for any reason including the source being removed entirely or the part being deleted out of the source e Modified Parts Any parts that have had any of their attributes changed will sho
126. 31 window 302 Max Length 191 403 menus manager 297 ShipConstructor 311 Menus SC Utilities 349 mirroring catamaran hulls 55 mlink 18 Mlink 338 Mlink manager 339 Model drawings 149 model link See mlink model space 25 N naming conventions 40 308 activate 45 create 43 delete 45 edit element 44 element properties 44 remove element 44 rename 45 re order elements 44 window 308 309 NavAid 153 159 424 navigator 6 311 312 No Spool 399 O object enabler 24 objects convert 3D to 2D 77 display in mlink 56 display wireframe hidden line shaded mode 56 hide or show 55 open a project 10 OPM 205 Options 152 153 155 438 orientation icon 466 OSnaps 177 178 179 P Pants 174 406 436 paper space 25 parametric modeling 3 parts mirror 55 mirror about centerline 55 update 462 password 13 planar groups transfer 339 polyline convert ellipse or spline 78 polylines reduce number of vertices 77 product hierarchy check 87 profile nest manager window 343 project database 12 project settings 28 297 export 29 import 28 set 28 Q quality matrix 361 options 362 R Remove clip 354 355 Routing 175 181 S Saddles 170 401 shapes project 77 ShipCAM 370 Spec 143 144 145 Spool create 517 Spool Break 399 400 Stocks 102 103 138 140 141 143 144 429 System 149 415 create 150 151 edit 151 system font 7 T text styles 37 306 create 37 delete 37 toolpaths 76 create closed 76 U
127. 470 P i F Save Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt Save Drawing Options page 470 Load Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt Load Drawing Options page 470 Insert BOM table See BOM gt lInsert BOM Table page 474 Me Insert Keyword See Production Utilities gt Insert Keyword page 485 Ee Viewport Options See Viewport Options page 470 Set Viewport Display Options See Viewport Display Options gt Set page 473 Load Viewport Display Options See Viewport Display Options gt Load page 474 Wal Save Viewport Display Options See Viewport Display Options gt Save page 473 ig Toggle List Only Visible See BOM gt Toggle List Only Visible page 477 in Edit Collector Options See BOM gt Edit Collector Options page 477 MarineDrafting Template Panel E View Creation Settings See MarineDrafting manual El View Generation Settings See MarineDrafting manual Ta Reference Line Style Manager See SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Style Manager page 363 ra Reference Line Import Styles See SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Import Styles page 367 EE Reference Line Edit Location Groups See SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Edit Location Groups page 367 PlateNest Panel ie Define Border See Structure manual Check Nest Template Drawing See Structure manual A Update from a Previous Version See Structure manual ProfilePl
128. 50 U01 F71 17 PL11 2050 U01 TT 03 PLIS UD_TT 1400 Bl Contes 3050 U01 TT O1 PLOS 3050 U01 TT 06 EE Interference Report wo_TT 1400 oe we 3050 U01 TT 01 PLOS 3050 U01 TT 06 Lit TT 1400 Zoom S050 U01 TT 01 PLOS 3050 U01 TT o6 Save As Uo TT 1400 Show S050 01 TT 01 PLOS 3050 U01 TT 06 Mame SAMPLE tat UD TT 1400 Dn Int 3050 U01 TT 01 FLOS 2050 U01 TT 0E Cance UDI_TT 1400 gt Al 3050 U01 TT 01 PLOS 2050 U01 TT 06 Include Optional Information Uo_TT 1400 3050 U01 TT 01 PLOS 2050 U01 TT 05 Selection M1 CGs F Drawings UDI_TT 1400 Repot co OF N em o Po gt 3050 U01 TT 01 PLOS 3050 U01 TT 06 FF Volume UDI_TT 1400 3050 U01 TT 01 PLOS 3050 u0i TT o5 Ml UD TT 1400 L3 1 7 PLO 3050 U01 L2500 UO1_L2500 PS S050 U01 TT 02 PLOS 3050 U01 F71 01 PL11 U01 TT 1400 UO FA71 3050 U01 TT 02 PL03 2050 U01 TT 06 HP 12047 UDI_TT 1400 Lod TT 1400 3050 U01 TT 02 PLOS 2050 U01 TT 06 HP 1 2047 UDI_TT 1400 Lo TT 1400 9 Enter a Name for the interference report select the information to include in the report and click OK ShipConstructor displays the report in Notepad and saves the text file in lt project folder gt LogFiles lt unit gt Interference lt my interference drawing gt lt time stamp gt txt f T SAMPLE 2013 04 23 15 16 07 t Notepad Administrator e a File Edit iew Settings 4e Qnd 9 4 Be Aal HR Aa
129. AC Space Allocation Electrical Equipment Penetrations Weld Management Standard Assembly Database Utilities Window E X 0 l r a aha 0 8 mla SB A Setting Value E Project Aea J Distributed System Supports Electrical Equipment H General nnn Hull HVAC Penetrations Pipe Production Drawings Import Layer Source Name E Automatic Labelling Adjacent part edge tolerance 0 5 mm Distribution mode 0 Edge determination minimum angle 8 Edge length filter percentage of longest edge 50 Labels point to visible edges Yes 5g Remove curved plate parts HLR Yes Reports Standard Assemblies Structure Allow Remote Profile Cutouts Yes Bend Tolerance deg 300 Endcut Standard Trim Adjustment None Part Boundary Gap Tolerance 0 01 mm Planar Group Tolerance 0 001 mm Plate Flange Default Text FLG UP 90 Ready JASON METRIC_TR Distributed System Supports Electrical Equipment General Administrator gt Automatic Save Specifies ShipConstructor s behavior when AutoCAD triggers an automatic save auto save Off AutoCAD s auto save has no effect on the ShipConstructor drawing or database 298 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands OnUserControl The ShipConstructor drawing and database are saved when the auto save triggers OnResetOnStart The ShipConstructor drawing and database are saved when the auto save triggers Additionally each time you conne
130. ASS SIMIDIY LEVELS tessa caesscetioanawsisctsenpn iosa cei ucteusi sen E hadsanei vnareambenumtattns 67 Set Up Ucer Demed ARDUO Sraidean EO EO TOE SEO 68 SETUD ASSEMDIE Sise a aA A AAA AAA AA 70 Assign Parts Spools or Assemblies tO ASSEMDIICS cccccescssesssssssssssssssessssesessesassesessesassesaseesassesassesacsesaesesacesaneesansesanes 72 FIG ZOOM Remove Hide and SVQ WE LISS vaseline loi al ln tell i aaia 74 Renaming ace aoeener ener rarer een rer err ener ere eee eer Ce ee err eer ere er rer 75 Miscellaneous Geometry TaSKS ssc nnirhiciarhinnwhienwh ehh wahwhad ehh wha wh ahwaahinahiens 70 TOODA eniinn E A vain AAA E utd aint vad sunt otd A AE N E O SETS 76 DINEI ANIE nnana AAA AA TA AA A 76 Convert a 3D ODJect toa 21 OD E Erien E T IR T I IRET T 77 POV SHa pS auer adults cacaudas uacuusts uaduuistadueeis aduaiscatuast acuta catvesiatedua 77 Reduce the Number of Vertices on POLYyliNeS cccsscssscsssscssscsssesrseesessssesassesassesessesessessesesessecaeseseeseseeseceesaeeesasersansnsass 77 Convert an Ellipse OF Spline toa Polline wsiivesisevisvasicsniswacsiesnstsntuiintasicen inthis andesusnsndsviiuds a 78 Create en ls TNS EINE iaiia alata tic A AENA AEE E ae UNENEE Menta deiataetee 79 Import Reference Line Styles iscsi cciasiainssasisinstascasrataisenieitasvaaaiiinsassiniicdoniivdaneiiianaabbiniide niiiaanainaeiianeatiai 79 SOE UP SNAPPING eco eeastocen ssa usec wsoetintneoni atten dices tetas B 80 vald Pan arna ta tatuatituda a a a a
131. Assembly Metric B Stages Assembly Metric E Stage Assembly Metric B Assembly Metric B Assembly Metric E fecembhy Makri A 2 For each assembly level Levels select a template to use for assembly drawings Template Drawing To set up an assembly drawing template see Set Up a Production Drawing Template page 225 3 Click OK Tip The Pipe or HVAC drawing options you set in template drawing will be inherited in the final output drawing We recommend that you disable all modeling aids such as free end arrows in order to produce the cleanest output drawings Volumes Volumes are used when creating various production drawings Volumes can be created in any ShipConstructor drawing through the Volume Manager When creating a production drawing any parts contained within the volume selected will be included in the production drawing Volume Manager The volume manager can be used in any ShipConstructor drawing to define a volume Volumes are used when creating production drawings The volume manager is a palette and as such can be docked while running ShipConstructor so users can easily switch drawings while trying to define a volume that encompasses all the parts that are wanted To create a new volume 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manage gt Volume Manager page 461 The existing volumes for the project are loaded in the palette Getting Started with Production a C3 Merr Folder a Hew Waume YE Delete fg Pick blin
132. AutoCAD Object Property Manager for the part and change the No Spool property OR 4 Click on the Set No Spool toolbar button in the Distributed Systems toolbar OR 5 Choose SC HVAC gt Spools gt Set No Spool page 399 from the menu Note You cannot set a duct to No Spool if the duct is part of a locked spool 6 The Select Hierarchy Window appears 195 HVAC Modeling EIH Select Hierarchy li UOS Unassigned Pipe Spool QQ UnassignedHVAC Spool QQ Unassigned Equipment ff Unassigned Supports ff 0301 fA 0302 ff 0303 g 0304 f 0305 fA 0306 Current unit only Cancel 7 Choose a valid hierarchy and click OK Note You cannot select the Project as a valid hierarchy Typically if the hierarchy is not known at modeling time it should go into one of the Unassigned hierarchies so it is easier to find all the unassigned parts later Spool breaks will automatically be added at every connection the No Spool item has To undefine no spool items There are six ways to undefine a no spool part 1 Inthe Spool Manager SC HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Manager page 399 drag and drop a No Spool part to the Undefined Spools folder OR 2 Inthe Spool Manager SC HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Manager page 399 select one or multiple No Spool parts and right click on a No Spool part in the list and choose Undefine Part from the right click menu OR 3 Inthe model drawing right click on the part you want
133. Branch Length Profile Corner Radius Width Rotation Angle End Treatment Value Hvac Wye 4 Metric Ta 27 00696 kg Fectangle 300 mm 300 mm 0 mm 300 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm z 20 mm 400 mm 0 mm 300 mm 45 BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm x 20 mm 400 mm 0 mm 300 rar 45 BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm x 20 mm Component Preview Optional modes Unrestricted Mode Operations HVAC Library Setup K For descriptions of the General properties see Create a Stock page 103 Overall Properties Shape The overall shape of the profiles of the duct The shape can be either rectangle or flattened oval Height The overall height of the profiles of the duct Angle Applies to Rectangular Wye and Rectangular Radial Wye The angle that the side branch makes with the main branch Base Length Throat Length The additional length applied to the base end Profile Since the shape of the wye is already defined there are not many properties to define for the profile 135 HVAC Library Setup 136 e Width The width of the profile e Corner Radius Applies to the rectangle shape only The corner radius of the profile End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the base end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Branches Straight Branch Length Throat Length The additional length applied to the base end Profile Since the shape of the wye is already defined there are not many p
134. C Modeling ae U Because of the connections between the parts with selected grip points these are equivalent selections e Anchored parts will not move Free ends are treated similarly to anchors and will not move unless they are part of the current selection An octagon with a cross is shown at points beyond which the system is constrained and cannot be moved e When multiple grips are dragged the entire selected section will move by exactly the same amount and in the same direction That is the constraints governing how a set of grip points can move include the constraints imposed by each individual grip in the selected section e Within the above constraints the primary goal of the multi part transform solver is to determine a way to modify the system so that selected grips are moved as close as possible to where you drag them The multi part transform 189 HVAC Modeling 190 engine will adjust as much of the system as is necessary to accomplish this goal which could mean transforming parts a significant distance away from the selected grips Anchors are the best way to limit which portions of the system can be affected e The transform solver s secondary goal is to optimize the changes that are made to the system so that the changes to the system are as localized as possible That is changes to parts closer to the selected grips are preferred over changes to parts further away from the grips Toggle Constrain Enfo
135. C Modeling Reference Select Finishes E 5 fx Available Finishes Inherit from System and Assembly I E Spray Insulation Selected Finishes z a Polyurethane SA pare O 8 8 C Order Finish Source ry be i Paints Primer A Part ry shasta 2 Spray Insulation F Part E Primer A EY Antifoul Note Selected Onder is important Available Finishes A list that contains the available finishes that have been defined in the library setup See Finishes page 34 Selected Finishes An ordered list that contains all the finishes that will be applied to the duct Inherit from System and Hierarchy A box indicating whether to inherit the finishes from the system and hierarchy to which the part belong To override the finishes for a part this box must be unchecked HVAC Part Right Click Menu The HVAC part right click menu is available to all HVAC parts and is used as quick access to some main functions The HVAC menu is integrated within AutoCAD s right click menu 433 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference 434 C Rotate Draw Order Group Anchor Lock Disconnect No Spool Set System Edit Part Change Insulation Change Finish Extract Center Lines Merge To Bent Show Flow Direction Switch Flow Direction Rotate Line Mode Icon Set Line Mode Icon Size Don
136. Controls the size of NavAid text e Relative to screen size NavAid text has a constant size relative to the screen regardless of zoom level e 1 3 Duct Dimension NavAid text is 1 3 the size of the duct s dimension 425 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference 426 The Transform Tab an Hvac Drawing Options bE Display Wav id Transform Routing Behaviour anchor Locks F Show Anchors Ef creen F Show Locks SPE Se C Relative to Part C Relative to Part Fixed 600 Fed 1000 Anchored Ponts duning mukipart transtorms Split and Merge Yellow CJ F override Color for Spit Part E color 9 Size Relative to Part C Freed Anchors Show Anchors When checked will display the anchor symbol to indicate anchored ducts Color The color of the anchor symbol Size e Relative to Part The size of the anchor symbol is relative to the part e Fixed The size of the anchor symbol is statically defined by you entered in the Size field Anchored Points When performing a multipart transform an octagon like icon is displayed at points beyond which the transform cannot affect For example the icon is drawn where the transform is restricted by an anchored or locked part or a part ona locked layer etc Color The color of the anchored point symbol Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference Size e Relative to Part The size of the anchored point symbol is relative to the part e Fixed The size of the
137. Convert an Ellipse or Spline to a Polyline page 78 Converts an ellipse arc circle or spline to a polyline with only straight line segments using the displayed tolerance The tolerance is the maximum deviation from the original curve SC Utilities gt Layer gt Activate Structure Modeling tab gt Modeling Utilities panel gt Activate gt Activate SC Utilities gt Layer gt Activate SCACTLAYER Permissions None Procedure Activate a Layer page 54 Turns the selected layer on and thaws it if it is frozen SC Utilities gt Layer gt Deactivate Structure Modeling tab gt Modeling Utilities panel gt Activate gt Deactivate SC Utilities gt Layer gt Deactivate SCDELAYER Permissions None Procedure Deactivate a Layer page 54 Turns the selected layer off and freezes it 358 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands SC Utilities gt Layer gt Copy Geometry to Structure Modeling tab gt Modeling Utilities panel gt Activate gt Copy Geometry to SC Utilities gt Layer gt Copy Geometry to SCCOP YGEO Permissions None Procedure Copy Objects from One Layer to Another page 55 Copies objects to the selected layer Objects inside blocks are also moved to the destination layer SC Utilities gt Layer gt Move Geometry to Structure Modeling tab gt Modeling Utilities panel gt Activate gt Move Geometry to SC Utilities gt Layer gt Move Geometry to SCMOVEGEO Permissions
138. Delete Rename Permissions General gt Edit Approval Renames the selected approval drawing Delete Permissions General gt Edit Approval Deletes the selected approval drawing Export Page The Export page lets you create open and modify export drawings Export drawings are created by exporting any number of ShipConstructor drawings to a standard AutoCAD drawing 330 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands shipConstructor Mavigator Tutorial UDI Last Modified Date Preview ee Pipe Spal Be HYAC 5 pool E Support Construction d Equipment 5 Electrical vee Ba Product Hierarchy al Interference oo Weld Management Assembly Open Read Only coll Composite Approval Expat Open Permissions General gt Edit Export Opens the selected export drawing New Permissions General gt Edit Export Creates a new export drawing Right Click Menu Lets you open rename or delete the selected export drawing or create a new export drawing Open New Rename Delete Rename Permissions General gt Edit Export Renames the selected export drawing Delete Permissions General gt Edit Export Deletes the selected export drawing Hull Page The Hull page lets you create open and modify hull and pinjig drawings See the Hull manual for details 331 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Open Permissions Hull gt Lofting Permissions Hull
139. Display icon to open the Display Properties window Set the text size to Smaller 100 default Getting Started 10 cath em Seorcs Contra Canc F File dt View Tans Hep si Si aa I ce a Conkle Fane Hunis GL GS Sonteol Monel amp Appearance cad Merzonal zation i Diselay Meke it easier to reed what s on your screen Adjust resclution You can change the size o text ord other ters on your sereen oy choosing one of these ootions To Leripersiy enlarge jusl parl of Le screen use lhe Meurer Luu Calbrale wu ur Change display sctings maller LOO defan ki Preview Adjust Clearlype tex Sct custom text sec CPTI 5 Medum 125 Larger 1206 see alzo Apply Ferswiidlzclwurn Devices and Pnnters 3 Click OK Note If text is too small for you to read reduce the resolution of your display In the Display window select the Adjust resolution option and set Resolution to a lower value For example if your current Screen resolution is 1600 x 1200 reduce it to 1280 x 1024 However do not use a Resolution less than 1024 x 768 Open a Project Note For more information on project setup and administration see the Project Management manual To open a project Note You can also open a project from Manager by choosing File gt Change Project 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator to open Navigator If you do not currently have a project open for example after initially starting ShipConstru
140. Distributed Systems Production Drawings 219 creatino a o oleleleB lecl late mmmmemreeeencrnr E mtr nimi min ann arian mn nee 279 Set Up Spool Naming CONVENTION sctccuvtena hans sch a a A 279 SEE AN ACUVE NaI IG CONVENIO Nasien eana e a E tunanleleacauumiwnsensty 280 Set Up a Spool Template Drawing ae cee aera nelle cota oes entdwleaomenlh leo euloeani enlace lenlndrl cuneate Alton 280 Generate Spool DraWiNgS erei acasestadiecest scutes vad wats E A E T uae 282 viii Edit SOO DFA WHOS sescssicsiedsdicvandsauavandsaicvindstvevandaxdrnt A FRO Leah DIMENSION acc tact errata cle rcoen EE EE E Align Dimension Text tO View essessessssssssssrsssssssrssrsasseserseesessesersaesessesersansesersansatesensansass RE dimMension a Sp00 DraWING saanen aAA vA IIE NRA Label Connecting Spool ASSEMDIY c cccsccsssesssscsssecsssssssseesssaseesasersassesassesassesassesaneesanss Update Spool Da WINGS wwvscaicasucisiedatcatiatsisadtatidasttedataiddatitectintidattiedatitdatatectintiiattietats Identifying Drawings that Require Updating cssesersssssessersssssersersesesersersaesesersersatees Updating an Existing Spool DraWinnd ccsessssssssssssssessrsssssserssesesseserseeseseesersaesesersensatees Generate Arrangement DrawindS cesesessssssssssrsssssrssrssrsersersersersersersersersenss Set Up an Arrangement Drawing TAMplate cccccssserssssesssrssssssrssrsesssersersaesesersersates Generate Arrangement Drawings csssssssssssss
141. E Stocks Stocks Standard NoLeader Length Length Yes None No Decimal Precision 0 Units mm Round up Output Revision Rev Yes None No String FA Output BOM Title Standard Assembly Circles Structure Approval Nest E8 Nest Part List Nest Part List Nest Part List DEFAULT Profile Plot Be Profile Plot Part List Profile Plot Part List Profile Plot Part List DEFAULT Pipe Pipe Arrangement Ba Accessories All Accessories PIPE PROD TBL Pipe Arrgt Bubbles 4 FA Detail BOM Detail BOM PIPE PROD TBL Pipe Arrgt Bubbles Ba Master BOM Master BOM PIPE PROD TBL Pipe Arrgt Circles E Spool List Spool List PIPE PROD TBL Pipe Arrgt Bubbles SP Pipe Spool Ba Accessories Accessories PIPE PROD TBL PIPE SPOOL n 7 E8 Part List Part List PIPE PROD TBL PIPE SPOOL E Pen Component Pen Components Standard DEFAULT Bending Tables Fal Bending Bends PIPE PROD TBL Pipe Spool Cuts Bends B Collectors Cutlist Note Collector order is important Available E Cutlist Cutlist PIPE PROD TBL PIPE SPOOL Position determines BOM output All Accessories rn ali nration Tahice x Included Label Style Cable Support Accessories ra lt none gt 4 Cable Support Part New incopy X Delete 7 Default Collectors Structure Part lt none gt Distributed System Support 3 w Equipment Part lt none gt gt General Part Import 2 Export XML Equipment Accesso lt none gt Hae abia onneaan Accessories 5 Apply OK Cancel
142. G General HL Hull Field Types The type of the field data Description The description of the field Collectors Collectors are responsible for gathering objects in a drawing to be included in a BOM and then processing the object data for display in the BOM Note Collector order is important because each collector returns information specific to the objects it collects Resultant information for each collector is then compiled in the order specified by the BOM definition Collectors are specific for each production drawing type The following table lists the collectors available per drawing type List the list of collectors included in the selected BOM definition Included The name of the collector that is included Label Style Label style to use for this collector If all collectors or this BOM table will use the same label style then the collector label style can be set to lt none gt ais mli Moves selected collectors up in the listing order and moves the rows generated by those collectors towards the top of the table hd Moves selected collectors down in the listing order and moves the rows generated by those collectors towards the bottom of the table Appendix Production Command Reference Ki Adds the selected collector from the available collector list to the included collector list gt Available The list of available collectors for the selected drawing type Removes the selected collector from the i
143. General Options page 168 for options not listed here e Orienting end Switches which end of the fitting will be aligned to the axis formed by the point you picked in step 4 and the point you will pick in step 7 Click anywhere in the model to specify the direction of the current end s axis i e the end axis will be parallel to the line formed by this point and the point that you clicked in Step 3 The fitting is now restricted to rotation about this axis You are prompted to pick a point indicating the direction of an orienting end of the fitting or to choose an option 8 HVAC Modeling Please pick a point indicating a rotation about the defined end axis or Next end for orientation lt 1 gt Forward Aft Port Starboard Up Down DEck align FRame align Long align ALign to WCS ZRotate SNap lt on gt s Depending which end you placed in Step 3 not all ends will be available as an orienting end while cycling through ends with Next end for orientation For example if you placed a tee by one end of its trunk the other end of the trunk is not useful to orient the tee with but the branch is If desired choose one of the available options see General Options page 168 for options not listed here e Next end for orientation Switches the end governing the orientation of the fitting Click anywhere in the model to specify the direction of the orienting end To insert a fitting in intersection mode when one or both of the connecting r
144. HVAC Drawing Options Toolbar SC HVAC gt Command SCDWGOPTIONSHVAC Permissions None Procedure Set Up HVAC Defaults Display and Performance page 152 Opens the HVAC Options window See HVAC Drawing Options page 415 SC HVAC gt On The Fly Mode HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt On The Fly Mode Toolbar SC HVAC gt Sp Command SCToggleOTFMode Permissions None Procedure On The Fly OTF page 156 Toggles OTF Mode SC HVAC gt HVAC OTF Default Data None SC HVAC gt HVAC OTF Default Data Toolbar SC HVAC gt Sr Command SCShowHVACDefaultData Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Default Data page 156 Shows the Default Data Dialog SC HVAC gt Get HVAC OTF Default Data from Part None SC HVAC gt Get HVAC OTF Default Data from Part Toolbar SC HVAC gt Ge Command SCGetHVACDefaultData Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Default Data page 156 Creates HVAC Default data from an existing part 410 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Change Connection Accessory Package Changes the accessory package associated with a particular connection 411 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference Individual Drawing Display Settings Commands 412 Set Centerline Color Index SCDwgOptionsHVACSetCenterlineColor Set Show Centerline 0 false 1 true SCDwgOptionsHVACSetShowCenterline Set Sh
145. ING TEE with 70 deg angle 23 TEE ReEn AS F3wS S01 A stnaalw l meme mouwkwle sackeat REMIT TEE woth 45 dan analea d Lol 2ff Coll Sel 18 7 KB ANY CR LF INS Default Text Manufacturers 32 A manufacturer is a company that manufactures certain items used in your project for example pipe stock and insulation When you create such an item you must assign it a manufacturer Create a Manufacturer To create a manufacturer 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Manufacturers page 303 to open the Manufacturers window Library Setup fs Manufacturers EREE In Use Manufacturer Mame a Ei new ALLWEILER AG X Delete Barthel Armaturen Usage Log Eelman ELok SMA DEFAULT DISCoM DLE VENTILATOR ERMET EUCARO H HERMAMNM EHLERS SMBH HAMWOR THY WATER SYSTEM LTO HYUNDAI eee ISODEC 1 P SAUER amp 50NH 3 Cancel SIRI KIKI IS 3 Click New to create a new manufacturer 4 Enter a name for the manufacturer and press Enter View Manufacturers Usage It is possible to see a list of all the stocks that use a selected manufacturer A check mark in the In Use column indicates that the manufacturer is being used by stocks To list all stocks using a specific manufacturer 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Manufacturers page 303 to open the Manufacturers window 3 Select the
146. ISHES Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Finishes Reference page 432 Allows viewing of Finishes applied to the part SC HVAC gt Insulation and Finishes gt Apply Finishes HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Insulation and Finishes gt Apply Finishes None SCAPPLYFINISHES Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Finishes Reference page 432 Adds Finishes to a part SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Merge To Bent HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Merge To Bent Toolbar HVAC gt Y Command SCHvacMergeToBent Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Create a single bent duct out of a selection HVAC parts SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Mark all exceeding max length HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Mark all exceeding max length None SCHvacMarkAllMaxLen Marks all ducts that exceed max length Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Cut to Max Length Automatically cuts all straights and bents to their maximum allowed length SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Extract Center Line Extracts the centerlines from the selected parts and creates block references containing the segments of the centerlines and dashed lines to the corner points The segments are placed on the SCCENTERLINES layer and the corner lines use the line style ACAD ISOO2W100
147. IUCZ PROUECT UCZ PROIECTIUCZID3400 PROJECT UCZ D129 PROJECT UC2 PROJECT UCE PROJECTIUCZID3400 PROIFCTH 21791 PROJECTIUCL HGG PROIFCTILI I trhris Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Revision Type Shee Mate EXE Modified Modified Modified Modified Modified Modified Modified Modified Modified Modified Modified Modified Modified Modified Sub Type Ser Sire ee Emenee E Equipment Part Equipment Part Equipment Park Equipment Part Pipe Part Pipe Part Pipe Part Pipe Fat Pipe Part Pipe Part Pipe Part Pipe Part Pipe Part Pipe Part User Enter Sear text ARLOOMIAIN Chel ARLOOMAIN chri ARLOOMAIN chri ARLOOMAIN chri ARLOOMAIN chri ARLOOMAIN chri ARLOOMAIN chri SKLUOOM ALN Chri ARLOOMAIN chri ARLDOMAIN chri ARLOOMAIN chri ARLOOMAIN chri ARLOOMAIN chri ARLOOMAIN chri Park Added to De Hierarchy Modifc ShipConstructor Part Removed Fr Hierarchy Modifc ShipConstructor Park Removed Park Added Park Removed Park Added Part Removed Part Added Deleted Deleted 31958 rows E Export Page WK Clear Filters Dlierarchy Modif ShipConstructor Hierarchy Modif ShipConstructor Part Added to De Hierarchy Modifc ShipConstructor Part Removed Fr Hierarchy Modifc ShipConstructor Hierarchy Modif ShipConstructor Hierarchy Modif ShipConstructor Park Added to De Hierarchy Modif ShipConstructor Park Removed Cr Aierarclry Modil Slipo Lr ulur Hierarchy Modif ShipConstructor Hierarchy Modif ShipCoanes
148. If the user makes a change to the product hierarchy tree such that parts that he does not own will be modified a window will appear warning him of this and optionally listing the affected parts Product Hierarchy 2 parts assigned to this assembly for its children are mot split to this project and will not be renamed Delete log File oro wiew hog File By default when parts are renamed they use their current autonumber the elements in that name related to their location in the product hierarchy will be modified However some users prefer to model all their parts before defining the complete product hierarchy and only assigning those parts later This can cause parts to have exceptionally high autonumbers To allow the user to have their parts use the lowest number possible there is an option for renaming This option is available only to Structure In the Options menu under Naming gt Structure there are two choices Keep Autonumber and First Available The default is Keep Autonumber In the bottom right corner of the Product Hierarchy palette there is an image indicating the current naming option Keep Autonumber uses a 05 gt 05 image and First Available uses a 05 gt 01 image E Peman cs ee Descriptioni First Available J F PROJECT mT Keep Autonumber does just that parts will try and keep their autonumber when renamed If that autonumber is unavailable there may already be a part
149. Keys Licensed Materials use requires Hardware Keys supplied by SSI which can be used only at the site s authorized by SSI In the event of a failure of the Licensee s System Configuration the Licensee may upon advising SSI use the Hardware Keys and Licensed Materials on another system and or location 11 License Fees Licensee shall pay to SSI the License fees applicable for the Licensed Materials as set out in and in accordance with SSI s Invoice 12 Services Support services after the Warranty Period as defined in Section 15 below are provided by SSI under the terms of the SSI Subscription Agreement Installation consulting training and implementation services if requested by the Licensee shall be provided by separate agreement and at an additional charge 363338 2013 07 13 Taxes All amounts payable by Licensee to SSI are exclusive of all commodity taxes including but not limited to applicable sales use value added custom duties excise taxes and other similar government charges all of which will be paid by Licensee If Licensee is required by law to withhold any taxes then Licensee shall pay SSI a gross amount of money such that the net amount received by SSI after deducting or withholding the required taxes is equal to the amount of the fee originally charged by SSI 14 Interest Charges If any amount payable under this Agreement is not paid within 30 days of becoming due SSI shall have the right to impose a c
150. LOT UNIT gt The common unit of the parts in the plot If the parts belong to different units then Varies will be displayed lt PROFILE_ POSITION gt The lower left corner of the profile cross section view lt SCALE gt The scale of the plot relative to the full size stiffener lt STOCK_DESC gt The Description field of the stock for the stiffeners in the plot Profile Plot Sheet Template Keywords lt PART LIST gt A list of parts that are in plots in this sheet lt PLOT DATE gt The date and time the sheet was created or last updated The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt PLOT SCALES gt The common scale of the plots for this sheet If the scales are different then Varies will be displayed lt SHEET NAME gt The name of the profile plot sheet lt SHEET UNIT gt The common unit of the parts in the plot If the parts belong to different units then Varies will be displayed 493 Appendix Production Command Reference Update from a Previous Version Develop Product Hierarchy Opens the Product Hierarchy window letting you setup assembly levels and assemblies and assign parts to assemblies 494 Appendix Production Command Reference Tools Options Descriptionl fe F PROJECT ie F uol M E Unspooled Pipe Unspooled HVAC Unassigned Pipe Unassigned HVAC Unassigned Equipment Unassigned Supports Unassigned Structure Unassigned Standard A Unassigned C
151. Me Pipe Spool Be HVAC Spool E Support Construction HP Equipment 5 Electrical Ma Product Hierarchy E Interference oo Weld Management Assembly AM Composite Approval Esport Output cow ae Mest Profile Plot Open Permissions Structure gt Profile Plots gt Edit Opens the selected profile plot drawing Permissions Structure gt Profile Plots gt Edit OD Creates a new profile plot drawing Right Click Menu Lets you open rename or delete the selected profile plot drawing or create a new profile plot drawing Open New Rename Delete 336 Rename Permissions Structure gt Profile Plots gt Edit Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Renames the selected profile plot drawing Delete Permissions Structure gt Profile Plots gt Edit Deletes the selected profile plot drawing Templates Page The Templates page lets you create open and modify various types of template drawings shipConstructor Mavigator Tutorial UDI 5 Tutorial Pipe Spal lt HVAC 5 pool la Support Construction iP Equipment Electrical fee SM Product Hierarchy of Interference oo Weld Management ac Assembly Nest F Profile Plot iw Templates Open Drawing z aig Approval m aha AQ Approval metric zi ai Assembly ft Assembly Metric B a Assembly Ad k Composite SACS DistibutedSystemSuppart S ai DistibutedSystemSuppotConstruction iL Support Construct
152. NE AENA ATAO 428 Disa ciclo 0 ain eT ee AAAA NAA AAA 429 Select SUOCK VV COW Fo SECT IC iieii hci ce ec ce cc 429 Required Custom Attributes Reference iitiiiecsrociunioruniond niente alam a wenstaaenenenins 431 Matom RETENC E sectarian bcc den E 431 FA AC RO O EAA A TT Re nT en nT Ten Teen en ren ern eT 432 HVAC ParCRIONECICK MENU srpen AAA 433 On the Fly Command Line Reference ccccssessessssssssssssesssssssrseceseeseseeseseeseeseeseseseesaesasseseeseesassesnsansateass 435 EET DEE h AA he cece te EA AAA eee EA 436 Select UCS Options Referee cesecserssssrssrssrssrssrssrserserssrsersrseesrsorsrsersersersersersersensersersersersensersersnsensenss 438 Appendix Production Command Reference 441 Progucuon Mennin Manage l sncticataatteteatineneciatantanteutaemeteatatnteutan etn nnananan ante nn vain 441 General gt Production Output gt Label SUES xs ctiisiscsconscaccsesncas sawmocashutawuossconsneseuiaetiaeupads aes ctedaernedsiivans dei ceusaniiatencticrwnseth 441 General gt Production Output gt DIMENSION Styl s cccecsssesssssrssssssessrsseseesessrsessesersesassesersaesassesersansessesersansesensensanees 445 General gt Production Output gt Bill Of Materials ccccsesscssssssssssssrssrseessserssrsassesrseesesseserseeseseseeseesessesensansasensensatees 445 General gt Production Output gt Predefined Assembly FOr Al cesssssssersssssssssrsseseeessrseseseesersaeseseesersatsesrsensatees 451 Ribbon Tabs page Error Bookmark
153. Nest drawing specific to a particular nest Pipe Hanger Find and returns information for all Pipe Hanger Lets you choose from all the hanger part parts types Pipe Hanger Queries all Pipe Hangers and retrieves accessory Accessories package information from them Pipe Part Finds and returns information for all pipe parts Lets you specify the type and spool status of the objects listed in the BOM Pipe Spool Gathers all Pipe objects and organizes them into their spools Returns information for each spool Profile Plot Collects all objects in a Profile Plot drawing specific to a particular nest Standard Assembly Collects all parts that are part of standard assemblies Structure Part Collects structure parts Collector Options let you select the Part Types to collect Corrugated Plate Curved Plate Profile Penetration Components Plank Plate Twisted Profile Wireway Leg Collects electrical wireway leg parts re Merging Rows Rows with common field values can be merged There are only two requirements for two rows to be merged 1 The rows must be produced by the same Collector 2 For each field where Merge Identical has been set to Yes the row must have the same value as the one above Fields that are not marked as Merge Identical are merged appropriately e g Total Length is summed quantities are summed etc Where values differ in merged cells the value Varies will be displayed There is one exception to the rule of su
154. New Rename Delete Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Reattaches an existing drawing to a registered electrical wireway arrangement drawing that has its drawing file missing The selected drawing is checked to ensure it is an electrical wireway arrangement drawing Rename Renames the selected drawing Delete Deletes the selected drawing Product Hierarchy Page The Product Hierarchy page lets you create open and modify product hierarchy drawings See Product Hierarchies page 60 323 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands shipConstructor Mavigator Tutorial UDI Last Modified Date Preview ee Pipe Spal Be HYAC 5 pool E Support Construction d Equipment 5 Electrical vee Ba Product Hierarchy al Interference pela all Open Read Only MI Composite oS Mers Show Qut of Date Esport AAAA EEE Hull Space Alloc ation Output Nest Profile Plot Open Opens the selected product hierarchy drawing New Permissions General gt Edit Product Hierarchy Drawings Procedure Create a Product Hierarchy Drawing page 64 Creates a new product hierarchy drawing A product hierarchy drawing is used to visualize the parts in the unit when developing the product hierarchy tree of parts This drawing will contain read only copies of the parts that can be selected individually Show Out of Date Shows a A next to each drawing that has parts in it that have changed or parts tha
155. None Procedure Move Objects from One Layer to Another page 55 Moves objects from one layer to another If you move a block the objects inside the block are also moved to the destination layer SC Utilities gt Toolpath Structure Modeling tab gt Modeling Utilities panel gt Toolpath SC Utilities gt Toolpath SCTOOLPATH Permissions None Procedure Create a Closed Toolpath page 76 Creates a closed polyline when possible from lines that have no gaps If the connected path is not closed you will see the following warning Duplicate lines will generate warnings that allow you to remove them Tool Path Error Tool path is not closed 4 connected to toolpath O unused invalid Distance is 6 0125 Circle A adius DAI Create Circles Do Not Create Circles The command allows you to set the gap tolerance that is used to bridge gaps between the selected curves The default gap tolerance is 0 1 359 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 360 SC Utilities gt Fillet Creates a fillet between two curves AutoCAD s fillet command can fail to generate a result when two complex polylines are filleted SC Utilities gt Mirror about Centerline Makes a copy of the selected objects and mirrors them about the vessel s centerline SC Utilities gt Dihedral Angle Determines the dihedral angle between two planar objects Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands This command works on t
156. Production Distributed System Supp Charactersi uto Stark Point Beginning OFFset 0 TreeLevel OMIT Supports Static Electrical Assembly Level Charactersiduto Stark Point Beginning Offsets TreeLevel ASSEMBLY Cables Static Part Cable Supports Assembly Level Characters 4uto Stark Point Beginning OFFset 0 TreeLevel PANEL General Assembly Drawing PRIMARY Primary Assembly 0 Weight Strategy weight Strategy Prac Delete Equipment Part x x H 4C Parts Spool Stocks Penetrations Source Penetration Characters Pipe Start Point Element Det ails Parts Offset Spool Lise as Name Seed Stocks TreeLevel Space Allocation Space Allocations Standard Assemblies Parts in Standard Spools in Standard Sample Name UNIT 455EMEBL PAMEL Example Assembly Drawing naming convention Global Dimension to Point Value DE Assembly Suto Beginning 0 Yes a A Global Dimension to Point is used to indicate the distances from a given point to selected planes The global dimension to points can be displayed either as dimensions or as labels The text displayed in the dimensions and labels can be customized to display the information in any format specified by the user 221 Getting Started with Production Cf Oe Te a CA E oe oop 4 71 Forward UOIFiIN9 H 3970 Storboord UOILNGBHD_M e300 Up UOlTOPUCK_M a lt gt a N TS s The main grid will d
157. Project gt Copy Project See the Project Management manual ShipConstructor gt Model Link Lets you insert link drawings into the current drawing Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands MLink Manager We MiLink Manager Enter filter text Lock MLink Layers a iF DS Lock i uo1 New MLinks E Structure All MLinks ai J Frame EA ES LngBbhd E EF voice E BP uoi 500 ps m EB uo 750 P5 Check Visible F E ooi 75058 cheek F BP u01 _L1500 es makaia E BF u01 _L1500 55 Reload All xRefs E IBF uo1_t2s00 ps E EF Uo1_L2500 56 F BP uoi _L4500 ps F E uoi _L4500 56 E EF u01 15000 PS E EF 001 _L5000 56 C Deck E CI Arbitrary aE Curved O HYAL Cancel TI al Dine Current Unit Only E The MLink Manager lists all of the drawings in the project You can mlink a drawing into the current drawing by clicking its check box so a checkmark appears You can remove an mlinked drawing from the current drawing by clicking its check box so it is empty Lock Locks the layer that the MLink is placed on Each MLink is placed on its own layer New MLinks Only newly added MLinks will be placed on locked layers All MLinks All MLinks are placed on locked layers Current Unit Only Limits the tree of model drawings to show only the current unit of the current drawing Check Visible Checks only the model drawings that are in the current filter Uncheck All Unchecks
158. RE BAREEN aAa Ea aeaa en 209 Frase AULT V A CASES MICU S SCIONS orra uraia ewes aoe dw a ld hai lide 209 Production Concepts 211 Production DrawWINGS ivan oii TAAA a A A a a 211 yi Contents POG UGHOM ODI CCU ainsas giei K EE ERR EE A N 211 BINION WU AUT VANS ernennen ATEO TTO TEO EET TOE 212 BOM FUNCH ONA OVEM E W aaen AA A AAAA A 212 BOM CONECTO eatin cankan a e a a E E tc unelieds aeonttatenth fede 213 FLD SINE Uneaten tte entice ea ea eile A E TEA AAA A ta A an AA A A A A E antes vip A AA AA 213 Leader DistriDUtON LINES ccmenissniornsarnsnan nn a AARAA 213 KEO Sen A A 213 Getting Started with Production 214 Producton setu CHECK IISE a tciannudenhianiaenndehenihveniiiineihh AEAEE EERTECO 214 PrOdUCHON PTO OCE SERINO S ai einir iunea a E EEE EAEE EERE E 214 Perni SION eina T ETETE T ET ea ll ella are TET A TE ET 214 Dimension SYES arniran A T AA 214 Label S VES seisi E E E E EE 215 BOM Dennitions Mand gelaran ia AEAT OANA NNE AEA AONA 220 Assembly Drawing Naming CONVENTIONS ccecssssssssssssssssrsssssssesersesessesersassessesersansesersersassesersansassesorsansesersensansesensansates 220 GloBall DiIMeENSION LO POIRE main tin uve eutanes teenie A oA A LIA aA tee AR 221 Creating a NEW BOM Definito Marassi en ashiuenits ani titi unai un situa seared Cee atten oto Agu RNAi 224 Deleting an Existing BOM DSTA OP ssvesiudesniestesniustesdenlvaisiluvatyulodanlailuindusleslivulusetuinuaiyidneseaniit vestes oili tenses vanluaoedavceabtdvoteatya
159. Reference 506 me nsi Name Bee sortAtoz AT SonzZto ds 1 From the Data ribbon choose the From Other Sources droplist and then select the From XML Data Import option Select the sheet and cell for the origin of the top left most portion of the tabular data The data is imported in columnar fashion however it is likely randomly ordered To order the data you will specify a custom sort based on at least two columns For this example the data will be ordered on Name and Segment number in that order The order is important because the data must first be grouped a field that unites all segments from one item Then an ascending sort is applied to the Segment Number field Ej nsi sto ckName F ERW CS O40 40 A5 P ERY CS5 04 0 40 A542 Se E e S U O e _ P ERW CS 04 0 40 A5 P ERW CS 04 0 40 A5 P ERW CS_04 0_40_A5 P ERW CS 04 0 40 A5 Text Filters ne Select All oo P ERW CS_04 0_40_453 4 026 iel P ERW CS_04 0_40_453 4 027 lt it F Sc rt ep Sh add ewel x Gelete Fwe Hin avel 4 F Qahinins Py daca has bearers 1 Click once ta add a level Sark in rier nel hare vaker l Atc 2 crder fielcs i Ssgmsnthunber Wales Abe 2 Lancel The data should now be ordered according to pipe name and the segment number Choosing Pipes for XML Data Generation To choose the pipes that are required for XML data generation run
160. S Intersections HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Erase All HEP UCS Intersections Toolbar None Command SCHepUCSIntersectionDeleteAll Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Erase all HVAC UCS Intersections page 209 Erases all the UCS intersections in the current drawing 404 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Insert Penetration Creates a Penetration 405 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Swap Construction Line HVAC Ribbon Tab gt Penetrations Panel SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Swap Construction Line Toolbar Penetrations gt Penetration Construction Line Tools Flyout gt Command SCPENSWAPCONSTRUCTIONLINE Permissions Penetrations gt Modify Penetrations Procedure See the Penetrations manual for details on Penetrations SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Add Construction Line HVAC Ribbon Tab gt Penetrations Panel SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Add Construction Line Toolbar Penetrations gt Penetration Construction Line Tools Flyout gt Command SCPENADDCONSTRUCTIONLINE Permissions Penetrations gt Modify Penetrations Procedure See the Penetrations manual for details on Penetrations SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Remove Construction Line HVAC Ribbon Tab gt Penetrations Panel SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Remove Construction Line Toolbar Penetrati
161. SCDO file is created and it can be used either the drawing options or the viewport display options Drawing Options gt Load Drawing Options Production tab gt Main panel Assembly gt Load Drawing Options SCLOADDRAWINGOPTIONSFROMFILE Permissions None License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure None Loads drawing options from a selected SCDO file into the current drawing Viewport Options Production tab gt Production Utilities Viewport Options SCVPORTOPTIONS License Permissions None Lets you indicate whether an assembly drawing viewport is a keymap viewport or a normal viewport and whether ShipConstructor will insert automatic annotations into the viewport 470 Appendix Production Command Reference viewport Options Rehan Show KeyMap Labelling Label items from all BOM BOM Definition Assembly BOM Bill of Material Minimum leader length Label 5 pacing rea Show KeyMap Shows the Keymap layer in the selected viewport Enabled only in Assembly drawings Label items from all BOMs Flag used by labeling to determine what viewports to label When checked all BOMs in the current layout will be labeled in the selected viewport When unchecked only BOMs checked in Label column will be labeled BOM list List of BOM tables in the current layout Used to label specific BOMs for the selected viewport Minimum leader length The di
162. SHIPCONSTRUCTOR Featuring Database Driven Relational Object Model DDROM Copyright 2014 SSI All Rights Reserved HVAC www SSl corporate com Copyright 2014 SSI Feb 27 14 ShipConstructor 2014 HVAC Published 2014 02 27 Copyright Copyright 2014 SSI Information in this ShipConstructor manual is the property of SSI No part of it can be reproduced translated resold rented adapted modified stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means in whole or in part All Rights Reserved Trademarks ShipConstructor AutoMagic SmartP arts Database Driven Relational Object Model DDROM Are all registered trademarks of SSI SSI Suite 304 3960 Quadra Street Victoria BC Canada V8X 4A3 Toll Free 1 888 210 7420 Phone 1 250 479 3638 Fax 1 250 479 0868 Information info SSl corporate com Support support Sl corporate com Sales Sales SSl corporate com Website www sSl corporate com SHI PCONSTRUCTOR LICENSE AGREEMENT BEFORE PROCEEDING WITH THE INSTALLATION YOU MUST ACCEPT THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT INDICATE YOUR ACCEPTANCE OR REJECTION OF THIS AGREEMENT BY CLICKING ON THE APPROPRIATE BUTTON IF YOU CLICK ON REJECT INSTALLATION WILL ABORT 1 License Grant ShipConstructor Software Inc 304 3960 Quadra Street Victoria B C Canada V8X 4A3 DBA SSI grants to the person accepting this Agreement the Licensee a non exclusive non transferable
163. Saddle page 401 Vv Cut to Max Length See SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Cut to Max Length page 403 Mark all exceeding max length See SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Mark all exceeding max length page 402 Add UCS Intersection See SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Add HVAC UCS Intersection page 404 XQ Erase HVAC UCS Intersection See SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Erase HEP UCS Intersection page 404 Erase all HEP UCS Intersections See SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Erase All HEP UCS Intersections page 404 A Toggle Highlight on all HEP UCS intersections See SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Toggle Highlight on all HEP UCS Intersection page 404 amp Toggle Close HVAC end See SC HVAC gt Toggle close HVAC end page 408 Extract Centerline See SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Extract Center Line page 403 On the Fly Mode See SC HVAC gt On the Fly Mode page 410 k Transfer Parts See SC HVAC gt Transfer Parts page 409 3 Toggle Constraint Enforcement See SC HVAC gt Toggle Constrain Enforcement page 409 Y Merge to Bent See SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Merge To Bent page 402 cK nm AY Change Connection Accessory Package See SC HVAC gt Change Connection Accessory Package page 411 3 Pantsify End See SC HVAC gt Pantsify End page 406 See SC HVAC gt Toggle Transform Mode page 409 HVAC Panel er S
164. See SC HVAC gt Spools gt Add Spool Break page 399 y Remove Spool break See SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove Spool Break page 400 a Transfer Parts See SC HVAC gt Transfer Parts page 409 SC HVAC Menu The SC HVAC menu appears in HVAC drawings SC HVAC gt Straight HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Straight Toolbar HVAC gt Command SCHvacStraight Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Straight Duct page 160 Inserts a straight duct 388 SC HVAC gt Bent HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Bent Toolbar HVAC gt s Command SCHvacBent Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Bent Duct page 161 Inserts a bent duct SC HVAC gt Elbow HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Elbow Toolbar HVAC gt ie Command SCHvacElbow Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts an elbow duct SC HVAC gt Tees gt Tee HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Tees gt Tee Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Tee Flyout gt d Command SCHvacTee Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a tee duct SC HVAC gt Tees gt Square Tee HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Tees gt Square Tee Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Tee Flyout gt oe Command SCHvacSquarelTee Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittin
165. Sets the throat length of both ends e Throat2 Sets the throat length of the end opposite to the one you are placing Options specific to transitions and offsets e Length Sets the length of the non throat component e HorizontalOffset Sets the horizontal offset e VerticalOffset Sets the vertical offset Options specific to elbows e Angle Sets the angle of the elbow in degrees e CenterRadius Sets the radius of the elbow s centerline e ThroatRadius Sets the throat radius of the elbow The throat radius is equal to the centerline radius minus half the larger profile width e Offset Sets the vertical offset of the elbow e NumSegments Sets the number of mitered segments the elbow is composed of A value of 1 makes the elbow rounded e Flip Swaps the width and height of each profile analogously changes the axis in which the elbow curves Pantsify 436 Any end on any part can be pantsified as long as the end is rectangular Pantsifying an end breaks a large end into many smaller sub ends that you can connect smaller ducts to Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference lt Process of pantsification left to right Free duct end pantsified duct end two elbows connected to a single duct end SC HVAC gt Pansify End opens the HVAC Edit Pants window 437 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference HVAC Edit Pants Add a new Division Edit an existing Division Click on the diagram to insert anew di
166. Spool Break page 400 and there is a toolbar button in the Distributed Systems Utilities toolbar 3 If breaks were removed between defined spools a prompt to select which spool you wish to keep for this joined section is displayed Select a single part from the section of the original spool that you wish to keep To change the display properties of the spool break icon 1 Choose SC HVAC gt HVAC Drawing Options page 410 to open the HVAC Options window See HVAC Drawing Options page 415 2 Inthe Display tab change the properties under Show Spool Break 3 Click OK Define and Undefine a Spool Permission HVAC Spools Create Delete To define a selected spools 1 Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 2 Under the Undefined Spools category select one or multiple spools and right click on an undefined spool and choose Define Spool The Spool Properties window appears See Spool Properties Reference page 514 3 Choose a hierarchy level for the spool a name finishes insulation and click OK Note You cannot select the Project as a valid hierarchy Typically if the hierarchy is not known at modeling time it Should go into one of the Unassigned hierarchies so it is easier to find all the unassigned parts later The spool now appears under the Modified Spools heading Note When a spool is defined the spool will be put on a layer of the same name as the spool To define all undefined spools 1 Open
167. Tab page 429 for details 4 Click OK to save changes and close the HVAC Drawing Options window On The Fly OTF OTF Mode is a mode that can be turned on to model HVAC without having to have the correct stocks created already Simply define some default data select a type of duct to place and place the duct To turn on off OTF Mode 1 From the HVAC toolbar click on the Toggle OTF button ep 2 The status on off of the OTF Mode will be shown on the command line SD OTF off S amp P OTF on Default Data HVAC default data are used for creating stocks used in OTF mode While in OTF mode the default data are used every time a duct is created for placement HVAC Modeling Default data for HVAC parts include e Measurements Imperial or Metric e Sheet Stock e Finishes e Insulation e Start End Treatment e End End Treatment If the default part data have not been set when a duct is going to be placed the default part data dialog will open to ask the user to define some default data HVAC Parts Default RES Measurements Metric O Imperial Sheet Stock 16 GA AL 3003 Stat End Treatment Hange Stainless Steel 18 5R 0 1875 in x 1 5in End End Treatment Flange Stainless Steel 18 SR 0 1875in x 1 5in Paints Antifoul To define default parts data 1 From the SC HVAC menu select HVAC OTF Default Data OR 1 From the HVAC toolbar select OTF Default Data om 2 Change the data as needed click OK
168. Tee Z Laterals Crosses lt Pew Duct Apply Changes Discard Changes Spec Functions Preview B El H H amp 102 HVAC Library Setup Filtering the Stock List At the top of the catalog stock list is the yellow filter row This filter row lets you filter by any property in the stock list to narrow down the number of stocks displayed To filter by a property 1 Click on the filter row cell in the column that the filter should be applied for 2 Enter a number string or any other characters to filter by Note The filter row executes a contains filter This means if you filter using the string 13 you will get hits for 13 133 Stock13 and any other string containing 13 3 Repeat Steps 1 and 2 to add additional filters to other columns to further narrow down the number of stocks displayed Note The filter is applied only to expanded nodes in the tree 3 Click the Apply Filter button to apply the filters U4 To clear all filters 1 Click on the Clear Filter button To expand the entire list 1 Click on the Expand All button A To collapse the entire list 1 Click on the Collapse All button EJ More filtering options e Under Units select whether to show only stocks that are measured in Metric units stocks that are measured in Imperial units or stocks measured in Both metric and imperial units e To change the order in which stocks are listed in the stock list click a co
169. This means that you will have to rename your spool to reflect these changes To change the finishes of a spool 1 Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 2 Select the spool 3 Make sure the properties section of the Spool Manager is open See Spool Manager Reference page 510 4 Click LJ beside the finishes list The Select Finishes window appears 202 J HVAC Modeling Select Finishes Available Finishes Inherit From System G 7 Spray Insulation Selected Finishes a a Orders Finish Source Si Paints i Tease Spool Dee ae Primer B oe E Primer A con JEN Antifoul Note Selected Order is Important When you finish changing the finishes click OK See Finishes Reference page 432 for more details To change the insulation of a spool 1 2 3 Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 Select the spool Make sure the properties section of the Spool Manager is open See Spool Manager Reference page 510 Click beside the insulation list The Select Insulation window appears 203 HVAC Modeling Select Insulation SEE Available Insulations Inherit From System Thermal Selected Insulations E Self Adhesive Order Insulation Source EF eer 1 BOP ee system PA i 2 Thermal Self Ad Branch a a 3 Acoustical Type Spool Solvent Emulsion a Note Selected Order is Impostant 5 When you finish changing the insulation cli
170. To change the prefix PreText or postfix PostText text of the keyword use the property palette Insert a BOM Table into a Production Drawing Template You can now predefine a BOM definition for use within a production drawing template This enables you to format an empty BOM table to your specifications correct text style size and so on before creating a production drawing Note To insert the BOM table there must already be an assembly BOM definition defined See Creating a New BOM Definition page 224 To insert a BOM table l Li In the drawing template activate paper space except for plate nest and profile plot drawings Choose Format gt Table Styles to customize the table style to be used for the BOM table Be sure that the name of the table style matches the Acad TableStyle name in the BOM Definition Choose BOM gt Insert BOM Table page 474 Getting Started with Production ES BOM Definition Wizard Step lof 2 Please Select BOM Definition BOM Definitions Fields Fecinane Jms a Sr dea General Item E Assembly Iter Ves Part Mame Park Mame l Bill of Material Assembly BOM Asse Qty Stock Mame Stock Name Weight Length f Ir Eura Colleckors Note Collector order is important Position determines BOM output A teeeeeatias x Cable Support Accessories z na _ Ca Cable Support Part 7 Defar ngo E ee System Support a i E guipmert
171. Typea File Name for the drawing Note To open the new drawing click on the Open new drawing check box 5 Click OK Lock or Unlock a Drawing You can lock drawings so others can open them and view them but not save any changes to the drawing To lock or unlock a drawing 1 In Navigator click the padlock icon amp beside the drawing name e A dark padlock icon means the drawing is locked e Adimmed padlock icon means the drawing is unlocked Note If clicking the lock icon does not seem to work you may not have permissions to lock or unlock the appropriate drawing files 15 Drawings 16 Rename a Drawing To rename a drawing 1 In Navigator right click on the drawing name and choose Rename 2 Enteranewname 3 Press Enter Delete a Drawing To delete a drawing 1 In Navigator right click on the drawing name and choose Delete Save a Drawing It is Important for the user to click File gt Save in AutoCAD to save the current structural drawing periodically This ensures that the drawing and the project database remain synchronized Note The automatic saving feature through AutoCAD will not save ShipConstructor drawings Closing a Drawing Erased parts are deleted from the database when the drawing Is closed and you have saved the drawing If AutoCAD crashes without closing a drawing any parts that were deleted in that session will be left in the database The next time the drawing is opened a synchronize warn
172. Ur dak celal heh cal ee taee nectar neeanbne cael ae 52 Activate Bo ere rere ey er RETR CEE Ree RE ETT nee en er ne cee enero 52 SEIECE a UCS VIEW DOIN aariaa A antl ashamicnanieh A 53 PCUV ARCs T LAVE ieaie E EEEE aE OEE ar a EE 54 De ctivate d Laye eeneenenen ence n a a ny ter ern nee ener eee eer er A er ee 54 Copy Objects rom One Layer TO ANOMGh iissien tint acrcnaentimionanvaetiieboiiindetd ain onsen AE E 55 Move Objects from One Layer TOA MOU GN sass teccesistcassestechiveabaceasrnsteregeimniainnins cancun ts weounsbagheveubannsaiesbacledcashaenpueataeeacinhamuniein 55 MUTORE lqcorsmetrrer em rrr tren crete a erry tren etre errr tren ner er enn irre rere rrr 55 Minor Pats ADOUE TINS COERCED ING saraet ainera e ga Net Ea 55 Minor catamara IFUN S anainua a a wlan vate van init e 55 oDe CDEP y ee E A OE ane 55 Hider SNOW Obecna aaa aaa a nae cad a aa acta eal a ava ee divenaies 55 Display Objects in Wireframe Hidden Line or Shaded MOde c ccsessssesssessssesssscessesesseceseseseeceseeseseesessesaseesasersaseneass 56 Display Information for an Object within an MLinked DraWinG sssesssssscsersssssssssrssessssrserseseserseesaseesersesatersersateass 56 Bae GOR Lal mereeermremerrerceer rer aeonrrrrtrrrr a a etree errr T 56 Pan Vew AG VANTAGES ccusiscasisncrteaaseuetnasnneu siteeauswt sens cSt vaentsienensitbinde in dsnttiscBe ns adt nail ctl nen adininin Dn cesintsenttadetiassaeeaiepetenceiwattia 56 SUP DOME SIPC OMSUMUCTOI IMSS oa f
173. VAC RIDDON T aD ienaa AEAEE A AAE 375 HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel ciccisindvesesiaduuassbadinaan eaciiiianiducasavsantaanitiina neal aiaa nes aineaaranaaMaenneunaeaes 375 AVAC PIC lis anes tasininastvasrunansaavnaauwnansaauuhansh iy navaiavatuvan dos hunsn asabenun di ancndn A quvsnausnunsh ds ban AAN 377 AVAC SPOON PMG I ssiictescweunsisconsiassscsesintistuideSenststiat uation ction ated DbuicesseeeutiabaBs uate ualuaticesshedbintiseidiietuigeBtnsirar adedetianadeceunitadeeiedes 381 Penetatiohs Pane eaten satin g stunt aA NEREAREN EROA 382 MeO OMe ENAA AAPA EOE AE E AEE EE AA E EEEE AA ate EEEE EEEIEE ENE EEEE 383 AVAC TOODA ranana a A S ener ee ere 383 Distributed Systems Utilities TOODA r miinan A Maa tiiddeata Mbetunaena nannies 387 STV PG ITC FU chica cc cataract erence T 388 SC AVAC gt Stralen a A NIN MIATA ON 388 SC HVAC S BENU atic tasstaantoneaten sonatas AEE E E E 389 ELA hT OEA OO tented teem Sete AA AA A A N N N EA A E O AA A AA A AT 389 SC HVAC di ee CO aA AA AA AA AAAA NAANA 389 SCHVAC gt Tees gt Square TEGi iaeiiai aa iia aia E aaia aaa aAa dead aaa Ta aaa Ea Taala 389 SC HVAC gt Tees OC ai ML TO Eirinen aiaa ia eaa eA E A A AE citcat ace 390 SC HVAC gt Tees gt Reducing Tee neninsniconioinsanan aaa A E Eia 390 SCHVAC IRS 2S COMMON TE Crina iaae AA EAA OEA A NOE TAERA 390 SC HVAG Tees gt Double TeC ticicccsticcecestccssnwedtbevoabiecsneslscnecwstnesawesticheushecewsshhcniuesiawnneiabineavabioseuuiadavestmnnnnldeeustnan
174. VAC menu or the HVAC toolbar choose the type of stock you would like to place in the drawing The Select Stock window will appear See Select Stock Window Reference page 429 for more information Note If there are no stocks shown clear all the filters by selecting the Clear Filter button and make sure that there are stocks of the type selected created and assigned to the spec where the current system is E Ex Stack Name Description End iProfile End 1EndTrestme End2Profile End 2nd Trestne Sheetstock U 10 AL 2 Circular 10 PL Aluminum 30 Circular 10 PL Aluminum 30 20 GA AL 3003 1 P 08 AL Zi Circular 8 PL Aluminum 30 Circular 8 PL Aluminum 30 20 GA AL 3003 1 j FO20 x5 Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 30 GA AL 3003 1 F DU FOO ka Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 Flattened Oval PL Aluminum 30 20 GA AL 3003 U FOZ Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 20 GA AL 3003 FO2S 10 Flattened Oval 2 PL Aluminum 30 Flattened Oval amp PL Aluminum 30 20 GA AL 3003 1 2 Select a stock and click OK Creating an HVAC Part in OTF Mode Connects To In OTF mode there is no need to select a catalog duct The very first time the type of part is selected to be placed a dialog comes up to specify the geometry of the duct then placing the duct continues on The editing of the geometry only S
175. WCS Z axis Vertical e Absolute Ortho Lets you draw orthogonal about the world coordinate system independent of the current UCS The AutoCAD ORTHO command only lets you draw orthogonal to the current UCS e Free End See the HVAC manual for details e End Axis Intersections See the HVAC manual for details e Profile Corners See the HVAC manual for details e Profile Edges See the HVAC manual for details 3 Click OK Invalid Parts If there are any problems creating or drawing a part that part may become invalid Invalid parts are usually displayed hatched as shown below 81 Checks Invalid parts if a valid boundary is not found the part is displayed as an X A part can become invalid for many reasons the boundary Is not closed problems with the geometry or solid creation or corrupt data in the database for example It is not always possible to determine the exact cause The main purpose of invalid parts is to provide a mechanism to delete parts from the database that may otherwise not show up in the drawing Deleting and re creating the part is usually the best solution but there are some common problems that may be fixed These solutions may not be applicable to all part types Check that the piecemark is inside the part s boundary If not move it back inside with the grip points Check that the part s boundary is closed If not adjust the part s boundary objects or add boundary lines to close any gap
176. _FF81 Update Options Z Ignore Up To Date OF Cancel 88 Checks Select the drawings you wish to recreate or update using the ShipConstructor database Optionally you may check the Ignore Up To Date box which will improve the speed of the command by not updating files that do not require updating from the database Click the OK button ShipConstructor will open and update each of the selected drawings When the operation is complete a status message Is displayed along with the option to open a log file containing a detailed breakdown of the status for each selected file UpdateModelAndSystemDrawings 2008 08 28 13 38 00 txt Notepad Fie Edit Format View Help 8 28 2008 1 38 00 PM Log Tile D Projects Projects2008 sc2008Demo LogFi les update Update Model And System Drawings D Projects Projects2008 5c2008Demo weer Update Complete 1 40 21 PM 9 Total 6 Updated 1 Failed 2 Already up to date 0 Not Processed 1 38 04 PM UnitssUL2 structure Frame U1L2FR_107 dw Error File is read only eeeee Successful Updates 1 38 22 PM Units UL2 structure Frame U12FR_108 dwq Success 38 49 PM Units UL2 5tructure Frame U12FR_109 dwg Success 39 07 PM Units UL2 structure Frame U12FR_110 dw Success 39 26 PM Units UL2 structure Frame UL2FR_111 dwg Success 39 45 PM Units UL 2 5tructure Frame UL2FR_112 dw Success 40 03 PM Units UL2 structure Frame U12FR_113 dwc Su
177. a a desea 190 IS COMMGCE DUCTS sas arcs alee wean a aac ge a ce aaa i ea a ea ia ic are eae aaa eae ia 190 CORMECE DUCUS raan inst cer bene e ier oni Sate anes CeuNth oneieh Cael anaes ae nasa oe Aet anak eee 190 MarK All EXEeCe aig M a Ximun Length sisinio a enaA aaa TEN a aE ara 191 CUETO Mamun Lengi ninnaa N AAAA AAAA 191 EXract Center HNE sirrinin aan E ERA A EA 191 Merge To Bent ceker acct atectcust nati ae E E a a 191 Change Connection Accessory Package ewes idisnearaiesiuacsneveinosensieasiluabaeesnsesndinlusousessiotiavulaodeustialsdunlecaitiluininloten ition 192 Transfer parts to another drawing UNIt cssceserssssssssssrsssssssesersseseesesersaesesseseesaeseseeseesacsesensensasesersaesasesensansasensensansess 193 CODY parts another drawing T UNIE 5 sic ists ovaancs a a R RA 193 PAC ODOO aane T E OER 193 Creating SOO ONS eson E O i eden Ds gd creeds 193 COP Illes sane ebeaeauacmenternctendoracouadouacnentoeactenteaccuatedaeaitec vncceadceativatseneaentcenecunteenscengsenssuneieandeatientdentsanedenteunretnaianssnciantness 205 CEI AESS TOP LIU S jasc dtc cimetidine dnc cna bn ded ena bana lacie eta 207 FAVE CASES FESS SC ELON aia a A A anaes an au nedaenanee 208 Add HVACUCS IntersectioNsnnm ean cerca sac aatan eee ta ese tis ieee ee eee eae Sees aa aces ca nas 208 TOJE WSS CSS S CEO RMS Sc seca ss ace acest el hart ae a nee bate eb Sita aie naan asl 209 Erase HVAC UCS IntersectiON isesticrsnestrctcmetawassestwatiencedeinn cs taaa Eai aE RA
178. a adver aaa neni adie adele 481 kabel gt COMer GEG ANCE sruni AA AA AEA A AAA A eRe 481 Label gt Edge Determination MINIMUM ANGle ccsecsssssssssssssssrssrsssseserssrsessesrsassesseseesaeseseeseesasesorsansesersensansesersansates 481 Label gt Label Reset Automatic Settings siveastsnsiiwwssvtitvnigila vvaicilvosunisilvvuateieloluseac alo uiaidnbie i nualexvilvavenseiaunsinduoduabidaleveaillvodealiias 482 BOM Revisions gt New BOM Revision in Current LAYOUL ccssesssssssssrsssssssssrssesssersseseesesseseesasesersatsasersensansesensansates 482 BOM Revisions gt New BOM Revision in All LAYOUS cccecscssessssssssserssessssessrsseseserseesetseserseesassesersaesasersensansesensensates 482 BOM Revisions gt Delete BOM Revision from Current LAYOUL ccccsesssssssesssrsssssserserseseserseesessesersaeseserseesatsesersensates 482 BOM Revisions gt Delete BOM Revision from All Layouts cccessssssserssssssesssrsssssssrsesseseserseesesesersansesersersansesensensates 483 BOM Revisions gt Delete All BOM Revisions from Current Layout ccsssesssssssssrssrssssessrseesasersersaesesersersatsesersersates 483 BOM Revisions gt Delete All BOM Revisions from All Layouts cccsersssssesssrsssssserssrseseserseseserserseesasersensatsesensansates 483 BOM Revisions LISTIB OMB GWIS IONS 2 ec rcestoncuvustocan cuseec elder annesioescunlisodiassdiolcanllsiodiasealedsainleavdietedaod wnlicodeaidodueaudecibucen 483 ACIUISEIECACE SPACING
179. able Supp Unassigned Cable La 0101 m F 0102 Lower Side Assem Po Shell 51 0102 P01 P01 J amp SSI 0102 P01 P02 PF 5SI 0102 P01 501 PO2 POS P04 POS P06 PO 4 rm Show Current Unit Only Product Hierarchy 55 Level PART Selected Parts 1 Production tab gt Labeling panel Menu Global Dimension to Point Command SCDISTANCEFROMPOINT Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Procedure Indicates the distance from selected planes to a given point as a label or a dimension Editing the Text The text displayed for the Global dimensions can be customized to display words or specific keywords The available keywords are e Distance The distance in the current units between the selected point and the plane e Direction To The direction from the point to the plane 495 Appendix Production Command Reference 496 e Direction From The direction from the plane to the point e To Positive if the plane point is greater than the picked point in the given direction otherwise negative e From Negative if the plane point is greater than the picked point in the given direction otherwise positive e UCS Name The name of the UCS being used Global Dimension To Port oppo ead ST oer kark Enter filter text iF uoi E Frame U8 voi _exiay IE voi_Fres _ I voi _FRree WA uo FREF
180. ace only 475 Appendix Production Command Reference 476 led 20M Defirition Wizare Ctcep 2 of 2 Set 30H and lcbeliag opiicrs Tale Oplior olurr w dih 15 C00 m PS uril Lt ictal List Oal isicle Vira lable Wrap cirecton CaCl ahel ptinee 1 View pork sclocked Select y epyk Highigat selected Table Options Specify the physical table properties List Fight Fic height 1 Lireefs ow 6 35 mnlFz writs Yaman namber of res per bable oor C md cales ra miarat lt Beck Row height Default number of lines per row of table Actual height varies with table style and text style Lancel Column width the initial column width of the table You can easily adjust the widths of the columns afterwards Maximum number of rows per table any non zero value will cause additional tables to be populated in the direction specified by the wrap property below All rows generated by the collectors are compiled into the BOM data master set You can control the items listed in the BOM Table by choosing one of the two options List All Lists all items in the compiled master BOM List Only Visible Items displayed in the BOM will be based on objects viewport visibility Items that are visible in any of the viewports within the layout will be listed Object layer visibility and viewport clipping are respected The numbering of items remains consistent across all lay
181. ad the current global display options from the source Approval Document and configure the UI accordingly e Load From File allows you to read in an previous Bound Approval Document Configuration and configure the UI accordingly e Save to File allows you to save the current settings in the UI to a text file that can be used to configure other Bound Approval Document configurations Export Drawings ShipConstructor drawings can be exported to standard AutoCAD drawing format This lets you use the solid model in other applications that do not support the object enabler During export ShipConstructor converts all custom objects to standard AutoCAD objects Structure parts are exported as 3D solids and production geometry In the standard AutoCAD drawing exported solids are on the DrawingName_SOLID layer and production geometry is on the DrawingName_PRODUCTION layer To export ShipConstructor drawings 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator page 311 to open Navigator 2 Select Export in the component list 3 Click New to open the New Export Drawing window Mew Export Drawing File Manne Export Drawings Open Mew Drawing Oo on 4 Entera name 23 Exporting ShipConstructor Drawings select Model Drawings Select Drawings Drawings Enter miter Text WE Tutorial af DS ifr UO z uoz Space Allocation Lancel 5 Click the check box for the drawings to include in the EXPORTED drawing 6 Cl
182. adcaseaaiinceread Oder aared ni tieenaies 36 Delete NSUIAUION OF INSUIATION Typenr NA EROA A 36 SUIS AEN TAS a IS eat zene tent antec tec lala TI E IE 37 i E renee eer E E arr eter et rer A eter rer ater er eee reer eee reer ee eee eee E 37 Cth UN SVC a ricer ted cele ceutical ae tai ed eaten ad edna aul tdennanadat 37 Delete a TOKE SUC eat eces at iaee ed aata ad ces T ead uaineauara aarae aes 37 ACCESSO ata lt o 19 Samet MTEC TMT MEE RTT MRT MERE TRC MTCC MTR T ETM T ERT TRC RTT en CTT men T ERC Tent 38 Create AR ACCESSO TYDE ieee te Sa race aca aa ta ea a ase ag ad ae eel len ae seen een 38 Create an ACCeSSOly Package whecuacrncuibotinaentnbatrinaee tions nahi ihn iinaehd Minin incon MawannaaniMiniioneniaNnationnes 38 Create AM ACCESSO Y cited cs lars atch ces ces iacaa ccetinearshedi ashe A EAER ARREN E ac cea ada uc ad aAa EANA hard ues AAE AARRE ENA Eaa 38 CODY aN ACCESSORY PACK AGG eisai sencctetsesencisevsesaceans oases cat arate ueecaseuaati acest eateal Saat a AA 38 Delete ain Accessory Package xiciasicancasia nc danintnnuan renin tontdniatidaanml anbon nana Naaiionamnlieatelinaedl onbomunancuside 39 Delete an ACCeSsoby or ACCESSONY TYDE iurati eai a eea an aiaa aeaaee aaaeeeaa kaaa eea ERa aia 39 Add or Remove an Accessory To or From an Accessory Package ccesscsesssssssssssssssrsessesssersaseesacsesessesaseesassesareesansesanes 39 Add or Remove an Accessory Package To or From a Spec ecssessssssssssssscsssscerssseesaseesassesacs
183. ahis How E on E indiier E onn E RamnuweL W oio Dolled E o EJ Ilacheroadt E zaw zs show Herroved Sit Shows Previcw Choelec Pars LK Larcel You can use the Modified Part Information window to inspect parts that have changed during this update Click OK to continue the update process The Bill of Materials BOM in this drawing will now be updated Depending on the size of your drawing and the BOM definition this may take some time A window appears asking if you want to re dimension the drawing If you choose No the update process Is now complete If you choose Yes continue with Step 7 The Select Dimension Attributes window appears See also Spool Styles Reference page 519 Distributed Systems Production Drawings oi Select Dimension Attributes Override Spool Style Dimensions Dirnensioning ARS and Penetration Label Style Label Offset 10 mm Label Style ARS label Orientation Dimension Offset 200 mm MS Units Dimension Skyle PIFE SPOOL 10 Warning Update required to recreate 0 mm M5 Units penetrations ext 8 You can choose to use the spool dimensioning style that was used to originally create the spool drawing or you can override the settings Click OK to finish the drawing updating Generate Arrangement Drawings Set Up an Arrangement Drawing Template One of the requirements to create an arrangement drawing Is an arrangement template drawing There must be an arrang
184. alul 244 Labelon Visible Edge OM Off scasese eae ecu caca acess cote veah cast esau econ ican scat asian cus w aaa aah stat ccoves Sadan sein act A 245 Adjacent Part Edge Tolerance orsina Mhasisaiona Maetusaaonaaeiincanhu Maalalddantnibetasaodubienliese 245 Curved Plates in Visible Edge Detection On Off ccccsssssssecsssessssessssessssesessesssecssessseseeseseesesersasersesrsassrsasersasneass 245 Label Reset Automatic Settings jaiisectaiawatiankiwanuninianncdinadinndinniinadtianiinadtinuienudaduanneuiae 245 updatea PROCUCTION DFA WING ienien a duteirtutistinntnainninneinnneden 246 Identifying Drawings that Require Updating ccsecsssssssrsssssssrssrssesesersesessesersaesasseseesaeseserseesatsesersatsasersensatsesensansates 246 Updating ait Ala AGS HSE Drawing siiviaicaswstiatire anus divans AA ROATA AEAT NAANA 247 Update VAIO V WOES cresen E E tec Baie ona adie lea Baan eds 250 BOM REVISIONS acesscenscenatenscensteacaunctensceacten a a antultestatatindentutiedsmiudesatadiecentutied miulieiiatadiedeniutied miutiatde 250 PN VRS OM Newco inno ie ominous lo fs ol loa lee eee ete aaciosoh ao 251 Delete By SAIS IO I arses votive alec EANET tne eae idle NaosNMlatesheoae 252 Delete Al REVISIONS rrian a ERENNERT OET OOO 252 HSCREVISIONS cirai raar E E E aE 252 Inspect a Plotted Assembly DraWwitd cessssssssssssssrsssssssessrsseseesrsersaesessrsaesecsessesaesessesersansesensansassesersansesersersansesersansates 252 Update PFOGUCEON Dra WINO oareni
185. an S TE O ROEA 371 EXDOME Product Hieral Ny enana OAA AAA AANA 371 MPO Product HEr AGIA aeiaai et e E A 371 Part View Load via Extents SCPARTVIEWLOADBYEXTENTS sccscssssrssssssesserssessserseeseeseseeseesassesersaesasersersansesensensates 372 Part View Load via Selected Object Extents SCPARTVIEWLOADBYSELECTEDEXTENTS sessscssserssrsstsssersrseees 372 Part View Load Associated Structure Parts SCPARTVIEWLOADASSOCIATED c cccssecssssserssrsssssserssrsessesersensaees 372 Part View Refresh Part Views in Drawing SCPARTVIEWREFRESH ccssscsscssssrssrssessssrssesessrserseeseserseesatsesersansates 372 Part View Delete All Part Views in Drawing SCPARTVIEWDELETEALL c ccsecsssssssssrssrsserssrssesssersesensesersensates 373 Dano iE COMMANA S inona a a 373 command Tace ENADE iarr EE EEE EEA OEA EA OEA E EN GA 373 Command il re e cee B cys 0 Seamer een rem Meee Cheer cheer hence cee ra es ee ee ee ee ee 373 DEDU TA CEVENO Se conrad ci eens nc cB ah alia adden cesta aD aeBcenaneen eds 373 DEBUG PAC AOI E merino n ree OA E TEETE er 373 De bu Traces Disable nirean aaa a a a a A AAAG 374 Penormance Montor Stairr n NAA E A E EEO 374 Perormance Montor ENO aeriana alta valde eee alc a i ala vl OANE 374 Perrormance Monitor DISDA yoe a AE A EAA E Maina aia iiNet 374 DataMa ager DUMP sinsin tann schenu bon in damn sn sane nonn aban ser inanae abamudn anu asenu itera inbeniis 374 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference 375 H
186. ance Determines how accurate ShipConstructor solids are Solids are used for visual representation interference checking and the calculation of weight and center of gravity Solids are not used for production Set Solid Creation Tolerance to 0 to ensure solids exactly match the production geometry or increase the value to decrease the accuracy of solids and reduce file size Stiffener Marking Type Controls how ShipConstructor marks stiffeners on plates A setting of Extents marks the full length of the stiffener while a setting of Contact marks only the length of the stiffener which contacts the plate Contact Extents a SEII m a SEI m The difference between Contact setting and Extents setting Structure Colors Construction Line Colors Offset Construction Line Color The color of all Offset construction lines Planar Group Hull Trace Color The color of all HullTrace construction lines Planar Group Plane Color The color of all PlanarGroupPlane construction lines User Color The color of all User construction lines Draft Colors Draft Cut Color The color assigned to the _Draft_Cut layer in structure model drawings Draft Mark Color The color assigned to the _Draft_Mark layer in structure model drawings Draft NoProcess Color The color assigned to the _Draft_NoProcess layer in structure model drawings NC Pyros Colors The colors of parts when displayed in a nest drawing or after they have been assigned to a nest This makes
187. anch Fittings Wyes page 133 for details on type specific properties The Component Preview interactively updates based on any changes that you make to the property values 5 Click OK to close the Edit HVAC Stock window You will see your newly created stock in the list If you do not see your stock in the list try turning off all the filters General Properties Stock Name The name of the stock duct You can manually enter a stock name or you can set up a naming convention for HVAC stock parts See Naming Conventions page 40 for details on how to set up a naming convention When a naming convention is used for the HVAC stock the stock name will be pre filled with a name generated using your naming convention You can use this pre filled name or manually type in a new name If you have multiple naming conventions for a specific stock you can change the active naming convention To change the active naming convention 1 Click on the stock name and a menu will appear to the right of the Stock Name field The bolded name is the active naming convention St New Duct Attributes Component Preview General HVAC 20 Gauge Al 1 Overall HVAC Stock Conv Description Measurements Metric Sheet Stock 20 Gauge AL Insulations Finishes Weight Auto calculation e weight per unit length 0 003939 kg Vanes Humber of Yanes Notes Duct Specific E Profile Rectangle 500 mm x 300 mm Pro
188. and choose No Spool from the right click menu The next time you right click on the part no check mark should appear beside the property No Spool OR 4 Inthe model drawing display the AutoCAD Object Property Manager for the part and change the No Spool property OR 5 Click on the Remove No Spool toolbar button in the Distributed Systems toolbar OR 6 Choose SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove No Spool page 399 from the menu To change the display properties of the no spool icon 1 Choose SC HVAC gt HVAC Drawing Options page 410 to open the HVAC Options window in a HVAC drawing See HVAC Drawing Options page 415 In the Display tab change the properties under Show No Spool Click OK 196 HVAC Modeling Add and Remove Spool Breaks Spool breaks let you logically split up your system into distinct spools Connections can be turned into spool breaks with the aid of the Spool Manager or by clicking on the corresponding toolbar icon By default spool breaks are indicated with a disk of rays You can turn on or off the display of spool break indicators and change their size and color To add a spool break to a spool l In the Spool Manager click Add under Spool Break ShipConstructor minimizes the Spool Manager and prompts Please select a Connection to add a Spool Break Select the connection where you want to break the spool Parts that are not connections are temporarily locked to make selecting a connection easie
189. and some of the logic ShipConstructor uses to help you in cases where a particular transform is not behaving as you expect it to Helpful things to know about multi part transforms e The only changes a multi part transform makes to a system are duct translations and the shortening or lengthening of straight segments Fittings are rigid in that they only translate their geometry does not change e Itis best to think of a system as several rigid sections connected by straight segments The notion of these rigid sections is important in understanding how the set of selected grips determine the selected portion of the duct HVAC Modeling system Y The thicker black lines indicate the rigid sections of this system e Selecting a grip on a rigid section effectively selects the entire rigid section that is selecting more than one grip point on the same rigid section has no effect 185 HVAC Modeling 186 HVAC Modeling r Me I P A iy ara 2n Given that a double lateral transition and offset are directly connected here these are equivalent selections Selecting more than one grip point selects all of the connected ductwork between the grips More specifically selecting a set of grips is equivalent to selecting all grips points along all possible paths from every selected grip point to every other selected grip point 187 HVAC Modeling ks P Mn 4 Go a 7 188 HVA
190. angles shown as spikes on the NavAid The current setting Is displayed in the command line in lt angle brackets gt e Plane Changes the NavAid plane to a perpendicular one the plane formed by the Z and X axes of the current UCS effectively cycles the NavAid plane between the 3 axial planes of the current UCS e XRotate YRotate ZRotate These options rotate the NavAid or equivalently the current UCS about the respective axis according to the right hand rule 168 HVAC Modeling World coordinate alignment options The following options are often available at times when you are prompted to pick a point specifying a direction or rotation They are a convenient way to get diagonally oriented runs pointing back along world coordinate axes and planes e Forward Aft Port Starboard Up Down These options automatically provide input equivalent to a point in the respective direction or as close as possible to that direction depending on the situation If you are routing a trimmable elbow it is often the case that trimming it will allow alignment to directions not otherwise possible In these cases options for all possible directions will be available choosing one that requires trimming will result in a prompt asking if you wish to trim the elbow to allow the alignment e Deck align Frame align Long align These options will automatically provide you with an alignment such that the end you are orienting points in a direction
191. anufacturers page 32 for more information on how to set up these properties Rename Sheet Stock To rename a sheet stock 1 Open the Sheet Stock window See Sheet Stocks page 92 2 Double click the sheet stock you want to rename 3 Type anew name and press Enter Import Sheet Stocks You can import sheet stocks from another project or from an XML file that is exported from another project To import sheet stocks 1 Open the Sheet Stock window See Sheet Stocks page 92 2 Click Import to open a File Browser 3 Select a project file PRO or XML file XML 4 Click Open to open the Import Sheet Stock window 93 HVAC Library Setup Import Sheet Stocks from XML Import Sheet Stack Description d El C Projects SC2006Demo Sheet5Stock XML F eg 20 Gauge AL F Hh 20 Gauge Steel 2z Gauge Steel 5 Check the import check boxes of all the sheet stocks you want to import 6 Click OK Export Sheet Stocks You can export sheet stocks to an XML file for example to import into another project or to edit using other software To export sheet stocks 1 Open the Sheet Stock window See Sheet Stocks page 92 2 Check the Export check box for each sheet stock to export 3 Click Export XML to open a file browser 4 Enter a name for the XML file 5 Click Save Delete Sheet Stock To delete a sheet stock 4 Open the Sheet Stock window See Sheet Stocks page 92 5 Select the sheet stock you want to
192. ard Assembly Level Characters 4uto Start Point Beginning Offset TreeLevel P4NEL Standard Assembly Static i 1 Structure AutoNumber Digits 2 Startvalue 1 Increment 1 i Nests Farts Corrugation New Static B X lt Delete _or tmip Default Forrugation Element Details Faceplate value FP Enp DE Default Faceplate Source Assembly Plank Characters Auto Default Plank Stark Point Beginning Plate Offset Use as Name Seed Stiffener TreeLevel Default StiFFener StiFF Ennp Profile Plot Sample Mame 3050 UNIT P4EL 01 Apply OK Cancel Name Conventions Lists all naming conventions grouped by type Active naming conventions are indicated by a checkmark Select a naming convention to display its Elements New Creates a new naming convention within the selected group Delete Deletes the selected naming convention Set Active Makes the selected naming convention the active naming convention for its group Manage Aliases Opens the Alias Manager letting you change the the names of sub categories that are used to organize naming conventions Elements Lists the elements the components that make up a naming convention of the selected naming convention in order Select an element to display its properties below Up Down Arrows Moves the selected element up or down in the list of elements letting you re order them New Opens the Select Type window letting you add an element to the selected na
193. art Above Left At Start Below Right At End Centered At End Above Left At End Below Right The Start means the start of the line Typically this is the left or bottom end of the line Text Orientation The rotation of the text Possible values Parallel to line Perpendicular to line Reverse Parallel to line Reverse Perpendicular to line Parallel is 0 degrees rotation relative to the reference line Perpendicular is 270 degrees rotation relative to the reference line Reverse Parallel is 180 degrees rotation relative to the reference line Reverse Perpendicular is 90 degrees rotation relative to the reference line Text Color The color of the text label and the primary location texts 366 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Import Styles Production tab gt Production Utilities panel SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Import Styles SCRLINESTYLEIMPORT Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Permissions Edit production drawing if in a production drawing or edit model drawing if in model drawing Procedure Import Reference Line Styles page 79 Imports all reference line styles from the selected drawing into the current drawing The command will ask if you want to overwrite existing reference line styles No means styles that already exist in the current drawing will be unchanged Text styles used in the reference line styles that are impo
194. art transform modes To toggle the current transform mode 1 Click the transform mode icon ae on the transform toolbar 181 HVAC Modeling Single Part Transforms Bent ducts The middle grips can be used to translate the entire bent duct without changing its geometry End and corner grips behave similarly for bent ducts The points you initially clicked when creating the bent duct are actually the same points as the end and corner grips Moving a grip to a different location can be thought of as moving one of the input points and recreating the bent duct You can only move a grip point so that the locations of the other grips are not changed oa a ge P ae i aT 1 NJ aa Fittings With fittings middle or center grips can be used for translations Dragging an end grip point will rotate a fitting about one of its connected ends if possible 182 HVAC Modeling i E _ a eh Ee i ia E r Poc I 3 ii f dl l A S lt Multi Part Transforms Multi part transforms let you manipulate large sections of an HVAC system simultaneously Typical uses of multi part transforms are tasks like fine tuning the location of large sections of a duct system or adjusting the location of branches fittings or saddles in the system 183 HVAC Modeling 184 i Experimenting may be the most effective way to familiarize yourself with the behavior of these transforms but it may also be helpful to underst
195. art user defined attributes can be edited through the OPM The ShipConstructor entities have logically categorized properties according to the specific part s properties for easy navigation 206 HVAC Modeling Activate UCS from Parts This is a ShipConstructor Utility function that is accessed through either the SC Utilities gt Activate UCS menu command or through the Utilities toolbar button This utility behaves differently depending on what type of ShipConstructor parts are selected while using the command This document describes the command if you select a Distributed Systems part For information on this command while selecting other ShipConstructor parts please refer to the respective parts documentation To activate a UCS from a part 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Activate UCS or Utilities toolbar x The Activate UCS window appears For more information about the options in this window please see Activate a UCS page 52 tl Activate UCS Activate from list UCS Hame Mew Out of Plane Move Z Activate from Object Add Curent UCS Rename 0 000 0 000 0 000 2 Click on the Activate from Object button 3 Select a Distributed Systems part such as HVAC Note Xref d objects and dimensions are also selectable The Select UCS Options window appears HVAC Modeling _ Select UCS Options Ed UCS Plane Deck Plane LGBH Plane C Pick 3rd Point For Plane UCS Origin Point Part P
196. arts named P 67 P 68 and P 69 and then delete part P 68 the next plate part that you create will have the name P 68 not P 70 Element Details Digits E Start Value 1 Increment 1 Recycle Numbers Yes Element Details List The Details list shows the properties of the element selected in the Elements list Create a Naming Convention Before being able to add edit and remove elements create and change aliases and modify the naming convention itself you must create your naming convention To create a naming convention 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Naming Conventions page 308 to open the Naming Conventions window 3 Inthe Name Conventions pane select the type of naming convention to create Creating a lower level naming convention will override one at a higher level Click New ShipConstructor creates a new entry in the tree with a default name Type a name for the naming convention and press Enter Add elements to the naming convention See Add an Element to a Naming Convention page 44 43 Library Setup 44 Add an Element to a Naming Convention To add an element to a naming convention l 2 3 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Naming Conventions page 308 to open the Naming Conventions window In the Name Conventions pane select the naming convention Any existing elements are displayed in the El
197. ase of viewing These can be treated much the same as modified spools but are usually just undefined to free up the spool name Spool Break A spool break is a break in the logical grouping of a run of ducts This makes it possible for you to spool pieces of a system that are still connected together e Add Adds a spool break When clicked the Spool Manager minimizes and lets you select all the connections that you want a spool break added for e Remove Removes a spool break When clicked the Spool Manager minimizes and lets you select all the connections that you want a spool break removed from Override Colors This is where you can override the color settings while the Spool Manager is open Changing color settings helps you visualize which parts are Undefined Defined Locked No Spool and Modified To override the colors 1 Check the Override Colors check box 2 Select a category from the drop down list For example select Modified 3 Click on the color picker directly below the drop down list and select a color For example if you selected Modified in the previous step the color selected here will change the color of all parts that are in the Modified Spools category 4 Repeat Steps 2 and 3 for all the categories you want to override colors for View When any of these options are checked if you double click on a spool an undefined spool group or any part the view will change according to the options checked an
198. ate a new catalog for your grouping needs To create a catalog 1 Open the Edit HVAC Catalogs window See Catalogs page 142 Click New Cat to create a new catalog 2 3 Entera name for the catalog and press Enter 4 Click OK to close the Edit HVAC Catalogs window Import Catalogs You can import catalogs from another project or from an XML file that is exported from another project To import catalogs Open the Edit HVAC Catalogs window See Catalogs page 142 Click Import to open a File Browser Select a project file PRO or XML file XML Click Open to open the Import HVAC Catalogs window Check the import check boxes of all the catalogs you want to import Click OK oY ee ee a a 142 HVAC Library Setup Export Catalogs You can export catalogs to an XML file for example to import into another project or to edit using other software To export catalogs Open the Edit HVAC Catalogs window See Catalogs page 142 Check the Export check boxes for the catalogs that you want to export Click Export XML to open a File Browser Enter a name for the XML file Click Save Click OK to close the Edit HVAC Catalogs window a a ee i EE Assign Stocks to a Catalog To assign stock to a catalog 1 Open the HVAC Stocks window See Stocks page 102 2 Select the stock or stocks to assign to a catalog 3 Click Edit Catalog Assign to open the Edit Catalog Assignments window 4 Check the check boxes for the cata
199. ation faceplate and plank Part types can be aliases using the Naming Convention Alias Manager Planar Group Model Drawing Planar Group Model Drawing returns the planar group model drawing that the structure part is modeled in Plate Stock Length Plate Stock Length returns the length of the plate stock item that the structure part is made from Plate Stock Width Plate Stock Width returns the width of the plate stock item that the structure part is made from Pressure Rating Pressure Rating returns the pressure rating of the pipe stock Profile Plot Drawing Profile Plot Drawing returns the profile plot drawing name of profile nests Project Project returns the name of the ShipConstructor project Remnant Remnant returns the name of the remnant that the plate nest was cut from Sheet Stock Sheet Stock returns the name of the sheet stock that the HVAC stock is made from Stock Stock returns the name of the stock that the part is made from System System returns the spec level system level or branch level system name of the system of your entity Which level is returned depends on your selection in the Tree Level drop down list Note If the entity is in a system with a level higher than the selected system tree level nothing is returned for that element Thickness Thickness returns the thickness of the plate stock that the plate part is made from User Defined Attributes User defined attributes let you define custom att
200. ation about ArcSegmentType 4 ieee da Arc segment information zeC Radius Centerline radi mm sc Bend ng Ill Bend angle de zsc ArcLeng Centerline arc Schema Arc segment node Formatted StraightSeqgmentType Straight segment information Schema Straight segment node H attributes Segment number Zero based always starts 0 zsc Outerl Distance Fro corner inter end tangent From corner zec InnerL Straight por This form of XML is different than the Raw format in that the information is flattened and therefore imports easier into programs such Microsoft Excel The data is also converted into the destination units of choice by editing a settings XML file The schema file is located in the install directory in the following path XMLSchemas Output Piping SC _PipeBendingData_FlattenedV2011 1 xsd The formatted xml is the result of an XSLT transformation that is applied by MappingSC PipeBendingData FlattenedV2011_ 1 xslt and the input file SC_PipeBendingData_ FormattingV2011 1 xml The following shows the schema diagram for the Formatted flattened file Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Excel Import The information from the flattened file can be imported into Excel easily by using the Data import feature The following example uses Excel 2007 to import a sample flattened file into Excel 505 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production
201. awing 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Model Link page 338 to open the MLink Manager une MiLink Manager Enter Her text Lock MLink Layers ii u01 Lock Structure New MLinks HYAC All MLinks 9 Pipe E LJ Equipment Electrical Supports J Current Unit Only 0 Hidden MLinks 3 Check Visible Uncheck All Reload All Refs Drawings 2 Select the drawings to insert link into the current drawing 3 Click OK Tip After inserting linking a drawing into another drawing you can use AutoCAD s XCLIP command to hide parts of the linked drawing For details see xclip in AutoCAD Help To reload mlinked drawings 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Model Link page 338 to open the MLink Manager 2 Click Reload To remove an mlinked drawing 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Model Link page 338 to open the MLink Manager 2 Remove the checkmark from the drawings to remove the drawing from the current mlinked drawing Tip To remove all mlinked drawings click Uncheck All 3 Click OK Configuring Viewport Dependant Display Options Viewports in ShipConstructor can be configured with a subset of the options available globally These selections will only show inside the specified viewport This can be done inside of a Template or a production drawing Configuration changes made to the Viewport Display Options will override those same settings in the global display options Each option
202. awing files A locked file is set as read only e Drawing name Right click on the drawing name to display a menu of commands e User The name of the user who currently has the drawing open as read write e Last Date Modified The date that the drawing was last modified You may need to scroll across or resize Navigator to see this information e Preview The Preview is a preview image of the drawing selected in the Drawing List e Local Only Drawing icon E The drawing exists on the local file system and not on the server e Database Only Drawing icon J The drawing exists on the server and not on the local file system Sometimes a preview image does not appear If ShipConstructor has automatically modified a drawing for example if you make a change in one drawing ShipConstructor may automatically update other drawings a preview image does not appear until the next time you open and save the drawing Page The Page buttons let you perform functions related to the selected item in the Drawing List The following items are found on all pages Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 314 e Read Only If this is turned on when you open a drawing you cannot modify and save the drawing If Read Only is turned off when you open a drawing you can modify and save the drawing e Close Current If this is turned on when you open a drawing ShipConstructor will automatically close the current drawing This option is only availa
203. awings Layer n om Cater ar paor enrar rrrer r arr par certo Ferer i s A A a Structure gF E Deck E EF aa a Pipe E EF P Con Finish The last page of the arrangement drawing creation wizard lets you choose which drawings non ShipConstructor geometry will obtained from and the layers to put them on The drawings presented in this tree are computed based on the sources you have selected during Step 3 of the arrangement drawing creation process The layer column behaves similar to that of the previous step Note Any geometry imported using this mechanism has a special tag attached to it for the purpose of identifying it When the drawing is updated only the non ShipConstructor entities brought into the drawing with this process are updated Any custom geometry you manually add to the arrangement drawing will be unaffected during a drawing update Getting Started with Production Create Arrangement ntar a unique filename tar the arrangement drawing Te d Geometry Template Drawing Label Styles elect a previously Table Styles made arrangement drawing template Ps ra Production Objects Define the sources to get ShipConstructor parts from and the destination layers to place them for each source Layers can be chosen from a list which Included the layers found in the selected template drawing or entered as text Choose which drawings you wish to import AutoCAD geometry fram and the
204. awings to be flagged as out of date 139 HVAC Library Setup Stock Usage This powerful feature lets you easily find all part instances that are using a certain stock In addition to creating a report where the stock is used you can interactively open drawings and inspect the parts using the selected stock To check stock usage 1 Open the HVAC Stocks window See Stocks page 102 2 Select a stock that is in use 3 Click Stock Usage The Drawings using stock window appears sc Drawings using stock Round Duct 450mm Sele Drawings Instances ugi 2K02 dwg LOWER ESHAUST MANIFOLD diag i Total Instances 406 Open Drawing Create Log 4 All drawings that contain a part using this stock are listed 5 Select a drawing node and double click it or click the Open Drawing button to open the drawing The Parts using stock window appears 140 HVAC Library Setup sc Parts using stock Round Duct 450mm M Elx Instance Name Behaviour Round Duct 450mm 028 ete 450mm 031 Highlight 450mm 824 a mm 5 450mm 826 Zoom 450 roam 82 Total Instances 6 Delete Partis 6 You can inspect the parts in the drawing by clicking on the part in the window Click OK to close the drawing and return to the Drawings using stock window To create a stock usage log 1 Open the Stock Usage window 2 Click Create Log A log file summarizing where the stock is used will be created and displayed The log f
205. before cutting to stock length C Never cut bo stock Length Creating warning labels for tems LI exceeding stock length on drawing save Stock Length Enforcement Automatically cut stock to length When selected stock length is enforced by automatically cutting the stock to the maximum length whenever a duct is modified Ask before cutting to stock length When selected when maximum stock length has been exceeded you will be prompted to cut the stock length Never cut to stock length When selected will never cut the duct if the maximum length has been exceeded Create warning labels for items exceeding stock length on drawing save When checked labels will be displayed on ducts that are greater than their max length unless the Don t Show Max Length Warning is set on the part Select Stock Window Reference Select Stock Window Reference 429 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference The Select Stock window appears while not in On The Fly mode when e Trying to insert a part of a certain type for the first time e You select S while inserting a duct e Trying to connect one duct to another and the duct to which you are trying to connect cannot connect This can happen if you have not defined a connection for the type of ends you are trying to connect Heating Cooling Main Deck Port IE Ae Stack Name Description End iProfile End iEndTrestme End2Profile End2EndTrestme Sheetstock Pray DU 10 AL 2 Circular 10
206. ble when you are working in multiple document interface MDI mode ShipConstructor has been optimized for single drawing compatibility mode SDI so we recommend using SDI mode To switch between MDI mode and SDI mode type SDI at the AutoCAD command line Use 1 for SDI Other items are different for each page see below Project Page shipConstructor Mavigator Tutorial U01 Project Uo FAe Projects S514 Tutorial Tutorial 14_A1 pro Change Project wE Structure Unit User Permissions S things Support 4 Pipe Spool Be HYAC 5 pool E Support Construction d Equipment 5 Electrical vee Ba Product Hierarchy al Interference ie Weld Management Assembly W Composite Approval l Esport Z Hull E Read Only space Allocation s Mew Urik Reload DB Revisions Profile Flot The Project page lets you create open and modify unit drawings and perform project related functions Change Project Opens the Register Project window letting you switch to another project User Permissions Opens the User Permissions window See General gt User Permissions page 302 Settings Opens the Project Settings window See General gt Project Settings page 297 Open Opens the selected unit drawing New Unit Adds a unit to the current project See Create Units page 59 for details Reload DB Reloads the settings from the project database into ShipConstructor Use Reload DB whene
207. bly For more information on how to set up these properties see the Naming Conventions section in the Structure manual Note If the selected level of database item is lower than the actual parts level no database item will be generated For example if you select an Assembly level of Panel but your spool is joined to the Unit level an empty string appears for that element in the generated spool name A check mark appears beside the naming convention in the Naming Conventions tree indicating that it is the active naming convention for that category Set an Active Naming Convention You can have several spool naming conventions however only one spool naming convention can be the active naming convention that ShipConstructor uses To set a naming convention active 1 Inthe Naming Convention window select the naming convention that you want to be active 2 Click Set Active Set Up a Spool Template Drawing One of the requirements to create a spool drawing is a spool template drawing There must be a spool template defined for the type of spool drawing you want to create For example if you want to create an HVAC spool drawing you must have an HVAC Spool Template defined To create a spool template drawing 1 Open Navigator choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator 280 Distributed Systems Production Drawings Navigate to the Templates directory Select the HVACSpool folder and click New HVACSpool OR Select the PipeSpool fol
208. bly XYZ could refer to a panel a unit or other item Next you decide which specific stages to use for each specific unit which specific assemblies to use for each specific Stage and so on See Set Up Assemblies page 70 For example you may want to divide unit U12 into five stages COLDOUTFIT HOTOUTFIT HVAC PIPING and STRUCTURE At the lowest level you assign individual parts to assemblies See Assign Parts Spools or Assemblies to Assemblies page 72 Obviously you cannot perform this step in the product hierarchy process until you have actually created your parts When assigning parts to assemblies it is helpful to use a product hierarchy drawing so you can see all parts within a unit See Setting up Multiple Product Hierarchies page 61 Finally you must decide on a time schedule for each assembly indicating when it will be completed Setting Up Multiple Product Hierarchies You can set up multiple hierarchies within a project For example in addition to the build strategy used for assembly you may want to create a separate hierarchy used for a SWBS breakdown another for weight quality control and analysis and a third for paint planning To create a new product hierarchy 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Product Hierarchy page 341 61 Library Setup 62 Tools Options Descriptionl o F PROJECT i U01 ce Unspooled Pipe mfi F Unspooled Hvac m UnassignedPipe Unassigned HVAC EW
209. bly you want to edit and choose Tools gt Assembly gt Edit This option is also available if you right click on the assembly The Edit Assembly window appears EJ Edit Assembly Praperhie User Detirnec Attribite Name I Reset Humber 1 J Interval Attribute Erakled Required value Cescriptonz No Levels ETACE Z STAGE PIFIMG cy STEM ERANLA GROUP Finizhes Finishe SSlechec Finizhes OF Cancel 2 Change the options 3 Click OK 71 Library Setup 72 Delete an Assembly To delete an assembly 1 Inthe Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 select the assemblies you want to delete 2 Choose Tools gt Assembly gt Delete ShipConstructor deletes the assemblies If the assembly contains parts ShipConstructor re assigns the parts to the parent of the deleted assembly If the assembly contains sub assemblies ShipConstructor deletes the sub assemblies Change the Level of an Assembly You may want to change the level of an assembly if you are adding a new assembly level but have already created some assemblies and need to move them up or down within the product hierarchy If an assembly has the level directly below the level of its parent and its level is the level directly above the level of its children its level cannot be changed To change the level of an assembly 1 Inthe Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 select the assembli
210. briictar ShipConstructor Shin anster rkar Description C Jta Citas toart ENEE iwar feet 3050 002 3400 2050 U02 D3400 J030 W02 03400 3050 Ud2 D3400 3050 Ud2 D3400 3050 Ud2 D3400 3050 Ud2 D3400 3050 Ud2 D3400 3050 Ud2 D3400 S030 W02 Db5400 3050 Ud2 D3400 30RA ls4nn By default selecting the Search button without changing any options shows all revisions to the project but the number of revisions can be quite large Various options are given for restricting the number of retrieved revisions e Category The category of revisions Category column from different areas of ShipConstructor At least one category needs to be selected e Revision Type The type of revision Type column At least one type needs to be selected Right click options allow you to select all or select none e From and To Optional Provides a starting and ending date for revision date Date column To provide a date select the check box and select the date area e Date Sort Order Determines the date sort direction Descending present to past order Ascending past to present order e Object Optional The object the revision pertains to e User Name Optional The username of the person making the change e Rows Per Page Determines how many revisions to retrieve per page Revisions are returned in pages since the number of revisions can be quite large If the number of revisions exceeds the rows per page
211. bute values For more information see User Defined Attributes page 49 68 Library Setup 4 Assernbhy User Defined Attributes In Use Available Attributes Description In Use Attributes Required Def ault a O O OO OOO OOOO O O O O E Commercial Length PRIMARY E Commercial Width j Description 1 No Description Assembly Description j Description Ne Description Assembly Description i Weight Strategy Model Number Description 1 No Order Number Description Mo E Phase From Equipmentilass E Power From Equipmentclass EJ Remark Short dese E Signal Type From Equipment class Tag Nurnber Voltage Fram EquipmentClass y ts Usage Log Ik Cancel To create a new user defined attribute l 2 3 4 5 From the Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 menu select Tools gt User Defined Attributes Click New Enter a name for the attribute and press Enter Optionally add a description Click OK to close the User Defined Attributes window To assign an user defined attribute to a Product Hierarchy l From the Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 menu select Tools gt User Defined Attributes Select the attribute on the left side of the window Select a product hierarchy on the right side of the window Click the right arrow button D to assign The attribute is now listed under the product hierarchy
212. cal a Za Product Hierarchy ofa Interference oi Weld Management Assembly W Composite Read Only Approval Esport Output cow ae Mest E Profile Plot Unnested Parts Open Permissions Structure gt Plate Nest gt Edit Opens the selected plate nest drawing Permissions Structure gt Plate Nest gt Edit Z OD Creates a new plate nest drawing Unnested Parts List all un nested parts within an assembly See SC Plate Nest gt Part gt List Un nested Parts in Structure manual Right Click Menu Lets you open rename or delete the selected plate nest drawing or folder or create a new plate nest drawing or folder Open New Rename Delete New New Folder New Rename Delete New Folder Permissions Structure gt Plate Nest gt Edit Creates a new folder as a subfolder of the plate nest root folder Subfolders of these folders are not allowed 335 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Rename Permissions Structure gt Plate Nest gt Edit Renames the selected plate nest drawing or folder Delete Permissions Structure gt Plate Nest gt Edit Deletes the selected plate nest drawing or folder Profile Plot Page The Profile Plot page lets you create open and modify profile plot drawings See Profile Plots in Structure manual shipConstructor Mavigator Tutorial UDI Drawing Last Modified Date Preview Fs Plats a 423 2013 10 57 17 AM
213. cations listed below will not be performed Check Unit will perform the following checks e Makes sure the 3D Unit drawing file exists If the 3D Unit drawing does not exist then an empty 3D Unit drawing will be created e Checks to see if ShipConstructor specific drawing information exists in drawing If the unit drawing does not have this drawing information or it is corrupt ShipConstructor will create or fix the drawing information e Calls the Planar Group Check for all planar group model drawings in the unit e Checks that all markings lie within the boundaries of the part that they are associated with If any part of a mark symbol or text lies outside the part boundary it will be noted in the generated log file e Checks that the template drawings for Assembly Pipe HVAC Equipment Arrangement and Pipe HVAC Spool drawings exist and are registered to the project Repair Errors will register any files not already registered and missing drawing files will be removed Note Unlike ShipConstructor 2005 checking a unit does not xref all the planar group model drawings into the 3D Unit drawing ShipConstructor gt Check gt Check Templates SC Utilities tab gt Check panel ShipConstructor gt Check gt Check Templates SCCHECKTEMPLATES Permissions Structure gt Modeling Checks that all registered drawings exist and that all files in the Template folders are registered Repair Errors will create missing drawings or reg
214. ccess aww Already Up To Date 1 38 04 PM Units U12 5tructure Frame U12FR_106 dw File is alreay up to date 1 40 03 PM UnitssUL2 structure Frame UL2FR_114 dw File is alreay up to date lt u 2 Note You can also find the log file in the LogFiles folder contained in your project s main folder 89 HVAC Library Setup HVAC Library Setup Each project contains various libraries that hold the stocks materials and other entities that you can use in the project Before you begin work on a project you must set up these project libraries You can also import project libraries from another project or from an XML file that you have exported from another project This manual describes how to set up HVAC libraries The Structure Pipe and Equipment and Penetrations manuals explain in detail how to set up libraries for structure piping and equipment and penetrations Overview The following diagram shows how the various items defined in the library combine to create a single HVAC stock Once the stock has been created you can organize it by assigning it to multiple specs and catalogs 91 HVAC Library Setup 2D Line mode icon Material the insulation is made out of Used when calculating a ducts went End Treatment type Type Flange Male Female or l lation Catalog Plain Style Bar Plain or Slip on Detines the 30 peanetry End Treatment Alias A name that your company uses to identify this
215. censee identifies to SSI through fixes or workarounds free of charge If SSI determines that it is unable to make the Licensed Materials perform substantially as warranted Licensee may terminate the License and receive a refund of a portion of the License Fees paid to date 17 WARRANTY EXCLUSIONS THE LIMITED WARRANTY CONTAINED IN SECTION 15 IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ALL OTHER CONDITIONS WARRANTIES AND REPRESENTATIONS EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ARE EXCLUDED INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO CONDITIONS REPRESENTATIONS AND WARRANTIES RELATING TO MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE SSI DOES NOT WARRANT THAT THE LICENSED MATERIALS ARE COMPLETELY ERROR FREE OR THAT ITS OPERATION WILL BE CONTINUOUS AND UNINTERRUPTED 363338 2013 07 18 Maintenance Services Licensee may elect to obtain maintenance support and upgrade services from SSI in accordance with and subject to the terms of SSI s standard Subscription Agreement 19 Loss of Data SSI shall not be responsible for any loss of or damage to files or data caused by the Licensed Materials or be required to restore or rebuild files or data Licensee shall implementing adequate backup procedures to avoid any loss of files and data 20 Modifications SSI may from time to time provide the Licensee with revisions to the Licensed Materials the Revised Licensed Materials The Licensee shall test any external applications using the revised API
216. cified Getting Started with Production 244 To find what label style it is using go to Manager gt General gt Production Output gt Bill of Materials Select the BOM definition used to create the table If the collector has a label style then it will be that style If it is lt none gt then the label style will be the BOMs label style Select a part to label 3 Select a part to label The selected point will be the position where the arrow points to Specify label position 1 seg Multi segment 4 Specify label position 1 seg indicates that the label style has the Num Segments value of 1 If your label style has more than one segment then you will be prompted to pick the remaining segment points If you type in an M you are permitted to select more leader points than the style has Press Enter will finish the Multi segment label mode Select a pare Eo Label Copy 5 After you create the first label you can switch to Copy Label mode by typing in C In this mode you can continue to label parts with only having to select the part and not the label position The label geometry will be the same as the previous label Select part to copy label lAbel You can switch back to manual label mode by typing A Press Esc at anytime will end the labeling Copy Label Lets you create labels that are copies of an existing label with the contents changed to reflect the first BOM column of the selected part The copied
217. ck Locks or unlocks the selected HVAC spool and its drawing Model Drawing Right Click Menu Open Lock Unlock Spools Lock Unlock Spools Permissions HVAC gt Spools gt HVAC Spools Lock Unlock Locks or unlocks all the approved HVAC spools and their drawings in the selected HVAC model drawing Support Construction Page The Support Construction page lets you create open and modify support construction drawings See the Pipe manual for details Open Permissions Distributed Systems Supports gt Construction Drawings Edit Opens the selected support construction drawing New Permissions Distributed Systems Supports gt Construction Drawings Edit Creates a new support construction drawing Show Out of Date Shows a A next to each support construction drawing that has parts in it that have changed or parts that have been added or removed Right Click Menu Lets you open reattach rename or delete the selected support construction drawing or create a new Support construction drawing Open New Rename Delete Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Reattach New Rename Delete Reattach Permissions Distributed Systems Supports gt Construction Drawings Edit Reattaches an existing drawing to a registered support construction drawing that has its drawing file missing The selected drawing is checked to ensure it is a Support construction drawing Rename Permissions
218. ck OK See Insulation Reference page 431 for more details View Spool History Spool history is created for every spool Before saving a system model drawing the spool history is updated based on the actions you perform in the drawing so you can keep track of what you have done before you save After the drawing Is Saved and re opened the spool history changes to reflect the time when your drawing was saved For example if you modify the spool a few times before saving the drawing the spool history will show each modification after saving and re opening the spool history will show one modification at the time the drawing Is saved To view spool history 1 Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 2 Select the spool 3 Make sure the properties section of the Spool Manager is open See Spool Manager Reference page 510 4 Click LJ beside the revision history The Spool Revision History window appears Note The Spool Revision History window will not appear if the spool has just been created If a spool has just been created the word Created will appear in the Revision History row in the Properties section of the Spool Manager 204 HVAC Modeling f Spool Revision History Revision Date Revision Type Revision Description Modified Updated H Spool Main System 1 6 5 2006 6 04 AM Modified Added Part 100 maxlen test 3 6 5 2006 6 04 AM Modified 4dded Part 100 maxlen test 4 6 5 2006 6 04 AM Modified Adde
219. ck items and other rules or conventions ShipConstructor m Structure mock Catalog oD ES uter el Sluck Proper iz SRA Mela evecetsd Pate insane s a a e oaee anaoa asian rero EH F Protile IL SUs Abe 4 AL 40x 4 Steel rade 4 3 SUU AME CI Ep ao h E F ange L6 Us Us ELs 3U E steel rrada O Loker 244 z SUJ AME LIW Edt Sh i AC Jak ri L fhe SUF _ ek SUK steel Grads A E woke 1 z aUu AME LN Ba Shapes DB tod L 80x 40x 6 _ EC 40x Steel Grada A E Cok E 300 AME EN Furr tapes ar eared L 80x 50x 6 EC Stee Steel Grads A E Cok 74 z 300 AME CIN ne aaa os L100 50x 6 L00 EC 6 Steel Grads A E Cok 201 z 200 AME CIN ele iauwahpe L100 65x 7 LODs Ex 7 Steel Grads A i cok 112 z 300 AME CIN EF T Liat 80222 L20 ECx12 Steel Grada A E co acz z 300 AME CIN EATdt Monufac Mery erate Maetala DAP Sarialed 4 ide DAP s gt icated Tas 2 i S arated uv HBB Pla bk WI F OE Li Workspace and Tools Most ShipConstructor tools are available within AutoCAD from special menus and toolbars or by typing commands in the command line Li ee oe T j T Par Qe ji me kei i l he jeer Hea eee eet m ber iy 7 ee ee ee ee O a en ee ee rac ee fe oe a ak FEN DE E Bice oe oe ba am ii pa z ShipConstructor Menus aie amp a A oh rE a p L BAJTA ee ERAAI Sh hipConstructor Toolbars hL ERP amp Workspace ref ft FR A aR LUSS PS te eS gagad Uyi WEAEGCR Ee F408 FHF Ir
220. ct to a project the AutoCAD auto save settings are automatically set to be enabled using a default time of 10 minutes between saves After you have connected to a project you may turn off the auto save in the AutoCAD options but next time you connect it will be re enabled Note You may enable or disable AutoCAD s automatic save and specify a time after which an auto save will be triggered in the Open and Save tab of the AutoCAD Options window Tools gt Options menu Bill Of Materials gt N A Text When a field in the BOM table is not applicable for a part the field contains the specified text Bill Of Materials gt Varies Text When a row in the BOM table is a grouping of items and the data for the items is different for a field the field contains the specified text Display Length Decimal Places Indicates the precision of length values displayed in the user interface Display Length in ft in 1 16 format Length measurements displayed in the user interface are displayed ina standard feet inches and inch fractions format or in decimal format Display Length Units Indicates the units of length values displayed in the user interface Display Weight Decimal Places Indicates the precision of weight values displayed in the user interface Display Weight Units Indicates the units of weight values displayed in the user interface Minimum Interference Volume The minimum volume that will result in an interference T
221. ctor the Register Project window appears If you currently have a project open Navigator appears Select the project from the component list for example SC2009Demo and click Change Project to open the Register Project window Getting Started Register Project WW SHIPCONSTRUCTOR Projects Ea P Projects S51 Demo_Project pro Q20 14Demo pro D Project Project pro Login Password HEH E Use Windows Authentication 2 Select the project from the list or click Browse to locate a project file A ShipConstructor project file has a pro extension 3 Enter your User name and Password Note For the project templates the User name is ShipConstructor and the Password is shipcon If you do not have a user account ask your system administrator to set one up or see User Accounts in the Project Management manual for details 4 Click Open Note If this is the first time you open a project after starting ShipConstructor the Licensing window appears See Get Licenses page 11 for details Get Licenses You can turn on and off licenses to enable or disable ShipConstructor modules You can purchase ShipConstructor modules separately at various levels based on number of parts You can also use a combination of local locks located on your computer and network locks located on a network accessible computer For details on setting up licenses see the Installation Guide To turn on or off licenses 1 Choose Sh
222. ctor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Project Settings page 297 to open the Project Settings window 3 Click Export XML to open a File Browser 4 Enter a name for the XML file 5 Click Save User Permissions See the Project Management manual for details on how to use User Permissions ShipConstructor is designed to be used by a team of people Each company will have different types of people so we will present a typical case Structure Team Roles Project Manager e Schedules and plans the project e Organizes team e Corresponds with client Structural Designer e Approves contract drawings e Creates structural detail design Structural Lead e Ensures that standards are maintained e Is responsible for the model Build Strategist e Develops the build strategy for the project e Coordinates scheduling Modeler e Models all structure and generates parts Nester e Creates nest and nests parts e Tracks stock Production Detailer e Details assembly drawings CAD Administrator e Creates users and maintains databases e Manages communication about issues with ShipConstructor Software Inc and applies patches 29 Library Setup People in the team may have more than one of these roles The different roles in the project require different permissions We recommend that you set up permission groups for each role Materials Each part is fabricated from a specific type of material for example A
223. d SF SPL ON LIC ee Drawings Open a Drawing To open a drawing 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator page 311 to open Navigator Note To open a drawing from a unit other than the current unit select the project at the top of the component list then select the unit in the Unit list 2 Select the type of drawing in the component list for example Structure or Pipe Note To open a unit drawing select the unit name in the component list for example U12 3 Select the drawing in the drawing list Note To open the drawing in read only mode click on the Read Only check box 4 Click Open Create a Drawing To create a drawing Note The following procedure describes how to create drawings in general For information on creating specific types of drawing see the appropriate section of this manual 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator page 311 to open Navigator Note To create a drawing for a unit other than the current unit select the project at the top of the component list for example SC2009Demo then select the unit in the Unit list 2 Select the type of drawing in the component list for example Structure or Pipe Note If the drawing list contains folders select the folder for the sub type of drawing 3 Click New Note The New button label may be different for different drawing types for example New Piping New Arrangement Create or Create Spool Dwg The New Drawing window appears 4
224. d Part 100 maxlen test 5 6 5 2006 7 24 AM Modified Updated H Spool Main System 1 S2006 7 22 AM Modified Added Part 100 maxlen test 2 S2006 7 22 AM Approved Approved Static 3 6 5 2006 7 22 AM Modified created Static 3 Click OK to close the window OPM The Object Properties Manager OPM in AutoCAD is a very powerful tool when used with ShipConstructor entities Each ShipConstructor entity has properties which can be seen in the OPM many of which can be modified directly through the OPM without running separate commands In addition to the general OPM properties that all AutoCAD entities shared ShipConstructor adds Solid LineType and Solid LineWeight These properties allow you to set the line type and line weight of the solid separately from the centerline The centerline line type and line weight will use the default LineType and LineWeight properties As with all AutoCAD entity properties that aren t ShipConstructor properties they will not transfer between drawings such as when creating a production drawing or regenerating a model drawing from the database HVAC Modeling PROPERTIES l In this example the properties with the white background are the properties which are editable There are general properties as well as part specific properties User defined attributes that are assigned to the stock or part can be seen here The p
225. d Radius The centerline radius of the bend Bend Angle The angle of the bend Bending and Location Tables Example The bent pipe in the following image produces the tables that follow Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference AY 900 La AY 45 0 R Semm 5 SSM mi AY 90 0 R amm 5 7mm lem alphanumeric Stock Mame 509 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Ea Lu Position Location LI04 1000 2164 0116541659 WINi0 1698 1698 Lod 1000 45 U01165 3367 WIN10 1698 3698 Spool Manager Reference Spool Manager dynamically refreshes If you have the Spool Manager open while modeling and you add a part to the drawing it appears in the Spool Manager as soon as you finish adding it If you are in an HVAC drawing choosing SC HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Manager opens the HVAC Spool Manager If you are in a Pipe drawing choosing SC Pipe gt Spools gt Spool Manager opens the Pipe Spool Manager You must save the drawing first in order to open the spool manager Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference fF Pipe Spool Manager ERIA LA Undefined Spools 7 Spool Break Undefined Spooll 7 parts amp add Undefined Spool 2 parts Undefined Spool3 2 parts Undefined Spoold 2 parts Undefined Spoal5 7 parts Undefined Spool6 2 parts Undefined Spool 2 parts i Delis Spools 118 Override Colors 7 k 3050 641 B6L01 001 17 part K Remove Und
226. d Toolpath 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Toolpath page 359 Select objects or GAptol 0 1 2 Window select all the objects It does not matter if you select objects that are not part of the toolpath The command only connects objects with no gaps or a gap less than the GAptol Press Enter The result of the toolpath operation appears in an information window Click OK Dihedral Angle Use the Dihedral Angle command to determine the angle between two non parallel planar objects The dihedral angle between two planes Is the angle between their two normal unit vectors You can see the dihedral angle of two planes by looking at the planes along their intersection line Find the Dihedral Angle between Two Planar Objects 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Dihedral Angle page 360 Note ShipConstructor creates the dimension style SCON_DihedralAngle for displaying dihedral angles in the drawing 2 Select the two objects you want to determine the dihedral angle for 3 Press Enter Library Setup 4 ShipConstructor displays the four possible dihedral angles as arcs Select the dihedral angle that you want to display in the drawing by clicking on its arc Convert a 3D Object to a 2D Object You can convert a 3D object to a 2D object on the XY plane of the current UCS When you do so ShipConstructor removes the Z component of the object For example a circle that is not parallel to the current UCS is converted to an elliptical polyline This
227. d or remove sources from this arrangement drawing use the check boxes in the source trees You may add any number of sources to one drawing The Layers column works the same here as it does for creation of an arrangement drawing except that parts for each source that are already in the arrangement drawing will remain on their current layer 275 Getting Started with Production Update Arrangement Drawing Wizard Step 2 of 2 Please select all the drawings From which you wish bo import QutoC4D geometry and the layers to place them on Drawings Layer Enter Aker text Enter Fifer faxt HOi Structure Structure Frame M EA Ho1rR_o3 HOLFR 03 M EA Ho1rR_o7 HOLFR OF E EF H01FR_02 HOLFR_D2 E EF HO1FR_o1 HIFR Ot D EF H0iFR_08 HOLFR_ D8 E EF HO1FR_o9 HOLFR 19 E EA Ho1FR_o4 HOLFR 04 E EA Ho1FR_oo HOLFR O0 F EA Ho1FR_os HOFER 05 E EF H01FR_06 HO1FR_D6 LngBhd LngBhd BR HoiLNG 500 HOILNG_500 The second page of the wizard shows you all drawings that ShipConstructor entities will be obtained from to create the arrangement drawing If you want to also bring in non ShipConstructor geometry such as lines and solids from those drawings select them here Any drawings that you have already obtained non ShipConstructor entities from will be pre selected The Layers column behaves similar to that of the previous step Note While updating non ShipConstructor entities only entities that were brought into the drawing with this proc
228. d tothem Select a layer fo each conflict to resolve this Layer Contlicts Layers 641 BLO7 641_Bilge and ballast 641 604 64 1 BLO4 641_ Bilge and ballast a 64 1 BLO3 641_ Bilge and ballast 64 1 BLOS 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLO6 641_ Bilge and ballast 64 1 BLO8 641_ Bilge and ballast Use for all 641 BLO2 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLO1 641_ Bilge and ballast Wie Center Highlight F Zoom The window will appear when creating or updating production drawings where layers are defined with sources if there are any parts with multiple source layers defined The list labeled Layer Conflicts shows all the sources that contain conflicted parts and a status icon for each conflict You can select any of the conflict in this list and depending on the View options the conflicted parts from the selected conflict will be highlighted centered and zoomed to The list labeled Layers shows the possible layers for the currently selected conflict on the Layer Conflicts list The Use for all button will assign the checked layer in the Layers list to all conflicts where that layer is an option Status Icons x The X icon signifies that the conflict hasn t been resolved va The Check Mark icon signifies that it has been resolved The Exclamation Mark icon signifies that it is resolved but was changed by the Use for all button Once all conflicts are resolved the OK button will be enabled and you can press it to move the conflicted
229. d what was double clicked on For example if the Zoom and Center view options are checked and you double click on a spool the view in the model drawing will be zoomed and centered on that Spool Done Closes the Spool Manager Properties This button lets you toggle whether you see the properties or not The properties will dynamically update depending on what you have selected in the tree above Spool Properties 1 Naming Convention The naming convention used to generate the spool s current name To change the naming convention click on the dropdown control and select a new naming convention in the list The first available name using the new naming convention will be assigned to the spool 2 Spool Name The name of the spool To change the spool name click on the button beside the spool name You may have to click on the spool name itself in order to see the button A list appears with some possible names Select a new name and click OK 3 Is Locked The icon that appears here tells you whether or not the spool is locked To change the lock status here click on the button beside the icon You may have to click on the icon to see the button 4 Hierarchy The hierarchy level of the spool To change the hierarchy level of the spool click on the button beside the hierarchy level You may have to click on the hierarchy level to see the button A hierarchy tree Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Ref
230. dcuts to display parts without endcuts Bend Filter Filters the Unnested Parts list to display Straight Parts Bent Parts and Curved Parts Trim Filter Filters the Unnested Parts list to display Trimmed Parts and Non Trimmed Parts Standard Assemblies If checked the filter will display assemblies from standard assemblies and their parts Purchased If checked Standard Assemblies tagged as Purchased will also be displayed Dist Sys Supports If checked Distributed Systems Supports are displayed Nested Parts Includes nested parts in the Unnested Parts list Unnested Parts Lists unnested parts that use the selected profile stock under Show Parts Nests of Type and lets you add parts to nests Add Adds the parts selected under Unnested Parts to the nests selected under Nests If no nest is selected ShipConstructor tries to create nests for the selected parts Remove Unnests the parts selected under Nests or unnests all parts from nest selected under Nests Nests Lists the nests for the selected profile stock under Show Parts Nests of Type and the parts within each nest 343 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 344 Create Nests Issue Selected cut Selected Nests Nests H L y e Check All Visible Nests ZON Delete Selected LIn issue LIn cut selected Nests Selected Nests ests Create Nests Creates an empty profile nest Delete Selected Nests Deletes the selected profile nests and
231. der and click New PipeSpool Enter a name for the Spool Template drawing Click OK Set up the template drawing with the settings that you want to see in your generated spool drawing Customizing the Template Drawing The template drawing controls how the final output drawing appears By setting up viewports styles and layouts in a template drawing all the production drawings that are generated with this template look generally the same The template drawing selected when creating a production drawing is used as a base for the drawing This means that most AutoCAD options that are drawing specific and setup in the template drawing will be in the production drawing created In order to help you customize the appearance of the template drawing a number of layers are created and used SCDimension Dimensions are on this layer Re dimensioning a drawing will delete all objects on this layer Change the color of this layer to control the color of the dimensions in the resulting spool drawings Offset Hatches and boxes for offsets are on this layer Re dimensioning a drawing will delete all objects on this layer Change the color of this layer to control the color of the hatches and offsets in the resulting spool drawings Spool Layer All HVAC and Pipe entities are place on this layer Change the color of this layer in combination with the Use Branch Color option in the Display Options to control the colors of the parts in the generated spool
232. does not match anything we have seen previously If you now create a fifth and sixth part made from material M2 and in system Fresh Water ShipConstructor will generate the names as follows M2 FreshWater 002 M2 FreshWater 003 To further illustrate the nature of seeding consider the following example To make things simple pretend that you are again working with a fresh project and have not generated the names above You define a name convention identical to the one in the example above Material System Autonumber except that instead of both the Material and System elements being seeds only the Material is a seed element Following the same procedure as above your part names will be as follows M1 FreshWater 001 M1 FreshWater 002 M1 SaltWater 003 Notice how even though the system changed from Fresh Water to Salt Water the numbering scheme did not change it continued counting up This is because the system is not a seed element If you create two more parts the names will be as follows M2 FreshWater 001 M2 SaltWater 002 Notice how the numbering scheme changed the first time because the material element changed but continued counting up the second time Database Elements The power in naming conventions lies in the ability to generate names based on entity attributes stored in the database The following are descriptions of all the database elements currently supported by ShipConstructor Assembly returns the primary product hierarc
233. drawing contains a base set of keywords and some keywords specific to the drawing type Keywords are updated when the production drawing is created updated or update all keywords is run Getting Started with Production Getting Started with Production 214 Production drawings contain a number of components that should to be configured to make for a streamline process for creation The process of generating good looking production drawings can be a try and see process The ShipConstructor template projects include sample template drawings that are configured Production Setup Checklist 1 Project Settings 2 Permissions 3 Dimension Styles 4 Label Styles 5 Table Styles Production Project Settings Production drawings have a few project settings that are primarily for controlling automatic labeling To change project settings 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Project Settings page 297 to open the Project Settings window 3 Change the settings as needed Production drawings are mainly affected by the General Report and Production Drawings settings 4 Click OK to save and close the Project Settings Permissions Production drawings have permissions for each type of drawing Set up the permissions so that only the authorized users can access the production drawings See the Project Management manual on how to set up user permissions Dimension Styles AutoCAD Dimension
234. drawings as an overlay of the current assembly It gives reference to where the assembly is located in the unit or vessel The keymap drawing can contain any objects It is recommended that you prepare the keymap drawing after it has been created Show Out of Date Shows a A next to each drawing that has parts in it that have changed or parts that have been added or removed Right Click Menu Lets you open reattach rename or delete the selected assembly drawing or create a new assembly drawing Open New Rename Delete Reattach New Rename Delete Reattach Permissions Structure gt Assembly Drawings Edit Reattaches an existing drawing to a registered assembly drawing that has its drawing file missing The selected drawing is checked to ensure it is an assembly drawing Rename Permissions General gt Assembly Drawings Edit Renames the selected assembly drawing Delete Permissions General gt Assembly Drawings Edit Deletes the selected assembly drawing Composite Page The Composite Page lets you create open and modify composite drawings drawings that you can use to MLink in other drawings in order to see multiple modules together See Set Up Composite Drawings page 16 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands shipConstructor Mavigator Tutorial UDI Last Modified Date Preview ee Pipe Spal Be HYAC 5 pool E Support Construction d Equipment 5 Electrical vee Ba P
235. ds SC Utilities gt Unhide Objects SC Utilities tab gt Visual panel SC Utilities gt Unhide Objects SCUNHIDE Permissions None Procedure Hide or Show Objects page 55 Shows hidden objects SC Utilities gt Hide Objects page 352 in the reverse order that you hid them SC Utilities gt Unhide All Objects Button Ribbon SC Utilities tab gt Visual panel SC Utilities gt Unhide All Objects SCUNHIDEALL Permissions None Procedure Hide or Show Objects page 55 Shows all hidden objects SC Utilities gt Hide Objects page 352 Note When determining if an object is not visible in the drawing run this command and turn on and thaw all layers SC Utilities gt Clip Current View Permissions None Clip Current View is a utility function that provides a convenient method for setting up AutoCAD clipping planes inside a viewport Note Before running the command you need to switch to the viewport in which the clipping plane Is to be applied Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Fie See Paa ka s I po af A i T gt j F j r j j i gu TE nl z T a ATN a F naili i _ i F R mies 1 4 4 i Faj oF e Peres pp n The command line prompts you to Bnrtrer Point on Plane 1s Choose a point on one of the clipping planes to be used whether it is the front or back clipping plane will be 2 determined by ShipConstructor The command line prompts you to ente
236. ds e PipeCatalog XML pipe catalogs Catalog Setup Workflow This manual is organized in the order that you will typically set up a project Project Settings 28 There are certain settings that ShipConstructor uses throughout a project Before you begin work on a project you must set these project settings We recommend that you do not modify certain project settings after you have begun work on a project See General gt Project Settings page 297 for details You can also import project settings from another project or from an XML file that you have exported from another project We recommend that you do not modify the project settings after you have begun work on a project Set Project Settings To set the structure options 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Project Settings page 297 to open the Project Settings window 3 Open the Structure section and set the options See General gt Project Settings page 297 4 Click OK to close the Project Settings window Import Project Settings To import project settings 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Project Settings page 297 to open the Project Settings window Library Setup 3 Click Import to open a File Browser 4 Select a project file PRO or XML file XML 5 Click Open Export Project Settings To export project settings 1 Choose ShipConstru
237. ducer Similar to the reducer The edge opposite the edge where the profiles align is curved quadratically Both ends have different profiles Also known as a takeoff ee Offset A transition with an offset Both ends have the same profile The cross section area is constant throughout the entire offset Curved Offset A curved transition with an offset Both ends have the same profile The cross section area is constant throughout the entire offset 109 HVAC Library Setup SC New Transition General oo Stock Name Description Measurements Sheet Stock Insulations Finishes a weight coo Auto calculation Yanes Number of Yanes Overall Froperties Length Offset x Offset Y l End 1 S5 Profile Corner Radius Throat Length End Treatment l End 2 a Profile Corner Radius Throat Length End Treatment HVAC Transition 3 27 85133 kg 600 mm 0 mm O mm Rectangle 0 mmx 500 mm x 300 mm Rectangle 0 mm SOO mm 300 mm 100 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mmx 20 mm Rectangle 0 mmx 300 mm x 300 mm Rectangle 0 mm 300 mm 300 mm 100 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm x 20 mm Component Preview Optional modes Unrestricted Mode Operations For descriptions of the General properties see Create a Stock page 103 110 mae Cancel HVAC Library Setup Overall Properties Profile Applies to the Offset and Curved Offset types The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stoc
238. duct hierarchies Product Hierarchy lt User Defined Attribute gt User Defined Attributes of the assembly in every product hierarchy A keyword exists for each user defined attribute lt ASSEMBLY CG gt The Center of Gravity of the assembly lt ASSEMBLY LCG gt Longitudinal component of the Center of Gravity of the assembly lt ASSEMBLY LEVEL gt The level rank name of the assembly lt ASSEMBLY NAME gt The name of the assembly lt ASSEMBLY PROPERTIES gt The level name weight center of gravity and finishes of the assembly lt ASSEMBLY TCG gt The transverse component of the Center of Gravity of the assembly lt ASSEMBLY VCG gt The vertical component of the Center of Gravity of the assembly lt ASSEMBLY WEIGHT gt The total weight of the assembly lt FULL ASSEMBLY NAME gt The full path of the assembly tree that this assembly belongs to lt SHORT ASSEMBLY NAME gt The name of the assembly and its direct parent Keywords for Spool Template Drawings Description lt ASSEMBLY User Defined Attribute gt User Defined Attributes of the primary product hierarchy assembly the spool is assigned to A keyword exists for each user defined attribute lt SPOOL ASSEMBLY gt The immediate assembly the spool is assigned to lt SPOOL BRANCH gt The branch of the system the spool belongs to lt SPOOL FINISHES gt The finishes assigned to the spool lt SPOOL FULL ASSEMBLY NAME gt The entire assembly chain from the pr
239. duct work breakdown structure PWBS Product hierarchies consist of several levels At the lowest level individual parts are assembled to form minor assemblies At the next level minor assemblies are combined to form panels At subsequent levels panels are combined to form assemblies assemblies are combined to form stages stages are combined to form units and units are combined to form the completed project The first step in developing a product hierarchy Is to divide your project into units See Unit Setup page 59 The top level of the product hierarchy is always the project and the project is always divided into units Typically you perform this step of the product hierarchy before you begin designing parts Some shipyards prefer to name their project based on the unit they belong to Library Setup Next you set up the available sub levels that you potentially want to use within your units See Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 These levels are referred to as assembly levels The levels listed above are ShipConstructor s default assembly levels but you can modify them as necessary Note The word assembly has several meanings In the general sense an assembly or assembly level refers to any level within or under the unit In the specific sense an assembly refers to the level above panel that is an assembly is composed of several panels An assembly or assembly item can also mean any item of several parts for example assem
240. e 185 IPA nn 171m 510mm wW SHIPCONSTRUCTOR A SHIPYARD INC Usa 262 Getting Started with Production Distribution Lines The leader distribution lines are visible as light gray lines in the above image Distribution lines do not plot Leaders can be manipulated in several ways with respect to distribution lines 1 Dragged off a leader distribution line The leader will be detached from the distribution line such that any further manipulation of the line will not affect the leader 2 Repositioned along the distribution line The leader s new position along the line is maintained even if the line is subsequently manipulated Dragged onto another distribution line The leader is detached from the first line and attached to the new line Bulk transfer to another distribution line Using the SCTRANSFERLEADERS command the selected labels are transferred to another distribution line 5 Distribution line manipulation Transform the line using any of the standard AutoCAD methods The labels will remain attached Note In order for individual leader manipulations to be effective when positioning on distribution lines enable the Nearest Osnap Line dependent variables 1 Bubble spacing Bubble spacing can be set on a per line basis This forms the minimum spacing between the labels 2 Leader attachment position To ensure consistent label positioning distribution lines enforce leader consistent insertion modes a
241. e This means that the size values are in paperspace units and no matter what the zoom scale of the viewport the label is always the same size Typically this can be turned off It is intended for labels in modelspace but ShipConstructor mainly labels in paperspace Orient to View When labels are placed in modelspace atypical the orientation of the label can be set to always face the view direction and be horizontal Since ShipConstructor mainly labels in paperspace this can be turned off Include Wipeout A wipeout blocks out what is behind a label If No the background objects behind the label show through New Creates a new dimension style link Delete Deletes the selected label style If the label style is In Use then deletion will be denied Import Imports label styles from an XML file Export XML Exports the checked label styles to an XML file Usage Log Generates a log file that shows where the selected dimension style is used Appendix Production Command Reference General gt Production Output gt Dimension Styles Permissions General gt Manager gt Edit Dimension Styles Procedure Dimension Styles page 214 The list of dimension styles that correspond to dimension style names in production template drawings The dimension style is used in the label style The names should match a dimension style in the drawing The case of the name does not have to match ei Dimension styles fee Dimension Style
242. e overlapping dimension lines Index 3 3D 2D view 25 A Accessory package 147 add to connection 147 change 192 411 accessory packages 307 Anchor 179 180 408 angle dihedral 76 AutoCAD 330 xclip 16 19 B bill of materials See BOM BOM Manager 220 C Catalogs 142 143 catamaran hulls mirroring 55 CG 467 Clip view 353 composite drawings 16 Connect Disconnect 145 190 407 Connections 145 146 147 192 D database 12 Database Driven Relational Object Model See DDROM DDROM 3 dihedral angle determine 76 Dimension 522 523 dimension styles 214 445 Display 152 416 drawings 13 close 16 composite 16 create 15 delete 16 export 23 insert 18 Index link 18 lock unlock 15 open 15 rename 16 save 16 Drawings 149 E editors 26 End Treatments 94 99 100 F finish create 34 36 create finish type 34 delete 35 export 34 import 34 rename 34 finishes 304 window 304 Finishes 432 G getting started 7 grades create 30 delete 31 export 31 import 31 rename 31 H hulls mirroring catamaran 55 insulation 305 Insulation 431 interferences 82 check 84 create drawing 83 527 Index L layer activate 54 copy objects from layer 55 deactivate 54 move objects from layer 55 licenses 11 licensing window 346 M manager 3 338 manufacturer create 32 manufacturers 303 window 303 materials 302 create 30 delete 31 export 31 import 31 rename
243. e 145 2 Select the connection 3 Click Add to open the Select Accessory Packages window 4 Check the check box for the accessory packages to add to the connection 5 Click OK to close the Select Accessory Packages window The accessory packages are listed under Connection Accessories To remove an accessory package from a connection 1 Open the HVAC Connections window See Connections page 145 2 Select the connection 3 Under Connection Accessories select the accessory package to remove 4 Click Remove Create a Connection Report To create a connection report Note This feature is not yet available in ShipConstructor 1 Open the HVAC Connections window See Connections page 145 2 Select the connections for which you want to create a report 3 Click Report to generate and display a report of the connections use For each connection the report lists the drawings where the connection is in use which ducts are using it and the number of times it is used Import Connections You can import connections from another project or from an XML file exported from another project To import connections Open the HVAC Connections window See Connections page 145 Click Import to open a File Browser Select a project file PRO or XML file XML Click Open to open the Import HVAC Connections window Check the import check boxes of all the HVAC connections you want to import Click OK a SP F Export Connections Y
244. e Arrangements Edit Creates a new drawing Show Out of Date Shows a A next to each pipe arrangement drawing that has parts in it that have changed or parts that have been added or removed Right Click Menu Lets you open reattach rename or delete the selected drawing or create a new drawing Open New Rename Delete Reattach New Rename Delete Reattach Permissions Pipe gt Pipe Arrangements Create Delete Reattaches an existing drawing to a registered pipe arrangement drawing that has its drawing file missing The selected drawing is checked to ensure it is a pipe arrangement drawing Rename Permissions Pipe gt Modeling gt Pipe Models Edit OR Permissions Pipe gt Pipe Arrangements Edit Renames the selected drawing Delete Permissions Pipe gt Modeling gt Pipe Models Create Delete Permissions Pipe gt Modeling gt Pipe Models Edit OR Permissions Pipe gt Pipe Arrangements Create Delete Permissions Pipe gt Pipe Arrangements Edit Deletes the selected drawing Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands HVAC Page The HVAC page lets you create open and modify HVAC model and HVAC arrangement drawings EH ShipConstructor Navigator Demo09 U03 sg an Drawing Preview u03 ET E Structure i mo gP Distributed Systems P Fipe jm HYAC p Support ka Fipe Spool caj HVAC Spool Support Construction EF Equipment Ete Product Hierarchy
245. e BE o 2 B PAA A A AA A AA A A AA A AA AAAA A A SC Utilities gt Orthographic Projection csecscessesssscssssrssessssserssesessrsersaeseserseesatsesersensates SC Utilities gt Remove Vertices Below Tolerance s esssssssssrsrsrrrsrsrsrsrsrnrnnnnnnnsnsrsrnrnrnrnnnns Contents Contents SC Utilities gt Convert Ellipse Spline to POlyline csesesssssssssrsssssssrssrsesessrsrsaesesseseesacseserseesessesersansessesersatsesensersatees 358 SENG SS LVI SACUVATI sintentged nical setenv ONGEA OENE 358 SC UUINES Layer SDA CEVA tE sen cucu inch ali uinsa dicaice Misia cha mee ium aware ah una Nine bie iia 358 SC Utilities gt Layer gt Copy Geometry tO cescssesesssssssessssecsssessssesssessssesessessesesesseseeseceeseseeseceeseeeesaesesasersassesasrsasesass 359 Sc Utilities gt Layer gt Move Geometry TO waste atsalitensicn eter lena elena aleve a 359 SC Uilities gt Toolpa tenensa a AA A ANE 359 SC Utiliues Fleta A EONA E EO 360 SCHilues Minrorapout Centerline iseina aana AE NE AA EE 360 SC Utlite s gt Dihedral ANGIE crnini nanna nanana aaa A A AAAA AA NE 360 SC Utilities gt Reload DrawitiG aomena nE COENA EROE 361 SCUUNUES gt Create Qualy Mat Xaar aaaea EEE EEE EE aai 361 SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Style MANaQEel cc cscsscsssscsssessssecsssecsssessssecssseceseseesesseseceeseceesaseesassrsaseesaseesasaneass 363 SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt IMpPoOrt Styles ccessesssssscsrssrssessssessrs
246. e Hull location groups Hull location groups are used in the Hull module for marking curved plates in the Structure module for marking plates and in reference lines for indicating locations 367 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 368 ES Location ICL ps Te a Name Descr piion sta oin Modficd Locckionz Tog FiF Inzak nns Butkeck seconcary bukkocks 3 12 2013 glazia i4 Ey Layer hen Buttock bukcccks 6 OfZzo007 E s0 20CF 0 By Laver Buttock primary autcocee S 1212018 SIL Zoos __ By Layer CLpy BJttock MD Loncs SEf20 15 Sle l Ey Laver SE F ma Franas g zgiz0g efeof20cy 38 __ By Layer Feces Steuer Fra vcs PIEIeC1S ST fP015 5S4 Dy Laver Delete Ferme MID Fe erie 3 Ef2c13 PETAT HEC 1 __ Fy l aver eae Feme Maji Frames 3 ZFIZ013 SPF I015 18 __ Oy Laver a Ferme one ame 2 1312013 st 3f2013 1 Hyl aver m ee E air larin a Irdan 3 Da ane ae Type The type of the location group Name The name of the location group Description An optional description of the location group Create The date the location group was created Modified The date the location group was last modified Locations The number of locations in the location group Color A color associated with the location group The color is used in surface marklines in Hull drawings Edit Locations Shows the window to edit the individual locations in the selected location group New Creates a new location group
247. e Plat LI Templates Ny 3050 641 BL08 013 Ny 3050 641 BL08 014 Ny 3050 641 BL08 015 Ny 2050 641 BLOG O1E a 3050 64 BLO8 01 Gay 642_Fire tighting and Deckwa mere 2050 642 FF 01 001 a 3050 642 FF07 001 ShipConstructor Open Read Only Create Show Out of Date qazil 5729 PM 4724 2013 9 50 09 4M 47272013 2 59 54 PM Distributed Systems Production Drawings 288 Updating an Existing Spool Drawing Out of date spool drawings can be identified by the exclamation mark icon dh Spool drawings that are out of date can be updated instead of re created This lets you preserve all the customization work done on a spool drawing as only the modified geometry of the spooled parts is modified Items that are affected during a drawing update include the following To update a spool drawing i All parts will be updated to reflect the latest geometry in the source model drawings The Bill of Materials BOM All keywords The automatically generated dimensions and offsets optional Note When ShipConstructor re dimensions your spool drawing it will delete all entities which reside on the dimension and offset layers If you wish to preserve your custom dimensioning during an update it is recommended that you place these dimensions on a different layer Note You cannot update a spool drawing from a spool that is not approved Choose SC Spool Drawing gt Update Spool Drawing to start updating t
248. e a modified spool and usually should just be undefined to free up the spool name Approve a Spool Spools that are in the Modified Spools category are spools that have just been either created or modified These are the spools that can be approved A spool must be approved before it can be moved to the Defined Spools category 199 HVAC Modeling 200 Permission HVAC Spools Approve To approve selected spools 1 Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 2 Select the spools in the Modified Spools category you wish it approve and right click on a spool in your selection and chose Approve Spool from the right click menu The spool automatically moves to the Defined Spools category To approve all spools 1 Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 2 Right click on the Modified Spools category heading and select Approve All All the spools that were in the Modified Spools category now appear in the Defined Spools category Lock and Unlock Spools You can lock a defined spool to prevent any editing of the parts in the spool that would change the spool for example erasing moving adding new parts to unconnected ends or adding and removing breaks Once a spool is finished you should lock the spool to prevent a modeler from changing the spool without first checking with the project manager To lock selected spools Permission HVAC Spools Lock There are three methods available to lock a spool
249. e and Square Radial Tee The shape of the main body of the tee You can choose from rectangle and flattened oval Height Applies to Square Tee and Square Radial Tee The height property for the tee including all its ends Base Profile Since the shape of the tee is already defined there are not many properties to define for the profile e Width The width of the profile e Corner Radius Applies to the rectangle shape only The corner radius of the profile Throat Length The additional length that the base protrudes from the other two ends End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 115 HVAC Library Setup Branch Throat Length O Branch Throat Radius Base Throat Length Branch Width gt Overall Height Branch 1 Branch 2 Profile Same as the base profile 116 HVAC Library Setup Throat Length The additional length applied to the end Throat Radius Applies to the Square Radial Tee The radius of the branch Mitering Applies to the Square Radial Tee This property sets whether the branch curve is mitered or rounded e Miters The number of segments if the branch curve is mitered End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Tee and Double Tee Main Body Length The overall length of the main body Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page
250. e bit more complex If the destination text style has zero height the height of the label text comes from the associated dimension style Otherwise it will be the height from the text style definition The same convention AutoCAD dimension text uses 217 Getting Started with Production Text Style Curent text style Standard Siyi 2006 TEL DATA 2006 TEL HOR 2006 TBL TITLE E romans she HEADER Use Big Fort ROMANS Font Ford Mane Sie Annotainne 1 Elects Upside down Backa Verbcal When everything is set but label bubbles and text still have wrong sizes When everything is set but label bubbles and text still have incorrect sizes the user should check scaling parameters in the production drawing There are a few scaling parameters to be aware about e The Scale to View setting should always be turned off for labels that live in paper space Scale to View Is an old ShipConstructor setting that was introduced back in the times when ShipConstructor labels were placed in the model space Currently the only type of the drawing where labels appear in the model space is the plate nest drawing In the rest of the drawings labels live in the paper space so additional scaling to view is not required in these drawings If the Scale to View setting happens to be turned on for paper space labels the size of the label will change depending on the current zoom of the layout which may not be a desired behavior e Au
251. e main run labeled Main A B and any branch lines are labeled Br 1 Br 2 etc Points listed are end points corner points and branch points Global Position The Global Position BOM is comprised of the Global Point collector and three fields Item alpha numeric Location and Connection Location lists the distance to the closest planar groups similar to the Global Distance to point function There are currently no options to override this behavior Connection lists the spool name of the connected item The Global Position BOM is automatically linked to the Corner Point BOM so that the item numbers coincide Bending Tables The Bending Information BOM is comprised of Bending Info Collector and six fields Item alpha numeric Outer Length Inner Length Rotation Bend Radius and Bend Angle The Bending Info Collector only collects straight and bent pipes just like the Cutlist Collector In fact since the items in both the Cutlist BOM and the Bending Info BOM are identical the BOMs are automatically linked so that the item numbers coincide The ordering is determined by that specified in the Cutlist BOM The bending fields are defined as follows Inner Length the length of any straight section of pipe Outer Length the length from end to corner bent end axis intersection point or corner to corner Rotation the rotation about the previous straight run axis that is required before the next bend can be applied Ben
252. e pipe stock Part Side returns the side of the ship on which the structure part lies Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Part Type applies to Structure parts Examples of part types are plate stiffener corrugation faceplate and plank Part types can be aliases using the Naming Convention Alias Manager Planar Group Model Drawing returns the planar group model drawing that the structure part is modeled in Plate Stock Length returns the length of the plate stock item that the structure part is made from Plate Stock Width returns the width of the plate stock item that the structure part is made from Pressure Rating returns the pressure rating of the pipe stock Profile Plot Drawing returns the profile plot drawing name of profile nests Project returns the name of the ShipConstructor project Remnant returns the name of the remnant that the plate nest was cut from Sheet Stock returns the name of the sheet stock that the HVAC stock is made from Stock returns the name of the stock that the part is made from System returns the spec level system level or branch level system name of the system of your entity Which level is returned depends on your selection in the Tree Level drop down list Note If the entity is in a system with a level higher than the selected system tree level nothing is returned for the System of that element Thickness returns the thickness of the plate stock that the plate part is made from ShipConstr
253. ected assembly tree level nothing is returned for that element Extrusion Profile Standard Type Extrusion Profile Standard Type applies to stiffeners Examples of extrusion profile standard types are angle bulb flat structural pipe custom and tee Extrusion profile standard types can be aliased using the Naming Convention Alias Manager File Path File Path applies to Plate Nests It returns the path to the plate nest drawing starting from the Nest folder The purpose of the file path element is to allow users to put the build strategy location in the plate nest name This is done by creating a directory structure in the Nests folder that matches the build strategy and then putting plate nest drawings at the appropriate location in the folder structure Major Stock Type Major Stock Type applies to all Structure parts Examples of major stock types are plate extrusion corrugated and plank Major stock types can be aliased using the Naming Convention Alias Manager Material Material returns the material name of the stock Material Grade Material Grade returns the material grade of the stock Nest Drawing Nest Drawing returns the nest drawing name of plate nests Library Setup Nominal Size Nominal Size returns the nominal size of the pipe stock Part Side Part Side returns the side of the ship on which the structure part lies Part Type Part Type applies to Structure parts Examples of part types are plate stiffener corrug
254. ection types Connection types are groups or categories of similar types of connections After defining connection types you can then define specific connections You can also add connection accessory packages to connections O macs Hvac Specification i pe Dance by which the ducts will be i 7 separated Liseful to model space taken up by gaskets etc 145 HVAC Library Setup To open the HVAC connections window 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose HVAC gt Stock Catalog to open the HVAC Catalog Stock Editor 3 Click the Connections tab HVAC Catalog Stock Editor End Treatments HYAC Stocks Connections o Export Connection Type In Use End Treatment 1 End Treatment 2 Gap mm Angular Tolerance Connection Icon New Type e E Standard PL PL Sop ai fase hava cdotewn A Manna aa nacre T Plain ASTM 4 105 g E g Plain ASTM 4 105 g 5 g E DEFAULT Utilities Mew Type gt Connection Accessories Engine Cooling Accessory Mame Description Remove Galvanized Galvanized Apply Changes Discard Changes Create a Connection To create a connection first you must create a connection type To create a connection type 1 Open the HVAC Connections window See Connections page 145 2 Click New Type to create a new connection type in the connection list or double click lt New Type gt in the connection list
255. ed a PEN O05 Removed W PEN O06 Removed 4056 F56 501 Modified 4056 F66 505 Modified Penetration Penetration Penetration Penetration Structure Angle Stiffener Structure Angle Stiffener Structure structure Structure Angle StifFener Andle stiffener Angle StifFener A a la LC A0S6 F66 506 056 Fe6 50 4056 Fo6 505 4 50 F Te ese Modified Modified Modified na C J View O Override All Part Colors Men E sreen aw a Center E Highlight Removed E Red Zoom E color gs4 a Viediacck E clue Unchanged Production Drawing Revisions Title Shows the title of the current drawing whose revisions it shows Action List The list of actions performed on the current drawing since it was created Any drawings unaltered since ShipConstructor 2011 R2 will only have a Created Drawing action The default order to the list is newest on top Action The type of action performed Eg Created Drawing Updated Drawing Deleted Parts Created Revision and Created MarineDrafting View User The user who performed the action Description The number of parts affected or the revision description Details The layout names if the action was for revisions the name of the MarineDrafting view if the action was for MarineDrafting views Date The date and time of the action Part List The list of parts associated with the selected actions Module The major module that the part from Part T
256. ed by clicking the SCON OSNAP button located beside the OSNAP button on the AutoCAD Status bar by pressing shift F3 or by right clicking on the SCON OSNAP button and click On or Off To enable or disable the custom Object snaps types right click on the SCON OSNAP button and click Settings The custom Object snap settings will be saved between ShipConstructor sessions 177 HVAC Modeling 178 my Drafting Settings 1 Ed Snap and Grid Polar Tracking Object anap Dynamic Input shiplon snap Project into UCS Absolute Ortho Orthogonal Automatic Longitude Longitude Transverse Transverse Vertical vertical ShipConstructor Object Snap On ShiFE F 3 PipefHYAclEquipment Custom Osnaps All Ends Free Ends End Axis Intersections Profile Corners Profile Edges All End Object Snaps These are the points in the model where distributed systems ends exist Free End Object Snaps These are the points in the model where unconnected distributed systems ends exist a subset of the points provided by the EndPoint object snaps End Axis Intersections End axis intersection snaps are points where end axes of a part meet For branch fittings you will find these snaps where the centerline of a branch meets the centerline of the trunk For an elbow you will find them where the two end axes meet which i
257. ed in the model should be done in model drawings Parts can be copied for further customizing of the appearance of the production drawing Composite parts Standard Assemblies Supports Penetrations that are contained in one object in the model drawing are separated into their individual component parts in production drawings When production drawings are created production objects are created in model space at the same position as they are in the ship coordinate system 211 Production Concepts Bill of Materials The ShipConstructor Bill of Materials BOM includes customizable and convenient functions e Management of all production drawing BOMs is performed through a unified interface the BOM Definitions manager e BOMs have full merging sorting and grouping capability even on hidden columns e You have control of object listing order in tables e Column heading aliasing e BOM tables use standard AutoCAD tables e BOM Functionality is identical regardless of drawing type e Consistent item numbering across all sheets e Updating without losing formatting e 6 Revisions BOM Functionality Overview ShipConstructor projects can have any number of user customizable BOM definitions available for use in target production drawing types As shown in the following diagram multiple tables can be inserted in a production drawing each referencing a master list BOM Definition Manager BOM Definitions
258. ed interference drawing New Permissions General gt Edit Interference Creates a new interference drawing 325 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Show Out of Date Shows a iM next to each drawing that has parts in it that have changed or parts that have been added or removed Right Click Menu Lets you open reattach rename or delete the selected interference drawing or create a new interference drawing Open New Rename Delete Reattach New Rename Delete Reattach Permissions General gt Edit Interference Reattaches an existing drawing to a registered interference drawing that has its drawing file missing The selected drawing is checked to ensure it is an interference drawing Rename Permissions General gt Edit Interference Renames the selected interference drawing Delete Permissions General gt Edit Interference Deletes the selected interference drawing Weld Management Page The Weld Management page lets you create open and modify weld management drawings See the Weld Management manual for details Open Permissions Weld Management gt Weld Edit Opens the selected weld management drawing New Permissions Weld Management gt Weld Edit Creates a new weld management drawing Show Out of Date Shows a A next to each drawing that has parts in it that have changed or parts that have been added or removed Right Click Menu Lets you open rea
259. eference Save saves the volumes and volume folders Refresh refreshes the data from the project Import imports volumes and their volume folders Export exports the selected volumes and their selected folder structure Selecting a volume to export will automatically select its folder structure Selecting a folder will automatically select its children Show click on the volumes light bulb to show the volume in the current drawing To rename a volume or folder just double click on the name cell to bring the cell into edit mode If a name violates any of the naming constraints there will show a warning on the bottom of the palette as to why To edit the min and max extents without picking a point simply double click to edit the desired cell Volume List Export Checkbox to indicate which volumes to export Volumes the name of the volume or volume folder Show An option to display the volume in the current drawing Min L The minimum extent of the volume in the longitudinal direction Min T The minimum extent of the volume in the transverse direction Min V The minimum extent of the volume in the vertical direction Max L The maximum extent of the volume in the longitudinal direction Max T The maximum extent of the volume in the transverse direction Max V The maximum extent of the volume in the vertical direction Update Drawing Button Ribbon Production tab gt Production Utilities panel Menu Update Draw
260. eference line Perpendicular is 270 degrees rotation relative to the reference line Reverse Parallel is 180 degrees rotation relative to the reference line Reverse Perpendicular is 90 degrees rotation relative to the reference line Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Primary gt Tick Size The length of the primary tick line in modelspace units Primary gt Location Group The location group that will be used to locate the primary tick lines Use SCEDITLOCATIONS to create or edit the location groups Secondary gt Tick Size The length of the secondary tick line in modelspace units Secondary gt Location Group The location group that will be used to locate the secondary tick lines Use SCEDITLOCATIONS to create or edit the location groups at Modify Datumline Style Standard Ticks Label Preview Label Text Test Height Text Margin Test Style Text Position BASELINE 250 100 Standard E End Centered BASELINE Text Orientation Parallel to line Test Color E By Block Canca Text The text to show as a label for the reference line Text Height The height of the text label in modelspace units Text Margin The distance of the text label to the reference line in modelspace units Text Style The AutoCAD text style to use for the text label Text Position The position of the text relative to the reference line Possible values At Start Centered At St
261. efined Me by Block VIEW Center 7 E 3050 641 BL01 009 10 part Highlight m k ag 3050 641 BL01 010 4 parts l Zoom Er 3050 641 BL01 014 2 pais 7 Ph A ma en m Ja e m a ma eam Properties lt Property Naming Convention 0n Strays Spool Mame 3050 641 6L01 002 Ts Locked hs Hierarchy PROJECTIUOL PIPING 64 1 3050 641 BL01 Finishes Insulations Revision History W11f2012 Modified by ShipGonstructor Undefined Spools This is where groups of interconnected parts reside that are waiting to be defined Each grouping of parts will list all the individual parts that are contained within the grouping Defined Spools This is where defined and approved spools reside e Lock Icon Appears next to a spool when the spool is locked against modification e Unlock Icon Appears when a spool is unlocked e Spool Icon Appears when the spool does not have a drawing associated with it 511 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference 512 e Drawing Icon Appears when the spool has a drawing associated with it No Spool This is where all parts that are defined as No Spool in the drawing reside Modified Spools This is where all the modified spools that are pending approval reside When a spool is just created it resides in the modified spools category because it still needs approval Empty Spools This is where all the spools that have been create and had all the parts in it deleted They are separated for e
262. efined Attributes General gt User Defined Attributes None Permissions Structure gt Manager gt Edit Materials Procedure User Defined Attributes page 49 Opens the User Defined Attributes window letting you create user defined attributes and apply them to materials User defined attributes allow you to add custom fields to ShipConstructor j User Defined Attributes General In Use Available Attributes Description In Use Attributes Required Default E Category E standards O O OOOO E Description Assembly Description fe Material Grade Description Assembly Description Min Rectangular Heigl Stores the minimum ce Min Rectangular Leng Stores the minimum ce Model Number Gi Import UDA s Ok Cancel Available Attribute List Global list of user defined attributes Attribute list List of user defined attributes that have been asssigned to types in the general case Material Grades Required Is the user defined attibute required for every instance of the type Default The default value when a new type is created New Creates a new user defined attribute 307 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 308 Delete Deletes the selected user defined attribute The attribute cannot be in use Usage Log Generates a log file that shows where the selected user defined attribute is being used Import UDAs Imports user defined attributes from another project or an XML file Only the user de
263. eld Label ccssssssssssscsssscssssesssessesesssseeseseessseesesaesesessesansesassesassesansesansesansesanss 498 Faber COMMECEMAC ASSEM Byssan E legato eal ental tlt locals ized oath ETAR 498 FAO BOMS oes acacia EE ESENE O E O anu weagu sai uacion EAE T O EA AN 498 dear All BOM Sorsi as a a AAAA 499 CIVIC OMS sce scses cts ons auton denattau unl ac acuta EE 499 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference 501 SOO I PDA FA MEM ia E R 501 SC Spool Drawing gt Rotate DIMENSION sinnn AA AANA TA bananas 501 SC Spool Drawing gt Align Dimension Text to Current ViQW ccsccssssssssssssrsssssseserssesesssserseeseseesersaesessrsersetsesersensatees 501 XIV Contents SC SOO Drawing ReDImMmenSIO Nersessian aa 501 SC Spool Drawing gt Label Connecting Spool ASSEMDI Y cccccceessessssssssssssssessesseseseeseseeseseesesesasersasersasersasersasensass 502 Bending Data AML OULD UT ianari einnar aen arakat anaa roa aaia aaao aaa aa koai 502 FR AW seer cance estes aa aaa aa aa a aaa a a 502 Foma ted aia EEO TEN N ETORO ON 504 EXCO IMDORRI 505 Choosing Pipes for XML Data Generation s sssrsrssssrsrsrsrnnrnnnnsnnrsrnnnnnnnnnnnnrnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnnnnnnnnnannnnnnnennann nnan nnaa 506 BENG IATOL Mall OMaNGsLOCELION Table Sises oE E E NAN AE 507 0 FV E OMIE anaE AAE AAO A OEE OEO O 508 GloDal POSIHON iseer AARAA AARAA 508 Bending PANES aeara E added R aod Seance ds 508 BSTC and Location Tables Ean Stents tesla iain lent
264. elds list Fields Field name Alias visible Sort details Merge Field props tem Tem ves ERMAN No Inceger Field wih Op i Part Mame Park Mame Yes Alone Alo String oy Guantity Cky Yes fone Mo Integer Field width Opl y Stock Mame Stock Mame Yes fone Mo String i Weight Weight Yes fone Mo w eight kg Decimal Precision 0 Length Length Yes fone Mo Decimal Precision 0 Unitsimm Round up to Revision Rey Yes Mone Mo String 9 Click the ellipsis button in the sort column so that at least one column Is sorted Warning If you do not sort the rows then the order of the rows is random and not guaranteed to be the same after an update 10 Set the Merge column to Yes as necessary to merge identical rows in the table A ana m 11 Use the and __ table 12 Review the Collectors sections to ensure the types of parts that you want in the BOM table are in the Included collector list Assign a label style to each collector that you want labeled 13 Click OK to close the BOM Definitions buttons to organize the order of the columns The top field will be the leftmost column in the Deleting an Existing BOM Definition BOMs that are currently being used by production drawings should not be deleted as this will prevent the BOM tables from updating You will need the Edit BOM permission to delete a BOM To delete an existing BOM 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General g
265. elected objects will be erased Note This synchronization process does not happen with production drawings For production drawings you must choose to update it with the Update command in the respective production drawing menu Set Up HVAC Systems An HVAC system is a collection of HVAC parts that together fulfill a specific purpose for example the heating system or the ventilation system Each system is composed of one or more sections or branches Before you can begin modeling HVAC you must set up systems and branches Each system is part of a specification Spec You must set up at least one spec before you can create a system or branch To set up a spec see Create a Spec page 144 149 HVAC Modeling Create a System To create a system 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Systems gt System Manager to open the System Manager g gt system Manager e dh Code 1 G gF Engine Room Enter a name for the new system and press Enter ot ee wW Click OK to save and close the System Manager Create a Branch To create a branch Level Finish Insulation Airflow Parts Using System Set the system properties See System Manager page 415 for details BEE 1 Adhesive Emulsion System 2 Thermal Self Adhesive Branch Se E 470 g Branch Under HVAC System select the spec os that you want the new system to belong to Click New System or right click on the spec and choose New System 1 Choose SC HVAC
266. eled Note The rules for BOMs assigned to viewport for labeling still applies This means selected parts may not actually qualify to be labeled Label on Visible Edge On Off The arrow points for labels can point at two types of points the piecemark or center point of the part or any visible edge This setting controls that option To set labels to point to edges of parts 1 Choose Label gt Label on Visible Edge On Off page 480 Labels point to visible edges Yes No lt No Project Setting gt 2 Enter Yes If labels are already placed run Label gt Delete All Labels page 479 Choose Label gt Label All page 478 Adjacent Part Edge Tolerance This tolerance setting filters out potential arrow points on edges that are too close to each other When arrow points are close another part it can be difficult to know what part the arrow it pointing at To change the adjacent part edge tolerance 1 Choose Label gt Adjacent Part Edge Tolerance page 481 Enter adjacent part edge min distance lt 2 0 Project Setting gt 5 Enter new value If you choose a large value then potentially all possible label points are filtered out and the arrow must revert to labeling the longest edge If labels are already placed run Label gt Delete All Labels page 479 Choose Label gt Label All page 478 Curved Plates in Visible Edge Detection On Off This setting is to allow the use of curved plates in the visible edge detect
267. eling To open the spool manager 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Manager page 399 in HVAC drawings See also Spool Manager Reference page 510 Note You must save your drawing to open the Spool Manager and undo will be disabled while it is open Hvac Spool Manager ar B 4 E x Undefined Spools 5 p Spool Break CA Undefined Spooll 1 parts FOFOa9e1 8546 4191 9351 FF6erb408a59 002 E Undefined Spool 3 parts i Undefined Spool3 1 parts a Undefined Spool4 7 parts Undefined Spools 1 parts ag Defined Spools 4 Ea amp Return Air 1 16 parts _ Override Colors ar a k Return Air 4 2 parts sia No Spool Parts 0 E A Modified Spools 7 E Return Air 2 2 parts a Return Air 3 2 parts ae47bdb6 762d 4623 a6d Focod9 718c007 001 ae47bdb6 F62d 4623 abd2 Feod9218c007 002 194 HVAC Modeling No Spool Items A No spool item is a part that is not going to be spooled No spool items are displayed with a cross Icon To set no spool items There are six ways to set a part as a no Spool part 1 Inthe Spool Manager SC HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Manager page 399 drag and drop an undefined part to the No Spool Parts folder OR 2 Inthe model drawing right click on the part you want and choose No Spool from the right click menu The next time you right click on the part a check mark should appear beside the property No Spool OR 3 Inthe model drawing display the
268. ement template defined for the type of arrangement drawing you want to create For example if you want to create an HVAC arrangement drawing you must have an HVAC arrangement template defined The template drawing controls how the final output drawing appears By setting up viewports styles and layouts in a template drawing all the production drawings that are generated with this template look generally the same The template drawing selected when creating a production drawing is used as a base for the drawing This means that most AutoCAD options that are drawing specific and setup in the template drawing will be in the production drawing created To create an arrangement template drawing See Set Up a Production Drawing Template page 225 Generate Arrangement Drawings Generating arrangement drawings is a multi step process To make this process easier there is a Create Arrangement Drawing Wizard See Create Arrangement Drawing Wizard Reference page 268 289 Distributed Systems Production Drawings See Creating Production Drawings page 236 To generate an arrangement drawing 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator to open Navigator 2 Select HVAC or Pipe in the component list 3 Select the Arrangement sub folder Steate 4 amp rranq2mert Daning Step 1 of 4 Please Ente a Drawing hame La wings boaters dares feat Filz Ware q Arrangement 4 Click New Arrangement 5 The Create Arrangem
269. ements pane Under Elements a button with one of the labels described above allows you to add an element If the label doesn t match the element you want to add click z to show the other types of elements Note Make sure each naming convention consists of at least one Static element and one AutoNumber element The new element is listed under Elements and is automatically selected The element s properties are listed in the window Set the Value for each Property See Edit an Element of a Naming Convention page 44 Click Test to generate a sample name If you are satisfied with your convention click OK to close the Naming Conventions window Edit an Element of a Naming Convention To edit an element of a naming convention ot Oe et oe e Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Naming Conventions page 308 to open the Naming Conventions window Under Name Conventions select the naming convention Under Elements select the element you want to edit Beneath the Elements pane set the Value for each Property Click Test to generate a sample name If you are satisfied with your convention click OK to close the Naming Conventions window Re order Elements in a Naming Convention To re order elements in a naming convention L 2 gt Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Naming Conventions page 308 to open the Naming Convent
270. en AENEA NE ENA 253 Producton Drawing Revision Palette sssiniiiniononineninirininii nia din Na ENA ERN 253 Show Outo Date Pas neniannnannnannn nauna anan a a aAa AAAA ANAA 254 OUTO NIN aaaea a a a 254 Generate Output Dire WAG rxson sce hea nt red bala seca deal adh anlah aaiind NA nse inne 255 update OUTWIT DRAWINGS kinunana nE a a ae cies isteach epee anette elon E 258 aro deh ea 0 8 219 8Y gro iste menrermentereerrty eerteren tren erereier ere cerrrer E retort eran rer reenact 259 PLACING FieldEa Del S rarior EA AO E d 261 REI UNA SEL DEI ana ee cea RE IE AE IER 261 Leader DIEMIDUUORN E MES ieis dara auaniautniaamaanauniaatniaaunaRaaaN 262 Feaderinserion ModE zidireniiimaoi e a caionadiestodnunliedeae aides 264 Redistributing Leaders on a Distribution LING ccsecsssssssssrsssssssessrsesesersesessesersaesessesersacsesersaesassesersanseseesensansesensansates 264 Exporting Drawings to Native AutoCAD Drawing5S cccsssssssssssssrssrssrssrssrssrsersersersrserserserserseesrsensenees 265 Layer Templates sys a aurea Dandi onda Nan S mane enAia 265 Create Arrangement Drawing Wizard Reference ccecsssssssssssrssrssrssrssrssrssrssrssrsersersrsrsersersersersersenss 268 Layer Conflict Resolution REFEFENCE ceccecsssssssrssrssrssrssrssrserssrsorserssessrsersersersersersersersersersersensersensonsensensas 274 Update Arrangement Drawing Wizard Reference c cescsessssssssssssssssssseserssesersersseseseesersersensersersenserses 274
271. en the global display options will be used instead of these options if unchecked then the viewport specific option will be used e Value The viewport specific value for this option This value will only be used if the Use Global Option is unchecked Below the grid is the Description field it will contain a description of the selected option 4 Once configuration is done click OK to continue 20 Exporting ShipConstructor Drawings Exporting ShipConstructor Drawings ShipConstructor drawings are similar to standard AutoCAD drawings except they contain many custom objects If you are running AutoCAD without ShipConstructor and try to open a ShipConstructor drawing the following message appears Proxy Information The drawing you have opened or referenced contains custom objects created by an unavailable ObjectARX application You do not need the original application to display proxy representations of objects that were saved in the drawing However many manufacturers including Autodesk provide object enablers that also allow you to edit these custom objects Visit the AutoCAD Object Enabler Assistant web page to locate Autodesk object enablers or contact the software publisher about object enablers for other applications Proxy Graphics Do not show proxy graphics Show proxy graphics Show proxy bounding box You can install the ShipConstructor Object Enabler page 24 a free download from www Shi
272. en the window To configure which columns are shown right click on a column header select or deselect the columns from the list shown Stock Source Stock Mame Description Endi Profile End1End Treatment EndzFrofile End2EndTreatment Sheetstock Insulation 4 amp 4 amp amp 4 w Catalog we Weight Radius Min Length Max Length 430 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference Preview This is a preview of the selected stock You can right click to change properties of the preview Create Button Click on this button when you want to create a new stock of the current type If you select a duct from the list and then click on create duct the properties from the selected duct will be copied to the new stock duct window for editing The create duct window is the same as the one to define your stocks in the HVAC Stocks page 102 catalog See Create a Stock page 103 for more information on defining a stock Connects To Button Click on this button when you want to filter all the stocks listed by an end to which you could connect Once you click this button you will be prompted to select an end Once the end is selected the list will be filtered based on whether the stock shown can connect to the end selected Required Custom Attributes Reference After routing the duct if there are any required custom attributes or if catalogs are assigned to the stock used the catalog and custom attributes for this part must be set ShipCo
273. ending which end you placed in Step 3 not all ends will be available as an orienting end while cycling through ends with Next end for orientation For example if you placed a tee by one end of its trunk the other end of the trunk is not useful to orient the tee with but the branch is If desired choose one of the available options see General Options page 168 for options not listed here e Next end for orientation Switches the end governing the orientation of the fitting 8 Click anywhere in the model to specify the direction of the orienting end Routing Options Several routing options are available in many different routing cases and serve more or less the same use in each case To use the options type their shortcuts the letters that are capitalized when the options are displayed on the command line Descriptions of each follow General options e Select stock Opens the Select Stock Duct window allowing you select a different stock duct e Insulation Displays the insulation window allowing you to modify the insulation applied to the part you are routing See Insulation Reference page 431 e Saddle Initiates the creation of a new saddle end on an existing duct to which the duct you are routing will be attached See Create a saddle while routing a duct page 170 NavAid specific options The following options affect the NavAid page 159 s behavior or orientation e Snap Toggles snapping of picked points to fixed
274. ent Drawing Wizard appears See also Create Arrangement Drawing Wizard Reference page 268 290 6 eee ee m gg pe N E a T Lk rm a pe Ah wa reste A Farid roe ret Loa rig Ctcp 1 of 4 Please Ente a Drowing hame Filz Jame meee Cravings Ents Porat teat ia J Arrangement Distributed Systems Production Drawings Lancel Enter a name for the Arrangement drawing and click Next Note You will not be able to click the Next button if the name you entered already exists 291 Distributed Systems Production Drawings Seite Srrangsmert Daming Ctcp 2 of 4 Please Soheck on Arrangement Terrplate Tenplate Prevaices RH FIFE ARRAS METRIC Bi a PIPE COORD CRW A0 a PIPE COORD CRW AZ a S OOL SUMMARY AS Se oes Cee 7 Select an arrangement template drawing and click Next 292 e reytt Arrangert Daming Ctcp tof 4 Please Sobeck Components be inser bo drawing Drawings Systens asserbles clumes Seleczed Sources Distributed Systems Production Drawings ni SOL OoS Layors Crawings T Y EF Ene ii y PDN CE REO LEAT J01 EeLAY W001 ELAY i i J01_FR6S W01_Ff 65 iF uo i J01 Feee U01 _Fr e a Structure Structure J 1_FR67 Lio i Fre HPAC HW AC Joi FRe s UOI FTES J Pipe Pipe J01_FR6o W01_Fr69 7 ER c4_Digs snd ballast 5 1 _Dilge and ballest J01 _FR70 UOI FF 70 Er E42_Fre Agiing and Deckwash 5
275. eometry removing unneeded geometry or updating existing parts The following items are affected during a drawing update e All parts are updated to reflect the latest geometry in the source model drawings e The Bill of Materials BOM e All keywords e The imported non ShipConstructor geometry Note When ShipConstructor updates the non ShipConstructor entities it only deletes and re imports geometry that was brought in during the drawing creation to update process Any additional geometry added by you to the arrangement drawing will be unaffected by a drawing update regardless of which layer the geometry resides on Copied Parts in Arrangement Drawings In an arrangement drawing you can copy any number of production parts During an update the copies of the parts also are updated The following rules apply while updating copied production parts e fthe original part is deleted from the arrangement drawing by the update process all its copies are also deleted e Ifthe original part is moved or its geometry changes the copies are also moves and have their geometry changed They will move relative to the original part while updating To update an arrangement drawing 1 Choose SC Arrangement gt Update Drawing to start updating the drawing 2 The Update Drawing Wizard appears See also Update Arrangement Drawing Wizard Reference page 274 Update Arrangement Drawing Wizard Step 1 of 2 Please select the sources for your drawi
276. er 2 Choose General gt Production Output gt Label Styles page 441 to open the Label Styles window anel Seles zba abal Styles Export In Use Lekel Stve Ware Irse tion Mode CEE Style ELEtle Size imr Leecer Acad Sensing Style Num Cecments Scele To Yisaper Oriert Te View include Wipeokt Ss a g o E wf Assembly Circes Center Circle 1C ies STANDORE 1 No Wo Wo Eoo t Mea Arat Bubbles Closest I o izontal Cukkle T Yes LADELZ 1 No ves ha L Irec Iree o oe a ws leac rgt Croes Closest Hoizontal Circle 1C ies LADELZ 1 No ves Wo J s Caper WML rem e El s HAZ SPSL Closest loizontal Reckaage 1 es LAOCLS 1 Ho ha ha i EO o o y Pipe Airgt Qubbles Closest llxizontal Cuttle Z ies LADELZ 1 No Yes ha A Usece Log Useceloa e El wf Pipe AivgtCindes Closest IIovizontal Circle IC Yes LADCLZ 1 No Yes Ho E af PIPC SPOOL Closest Ha izontal Cukkle T tes LADCLS 1 No ves Wo E Pipe Specl Carers Closest loizontal Cuokkle C Yes STANDSRE 1 Mo Yes Hs a m wf Pipe Cecel Cuts Der Closest Iovizontal Circle C Yes STANDORE 1 No ves Wo S o a E 3 Click New and enter a name for the new label style Change the properties of the label style Click OK to save and close the Label Styles Setting up Label Text Styles In Label Styles catalog in Manager each label style is referenced to a specific dimension style name 215 Getting Started with Production i ShipConstructor Manager LASCIN_METRIC_12R2 Label Style ee
277. er space If enabled the labels will be scaled to paperspace otherwise model Space units are used Label Layer Layer to place all the labels on Matrix Text style The text style of the text in the matrix of dimensions This lists all the text styles in the current drawing Text size The size of the text for the matrix of dimensions This also determines the size of the matrix If you started the command while in a layout then this value will be in paperspace units Text Layer Layer to place the dimensions on Matrix Layer Layer to place the matrix and column headers on Dimension Points Picked Points When picking points ShipConstructor uses that point as the dimension point Points Projected to Current UCS When picking points ShipConstructor creates a dashed line from that point to a point on the current UCS and dimensions from that point This makes it easier to pick points since you do not have to zoom in close and make sure you are picking points on the front of the plate SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Style Manager Button Ribbon Production tab gt Production Utilities panel SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Style Manager SCRLINESTYLES Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Permissions Edit production drawing if in a production drawing or edit model drawing if in model drawing Shows the reference line style manager Styles are stored in the drawing When
278. erals gt Double Lateral HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double Lateral Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Lateral Flyout gt a Command SCHvacDblLateral Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a double lateral duct SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double Reducing Lateral HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double Reducing Lateral Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Lateral Flyout gt we Command SCHvacDb RedLateral Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a double reducing lateral duct SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double 2 Segment Lateral HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double 2 Segment Lateral Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Lateral Flyout gt Command SCHvacDbl2SegLateral Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a double two segment lateral duct 392 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Cross HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Cross Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Cross Flyout gt a Command SCHvacCross Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a cross duct SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Rect Radial Cross HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Rect Radial Cross Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Cross Flyout gt od Comma
279. erarchy Edit General gt Product Hierarchy gt Product Hierarchy Levels Edit Universal or ProductHierarchy Product Hierarchies page 60 Opens the Product Hierarchy palette letting you setup assembly levels and assemblies and assign parts to assemblies 341 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Tools Options Descriptionl ii y U0 al e HW S Unassigned Pipe F Unassigned HVAC Unspooled Pipe U U T M F Unassigned Equipment U U F U nspooled HVAC nassigned Supports nassigned Structure nassigned Standard A Unassigned Cable Supp Unassigned Cable aM o101 aM P 0102 Lower Side Assem aMi roi Shell Bf 551 0102 P01 P01 SSI 0102 P01 P02 P a SSI 0102 P01 S01 M roz M Pos M Pos M p Pos M Pos M Por 4 i Show Current Unit Only Product Hierarchy 55 Level PART Selected Parts 1 Nest amp Profile Plots tab gt ProfileNest panel Menu ShipConstructor gt Profile Nesting Command SCPROFILENEST Permissions Structure gt Profile Nest gt Profile Nests Edit License Universal or ProfileNest Opens the Profile Nest window and Profile Nest Manager window letting you nest parts on profile stocks 342 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Profile Nest Manager Profile Mest Manager Show Parte Nests of Type Unnested Parts Si Angle eC gl uo O fF HP 1608 0 nests o hap L50404 C J Unsp
280. erarchy a spool and a part When defining a stock item in the library setup there is a general property called Finishes where you select the finishes that came with the stock item or the finishes you will always apply to this type of stock duct See Finishes page 34 and Create a Stock page 103 for more information When defining a system or a branch in an HVAC drawing you can select finishes to be applied to that system or branch in the System Manager See Create a System page 150 or Create a Branch page 150 for more details on how to set up a system or branch For example when finishes are selected for a system all the parts belonging to the system will have these finishes applied Finishes selected for a hierarchy are last in the order of selected finishes for a part This is so you can apply a finish to an entire hierarchy level of parts as a last step Apply finishes to an assembly using the Product Hierarchy window In a part finishes can be added or overridden If you do not want your part to have any of the inherited finishes simply uncheck the box Inherit from System and Hierarchy and remove all the finishes At any time you can see which finishes are applied to a part by right clicking on the part and choosing Change Finishes This brings up the Select Finishes window Note The finishes selected for a stock item will only show up in the Select Finishes window when you are in the HVAC Stock Library Appendix C HVA
281. erence appears Select a new hierarchy level and click OK If your soool name depends on your spool s hierarchy level you may want to re name your spool 5 Finishes All the finishes that are applied to the spool To change the finishes for the spool click on the button beside the finishes list You may have to click on the finishes list to see the button The select finishes window appears Change the finishes for the spool and click OK See Finishes Reference page 432 6 Insulation All the insulation that are applied to the spool To change the insulation for the spool click on the button beside the insulation list You may have to click on the insulation list to see the button The select insulation window appears Change the insulation for the spool and click OK See Insulation Reference page 431 7 Revision History Shows the last revision made to the spool To see all the revisions made to the spool click the button beside the last revision You may have to click on the last revision in order to see the button A window appears showing all the revisions made to the spool in descending order If a spool has recently been created the last revision in the properties shows Created and the revision list window does not appear 8 User Defined Attributes Any user defined attributes that have been assigned to this spool type will show up after the Revision History property To change the value simply click i
282. erent end on the part can it is automatically used instead If there is only one possible choice of connection and accessory package for the two involved end treatments it is used automatically otherwise the Select Connection and Accessory Package window will appear to allow you to choose which of each will be used If no ends on the part you are routing can connect the Stock Selection window will appear allowing you to choose from a list of stocks that do have ends that can connect to the clicked end In On the Fly mode There are two important differences from stock mode when creating connections in OTF mode The first is that in OTF mode some parts with simple geometry straights elbows transitions etc will automatically have their profile matched if it doesn t match already to the profile of the clicked existing free end Second if there are no possible connections between the two end treatments the Select Connection and Accessory Package window will appear allowing you to pick a workable combination of a connection accessory package and a new end treatment for the connecting end of the OTF part being routed If only one such combination is possible it used automatically Special cases It is possible to connect to a duct that you have XRef d in This is called a remote connection and is always a spool break A second special case is connecting to a duct from another system which also automatically becomes a spool break a warn
283. erference drawing This will only check for collisions between objects in a single drawing but it eliminates the additional overhead of creating a new interference drawing To Check Local Interferences 1 Open the planar group drawing that you want to check for interferences Checks 2 Choose SC Utilities gt Check Local Interferences page 369 to open the Interference List window 3 Follow the steps described above in the Check Interferences section starting at step 4 Check Product Hierarchy Checking the product hierarchy is not an automated command You need to check the assignment of parts to assemblies There can be cases where a modeler has mis assigned a part to the wrong assembly or the assembly stages are not completely known at the time of modeling To check an assembly 1 Create a product hierarchy drawing 2 Check for correct assignment of parts to assemblies To check assemblies 1 Create assembly drawings for the unit 2 Open each assembly drawing and verify that all the parts are there Check a Unit When you check a unit ShipConstructor checks the complete unit and its structure model drawings for errors Before the check is run you may choose to repair errors If you select No no modifications will be done to the drawings and errors will only be reported in the log file The unit check also updates the drawings to reflect any standards changes if the option to repair errors was selected When a cha
284. ermissions None License Procedure Displays the structure drawing options Drawing Options gt Pipe Drawing Options Production tab gt Main panel Drawing Options gt Pipe Drawing Options SCDWGOPTIONSPIPE Permissions None License Procedure Displays the pipe drawing options Drawing Options gt HVAC Drawing Options Production tab gt Main panel Drawing Options gt HVAC Drawing Options Command SCDWGOPTIONSHVAC Permissions None License Procedure Displays the HVAC drawing options Drawing Options gt Equipment Drawing Options Production tab gt Main panel Drawing Options gt Equipment Drawing Options Command SCDWGOPTIONSEQUIP Permissions None License Procedure Displays the Equipment drawing options 469 Appendix Production Command Reference Drawing Options gt Hanger and Support Drawing Options Production tab gt Main panel Drawing Options gt Hanger and Support Drawing Options SCDWGOPTIONSHANGANDSUPPORT Permissions None License Procedure Displays the Hanger and Support drawing options Drawing Options gt Save Drawing Options Production tab gt Main panel Equipment Drawing Options SCSAVEDRAWINGOP TIONSFROMFILE Permissions None License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure See the Equipment manual for details Saves the current drawing s drawing options to a file An
285. ersal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Transfer Leaders to Other Line Move leaders from one distribution line to another Production Utilities gt Insert Keyword Production tab gt Production Utilities panel Insert Keyword Command SCINSERTKEYWORD Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Insert Keyword into a Production Drawing Template page 226 Lets you insert a keyword into a production drawing template 485 Appendix Production Command Reference 486 he Insert Keyword k gt a eS Keywords Text Style CAS5EMBLY Ca gt lt A55EMBLY LOG gt lt AS5EMBLY LEVEL gt ZASSEMBLY MAME lt AS5EMBLY PROPERTIES gt 3 mm PS Units lt A55EMBLY T G gt ZASSEMBLY Y a gt Rotation ASSEMBLY WEIGHT gt CATEGORY gt lt COMPOANY MAME lt DESCRIPTION1 gt DESCRIPTION gt FILE NAME lt FILEPSTH gt lt FULL ASSEMBLY MAME gt HULL HUMBER gt lt J06 NUMBER gt lt LO5T UPDATE DATE AMD TIME gt lt LO5T UPDSTE DATE ROMAN Sa0 Text Size 0 degrees Keywords The list of available keywords to place in the HVAC spool template drawing Text Style The selected text style for the keywords selected under Keywords This is a list of available text styles from within the drawing If you created more text styles using AutoCAD for thi
286. es gt Rect Radial Cross page 393 Reducing Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Reducing Cross page 393 oS 2 Segment Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt 2 Segment Cross page 393 Double Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double Cross page 394 Double Reducing Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double Reducing Cross page 394 Double 2 Segment Cross See SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double 2 Segment Cross page 394 HVAC Wye Flyout Wye See SC HVAC gt Wyes gt Wye page 394 s Rect Wye See SC HVAC gt Wyes gt Rect Wye page 395 p Rect Radial Wye See SC HVAC gt WYyes gt Rect Radial Wye page 395 HVAC Transition Flyout Reducer See SC HVAC gt Transition gt Reducer page 395 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference 386 Transition See SC HVAC gt Transition gt Transition page 395 Curved Reducer See SC HVAC gt Transition gt Curved Reducer page 396 Offset See SC HVAC gt Transition gt Offset page 396 a Curved Offset See SC HVAC gt Transition gt Curved Offset page 396 3 Pantsify End See SC HVAC gt Pantsify End page 406 Y Merge to Bent See SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Merge to Bent page 402 Toggle Close HVAC end See SC HVAC gt Toggle Close HVAC end page 408 Edit Part See SC HVAC gt Pantsify End page 406 HVAC System Manager Flyout System Manager See SC HVAC gt Systems gt Sys
287. es and choose Tools gt Assembly gt Edit or right click on the assembly The Edit Assembly window appears 2 Select the new level for the assemblies in the Level list 3 Click OK Copy an Assembly To copy an assembly to another assembly 1 Inthe Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 select the assemblies you will copy and choose Tools gt Copy Assemblies This option is also available if you right click on the assembly 2 Select the assembly to paste the copied assemblies to and choose Tools gt Paste Assemblies Assign Parts Spools or Assemblies to Assemblies All three different types of objects assemblies spools and parts in the Product Hierarchy are assigned to an assembly These assignments can be modified by assigning those objects to another assembly There are two methods to do this To assign parts or assemblies to an assembly method 1 Note You cannot undo Edit gt Undo a product hierarchy assignment 1 Select the parts or spools or assemblies in the current drawing or in the Product Hierarchy palette If you select parts in the drawing they are automatically selected in the Product Hierarchy palette and vice versa You can select multiple parts by holding down the Shift or Ctrl key 2 Inthe Product Hierarchy palette drag and drop the selected objects onto the target assembly to assign them to When the Product Hierarchy is not split to the current project then the parts can
288. es changes to a project in Manager you must reload the project database for the change to appear in your ShipConstructor session To reload the project database 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator page 311 to open Navigator 2 Select the project node in the component tree on the left side of Navigator for example SC2009Demo 3 Click Reload DB 12 Drawings Change Your Password User passwords are configured using the Administrator utility Please consult the section Change User Passwords in the Project Management manual Drawings Drawings give you access to the project model data ShipConstructor saves the parts in the drawings but actually stores the parts in the database If there is any discrepancy between the drawing and the database the database Is considered to be correct Note ShipConstructor stores AutoCAD objects in the drawings only not in the database ales Drawings Read in drawing file PF SHIPCONSTRLIC EC Fead data fram database specific to the drawing SF DH RETRATOS Compare database and drawing part lists SP SePCONS TEUCTOR Do parts exist in database only seePconsneucrod g TES Wo Do parts exist in Yes drawing onle SF SIPC One O y Mo 14 Keep parts Parts are loaded SF HPE on eure Parts are flagged for delete SF SHIPL ONS TRL TOR Parts are exploded and placed on REY layer Explode parts Parts are erase
289. eseesesassesassesassesacsesaneesansesanes 39 MDO ACCESSORY PACKAGES iea aa AA AAA 40 EXON ACCESS OMY P OCK IGES erian ect E EIRE EEEIEE EEEIEE 40 Naming CONVENON Siana N EE A E A NE NA EA 40 Naming Conventions VV NCL OWN isaisa aia a ldo ele Sen dal van ala e aa 41 Activate a Namn CONVENON rearset nanan eA aT ANa AAE aTa EAA ER AO AN E 45 Rename a Namh CONVENON ovvatslerateateuternlcatssdvinlunienlavntenicdusalvnieulaiedanlcedniptuatetel ONOONO 45 D letera Naming CONVENTION sina viii mind AAAA AAAA 45 IVT NAINA Aliase Senny caso emetic se edge tela non ae Bets eB ce dB eat enatbeditenensudl 45 SST ST aI SIN AVS SUM TO NPD Skate etcetera een ete lalallala edn ES 46 Naming COnNventuon COM CE DES wessscicsindscicvindsivsranidaseavi A A A A A 47 Beels ceda N eA E AAA EE EA ner nnn ent E neg EA A E EA E 48 user pened ARIDUTES oe hea tha et Dracaena choad aac dae 49 create a WSer Denned AlN DULG niniin AA toni ioa deta Sonne inb artist eu hei oniiads 50 Assign a User Defined Attribute to a Material Grade cccssssssssssscsssssssscssssesssessrsaseesassesassesassesassesassesassesansesansesasas 50 Default Values on Required User Defined AttriDUtes cccesccssssessssesssscsssscsssssssccesesessssesssseseeseseeseseesaseesasersasersasensass 51 import User Defined AEM DUES rnini AANA NAE AOON OOS 51 Peeve WS Sr ST SCA CONS fcc cerned dpe bead ade ta ead naa daca tae canada 51 RET TCSII eae t eet ce neak acc neue neues hhc each teal ack eak ec Weal ett
290. esessrsersaeseserseesasseserseesesesersansessesersansesensensatees 367 SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Remove Style OVEITIAE ccscecssssssrssrsssssssrssrssseserseesacseserseeseseesersaesessesersatsesersensasees 367 SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Update LOCAtIONS c cscsesssssscssssssssessssessssessssessesesesesseseseeseseesaseesasersaseesasersaseneass 367 SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Edit Location GrOUDS ccssesssssssserssrssssssersersacsessrsesassesersersessesersansassrsersansesensensatees 367 SC UUIITIES ReTerence WINGS gt Creare niinen an A AA AAA een 368 SC Utilities gt EIST tent WITAIE BIOCK XTE sscitonsiacesscnssiaselsnesaianienassuiuienausstirnigatnensndslionnn dsitonanidasaensnedsateaiitenionoditenginpeasaiinnedstaiiobie 369 SG UGIITIES gt COCK LO Call ISTO VST OS snerist visia e eai lesetad ajia alent aiiai 369 SC Utilities gt Export Export to DW Gicssiiiiennnnnananantiananinnwanadeen Wada da aninachnaia 369 SC Utilities gt Export gt EXDOrt LON WG ainiaan OOE OIRO 369 SEIS sSNA secs entrap crc me cmc ts eso a a mn weston gna tee a a a ttandeooe ness 370 SC Utilities gt Random Color annnars naaa E A T A ANAA ANEA RA 370 SC Utilities gt ShipCAM gt IMport Files noii EEOAE 370 SscC utilities gt SHIDCAM gt Convert IGES to MESI veire tei eienaar a aN shes E Eaa 370 COM Maen Colm aS arna aaa aa 371 SOW Ex CICS Dal dorantes pee pea a iaai E NTE R E a e 371 CODY POUCA GVA NV eiie
291. ess will be affected If you have custom annotations or any other geometry in the arrangement drawing it will not be affected during updating 276 Getting Started with Production jpdated Arrangement Drawing Sources and Layers Define the sources to Bring in ShipConstructor parts and the destination layers to place parts either from new Sources or new parts from existing sources Existing parts r e will retain any manual changes made i Conflict Resolution to them before the update Layers can be chosen from a list which A conflict occurs when a part exists for multiple includes the layers found in the sources with at least 2 different layers chosen for drawing or entered as text those sources Ex A pipe belongs to System A and is in drawing B System Ais selected as a source with its destination layer as X and drawing B ts selected mh with its layer as Y Acad Sources and Layers The part is conflicted between layer X and Y For each conflict choose the layer that you want Define which drawings you wish to rts from the conflicted sources to go to import AutoCAD geometry from and pa go wo the layers to place them on for each be a source All existing AutoCAD i y i geometry is removed from the drawing Layer Conflict i initially Layers can be chosen from a list which included the layers found in the drawing or entered as text Acad Geometry gt Fi Modified Parts Shows parts that are
292. eunticasene wanscnrs dese aebanc mut cab rawaliadennn ia bane vatewait suds uaattiade enue adsleauenedsouscdntseas sabuaseadtenmeennatel 7 DERO Sata catatonia E ear ele alo EEA E AOA EA 10 CSOD COIS ES nrn E E A ae a ae ee ar ee A 11 RELOJN CO SNDCONSUUCTO eanan e alittle Big BS iBaileDtinninan Di 12 Reload a ONC Daaba teense leet encarta secant wale EIRE AEREA IOI RENOIR 12 Change Your PasSSWOldsresisnsasannonsasnsa ct cen est vast anaana aaa aAa 13 Drawings 13 Opena DraWi Nienie aa aAA A A AA 15 create AWW UNG arrian naaa A A AA 15 LOCK Or UMNOCK A DAWN O iienaa enra E Aa aa aE a 15 Rename a ey WWI Gy sears wit ER eta tg teagan aaah EAA tatceaioeo 16 Delete d Dra WiNG arraie cba O A uaa ea nha wad ans naa aed ota aaa eam Ade SAAT aR 16 Saved Dia WIAG sieviiniisned iron AEAT OAE Ane Tiina indi tnt 16 CHOS HNC a WN YG saesae enine cunt imouto inte Bis BBD Di Rl eid iene bloc BAe Bs 16 Set Up Composite Dra WINGS ii scavels kacicsc st aceust scaatesatacuetes laced S AET 16 Insert Link a Drawihg 1NtO ANOther DraWIAG siniiissinninsenndiieedvrenadvienniiin intends AL UNDA lNb 18 Configuring Viewport Dependant Display Options cccecssssssssssessssesssssssserssssessseesesceseseesessesesceseeceseeseseesesensasensasenses 19 Exporting ShipConstructor Drawings 21 EX DOME TO DWC sscsis ies ccssttsien ns oa S a alia ba dati oBeviaie ade Nama detstieeelhabS tai un ts detioabstes 21 EAO Fea AE garter nee ntact alien alee da AAA AA een fen nce van eal ale A
293. evisions in the current layout 483 Appendix Production Command Reference Adjust Leader Spacing Button se Ribbon Production tab gt Labeling panel Menu Adjust Leader Spacing Command SCCREATEDISTRIBUTIONLINE Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Adjust Leader Spacing Adjust minimum leader spacing setting on the leader distribution line This setting will be used when Redistribute Leaders is used Attach to Viewport Tracking Production tab gt Labeling panel Attach to Viewport Tracking Command SCATTDL Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Attach to Viewport Tracking Viewport tracking allows certain objects to translate in accordance with pan and zoom operations in the viewport The following objects can be attached to viewport tracking e Distribution lines e ShipConstructor labels SConLabel e AutoCAD leaders e MText e AutoCAD Text e Lines Create Leader Distribution Line Production tab gt Labeling panel Create Leader Distribution Line Command SCCREATEDISTRIBUTIONLINE Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Create Leader Distribution Line Creates
294. file Shape Rectangle width SOO mm Height 300 mm Corner Radius 0 mm Max Length 2000 mm Min Length 100 mm End 1 End Treatment circ Aluminum Al End 2 End Treatment circ Aluminum Al 104 HVAC Library Setup 2 Select the naming convention you want to use When you select a naming convention a generated name appears in the stock name field for your viewing 3 Click a different field in the Edit HVAC Stock window to hide the naming convention selection menu Description Optional A description of the duct Measurements The system of measurements either Metric or Imperial By default measurements are set to the project s system of measurements Sheet Stock The sheet stock from which the duct is made See Sheet Stocks page 92 Insulation Optional The insulation applied to the duct See Insulation page 35 for information on how to set up insulation See Insulation Reference page 431 for information on how insulation is used throughout ShipConstructor Finishes Optional The finishes applied to the duct See Finishes for information on how to set up a finish See Finishes Reference page 432 for information on how finishes are used throughout ShipConstructor Weight The weight of the duct e Auto calculation Check the check box if you want ShipConstructor to calculate the weight for you The weight will be calculated using the geometry of the duct and the densities of the materials specified f
295. fined attributes assigned to the same types listed in the Attibute list will be shown 2E Import Pipe UDAs from Database Import Mame Is Required Default Value Pipe User Defined Attributes Pipe Parts Valve Type Ball Tag Number Required and dete Valve Type Butterfly Tag Number Required and dete Valve Type Check Tag Number Required and defi Valve Type Diaphragm Tag Number Required and dete ahoan Tiros Take Caneel Import Check each user defined attribute that you need to import General gt Naming Conventions General gt Naming Conventions None Permissions Structure gt Manager gt Edit Naming Conventions Permissions Pipe gt Manager gt Edit Naming Conventions Permissions HVAC gt Manager gt Edit Naming Conventions Permissions Penetrations gt Manager gt Edit Naming Conventions Permissions General gt Manager gt Edit Assembly Drawing Naming Conventions Procedure Naming Conventions page 40 Opens the Naming Conventions window letting you create and edit naming conventions Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Naming Conventions Window Naming Conventions E Hew 9X Delete YA zet Active G amp Manage Aliases 7 Generate Mames ki Usage Log Mame Conventions Elements In Use Mame Conventions Active Element Type Summ ary I Space Allocation Static Space Allocations Skatic H Standard Assemblies H Parts in Standard Skatic E Spools in Stand
296. finished layout for printing or plotting To switch between paper space and model space 1 Atthe bottom of the drawing window click the Model tab to switch to model space or click the Layout tab to switch to paper space Note A drawing can have more than one Layout tab 25 Exporting ShipConstructor Drawings Windows and Editors When a window or editor opens there are numerous features designed to help you accomplish the task you are doing Some of the most commonly used features are the following e If information is sorted in a column you can click the column name to sort the list alohanumerically e Click the column name a second time to sort the information in reverse alohanumerical order e If a window consists of more than one tabbed panel you can move between tabs using the left and right arrow keys only when a tab name is highlighted e Press Tab to navigate among the window s elements e Press Esc to close a window Structural Design Workflow 26 The workflow of ShipConstructor will differ between companies due to the specific work processes of the company The following example is a typical high level flowchart of the Structure discipline Catalog Setup Saji up stocka materiali stamdards Set up Build Strategy Divide vessel into units and assemblies Set up Planar Groups Sel up drawings bo model structure Set up Boundaries Sel up lines thai define the edges of part
297. fy Pi k Max E Save a Refresh Ed Impnet E 5 I Exiort volumes b hioa Mm L Mn Pim w Max L baer Eber matar axt bates bane mter enter mte enter ther Je enber mter wea ener mter ial ener mte j a a Cy oft G Forward ig Forcdeck i rooo0 0000 ja S905 i 9935 73400 S fg IbIObY i Ring rane i 12000 32400 ia T Frame i 30000 30100 Ej Wulurie Mar ayer Select a volume folder or click New Folder to create a folder Click New Volume A new row appears Enter a name for the volume If you know the coordinates of the volume enter those in the columns and proceed to step 9 If you do not then open a drawing that contains the references you need Click Pick Min select a minimum point 8 Click Pick Max Select a maximum point oP et ee ee 9 Click Save The new volume is saved to the database and ready to be used as a source for production drawings Creating Production Drawings Creating production drawings Is done using a drawing creation wizard Each production drawing type has a different wizard When a production drawing Is generated it will update any BOM tables and keywords present Edit Production Drawings When some production drawings are generated they can just be reviewed and plotted but others may require detailing work Any of the set up performed in the template drawing can also be performed in the production drawing Insert
298. fy each end for modification Right click preview commands There are right click commands available for the preview of your duct e Reset View Resets the duct to its default position e Zoom Extents zoom to the extents of the duct e Shademode The three choices are Wireframe Gouraud Shaded and Flat Shaded 105 HVAC Library Setup Reset View button The reset view button will reset the preview to the default position Operations Flip Values Profiles The Flip Values Profiles button will flip the height and width values around So if the height was 500mm and the width was 300mm the flip values profiles button when pressed will swap the values so the height becomes 300mm and the width becomes 500mm The Flip Values Profiles button will flip the height and width for all the ends on the stock Optional Modes Unrestricted Mode When checked this option will turn off most restrictions when defining a duct Optional Modes Conical When checked this option provides the ability to set an inner and outer diameter instead of just a diameter to create a conical shape for a branch Optional Modes Offsetable When checked this option provides the ability to offset a branch by means of a Longitudinal Offset parameter Component Preview Hvar Duck 5 Description Measurements Metric Sheek Stack Alz5 Insulations Finishes Weight Auto calculation Weight per unit length 12 5779 kgm Vanes Number of Yane
299. g multipart transtorms Split and Merge Yellow CJ F override Coler for Spit Part E color 9 Size 8 Relative to Part C Freed 3 Set the options See The Transform Tab page 426 for details 4 Click OK to save and close the HVAC Drawing Options window Set the Routing Options The routing options allow you to control the visibility color and size of the flow direction arrow To set the routing options 1 Choose SC HVAC gt HVAC Drawing Options to open the HVAC Drawing Options window 2 Click the Routing tab 154 HVAC Modeling ia Hvac Drawi ng Options Display WavAid Transform Routing Behaviour Show Flow Direction Show Al Arrow Color coors 140 mm 3 Set the options See The Routing Tab page 428 for details 4 Click OK to save your changes and close the HVAC Drawing Options window Set the Behavior Options The behavior options determine how to enforce the stock length To set the behavior options 1 Choose SC HVAC gt HVAC Drawing Options to open the HVAC Drawing Options window 2 Click the Behavior tab 155 HVAC Modeling linia il EE Display WavAid Transform Rowting Femeviour Stock Length Enforcement O Automatically cut to stock length Ask before cutting to stock length C Never cut to stock Length Creating warning labels for tems LI exceeding stock length on drawing save 3 Set the options See The Behavior
300. g plane will be in a plane that is close to the Deck plane but not exactly the Deck plane This is because the part end selected is not aligned exactly to the Deck plane e Frame Plane Working plane will be in the Frame plane e Frame Like Plane Working plane will be in a plane that is close to the Frame plane but not exactly in the Frame Plane This is because the part end selected is not aligned exactly to the Frame plane e LGBH Plane Working plane will be in the LGBH plane e LGBH Like Plane Working plane will be in a plane that is close to the LGBH plane but not exactly in the LGBH Plane This is because the part end selected is not aligned exactly to the LGBH plane e Pick 3rd Point for Plane This option enables you to create an arbitrary plane based on the alignment of the part and the point that you pick When this option is selected you will be prompted to pick a point UCS Origin Point This option selects your UCS origin point e Part Point Point on the part The points are at the ends of the part If there are multiple part points you can click on the Toggle button to toggle through the list of points e Origin Selecting this option will give you a UCS Origin at 0 0 0 On the part itself there is a mock plane to enable you to see where your working plane will be You can use AutoCAD s orbit command to adjust your view of the mock plane if need be This working plane automatically adjusts as you select diffe
301. g the spool 790619 20619 Flange Rotation Angles Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Value Not used no no no 200 HVAC SPOOL Best Fit 100 DEFAULT yes yes yes yes If the end part of a spool is a flange which is connected to a valve outside of the spool a rotation angle is calculated If the end part is a flange but it is not connected to a valve a rotation angle will be calculated if the dimension orientation Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference used is not Ship Coordinate System The rotation angle indicates the angle the flange needs to be rotated so that the bolt holes will be aligned when the spool is produced Er a el Rotation Angle WF SHIPCONSTRUCTOR 4 SHIPYARD ITC ET lie LEH Ba 002 005 Spool Drawings Valves Icons The valve icons are used to represent valves in 2D line mode for spool drawings The valve icons are made up of 3 parts valve ends body icons and valve handles Valve Ends The valve ends are drawn as triangles The base of the triangle is drawn at the end of the valve with the tip pointing to the center of the valve The plane the triangles are drawn in will adjust based on the current view direction When the valve ends are drawn on end the ends will be drawn as a circle with an S in it Body Icons The body icons will draw a 2D representation of the selected body icon used for the valve The body icons can either be an arrow sphere
302. ge 244 Labels the selected parts from the BOMs associated with the viewport If no BOM is associated with the viewport then no labels will be created If the current space is paperspace then the command will switch to tiled model space to select parts in model space Label gt Track Label Positions Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Track Label Positions Command SCLABELTRACK Permissions None License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Track Label Positions page 246 Setting to control if labels to parts are moved or stretched when panning and zooming in a viewport or the part is moved The setting is saved on the computer so when it is changed it affects all drawings for that user on the computer Label gt Delete All Labels Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Delete All Labels SCLABELDELETEALL Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Deletes all SConLabel objects and leader distribution lines from all layouts This command is used when complete relabeling is needed 479 Appendix Production Command Reference Label gt Delete Labels in Current Layout Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Delete Labels in Current Layout SCLABELDELETELAYOUT Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal
303. ger Command SCVOLUMEMGR Permissions General gt Edit Volumes License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Volumes page 235 Co New Folder i New Vourre Y Delete Pick Min Pick Max ae x Refresh PdlImport ad Export Exoort Yolures MIn T Piri hy Max L Mla T Mla Y Enter E Enbar Ditar Ja En w ar T y Entar Diter Ma Enter Aitea a E E a A AF 9 Forward l Faredeck 3 7oo00 B0000 l 3305 3 49938 73400 3 fa IDOD l Ring Frane 32000 32400 ia WT Frame i 30000 30400 Ej Vulurne Wlariayer New Folder creates a new folder under whatever volume folder is selected to organize different volumes If no volume folder is selected it creates a root folder New Volume creates a new volume under whatever volume folder is selected Delete Deletes selected volumes and volume folders Pick Min when a volume is selected click this to pick the minimum extents of the volume in the current drawing Note if the selected point is larger in any dimension than the max extents the dimension will be swapped so as to maintain true min and max extents of the volume Pick Max when a volume is selected click this to pick the maximum extents of the volume in the current drawing Note if the selected point is smaller in any dimension than the min extents the dimension will be swapped so as to maintain true min and max extents of the volume 461 Appendix Production Command R
304. gs page 163 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference Inserts a square tee duct 389 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Tees gt Rect Radial Tee HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Tees gt Rect Radial Tee Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Tee Flyout gt Oe Command SCHvacRectRadTee Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a rectangular radial tee duct SC HVAC gt Tees gt Reducing Tee HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Tees gt Reducing Tee Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Tee Flyout gt Command SCHvacRedTee Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a reducing tee duct SC HVAC gt Tees gt 2 Segment Tee HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Tees gt 2 Segment Tee Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Tee Flyout e Command SCHvac2SegTee Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a two segment tee duct SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double Tee HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Tees gt Tee Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Tee Flyout gt je Command SCHvacDbITee Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a double tee duct 390 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double Reducing Tee HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Tees gt Tee Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC
305. gt ER uoi_rez izo U0 MR7E 170 BP uow_Frec UO FRFC SF uu Hw UUL HR gt EF int RFS IIM R77 EP uoi Erl UOL ELAY ER uo R77 UOL RFF MEF uo Re UOL FRE m E uo1_FRee UOI FRE IER uoi_Fres Udi FRES EB uoi m71 U1 R74 ER uoi_rroz U0 ROZ Co Gee Looe 10 ShipConstructor automatically determines all the drawings that it must collect parts from to populate the arrangement drawing In addition to ShipConstructor geometry you may also import non ShipConstructor entities You can later change these sources by updating the arrangement drawing See Update a Production Drawing page 246 Select all drawings that you also want to import non ShipConstructor geometry from and set destination layers for all non ShipConstructor geometry Click Finish 11 The arrangement drawing will be generated and all Bill of Materials tables and keywords will be updated automatically Depending on the number of sources selected and the contents of the selected sources this process may take some time 12 The Layer Conflict Resolution window appears if there are any conflicts between destination layers of any parts in the drawing See also Layer Conflict Resolution Reference page 274 294 Ea Layer Conflict Resolution Distributed Systems Production Drawings Parts from the sources selected have multiple layers assigned tothem Select a layer fo each conflict to resolve this Laver Contlicts 641 BLOTI641_ Bilge and ballast 64 1 BLO4 641_ Bilge and ba
306. hange an existing stock you can edit it 138 HVAC Library Setup To edit a stock 1 Open the HVAC Stocks window See Stocks page 102 2 Select the stock you want to edit 3 Click Edit to open the Edit HVAC Stock window HY Edit Elbow Attributes Component Preview General Rect 300x500 HalfThroat Slipon Description Measurements Metric Sheet Stock 16a Galy Insulations Finishes B Weight Guto calculation Value 3 524656 kg Yanes Number of Yanes Motes Elbow Specific Elbow Type Mitered Angle Throat Radius Segments m E Profile Rectangle 300 mmx 500 mm Profile Shape Rectangle Flip values Width Height Corner Radius End Treatment SlipSn ASTM 4 105 30 mm x 4 mm Male Throat Length End 2 E Profile Rectangle 300 mmx 500 mm Profile Shape Rectangle Width Height Corner Radius End Treatment SlipOn ASTM 4 105 30 mmx 4 mm Female Throat Length Elbow Offset Cancel Tip You can also double click the stock or any of its properties to open the Edit HVAC Stock window See Create a Stock page 103 for details on the properties you can edit 4 Click OK when you are finished editing Note Editing the non geometric properties of In Use stocks is now possible To do this you require the Edit In Use Stock Non Geometric Properties permission under HVAC gt Manager in the User Permissions dialog Changes made to stocks that are in use in production drawings will cause the production dr
307. harge of 2 per month 24 annually on the unpaid balance of the amount from the due date until the date of receipt of all amounts in arrears including interest 15 Purchase Orders Any purchase order an Order delivered by Licensee shall at all times be deemed to Incorporate this Agreement by reference and shall be subject to the applicable provisions of this Agreement Any provisions of an Order shall not apply and shall not be binding upon SSI unless they relate to information which was requested by SSI In the event of a conflict or an inconsistency between the provisions of an Order and the terms and conditions of this Agreement this Agreement shall govern and supersede to the extent of such conflict or inconsistency 16 Limited Warranty SSI warrants that during a period of 90 days from the date of delivery of the Licensed Materials to Licensee the Warranty Period the Licensed Materials will perform substantially in accordance with the Licensed Materials documentation specifications when used in accordance with this Agreement on a properly operating System Configuration SSI s sole obligation under this Warranty and Licensee s exclusive remedy shall be to use reasonable commercial efforts to correct Errors a bug defect or other problem incurred by a user in operating the Software that prevents the Software from performing in a manner consistent with the applicable specifications set out in the User Manual that the Li
308. he XOffset and YOffset options or choose an offset corresponding to a point on the bounding box of a duct s profile with the Choose offset option An example of how an offset vector affects the routing of a duct is shown below roi i F F a wa Fai F P _ a U U a l 176 HVAC Modeling Duct routed with four input points from several line segments with a left offset of 500 offset vector lt 500 0 gt Object Snaps HVAC ducts have several Object snap points that you may find useful when routing ducts or transforming existing ducts see Multi Part Transforms page 183 or Single Part Transforms page 182 The Object snaps can be enabled or disabled by clicking the OSNAP button on the AutoCAD status bar by pressing F3 or by right clicking on the OSNAP button and clicking On or Off To enable or disable the Object snaps types right click on the OSNAP button and click Settings Endpoint Object Snaps AutoCAD Endpoint Object snaps can be found at end points of ducts and at end points of the subsegments of a bent duct Midpoint Object Snaps AutoCAD Midpoint Object snaps can be found on the midpoint of straight segments of ducts ON Nearest Object snap HVAC ducts support AutoCAD s nearest Object snap by snapping points to each duct s centerline Custom Object Snaps In addition to the supported AutoCAD Object snaps several custom Object snap types are supported The custom Object snaps can be enabled or disabl
309. he drawing If the spool is not approved then the spool needs to be approved in the spool manager ShipConstructor determines all parts that need to be updated The Modified Part Information window appears See also Updating an Arrangement Drawing page 247 HE Modified Fart Information ee Dk amp e ttle 0h Fart Ware Sat c JES Szak c 1690 Sratec 2z07 l Siate PETE rab r H rakc 2211 rab ces VA rakc 2214 Srakc 2715 Sal L Z216 Srakc 823 Sal Lozi Srakc 821 SCRE Ye a tre BLAM S05C 64 1 BLC 1 0 12 305C 64 1 ELC1 01E 305C 64 BLC 1 0 12 305C 647 BLC1 01E AIL 41 A 1 1114 J05C 041 DLC1 012 AIL 41 A 1 111 05C 041 DL01 012 305C 64 1 ELC1 01E S05C 0 1 BLC1 015 305C 641 BLO1 015 S05C 0 1 BLC1 015 305C 64 1 ELC1 01E last Keven lype odFled ModFicd wooed Modfisd wooed ModFisd Wodiied udiizd Modified uid odFiad Lash Reweinr Ser ARLE MAI chris ARLOCMATY chrize ARLE MAI chris ALLOCMATY chrise ARII X MAr hrie ARLOCMALY chrise ARII CMGI hres ARLOCMALY chrise ARU MAT chrize APLOCMAT Yl rise ARLOVIMAT My chrize AREMA rise ARLDOCMATN chrize Last Heveion IAE L703 L054 ale 2172013 11 08 50 AV L703 11 06 50 AM 217 2013 11 08 52 AV A AATA TUR al oe m i7i2013 11 00 53 AY A AATA TUR al oe Brirf2oid 11 00 54 AY 2 1F 2013 11 08 59 AM Elrf2015 11 06 50 AY a 17 2013 11 08 50 AW a i7i2013 11 06 52 AY 2 i7013 11 08 52 AV cea WFLA 1 enbe Hignicht Zoom
310. he entire system that contains all parts in the selected system model drawing Layer conflicts may arise in this situation but will be dealt with in a later step Note You may also choose to retain the layers of the part from its model drawing source at this step Choosing Retain Model Drawing Layers from the dropdown in the layer column will cause the layers from all model drawings containing parts in the current source to be copied into the arrangement drawing and the parts will be moved to the copy of the layer of their source This brings in all layers from the source not just ones used by parts in the given source Note While selecting sources if you hold down the Alt key while checking a box that box s children will not be checked otherwise the children will be selected 293 Distributed Systems Production Drawings Note You can optionally not show spools as a source with the Show Spools check box You can also force spools to override any possible layer conflicts caused by parts existing in multiple selected sources with the Spool Layers override conflicts check box 9 Click Next hdd crete Srrangemert Danang ES Ctcp 4of 4 Please acheck al the drawings From vhich you wish ko mport Aukol4 gt geon ekey cmd che lovers bo place khem cn Drains aver a Entar Afar Fe xr Pinter Aras baer iF uoi uo Of O Structure Structure i C Frame Frane 7 EE uu He 4 UUL HES EF int RAE lit _FRAE EP uot Fars UD R75
311. he following object types e Plates e Stiffeners with a straight construction line e Faceplates with a straight construction line e Any object that is planar SC Utilities gt Reload Drawing Structure Modeling tab gt Modeling Utilities panel gt Reload Drawing SC Utilities gt Reload Drawing SCRELOAD Permissions None Procedure None Updates all parts and construction lines in the drawing to reflect what Is stored in the database This command simulates the closing and opening of the current drawing You cannot undo this command Any objects that were erased will be removed from the database SC Utilities gt Create Quality Matrix Structure Production gt Modeling Production Utilities tab gt Create Quality Matrix SC Utilities gt Create Quality Matrix SCQUALMTX Permissions None Procedure Insert a Quality Control Matrix into an Assembly Drawing page 238 Inserts a quality control matrix into a drawing A quality control matrix is used for dimensional checking It shows the straight line distances between selected points 361 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 362 After inserting the matrix any of the dimension points or labels can be moved The length values will be updated when a View gt Regen is run The format of the lengths in the matrix is controlled by the Format gt Units settings Quality Matrix Options Quality Matrix Options Label Bubble style Bubble Bubble Margi
312. he following value Category ENDEN ft Equipment Part Equipment Part Equipment Part Equipment Part Equipment Part Equipment Part Equipment Part Equipment Fart Equipment Part Equipment Park Equipment Part Equipment Part Equipment Part Equipment Part Assemcly Assemcly Assembly Assemcly Assermcly Assemcly Assemcly Assemcly Assemcly Asserilly Assemcly Assembly Assemcly Assemble Spey emer Be ek Date Enter Sier text ziL7 Z0l13 Lid2 4l aM 211712013 11 92 41 AM Bil 2013 11 32 41 AM 2117 2013 11 92 41 AM 211712013 11 92 40 AM 211712013 11 92 40 AM 211712013 11 92 40 AM ail SPs 11240 AM 211712013 11 92 40 AM 2M 2013 11 92 40 AM 2017 2015 11 92 40 AM 2017 2015 11 92 40 AM 211712013 11 92 40 AM 211712013 11 92 40 AM A232013 7 50 55 4M A230013 7 50 55 4M 4 20f 2019 7 52 55 AM A233013 7 50 55 4M 4252015 7 50 46 4M 4 25 2015 7 50 46 AM 4 25 2015 7 50 46 4M 4 25 2015 7 50 48 4M 4 25 2015 7 49 46 AM 4 23 2013 7 43 46 AM 4 25 2015 7 49 46 AM 4 23 2014 7 44 44 AM 4 22 2013 3 00 27 PM izzina an PM Page Lof 2 j Object Enter nier taxt SPP 40 R 46 UG 3 z0 VALYE CHEST SxDN1I0 001 BAFFLE PLATE O230 5 003 FO FILTER DNS0 002 FO FILTER DNS0 002 BAFFLE PLATE D230 8 003 VALYE CHEST SxDN1I0 001 SPP 4U RK 46 Ug d u HOL D130 001 HOL 0130 004 HOL 0130 003 BAFFLE PLATE 0140 8 001 SPF 40 R 4608 3 W20 FO FILTER DNS0 001 PROUECT UCZ PROUECT UC2 PROICCT UCZ D1291 PROJECTIUCZ D3400 PROUECT
313. he name of the source for the layer name Retain Model Drawing Layers Places parts on the same layer as they are in the model drawings keywordSmport Layer Automatic Labeling 299 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 300 Adjacent part edge tolerance Edges will be less likely to be labeled if they are closer than this distance to an edge of another part Default value is 0 5 mm See Label gt Adjacent Part Edge Tolerance page 481 Distribution Mode Automatic distributing functions will use this setting as the distribution mode User can set the value to one of the three distribution modes Nearest Center and Equidistant Default Value is Nearest Edge Determination Minimum Angle See Label gt Edge Determination Minimum Angle page 481 Edge Corner Clearance Distance See Label gt Corner Clearance page 481 Label Point to Visible Edges See Label gt Label on Visible Edge On Off page 480 Remove Curved Plate Parts HLR See Label gt Curved Plates in Visible Edge Detection On Off page 481 Reports Company Name A text field that can be inserted into production drawings as a keyword This is included in the header of reports Hull Number A text field that can be inserted into production drawings as a keyword Job Number A text field that can be inserted into production drawings as a keyword Project Description A text field that can be inserted into production drawings as a keyword Project Na
314. he value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt REVISION DESCRIP TION gt The description entered for the last revision for the layout the keyword is on lt REVISION NAME gt The name entered for the last revision for the layout the keyword Is on lt REVISION OPERATION DATE AND TIME gt The date and time of the last operation revision added drawing updated for the layout the keyword is on The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt REVISION OPERATION DATE gt The date of the last operation revision added drawing updated for the layout the keyword is on The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt REVISION OPERATION USER gt The user name of the last operation revision added drawing updated for the layout the keyword is on lt REVISION USER gt The user name of the revision for the layout the keyword Is on SERS Keywords for Arrangement Template Drawings lt ASSEMBLY CGs gt The Center of Gravity of each assembly source for the arrangement drawing A row for each assembly will be shown The rows are sorted by the name of the assembly The value will be N A when the drawing has no assembly sources Each center of gravity is shown as lcg tcg vcg lt ASSEMBLY LEVELS gt The level rank name of each assembly source for the arrangement drawing A row for each assembly will be shown The rows are sorted by the name of the assembly The value will be N A
315. his lets you filter out very Small interferences during interference checking that may be the result of parts just touching interpolation errors by the computer or interferences so small that production will not notice them Project ID The unique project identifier Project Length Units The length units used throughout the project for example the units that AutoCAD geometry will be drafted in Do not change this setting after you have begun working on a project View From Aft This setting indicates which direction modeling in Frame Planar Group Model Drawings will take place This setting should be on if you prefer looking at frames from aft to forward This setting is determined when the project is create and is not changeable Hull HVAC HVAC Colors HVAC Sizes Penetrations Pipe Pipe Colors Pipe Sizes PipeLink Bolt Diameter Units Defines the units for bolt diameters in PipeLink PCF files Bolt Length Units Defines the units for bolt lengths in PipeLink PCF files Bore Units Defines the units for component nominal sizes in PipeLink PCF files Coordinate Units Defines the units for all coordinates in PipeLink PCF files Rotation Units Defines the units for rotational gap entries in support attributes in PipeLink PCF files Weight Units Defines the units for component weights in PipeLink PCF files Production Drawings Import Layer The default setting for part layers when creating a production drawing Source Name uses t
316. ht page 388 Bent See SC HVAC gt Bent page 389 Elbow See SC HVAC gt Elbow page 389 HVAC Tee Flyout Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Tee page 389 Square Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Square Tee page 389 re Rect Radial Tee 383 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference 384 See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Rect Radial Tee page 390 Reducing Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Reducing Tee page 390 amp 2 Segment Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt 2 Seqment Tee page 390 D Double Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double Tee page 390 Double Reducing Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double Reducing Tee page 391 Double 2 Segment Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double 2 Segment Tee page 391 HVAC Lateral Flyout Lateral SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Lateral page 391 WN M M Reducing Lateral See SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Reducing Lateral page 391 alt 2 Segment Lateral See SC HVAC gt Laterals gt 2 Segment Lateral page 392 Double Lateral See SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double Lateral page 392 Double Reducing Lateral See SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double Reducing Lateral page 392 fs Double 2 Segment Lateral See SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double 2 Segment Lateral page 392 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference HVAC Cross Flyout Cross e SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Cross page 393 Se Rect Radial Cross See SC HVAC gt Cross
317. hy assembly name of an ancestor assembly of your entity Which level s assembly name Is returned depends on which Assembly Tree Level you select from the Tree Level drop down list The list of assembly levels depends on how you structure your Product Hierarchy tree Note If the part is in an assembly with a level higher than the selected assembly tree level nothing is returned for that element Extrusion Profile Standard Type applies to stiffeners Examples of extrusion profile standard types are angle bulb flat structural pipe custom and tee Extrusion profile standard types can be aliased using the Naming Convention Alias Manager File Path applies to Plate Nests It returns the path to the plate nest drawing starting from the Nest folder The purpose of the file path element is to let you put the product hierarchy location in the plate nest name This is done by creating a directory structure in the Nests folder that matches the product hierarchy and then putting plate nest drawings at the appropriate location in the folder structure Major Stock Type applies to all Structure parts Examples of major stock types are plate extrusion corrugated and plank Major stock types can be aliased using the Naming Convention Alias Manager Material returns the material name of the stock Material Grade returns the material grade of the stock Nest Drawing returns the nest drawing name of plate nests Nominal Size returns the nominal size of th
318. ick OK Object Enabler You will not be able to open ShipConstructor drawings in plain AutoCAD without ShipConstructor or the ShipConstructor Object Enabler The object enabler is a separate installation that contains a portion of ShipConstructor that allows the custom objects to be accessible The object enabler contains no commands and is not connected to the project database You cannot edit parts or construction lines Changes or additions to non ShipConstructor objects are permitted Note Object Enabler is available as a free download from www ShipConstructor com Do not install both the object enabler and ShipConstructor on the same computer Views You can adjust the view within any drawing 24 Exporting ShipConstructor Drawings Select a 3D or 2D View To select a 3D or 2D view 1 Choose SC Utilities gt 3D Viewpoint page 349 to open the Select View window 2 Select the 3D tab Description PLAN LOOKING DOW Paint 3 Select a point within the 3D ship hull image Note You can also manually enter the viewpoint values beside VPoint 4 Click OK Switch Between Paper Space and Model Space Each drawing contains two types of views e The model space view represents your model in three dimensions You use the model space view for modeling and drafting e The paper space view represents your model in two dimensions as it would be printed or plotted on paper You can use the paper space view for creating a
319. ield labels can be copied using standard AutoCAD techniques or by using the ShipConstructor field copy commands Copying by AutoCAD techniques does not replace the object references within the fields Another command must be run afterward if object references are to be changed The ShipConstructor copy methods replace the object references during the copying procedure The SCFieldLabelCopy command copies the MText block and then prompts the user to select a new object reference place and place a new leader section To Copy a Field Label MText 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Property Labels gt Copy Property Label 2 Select the leader or mtext ShipConstructor automatically determines the association between the label and mtext if any Select the new part to replace the object reference within the field If the mtext is associated with a leader select the new leader origin Select the mtext or leader tail position The SCFieldLabelCopyQuick command copies the mtext block and then prompts the user to select a new object reference and position The existing leader geometry is retained To Quick Copy a Field Label MText 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Property Labels gt Quick Copy Property Label 2 Select the leader or mtext ShipConstructor automatically determines the association between the label and mtext if any Select the new part to replace the object reference within the field Select the leader or mtext position Getting Started w
320. ight of the label inherits its value from the dimension style s Text height 442 Appendix Production Command Reference wits Mew Dimension style SC Label Symbols and Arrows Text Primary Units Alternate Unita Text appearance T ext style Standard i jik T ext color O ByBhock Fall color oo Fraction height scale F13 409T Draw frame around text T ext placement Text alignment Vertical Centered Horizontal H orizontal Centered 6 Aligned with dimension line View Direction Left to Right Offset from dim line 0 0900 z O 1S0 standard The size of the arrow of the label s leader inherits its value from the dimension style s Arrow size 443 Appendix Production Command Reference 444 wists Mew Dimension style SC Label Symbols and Arrows Primary Units Alternate Units Arrowheads First i Second me Leader Hee Closed filled nal O Size R12 403 i 2 0000 Are length symbol Preceding dimension text Center marks i i 0 Above dimension text C None Mark Line Radius jog dimension O None Dimension Break nog ance H Break size Linear jag dimension 0 1250 Jog height factor 1 5000 Text height Num Segments The number of segments to include in the leader This only affects manual labeling Automatic labeling uses a maximum of 1 segment Scale to Viewport Is the size of the label scaled depending on the viewport s scal
321. ile is stored in the LogFiles HVAC Stock Usage folder Import Stocks You can import stocks from another project or from an XML file that is exported from another project To import stocks Open the HVAC Stocks window See Stocks page 102 Click Import to open a File Browser Select a project file PRO or XML file XML Click Open to open the Import HVAC Stocks window Check the import check boxes of all the stocks you want to import Click OK oe et ee LS a Export Stocks You can export stocks to an XML file for example to import into another project or to edit using other software To export stocks 1 Open the HVAC Stocks window See Stocks page 102 2 Check the Export check boxes for the stocks to export 3 Click Export XML to open a File Browser 4 Entera name for the XML file 5 Click Save 141 HVAC Library Setup Catalogs A catalog is a collection of HVAC stocks similar to the physical catalog of a supplier from whom you purchase HVAC stock By setting up catalogs of HVAC stock in ShipConstructor you can reproduce your supplier s physical catalogs or categorize HVAC stock into logical groups To open the edit HVAC catalogs window 1 Open the HVAC Stocks window See Stocks page 102 2 Click Edit Catalogs to open the Edit HVAC Catalogs window ES Edit HVAC Catalogs Export In Use Catalog Description Es Mew Cat Import F HVAC Catalog 1 Cx _ Create a Catalog You can cre
322. in this field The Licensed Materials requires independent confirmation of the reliability and accuracy of all designs drawings and other Licensed Materials output An SSI representative may be made available under a separate consulting agreement at the Licensee s request to provide training and consultation on the operation or integration of licensed materials 5 Limitations on Use Licensee shall a not make more copies of the Licensed Materials than are necessary for the Licensee s installation of the Licensed Materials and shall only create backup copies for archival or emergency restart purposes b maintain a log of the number of and location of all originals and copies of the Licensed Materials c include SSI s copyright trademark and proprietary notices on any complete or partial copies of the Licensed Materials in the same form and location as the notice on any original work d not attempt to defeat any copy protection e not modify any documentation including any user manuals f not modify translate reverse engineer decompile or disassemble the Licensed Materials g not sublicense transfer assign sell loan rent or lease the Licensed Materials other than as permitted in this Agreement h use the Licensed Materials for its own internal use only i not permit any third party to use the Licensed Materials and 363338 2013 07 j thoroughly test any and all custom interfaces in accordance
323. ined Part Menu 1 Set No Spool Part Only available if spool is unlocked Sets the part to a no spool part see No Spool Items page 195 No Spool Category Menu 1 Expand All Expands all the nodes in the tree beneath this category 2 Collapse All Collapses all the nodes to the part category level Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference No Spool Part Menu 1 Undefine Part Undefines the no spool part That is make the part a normal undefined part See No Spool Items page 195 Modified Spools Category Menu 1 Approve All Approves all the modified spools see Approve a Spool page 199 2 Expand All Expands all the nodes in the tree beneath this category 3 Collapse All Collapses all the nodes to the spool level Modified Spool Menu 1 Approve Spool Approves the spool see Approve a Spool page 199 2 Undefine Spool Undefines the spool see Define and Undefine a Spool page 198 Modified Part Menu 1 Set No Spool Part Sets the part to a no Spool part see No Spool Items page 195 Empty Spool Menu 1 Approve Spool Approves the spool see Approve a Spool page 199 2 Undefine Spool Undefines the spool see Define and Undefine a Spool page 198 Drag and Drop Feature for the Spool Manager The Spool Manager has a drag and drop feature for defining undefining and setting no Spool parts To define a spool Drag an undefined spool into the Defined Spools category box T
324. ing 3 Two Segment Lateral A lateral where the main body consists of two segments 4 Double Lateral A lateral with two side branches 121 HVAC Library Setup SAS 5 Double Reducing Lateral A double lateral with a reducing main body S Va 6 Double Two Segment Lateral A double lateral with the main body consisting of two segments fo Z 122 5C New Lateral E General Stock Mame Description Measurements Sheet Stock Insulations Finishes Weight 4ubo calculation value Yanes Mumber of Yanes Motes Main Body Length Profile Shape Diameter End Treatment 1 End Treatment 2 Side Branch Profile Shape Diameter End Treatment Throat Length Branch Offset Rotation Angle Value HWAT Lateral 8 Metric Ales 3 100464 kg 400 mm Circle 200 mm diameter Circle 00 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm x 20 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm 20 mm Circle 150 mm diameter Circle 150 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm 20 mm 50 mm 50 8 mm 45 Component Preview Optional modes Unrestricted Mode Conical OFfsetable Operations Flip Profiles For descriptions of the General properties see Create a Stock page 103 Lateral and Double Lateral Main Body Length The length of the main body Profile HVAC Library Setup Cancel The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile prope
325. ing Command SCUP DATEDWG Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Update a Production Drawing page 246 Updates the parts BOM tables and keywords within a production drawing Annotation labels are updated but new parts to the drawing are not labeled If a CG point exists in the drawing it will be updated In MarineDrafting drawings it will update the MarineDrafting views that are out of date In spool drawings it will ask to redimension the spool drawing The Modified Part Information window is used while updating existing production drawings It helps you to inspect parts that will change during this update process 462 Appendix Production Command Reference HE Modified Part information View i Center g A056 F73 P02 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 5 2010 10 25 10 PM V Highlight A057 F73 P01 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 5 2010 10 25 10 PM C Zoom A057 F73 P02 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 5 2010 10 25 10 PM A057 F73 P04 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 5 2010 10 25 10 PM A057 F73 P05 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 6 2010 3 18 14 PM A058 F73 P08 Drawing G906_FR73 Modified ShipConstructor 7 5 2010 10 25 10 PM O Color 90 a Modified parts ME colori70 C a PEN 001 Drawing G906_FR55 906 Gray Wate Modified ShipConstructor 7 29 2010 1 44 1
326. ing 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator to open Navigator 2 Select HVAC Spool or Pipe Spool in the component list Distributed Systems Production Drawings ship Constructor Mawig ator Tutorial U01 Drawing Last Modified Date Preview Ha 641_Bilge and ballast 42 2013 2 57 58 PM Ei 642 Fire fighting and D eckwa 47 2 2013 2 57 29 PM eke 2050 642 FF 01 001 4 24 2013 8 48 08 AM a 3050 642 FF 07 001 4727 2013 2 59 54 PM oe p Support iW Fipe Spool a HVAC Spool lt r Equipment 5 Electrical ss Ta Product Hierarchy E Interference g Weld Management N Assembly Read Only wI Composite l Approval Create Show Out of Date Esport 5 Hull space Allocation Output Hest E Profile Plot LI Templates Click on Create The Create Spool Drawing Wizard appears See also Create Spool Drawing Wizard Reference page 517 teate Spon Mraming g Cten af 3 Please Sert a Spool T nrlare a PIPE SPOOL METRIC A4 Tenplate Presies a PIPE SPCOL METRIC A4 1 RM Fpe Spool et ic ES aa 283 Distributed Systems Production Drawings 4 Select a spool template drawing and click Next Ctep 2 of S Please Soheck a Spool Seleczed Sources 3054641 ELO1 COs 3054641 ELO1 Con 3054 641 EL01 CO 3054 641 EL01 CO8 3054 641 EL01 CO9 3054 641 EL01 C10 3054 641 EL01 CiL 3054 641 EL01 C12 3054 641 EL01 C13 3054 641 EL01 C14 3054 641 EL01 C15 5 Inthe tree select all the
327. ing 6 Click OK Checking Interferences Typically you create an interference drawing that includes several planar group drawings within it and then check interferences within the interference drawing You can also check interferences from within a planar group drawing ShipConstructor then checks the solids within the current drawing for collisions ShipConstructor does not check Xref solids Running the List command on the interference solid will list the interfering part names and the volume and extents of the interference To check interferences 1 Create an interference drawing that includes the planar group drawings you want to check see Create an Interference Drawing page 83 2 Open the interference drawing you want and select an isometric viewpoint 3 Choose SC Utilities gt Check Local Interferences page 369 to open the Interference List window 84 Checks Note You can continue using ShipConstructor with the Interference List window open For example you may want to change your viewpoint without closing the Interference List window You can also close the Interference List window and re open it by choosing SC Utilities gt Check Local Interferences page 369 4 Click Run Check Ay Interference Check Solid Object Types Solid Object Type Structure Jf Structure 4 Pipe Vv Pipe HVAC H AC J Equipment l J Equipment Space Allocation Check Against J Space Allocation J Standard Assembly 4
328. ing party s possession in the same and material form prior to its receipt from the disclosing party and did not otherwise originate from the disclosing party or d is required to be disclosed by operation of law 363338 2013 07 22 Audit Rights Upon reasonable notice by SSI which shall be delivered on no more than an annual basis Licensee shall provide a signed statement verifying its compliance with the terms of this Agreement SSI shall also have the right upon reasonable notice and no more than on an annual basis to inspect Licensee s facilities to verify Licensee s compliance with such terms Any such inspection or audit shall be conducted either by SSI or by representatives authorized by SSI to complete the inspection If such inspections or audits disclose that the Licensee has installed accessed or permitted access to the Licensed Materials in a manner that is not permitted under this Agreement then Licensee shall be liable to pay for any unpaid license fees as well as the reasonable costs of the audit 23 Termination This Agreement may be terminated by either party immediately by written notice if the other party commits a breach of any material provision of this Agreement including a failure to make payment when due and fails to correct or rectify such breach within 30 days of receipt of the notice requesting it to do so SSI shall be entitled to place time lock devices and other disabling features in the Licensed Ma
329. ing that an inter system connection has been created will be displayed Saddles A saddle connection is made between a normal end of a branch part and a saddle end on a second header part There are two ways to create a saddle e Choose the Saddle option when initially routing a duct 169 HVAC Modeling 170 e Route the two involved ducts independently and use the Saddle command to create the saddle connection Extra material Both means of saddle creation allow you to adjust the amount of extra material This is the minimum length of the branch part beyond the intersection between its surface and the header part s surface Extra material 4 gt Extra material applied to a branch part branch part on the left header part on the right running into the page ShipConstructor can adjust the location of a branch part for a given amount of extra material only when the projection of the branch part s end along its end axis falls entirely on the header part In a situation in which this is not the case you may place both parts manually and use the Saddle command to create the saddle in which specification of extra material is optional Whether or not the end of a branch part projects entirely onto the header part Create a saddle while routing a duct 1 Choose the branch duct that you want to route from a new saddle connection from the SC HVAC menu The duct appears at the cursor 2 Type A for sAddle
330. ing will ask you to choose to keep the objects that are only in the database Set Up Composite Drawings You can create composite drawings in ShipConstructor and use AutoCAD s XCLIP command to create composite deck or frame drawings Composite drawings make the design process easier and let you see exactly what is happening around a deck or specific frame including the structure pipe equipment and HVAC components without making any permanent changes to your drawings To create a composite drawing 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator page 311 to open Navigator Drawings Prewiew oe p Support iW Pipe Spool Be HVAC Spool E Support Construction d Equipment Electrical a Ta Product Hierarchy EJ Interference i Weld Management Open Read Only Assembly Mew Space Allocation l Output Mest E Profile Plot 2 Choose Composite in the component list 3 Click New File Manne Composite Drawings Be Composite d Open New Drawing Enter a File Name for the drawing 5 Click OK The Mlink Manager window appears Select the drawings you want displayed in the composite drawing Click OK 17 Drawings 18 Insert Link a Drawing into Another Drawing Each drawing contains a relatively small portion of the entire project Sometimes you want to see more of the project than Is contained in a single drawing To do so you can insert link other drawings into the current drawing This type
331. ings to Native AutoCAD Drawings Export to Dwg generates a drawing that can be opened by AutoCAD without ShipConstructor being present on the computer The export process allows the user to configure the viewport display options that are used when generating the output entities The default settings are read from the ShipConstructor source drawing s model space configuration These options can be changed through the UI or the command line when performing an export There are a number of steps to export a ShipConstructor drawing to a regular dwg that can be read by AutoCAD First the original drawing is copied to a temporary location to avoid making changes to the source document Then all of the xrefs will be removed and a local copy of the data will be created in a block with the same name as the xref block Once that is done all ShipConstructor entities will be replaced with native AutoCAD entities which will be generated according to the display options provided When all ShipConstructor entities have been successfully removed the drawing will be copied to the final location The default name for the new file is the original file s name with Export and if necessary a unique number appended to the end Layer Templates Layer templates are used to give fine grained control of where output entities are placed in the new drawing The templates consist of static text that will be included as is in the layer name as well as any instance of the tex
332. iniai cet atven tienen acne uote orb enon let E aan ieee ad ate ilet 143 PASS GI STOCKS t a Canta OG succes cs ecutd culo acetate elds ead cl dasieate ste wuld atean dade Doddanletodse 143 OLS ee eee re ee ee re ree rr rr er re 143 Created CC wes badce nace ad aes ade nace nad aes aceite maces cad uence aac ua nad eas naa ean A EA O 144 ASSIGN a SLOCK 10 a SDE Coasa dannii ada aN nasa Ie ne 144 IMPO SPECS iania ieaiaia varus cnet uns ies B atu tit ca ai cB a dt Ba dBi ul RER KETA E aAa tite 145 01B ys A eae eee eer atone sete AA AN AA AA AA ete eal eae clave ee ata PAA ANA A A 145 CONNEC UON iirc advstnindsdvevini A A A odie nananaaaaaaaCnaR 145 Crearea CONNEC U ON isoa ai E TT NANA TTET EET OEE TA 146 Add an Accessory Package to a Connection iinniacincicinnd nian ninnniadetiininnnviediidonl taal aautl snbotnnaemniehice 147 Created CONNECHUON REDON ierste E EEE E EEEE e a EE 147 MPO CONNECTIONS a TRT R UATU TEATA TT EAEE TUTT AES 147 EXDOrt CONNEC ONS aiaiai ainera E A EE A A OE A E A 147 HVAC Modeling 149 AVAC Draw oS codnnenonniaa e A E AE 149 Creare dt Fat VN Drawing tat fits anaiaren ee ev aan eau elated lad ao alae 149 UDO Opening an AVAC Die WING minnanna aaa cane len haan Caen cca ian allan a Sean tbe aaa 149 EUTIN AC S IN EEEE E EEEE 149 eate Toy EN raros cea aiK oS AEON EEA AGEE ONERE A EFENA ON EEEE mus aan E OA A EE ANEA ETEO 150 Create ai Brane Piarais nia A AA AAA AAA 150 Modify the Properties of a System or Branch ssssecsssssssrs
333. inish or Finish Type To rename a finish or finish type 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Finishes page 304 to open the Finishes window 3 Double click the finish or finish type to rename or right click the finish or finish type and choose Rename 4 Type anew name and press Enter Import Finishes and Finish Types To import finishes 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Finishes page 304 to open the Finishes window 3 Click Import to open a File Browser 4 Select a project file PRO or XML file XML 5 Click Open Export Finishes and Finish Types To export finishes 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Finishes page 304 to open the Finishes window 3 Check the Export check boxes for the finishes and finish types to export 4 Click Export XML to open a File Browser Library Setup 5 Entera name for the XML file 6 Click Save Delete a Finish or Finish Type To delete a finish or finish type Note You cannot delete a finish or finish type that is currently in use in the project Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Finishes page 304 to open the Finishes window Select the finish or finish type Click Delete a eS a View Finishes Usage It is possible to see a list of all the parts that use a
334. inum i E Bronze Cast iron New aoe amp Copper a gt Insulation X Delete z 3 MDF Stainless Steel import O amp S Steel SS ET _ E Export WML Export In Use Material Density AP 5t 37 0 AB St 37 2 AB gal AB Grade 4 ok AB RS5t 37 2 ool Cancel lt lt lt lt s ARENAEN Export Checked materials and grades are exported when you click Export XML Material Lists materials and grades Right click on a material or grade to Rename it Delete it or create a New Material or New Grade Density The density of the material measured in the Density Units Before entering a Density value set the Density Units to the units for the value you want to enter In Use Indicates with a checkmark which materials and grades are currently in use in the project Density Units The Density of materials and grades are measured in the Density Units Before entering a Density value set the Density Units to the units for the value you want to enter To display material densities in another unit change the Density Units New Material Creates a new material New Grade Creates a new material grade for the selected material Delete Deletes the selected material or grade Import Lets you import materials and grades from another project or from an XML file that was exported from another project Export XML Exports the checked Export materials and grades to an XML file General
335. ion you can switch the end e Next end for orientation Switches the end governing how far along the chosen end axis the fitting is placed Click anywhere in the model to fix the distance between the fitting and the end you clicked in step 4 If the second run you are looking to connect to already exists you may click on its free end Should the angle of the fitting differ from the angle between the two ends a warning is printed If you are routing an elbow you may be given additional options to deal with the differing angle If the elbow s angle is too large and its orienting end is trimmable you will be asked if you would like to cutback the elbow to the correct angle If the elbow s angle is too small you will be asked if you would like to insert multiple copies of the elbow possibly trimming the last one to fill the entire required angle 167 HVAC Modeling The points clicked when placing a lateral at the intersection of two free ends If you clicked an existing free end you are finished otherwise the fitting s distance from the end you clicked in step 4 is fixed continue with step 7 7 You are prompted to pick a point indicating the direction of an orienting end of the fitting or to choose an option Please pick a point indicating a rotation about the defined end axis s or Next end for orientation lt 1 gt Forward Aft Port Starboard Up Down DEck align FRame align long align Align to WCS ZRotate SNap lt on gt Dep
336. ion Mletie B EQ DynamicharkingBlock EQ ElectricalCable AE Electricalwireway 5i am Flectricaly irewayAarangemertt iL wiew ay Argt Metric 61 aE Equipment alia E quipment4rrangemernt P ag E quipment Arrgt Metric B1 LE HVAC VP MEtic a HVAC WP Metric i am HYACArTangement o baL HVAC Amat Metric B1 5i aia HACS pool SLJ HVAC Spool Metric BS Ea Be re e khm Last Modifie 171472012E 4 22 2013 1 14672013 2 4 22 2013 1 4 22 72013 1 4 22 2013 1 A 2272013 1 4 22 2013 1 4 22 2013 1 A Preview T New Assembly 422720131 _ F Read Only Permissions General gt Edit Template Drawings Opens the selected template drawing New Template Name Permissions General gt Edit Template Drawings Creates a new template drawing The name of the button and the type of template drawing created is based on the selected folder in the Drawing List Right Click Menu Lets you open rename or delete the selected template drawing or create a new template drawing Open New Rename Delete 337 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 338 Rename Renames the selected template drawing Delete Deletes the selected template drawing ShipConstructor gt Manager Opens the Manager window letting you set up project settings project libraries and user permissions ShipConstructor gt Project gt New Project See the Project Management manual ShipConstructor gt
337. ion calculation Curved plates are complex parts that take extremely long to process if included When the setting Is off the edges of the curved plate are used To use curved plate solids in label edge detection 1 Choose Label gt Curved Plates in Visible Edge Detection On Off page 481 Labels point to visible edges Yes No lt No Project Setting gt Enter Yes If labels are already placed run Label gt Delete All Labels page 479 10 Choose Label gt Label All page 478 Label Reset Automatic Settings The label settings that come from project settings can be overriden in the drawing This command resets the values to follow the project settings To reset the overriden label settings 1 Choose Label gt Label Reset Automatic Settings page 482 245 Getting Started with Production Reset all label settings back to Project Settings Yes No lt No gt 2 Enter Yes Track Label Positions Label tracking is enabled by default and moves the labels when you pan or zoom inside a viewport that is labeled Depending on the user this may be a feature that generates unwanted changes to the labels when inspecting the drawing If the label tracking is turned off it is recommended to save the viewport s viewport so that it can be restored so that the labels point at the correct positions To turn off label tracking 1 Choose Label gt Track Label Positions page 479 Enable label tracking Yes No lt No gt 2 Se
338. ions to open the HVAC Drawing Options window l 2 J 4 132 Click the Display tab lt 4 Hvac Drawing Options Display Nav id Transform Routing Behaviour General Display Show Centerline Show Wal Thickness Show Insulation E By Layer Draw Part Uang Branch Color tiewe Cependent Symbols L End Direction C Band Direction End Munters Scaled To End Size Freed Height On Soneen Ci None 20 30 Wiretrame Cisplay Draw Line Mode Icons Double Line Display Ce Alwars 9 For Profiles Wider Than gt Never Mote Edge display is now controlled in the same Way as for Auto lat solids sme the TSOLINES and DISPSILH variables J Connections Show Connections Local Connection Color Remote Connection Color Show Free Erd Arrows 2 Spral Show Spool Break Show No Spodl Icon Fi Show Ebow Comer lean Performance Tips E creen seen BB cue B ped Red J Md white L The DISPSILH system variable has a large impact on deplay performance in shaded modes such as Realistic and Conceptual Setting it to 0 in these modes may yield a significant improvement you may need bo run the REGENS command to apply the change Futher improvement may result from tuming off drawing options you do not need Shor Wall Thickness and Show Insulation For instance can both greatly affect the amount of geometry that musk be displayed Restore Defauts Set the d
339. ions window Under Name Conventions select the naming convention The naming convention s elements are listed in the Elements pane in order From the Elements pane select the element and then click the up gS and down Ly arrows to move the element up or down in the list Click Test to generate a sample name If you are satisfied with the convention click OK to close the Naming Conventions window Remove an Element from a Naming Convention To remove an element from a naming convention L 2 3 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Naming Conventions page 308 to open the Naming Conventions window Under Name Conventions select the naming convention Library Setup 4 Under Elements select the element you want to remove 5 Under Elements click Delete Activate a Naming Convention Because you can set up many naming conventions you must choose one to be the active naming convention for a project To activate a naming convention 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Naming Conventions page 308 to open the Naming Conventions window 3 Under Name Conventions select the naming convention you want to activate 4 Click Set Active A checkmark appears beside the naming convention indicating that it is the active naming convention for that category Rename a Naming Convention To rename a naming convention 1 Choose Sh
340. ipConstructor gt Licensing page 346 to open the Licensing window 11 Getting Started Licens ng Modules Acqure Module Parcs Level Mass Parsi Lic Avail Lic Total Status r a aLkcmat chez 67C Urlimitac 10 1J 25 Electrical 272 Urlimit c 10 1J Se LQuipment le Urlimt c 1U 1J Hull GFC Ui linil2L 10 1J ga HAC Urlimik c i 11 MarineCratting 67C Urliraikec 10 11 S Nest 67C Urlirait c 10 1l Penetrabons Urlinitsc 1u 1J H PIG Desio aidalla C Un limikoe 10 11 yp Pipe 32 Urlirnitoc 10 13 a PipeLirk C Urliraik c 10 11 i Pipesupports 5z Urlirnit c 10 11 Ba ProductHiEer acy SUES Urlimitac 1u 1J Prufiehesl AFC Un linilaL 10 11 H Structure OFC Urliraiksc 10 11 E wWwaldManagemert 67C Urlimitac 10 11 F Ed Hrivarsad 145 Hrlimik r 47 5 selec J unselec all gtyhetwvork Sretresh List Felase Dae Af ent Server aud Luck Difu Server Lok Yane Lie e Eaury Dale Days dL Susser plio i Expiry Dale Type conver Sorver 12731 2013 260i 2131 2013 wicrlShare ShipConsk uctor MW Show thie window during Projact Register TE 7108 2 Set the options See Licensing Window page 346 3 Click OK Re Login to ShipConstructor If you have different user accounts for different roles you may need to change who you are logged in to ShipConstructor as To do so re open the project and enter a different user name and password See Open a Project page 10 Reload a Project Database Whenever you or anyone else mak
341. ipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Naming Conventions page 308 to open the Naming Conventions window 3 Under Name Conventions select the naming convention you want to rename 4 Click Rename 5 Enteranew name and press Enter Delete a Naming Convention To delete a naming convention 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Naming Conventions page 308 to open the Naming Conventions window 3 Under Name Conventions select the naming convention you want to delete 4 Click Delete Managing Aliases Aliases are used in naming conventions to customize the way that some database items are displayed For example when defining a naming convention for a structure plate part you may include the part side in the name By default the part sides are displayed as Port Starboard and Centerline You may however want to shorten those to PT ST and C This can be accomplished using naming convention aliases To start the alias manager 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Naming Conventions page 308 to open the Naming Conventions window 3 Click the Manage Aliases button on the bottom left on the Naming Conventions window to open the Alias Manager window 45 Library Setu Alias Manager p Profile Types F Structure Fart Types L Park Sides F Fabricated Profile Compone
342. ipConstructor uses density values to calculate part weight Rename a Material or Grade To rename a grade 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Materials page 302 to open the Materials window 3 Double click the material or grade to rename or right click the material or grade and choose Rename 4 Enter anew name for the material or grade and press Enter Import Materials and Grades To import materials and grades Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Materials page 302 to open the Materials window Click Import to open a File Browser Select a project file PRO or XML file XML Click Open Check the materials in the Import column that you want to import and click OK Se a Se Se Export Materials and Grades To export materials and grades Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Materials page 302 to open the Materials window Check the Export check boxes for the materials and grades to export Click Export XML to open a File Browser Enter a name for the XML file Click Save a ee E Delete a Material or Grade To delete a material or grade Note You cannot delete a material or grade that is currently in use in the project You can produce a log of all stocks standards that use a particular material grade by selecting the material grade which is checked In Use
343. ipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Label Current Layout page 244 Automatically labels parts from the current viewport and places them on the ANNOTATION layer New labels are only generated if they are missing from the viewport Label gt Label Viewports Label gt Label Viewports SCLABELVIEWPORTS Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Label Current Layout page 244 Automatically labels parts from the selected viewports and places them on the ANNOTATION layer 478 New labels are only generated if they are missing from the viewport Label gt Label Viewports from BOM Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Label Viewports from BOM SCLABELVIEWPORTSFROMBOMS Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Appendix Production Command Reference This command turns on the labeling for the selected BOMs for the selected viewports and labels the parts in the viewports Label gt Label from Parts Button So Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Label from Parts SCLABELPARTS Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Label from Parts pa
344. ircle 150 mm 0 mm 150 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm x 20 mm Component Preview MBI Optional modes Unrestricted Mode Conical OFFsetable Operations Flip Profiles For descriptions of the General properties see Create a Stock page 103 128 Cancel HVAC Library Setup Rectangular Radial Cross Overall Properties Shape The overall shape of the profiles of the duct The shape can be either rectangle or flattened oval Height The overall height of the profiles of the duct Base Profile Since the shape of the cross is already defined there are not many properties to define for the profile e Width The width of the profile e Corner Radius Applies to the rectangle shape only The corner radius of the profile Throat Length The additional length applied to the base end End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the base end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Side Branches Profile Since the shape of the cross is already defined there are not many properties to define for the profile e Width The width of the profile e Corner Radius Applies to the rectangle shape only The corner radius of the profile Throat Length The additional length applied to the end of the branch Throat Radius The radius of the inside curve of the branch Mitering This property sets whether the branch curve is mitered or rounded e Miters The number of segments if the branch curve
345. is brings up the Select Insulation window where you can select additional insulation to apply to the part or change the order of the insulation selected By un checking the box Inherit from System the inherited insulation will be pre selected and you are free to change the order of insulation for the part Note The stock s insulation will not be shown in the insulation window while selecting insulation for a part or a system When defining insulation for a duct order matters Please double check the order of the selected insulation The order of the insulation applied to the duct may show up in reports or BOMs 431 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference 4 Select Insulation Available Insulations Inherit from System B i Thermal Selected Insulations Self Adhesive Order Insulation Source amp Acoustical 1 DUAA System Type 2 Thermal Self Ad Branch amp Adhesive Solvent Emulsion Note Selected Order is Important Available Insulation A list that contains the available insulation that has been defined in the library setup See Insulation page 35 Selected Insulation An ordered list that contains all the insulation that will be applied to the duct Inherit from System A box indicating whether to inherit the insulation from the system the part belongs to Finishes Reference 432 Finishes on a duct can be defined at many levels and can be applied to a stock item a system a branch a hi
346. isplay all the available UCS s in the project or if Current Unit Only is selected it will display all available UCS s in the current unit Up to 3 different UCS s can be selected one in each direction X Y Z If a UCS is selected that is in the same direction as an already selected UCS the previously selected UCS will be unchecked The preview window will be updated with the newly selected UCS to indicate what will be displayed The top yellow row can be used to filter through the grid to find the appropriate UCS 222 Getting Started with Production t Global Dirmension To Point E En PE er tc xf i apl a y E cs BE Tutorial l ai Me ps d Main UCS s Only k if uo AlUCS E Curent Unit Orly IHI Frame 4 uo Eslay Marking Type aC E uiot_FRes Di i i Dimension Offset W uo FREE aa aE voi Fre Dimension Style aC wo1_Free PIPE SPOOL a W wo1_Free aC uoi _FR7O Label a vorrei Label Style a E uo prez Assembly aC U8 uoi FR72 170 aC wo1_FRr3 Label Preview 8 voi FR74 270 1252 Forward U02_FRE2_M aC WB uot FR 38 3725 Starboard UOT _L1500 SB_M 0 0000 Up UOT FRe3s_U_WLO a 8 voi Fre aC 4 u0 _FR77 4C voi _FR78 a uo1_rFrrs eee a0 W uo FRSO Defaut Edt a W uoi_Fret E aC woi_ Free Save Global W woi_Fres Dimension Style C uo1_Fres_ So C L uo1_FRe3_p 10 Dimension Style C L u01 _FR83_F 9 SSeS SSS LI L wor_Fre3_U BTO E C L uot _FR63_U_BT1500
347. isplay options See The Display Tab page 416 for a description of each option Click OK to close the HVAC Options window HVAC Modeling NavAid Options When you are placing ducts that require directional input a visual aid called the NavAid appears to help you orient the component You can adjust the size and snap behavior of the NavAid To change the NavAid options 1 Choose SC HVAC gt HVAC Drawing Options to open the HVAC Drawing Options window 2 Click the NavAid tab EH Hvac Drawing Options Bilis x Display NawAid Transform Routing Behaviour Radus 2X Duet Dimension gt Static Radius Fadia W Snap T rame Increment Text O Relative bo Sireen Site 1 9 Duet o Pipe Dimension Restore Defaults C Ces 3 Set the options See The NavAid Tab page 424 for details Click OK to save changes and close the HVAC Options window Set the Transform Options The transform options are the display options that are particularly relevant when transforming parts moving stretching etc To set the transform options 1 Choose SC HVAC gt HVAC Drawing Options to open the HVAC Drawing Options window 2 Click the Transform tab 153 HVAC Modeling 4 Hvac Drawing Options Display NavAid Transform Routing Behaviour Anchor Locks 7 Show Anchors E creen C R Show Locks Sze Size Relative to Part C Relative to Part Fiver 600 Fixed 1000 Anchored Ponts durin
348. isplayed for each connection to select the appropriate connection and accessory package to use Change Connection Accessory Package Connection accessory packages can be changed after you have placed the connection provided there are accessory packages defined for the particular connection type and the accessory package has the same spec as the ducts that are using the connection If the connected ducts are from two different systems connection accessory packages from both specs will be listed to select The accessory package that is assigned to a connection can be seen at a quick glance in the OPM Optionally from the steps described below the accessory package can also be changed using the OPM To change a connection accessory package 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Change Connection Accessory Package 2 Select the connection for which you wish to change the package 3 Press Enter If the connected ducts are from two different specs you will be warned to select your accessory package carefully ShipConstructor T warning Adjoining parts are From different specifications Please choose accessory package carefully The Select Accessory Package window will appear 192 HVAC Modeling 5C Select Accessory Package ie Sele Valid Accessory Packages Accessory Package Spec Muts and Bolts Engine Cooling Muts and Bolts To 15 deg Galvanized Package To 15 deg Seal To 15 deg 4 Select a connection accessory package a
349. ist 4727201 3 2 54 49 Phi Component List i Fr Uni Fan OC e mmmmammm f anann a EA AE ORs d F Component List Each project is divided into several components or folders The components of the current project are listed in the Component List The first component is the project name Within the project are one or more units and several project wide components Hull Space Allocation Output Nest Profile Plot Templates Within each unit are several unit related components Structure Pipe HVAC Support Spools Support Construction Equipment Product Hierarchy Interference Weld Management Assembly Composite Approval Export When you select an item in the Component List the associated drawings are listed in the Drawing List and the associated buttons are displayed on the Page To customize the Component List right click within it and choose Customize to open the Customize the Navigator window Select the items you want to appear in the Component List and click OK Drawing List The Drawing List lists the drawings associated with the selected item in the Component List Each drawing in the Drawing List is displayed with the following 312 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands e A lock icon locked or unlocked Clicking the lock icon locks or unlocks the drawing so it cannot or can be modified If clicking the lock icon does not seem to work you may not have permissions to lock and unlock the appropriate dr
350. ister unregistered drawings Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands ShipConstructor gt Check gt Fix Duplicate Drawing Names SC Utilities tab gt Check panel ShipConstructor gt Check gt Fix duplicate production drawings None SCFIXDUPLICATEPRODDWGS Permissions None Prior to ShipConstructor 2011 R2 it was possible to generate multiple records in the database for the same drawing After updating to ShipConstructor 2011 R2 or later you may see drawings in Navigator with Duplicate in the name Run this command to fix those duplicate drawing records Running this command multiple times has no ill effects ShipConstructor gt Update Model and System Drawings SC Utilities tab gt Update panel ShipConstructor gt Update Model and System Drawings SCUP DATEMODELANDSYSTEMDRAWINGSQUICK Permissions None Procedure Update Model and System Drawings page 88 Recreates or updates selected model and system drawings from the database ShipConstructor gt Update Production Drawings SC Utilities tab gt Update panel ShipConstructor gt Update Production Drawings SCUP DATEPRODDWGS Permissions None Procedure Update Production Drawings Updates existing production drawings ShipConstructor gt Product Hierarchy Button Ribbon ShipConstructor tab gt Main panel Menu ShipConstructor gt Product Hierarchy Command SCPRODUCTHIERARCHY Permissions General gt Product Hierarchy gt Product Hi
351. it easy to differentiate between parts that have been assigned to a nest and parts that are in a nest drawing but have not yet been nested Bevel Angle Color Color of the Bevel angle text Bevel Mark Color Color of the Bevel mark text Bevel Standard Color Color of the Bevel standard text Inset Color Outside cut that is in a hole of another part Inside Color Inside cuts Mark Color Marking on the plate Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 302 NoProcess Color Text and lines that are there for reference but not marked on the plate Outside Color Outside cuts Plate Stock Color Stock plate border Remnant Colors Colors of the remnant components in the DXF file after being exported Remnant Cutline Color Remnant cutline Remnant Hatch Color Remnant hatch Remnant Text Color Remnant text Nest Part Colors Outdated Part Color Part that has been modified after it has been nested Unassigned Part Cut Color A temporary color to signify that the part is not assigned to a nest Unassigned Part Mark Color Temporary color to signify that the part is not assigned to a nest Unassigned Part NoProcess Color Temporary color to signify that the part is not assigned to a nest Part Invalid Color When a plate part cannot generate a boundary the part will change to this color It is good to make this a distinctive color that will stand out clearly Plate Part Colors Part Bevel Color Color of bevel code text Part Cu
352. ith Production If AutoCAD methods are used to copy the label mtext to a new position and you wish to replace the object reference within the field use the SCReplaceObReflnField command to select a new object to use as reference Note that all object references within the field will be replaced using this command and as a result ill formed fields may result To Replace Object References within MText 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Property Labels gt Replace Object Reference 2 Select the mtext containing the fields 3 Select the new object to point the fields to The AutoCAD effect of improperly evaluated fields is to display 4 in place of the field You can display the field in its raw form and edit the field by using the SCEditField command To Edit Fields in MText 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Property Labels gt Edit Fields 2 Select the mtext containing the fields 3 Edit the text within the Field text box Leader Distribution Lines Leader distribution lines allow ShipConstructor labels to be automatically aligned and spaced Leaders when attached to a distribution line adjust as necessary when the line is moved resized or rotated Leader distribution lines behave exactly like AutoCAD lines and therefore can be modified in the same manner as AutoCAD lines PIPE LIST Hariri San nd A O a Oo e W 72 W ti am O Onm a a po an e a O mm am O EEN Snn euma mo if 991 2510 A e
353. k page 103 for a description of the profile properties Length The length of the transition Offset X Applies to the Normal Offset and Curved Offset types The magnitude of the offset in the X or horizontal direction Positive and negative offsets are allowed Offset Y Applies to the Normal Offset and Curved Offset types The magnitude of the offset in the Y or vertical direction Positive and negative offsets are allowed Mitering Applies to the Curved Offset type You can specify a rounded or mitered curve e Num Segments The number of segments in the curve if it is mitered End 1 End 2 Profile Applies to the Normal Reducer and Curved Reducer types The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length Additional length applied to the end of the duct Throat Length Branch Fittings Tees There are several defined types of tees 1 Square Tee The tee is a box All ends are square 111 HVAC Library Setup 2 Square Radial Tee All three profile ends are square Two of the branches of the tee are radial 3 Tee The basic tee This tee consists of a main body and one side branch 4 Reducing Tee The main branch of the tee Is reducing 5 Two Segment Tee The main branch of the tee consists of two segments 112 HVAC Lib
354. l SC Utilities gt Check Local Interferences SCINTERCHECK Permissions None Procedure Check Local Interferences page 86 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Checks for collisions between objects in a single drawing without having to create an Interference drawing SC Utilities gt Export gt Export to DWG Button Ribbon SC Utilities tab gt Export panel SC Utilities gt Export to DWG Command SCEXPORTDWG Permissions None Procedure Export a ShipConstructor Drawing to an AutoCAD only Drawing page 57 Exports the current drawing as an AutoCAD only drawing The entire drawing will be duplicated with only native AutoCAD entities including any hidden objects or layers Note The export loads the current drawing options into the options window SC Utilities gt Export gt Export to NWC SC Utilities tab gt Export panel SC Utilities gt Export gt Export to DWG SCNWCOUT Permissions None Procedure Export ShipConstructor Drawings to NavisWorks Drawings page 58 Exports selected drawings as separate Navisworks NWC files The resulting files are placed beside the original drawing with the same filename with extension NWC The current drawing s drawing options are used in each of the selected drawings to export This is convenient so that no matter what the drawing options are saved in each drawing the display will be consistent in the NWC files The export settings are used from
355. l Scassa re a gna la mile E N 99 DONE ENG TREATS HIS nnniiinan TAATA AATA ET TOONA 99 EDO ENA Teatme Nto porian a 100 Delete End Teatme S Ps vatvnsvatoncatgusretenendcae ellen lsd elton enol le lb ae OT 100 AVAC SEDC RIMS ACEH OUIESS sana a a a 100 Contents Create a User Defined Attribute wisiscosssconiicasvusssnasgann sansscsbwasinosiiedsuawaludinayn inosinces Lndevuttu sade untatiude saweliutsigatsdudsane dateantelcabinaiedadseaiedss 101 Assign a User Defined Attribute to a Part or Stock OF SPOOl ccccccssecsssssssssscssssssssesssesesesesesasersaseesasesaseesateesaneesanes 101 Delete a Usar Denned ANI DUTE assez cise esac chests AA Nevin count e al uiish hae bisa Nici lee ne onan iaeNe ats 101 MPO a WSS penned AEG CUS carcar n i a a a a aA 102 SOCK eaa E E E E AE NEE T N E E E E ENEN 102 FEES TGV neS tock HS Perier aeae Ea 103 Created areata eee et team ete eat NANEN EA 103 Edit SOG easter rate nee eat aes a T tadedeacacuales uadacais uacuesessaduustnuads 138 SOCK US AGS rsen a eaten acon sesasnenih E ia aehiucevaanceectansh biunansd Shamik DaewLA abandon aman aA 140 MEON ICS octane ieee vee aod gloat Ne ita delta enlist OA 141 EOE STOCKS siaraniceuensasievenc A N uti venta aicanisea chante cuca une nda ata seein S 141 NOS ss isaiatat ateeatat A A A A atabtad ata abdtatalneetabaustd aes aedtatanealaun 142 Create a Catalo ireren a A cae uadeaestisiaudub au AAN cused 142 MPO Ca OOS moana iA E E OENE OE AONNE EOE OREO OOA 142 EXO ONE Cael OOS a
356. l between the numbers used in the assembly names e User Defined Attributes You may specify values for any user defined attributes assigned to the current Product Hierarchy see Set Up User Defined Attributes page 68 To specify a value select the Attribute make sure attribute is enabled with a check in the checkbox then type a value in the Value field Attributes can be reset to their default value by clicking on the Reset button e Level The level for the new assembly The list consists of assembly levels below the assembly you selected in the Product Hierarchy palette e Finishes All finishes 70 Library Setup e Selected Finishes Finishes assigned to the assembly Select a finish from the Finishes list Click the left arrow button to assign the finish to the assembly You can use the up and down arrow buttons to reorder the finishes Click the right arrow button to unassign a finish 3 Click OK Rename an Assembly To rename an assembly 1 Inthe Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 select the assembly you want to rename and choose Tools gt Assembly gt Rename This option is also available if you right click on the assembly Unit level assemblies cannot be renamed The assembly name in the tree is now editable 2 Enteranewname and press Enter Edit an Assembly To edit an assembly 1 Inthe Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 select the assem
357. l related parts will have the same user attributes Adding or removing an attribute to a part will also add or remove that attribute to all related parts However the values do not have to be same between related parts Utility Procedures Activate a UCS To activate a UCS from an object 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Activate UCS page 350 to open the UCS window 2 Click Activate from Object 3 Select the object ShipConstructor calculates the UCS differently for different types of objects e Standard AutoCAD objects ShipConstructor determines the UCS plane of the object e ShipConstructor parts ShipConstructor lets you choose the UCS e Stiffeners ShipConstructor displays the following window letting you select one of four UCSs associated with an end of a stiffener 52 Library Setup stiffener UCS Select the button beside the UCS icon wou want Stifhener End Start E End e Plates ShipConstructor displays the following window Activate UCS Activate Fron Part Plane Starboard Mold side Fort Thickness side T 2500 T To activate a UCS 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Activate UCS page 350 to open the UCS window Select the UCS from Activate from list 2 Click Activate Select a UCS Viewpoint Selecting a UCS viewpoint is the easiest way to obtain a plan view to the currently active UCS especially if the UCS is canted such as for a sloping deck To select a UCS viewpoint 1 Choose SC Uti
358. label will be created with the label text and styles from the BOM table and geometry information from the source label To copy a label for labeling another part 1 Choose Label gt Copy Label page 478 Select the source label 2 Select the source label The system will find out the related BOM table for copying label text and styles Select a part 3 Select a part to label The selected point will be the position where the arrow points to and all other geometry information will be copied from the source label 4 Press Esc at anytime will end the labeling Label Current Layout Similar to Label All page 243 but only affects the current layout Label Viewports Similar to Label All page 243 but only affects the selected viewports Label Viewports from BOM 1 Choose Label gt Label Viewports from BOM page 479 Select BOM tables 2 Select the BOM tables you want to label from Select viewports 3 Select the viewports you want to label If the BOM is not already assigned to the viewport then it will be and assigned default values for Minimum Leader Length and Label Spacing Label from Parts This command will label all the parts selected by the user from the selected table Getting Started with Production To label from parts 1 Activate the viewport you want to label 2 Choose Label gt Label from Parts page 479 Select parts to label 3 Select the parts to label The parts will be automatically lab
359. layers to place them on for each source The list of drawings is all those that contain parts from the sources chosen for parts Layers can be chosen fram a list which includes the layers found in the template Conflict Resolution drawing or entered as text A conflict occurs when a part exists for multiple sources with at least 2 different layers chosen for those sources Ex A pipe belongs to System A and i in drawing B System A is selected as a source with its destination layer as X and drawing B is selected with its layer as Y 7 The part is conflicted between layer X and Y Volume For each conflict choose the layer that you want parts from There are 4 tabs that sources can be chosen from Drawings Systems Assemblies and Volumes The Drawings tab contains both planar group and system model drawings The possible drawings to use as sources for AutoCAD geometry are those that contain parts that are in any of the sources chosen in the previous step The AutoCAD geometry source choices will be displayed regardless of whether there is any geometry to bring in 273 Getting Started with Production Layer Conflict Resolution Reference The Layer Conflict Resolution window is used when creating or updating arrangement or assembly drawings It allows you to easily move any parts that were given multiple layers to go to in source selection Ea Layer Conflict Resolution Parts from the sources selected have multiple layers assigne
360. lcon Set No Spool Icon Color Index SCDwgOptionsHVACSetNoSpoollconColor Set No Spool Icon Size SCDwgOptionsHVACSetNoSpoollconSize Set End Numbers Mode 0 Fixed Size 1 Scaled Size 2 None SCDwgOptionsHVACSetEndNumbersMode Set End Numbers Scaled To End Size SCDwgOptionsHVACSetEndNumbersScaledToEndSize Set End Numbers Fixed Height On Screen SCDwgOptionsHVACSetEndNumbersFixedHeightOnScreen SetShowElbowlcon Set Show Elbow Icon 0 false 1 true SCDwgOptionsHVACSetShowElbowlcon SetElbowlconColor Set Elbow Icon Color Index SCDwgOptionsHVACSetElbowlconColor SetElbowlconSize Set Elbow Icon Size SCDwgOptionsHVACSetElbowlconSize Set Show Green SCDwgOptionsHVACSetShowGreen Set Green Color SCDwgOptionsHVACSetGreenColor Shared HEP Commands SCHEPReplicateToDrawing Button None Ribbon None None SCHEPREPLICATETODRAWING Permissions None Procedure Copy parts to another drawing unit page 193 Copies selected HEP parts from one drawing unit to another drawing unit 413 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference System Manager Choose SC HVAC gt Systems gt System Manager to open the System Manager a system Manager Hvac System Level Branch Code i Finish og Engine Room 1 Adhesive Emulsion System Insulation 2 Thermal Self Adhesive Branch Airflow Parts Using System 0 p New Branch x Delete OK Cancel Col
361. le Browser Enter a name for the XML file Click Save Delete End Treatments Note You cannot delete end treatments that are in use To delete an end treatment i 2 J Open the End Treatments window See End Treatments page 94 Select the end treatment you wish to delete Click Delete HVAC User Defined Attributes User defined attributes let you define custom attributes to hold arbitrary data associated with a part for example model number process codes and custom identifiers or stock making it easier to manage parts You can set up user defined attributes for structure pipe equipment HVAC and Spools 100 To open the user defined attributes window l Z Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager Choose HVAC gt User Defined Attributes to open the User Defined Attributes window HVAC Library Setup J User Defined Attributes HVAC In Use Available Attributes Description In Use Attributes Required Insert at stock level aparts OO O OO El Descriptioni Assembly Descriptio Branch Description Assembly Descriptio Cross IncomingVoltage at Cross Manufacturing Cost 22 Double Cross E Model Number SE Double Reducing Cross NumberPhase pA Double Two Segment Cross Order Number os Rectangular Radial Cross E PowerRating HE Reducing Cross f REMARKS XF Two Segment Cross TagNum Lateral User Number Tee eye Elbow T wl Gteainht lcarImport UDAs
362. le vessel As you work on a project you build a three dimensional digital model of the vessel 3D product model courtesy of Marinette Marine Corp and Genoa Design International ShipConstructor Database Driven Relational Object Model DDROM ShipConstructor uses a fundamentally new technology for creating storing and updating part information the Database Driven Relational Object Model DDROM DDROM is similar to parametric modeling Parametric modeling is a way of defining geometry in which geometric dependencies are built in so that editing one shape will cause other shapes to change size or location For example when you update a part after it has been defined any objects related to the part that are affected by the update are also modified When you work in ShipConstructor you create and work within drawings Each drawing Is only an interface between you and the model that is stored in the database The model is a three dimensional representation of the entire vessel Each project contains many model drawings but only one model Database FSF OFS CEAFA Pd ej ate ral a 5 A mil FO 8 1 4 ay p b p F p E b L RA E E k k ae i pi a m oy rl a a mi a P 5 B i WKEECHM ES 400g FN SITES ORE eh We GO nxan SRNR ad Bhi Objects in the database Manager Another part of each project is the Manager Manager is where you set up sto
363. lect No The labels will now not move automatically in all drawings Update a Production Drawing ShipConstructor arrangement drawings can be updated Drawings that need updating can easily be identified in Navigator Identifying Drawings that Require Updating Arrangement drawings that contain parts that have been changed are identified in Navigator To identify out of date arrangement drawings 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator to open Navigator 2 Select HVAC or Pipe in the component list 3 Click the Show Out of Date button ShipConstructor Navigator SCO18 114 I Last Modified Date Preview Wy ITEM A AD Structure bagi 1140354 2012 02 02 3 54 31 PM Distributed Systems die 114 M364 2012 02 02 5 55 11 PM Pipe Fal WirewayAnangement 2012 01 10 3 32 30 PM 2012 02 02 4 04 30 PM ShipConstr 2072 02 16 10 56 47 AM HVAC Spool Support Construction EF Equipment gt Electrical Product Hierarchy B Interference Weld Management i 0 f Assembly pen C Read Only New Wireway Arrangement Show Out of Date EA Nest ofa Profile Flot Templates Close 246 Getting Started with Production Out of date arrangement drawings can be identified by the exclamation mark icon dh Updating an Arrangement Drawing Arrangement drawings can be updated in ShipConstructor This lets you keep all the detail work done to an arrangement drawing while importing new parts and g
364. lect all ducts that you want to unanchor 3 Press Enter Lock a Duct Locked ducts are similar to anchored ducts but with even more restrictions You cannot modify or erase a locked duct Locked ducts show a lock icon on them Reasons for the duct being locked can be seen in AutoCAD s OPM Object Property Manager The most common locks in HVAC are a user lock and spool lock The steps below describe the user lock To lock a duct 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Lock Part page 408 2 Select all ducts that you want to lock 3 Press Enter To unlock a duct 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Unlock Part page 409 180 HVAC Modeling 2 Select all ducts that you want to unlock 3 Press Enter Grip points Grips are in the same locations regardless of which transform mode you are using but they behave differently in each mode In single part transform mode there are three types of grips end corner and middle grips End grips are square corner grips are round and center grips are triangular Their behavior is part Specific see Single Part Transforms page 182 e oe In multi part mode all grips look and behave similarly Toggle Transform Mode There are two modes in which you can transform existing ducts Single part transform mode lets you make specialized changes to individual parts Multi part transform mode lets you move larger sections of a duct system simultaneously You can toggle between single part and multi p
365. lectrical Cable Count Electrical Cable Length Clee l M hl itniabe LPG Abas Q H P EL EGH P H F S F F S F EL EQ H F S EL EG G H HL F G G WW String String String String String String String String Angle String String Integer Length T isinlk The name of the assembly in the build strategy in which the part resides le the profile Straight Bent or Twisted The name of the system branch The name of the catalog Same az part name For Structural parts Spools and Assemblies same as stock mame for everythin Wanation of the cable support type Endeut applied to the end end of the cross tiers Endecut applied to the start end of the cross tiers Whether the plate part i curved The angle of the elbow fitting less the cutback amount on each end The drawing the part is modeled in Full path to the drawing the part i modeled ir The number of electrical cables The length of the electrical cables The oeiabe F BLA 1 31 BL Cancel Getting Started with Production 7 Place a check next to each field you want to include in the BOM For BOMs that include structure parts only include fields that have Module S P Is for Pipe H is for HVAC Note For structure BOMs you should include Part Name and Quantity fields Item is required for labeling parts 8 Click OK to return to the BOM Definitions window You will see that the fields are added to the fi
366. lightly differs from the edit geometry dialog seen in the HVAC catalog The name of OTF parts cannot be edited as OTF is supposed to be used for quick modeling HVAC Modeling Lie Ba et et Mew Laas Attribute A Component Previn General Sock Description Measurements Metric Sheet Stock 16 GA AL 3003 insulations Finishes 1 Paints Antifoul Stock Weight Auhe caleulation Weight Value 5 07198 kg Vanes Number of Vanes a Wane Notes Main Body Length 300 mm Profile Qirde 300 mm diameter anes he eget View Diameter 300 mm End Treatment Flange Stainless Steel 18 SR 0 1875 in 1 5 i End Treatment 2 Flange Stainless Steel 15 SR 0 1675 in x 1 5 in Circe 150 mm diameter All Circle Diameter 150 mm Throat Length 50 men Branch Offset 150 mm m End Treatment Flange Stainless Steel 18 SR 0 1875 in 1 5 i Cirde 150 mm diameter Circe Diameter 150 mm Throat Length 50 mm Branch Offset 150 mm End Treatment Flange Stainless Steel 16 SR 0 1675 in 1 5 in 5 Canion Ahin Order Number Eia ibaa Later when placing another duct of the same type in OTF mode the same shape duct and the specified default data will be used Command line options are provided to make it easier to modify some geometric properties of ducts described in detail in the On the Fly Command Line Reference page 435 NavAid The NavAid is a tool intended to help you with several aspects of duct routing It can be helpful fo
367. line The current drawing will be closed when the export drawing Is created so ShipConstructor will ask you if you wish to save the current drawing before proceeding 2 A Save As window will appear with a generated name for the document Set the file name and location as needed Click Save and the Export To Dwg Configuration window will appear 21 Exporting ShipConstructor Drawings 22 E Export To Dwg Configuration Part Piecemarks Plate Production Bevel Text Cuts Marks Marklin Text Solid Green Stiffener Start and End Labels Hvac 2D 3D Wireframe Draw Line Mode Icons Hide Double Line Display Always End Numbers Mode Scaled Scaled Size 0 75 Part Bend Direction Hide Center Line Color M By Layer Centerline Show Elbow Icon Color N White Elbow Icon Size 3 Lock Color H Blue L cL rhe ass A Use Current Load From Save To The Export To Dwg Configuration The interface to configure the export will display the available options in the main grid Items that are displayed under another item are dependent upon the item above them to be enabled for them to be enabled Example Structure gt P art gt Solid gt Green is set to Show in the above picture but if Structure gt Part gt Solid was set to Hide then any dependant values such as Green would be be treated as having the value Hide and the tree under Solid would be collapsed for easier navigation Note The configuration options fo
368. line from which export settings can be read These files can be generated using Export to Dwg and the save option in the window Enter a file name or use the default filename that is generated The file is exported Create Arrangement Drawing Wizard Reference The Create Arrangement Drawing wizard is a tool for generating arrangement drawings 268 Getting Started with Production Step 1 of 4 Please Enter a Drawing Name Drawings Enter Filter Text P F arg Pipe Test Arrangement1 ie Fipe Test Arrangementi Copy Pipe Test Arrangment The first page of the wizard is for entering a drawing name The Next button will be disabled until a valid drawing name is entered There is also error text that shows up underneath the name textbox to let you Know what is wrong with the name 269 Getting Started with Production Step of 4 Please Select an Arrangement Template PIPE ARRGT METRIC B1 No Preview The second page of the wizard is where you select your arrangement template drawing 270 Getting Started with Production sc Create Arrangement Drawing Step 3 of 4 Please Select Components to insert into drawing Layer Layers Ld Frame F E tngBhd Volumes gW E Deck New Volume iv EF aa Arbitrary EO curved al La HVAC E Pipe EP ri con fy Pon Show spools Spool Layers override conflicts The third page of the wizard is where you select the various sources that
369. ling panel Label gt Adjacent Part Edge Tolerance SCLABELAD ACENTTOL Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Adjacent Part Edge Tolerance page 245 Edges will be less likely to be labeled if they are closer than this distance to an edge of another part Label gt Corner Clearance Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Corner Clearance Command SCLABELCORNERCLEARANCE Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting The closest distance a label s arrow point can be to the end of an edge of a part when automatic labeling and label on visible edge Is on Label gt Edge Determination Minimum Angle Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Edge Determination Minimum Angle SCLABELEDGEDETERMINATIONANGLE Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Line segments will be considered part of the same edge if they are less than this angle away from tangent 481 Appendix Production Command Reference Label gt Label Reset Automatic Settings Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Label Reset Automatic Settings SCLABELRESETALL Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 Licen
370. lipse or spline you want to convert Press Enter Library Setup Create a Reference Line Reference lines are useful reference locations in any drawing They can be used to show positions of items in the vessel or as baselines for dimensioning They can be created when the view is created However if you forgot to setup reference lines during creation then you can manually create them after To create a reference line 1 Setup the current User Coordinate System UCS so that the reference line will be generated on the X or Y access of the UCS 2 Choose Production gt Production Utilities gt Create Reference Line Depending on the orientation of the UCS the prompt will show relevant directions Enter direction Longitudinal Transverse lt Longitudinal gt 3 Select the axis direction desired A reference line is created across the extents of the drawing Import Reference Line Styles Reference line styles once set up can be copied around to different template or production drawings by importing them from a source drawing that has the st To import reference line styles 1 Open the drawing you want to import reference line styles into 2 Choose Production gt Production Utilities gt Import Reference Line Styles rt Drawing to import fram Look in _ MarineDrafting eR GGH Views Tools Marne Preview E MD Approval DWG E MD template dwg E MID Workshop dwg File name i Open ig Files of type Drawing d
371. lities gt 3D Viewpoint page 349 to open the Select View window 2 Click the Plan tab 53 Library Setup 54 ol Select Wie Description PLAN TO CURRENT UCS Paint Current UCS Looking Down O Looking Up Construction UCS Looking Looking Views for the current UCS are listed under Current UCS If you are currently in a planar group drawing the views for the construction UCS are listed under Construction UCS Note The view names are based on the orientation of the UCS for example Looking Aft Select a view Click OK Activate a Layer When you activate a layer the objects on the layer become visible and available to edit To activate a layer 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Layer gt Activate page 358 to open the Select Layer to Activate window 2 Select the layer you want to activate 3 Click OK Deactivate a Layer When you deactivate a layer the objects on the layer become hidden and are unavailable for editing that is they become frozen To deactivate a layer 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Layer gt Deactivate page 358 to open the Select Layer to Deactivate window 2 Select the layer to deactivate Library Setup 3 Click OK Copy Objects from One Layer to Another To copy objects from one layer to another 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Layer gt Copy Geometry to page 359 2 Select the objects you want to copy 3 Press Enter The Copy Geometry to Layer window appears Select the layer t
372. lities Window 3 iP Dimension Style Manager Os PRD Da BBS AEA Curent dinveretign style LABELS Th Spier LABELS Label Style Name Paper 1 51N_1FT Assembly packet Standard C amp FALLT Hvac Arrgt Bubbles Pac Arrgt Cires HAC SPL Pipe Aargt Circles PIPE SPOOL Pipe Spool Comers Closest Honzantal Ripe Spool Cuts Bens Closest Horizontal n zits Pistes Closest Horizontal STANDA LES hont kyl sales m Hieta The simplest way to ensure that all production drawings have properly named dimension styles is to predefine required dimension style in production drawing templates In AutoCAD each dimension style is referenced to a Text Style 216 6 Modify Dimension Style LABELS Getting Started with Production Lines Symbol andAnows TE Ft Primary Units Akemnate Units Tolerances Test appearance Text color Fil color Text height Fraction height scale Draw frame around tex Text placement Vertical Above Hongontal Centered View Dieco Leftto Right Offset from dim line 009375 1 0000 Text shonment D Horizontal Aligned with dimercion iie 150 standard ShipConstructor labels get their text styles from the text style that is assigned to the dimension style that is associated with the label style Label Text Style Ly Dimension Style L gt Text Style Setting up Label Text Sizes A situation with the text size is similar but a littl
373. ll be allowed to incorporate Licensee s name in SSI s customer reference list and to use it for marketing 30 Dispute If any dispute arises under this Agreement a good faith attempt to resolve the dispute will be made by senior management of both parties at a mutually agreeable site and time If the parties are unable to reach agreement within 30 days after a request for such meeting the dispute shall be referred to arbitration in English before one arbitrator in Victoria British Columbia Canada in accordance with the Commercial Arbitration Act of the British Columbia 31 Entire Agreement This Agreement contains the entire agreement between the parties and shall supersede all prior discussions and agreements between the parties regarding its subject matter 32 Amendment Any amendment of this Agreement must be in writing and signed by duly authorized representatives of the parties 33 Waiver The waiver by any party of a breach by the other party of this Agreement shall not be construed as a waiver by such party of any succeeding breach by the other party of the same or another provision 34 Assignments Licensee may not assign or transfer the License or Licensee s rights or obligations under this Agreement without SSI s prior written consent and any such assignment or transfer without consent shall be null and void A transfer of all or substantially all of the voting stock of the Licensee shall constitute a transfer for these pu
374. llast 64 1 BLO3 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLOS 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLO6 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLO8 641_ Bilge and ballast 64 1 BLO2 641_ Bilge and ballast 641 BLO1 641_ Bilge and ballast Use for all VIEW Center Highlight F oom 13 You can use the Layer Conflict Resolution window to sort out the destination layer for any conflicted parts Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Manager Menus File gt Import Stocks gt Lets you import Manager settings from another project or from an XML file that was exported from another project either for All Modules or for an individual menu in Manager General Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment See the Project Management manual for details File gt Export Stocks gt Exports Manager settings to an XML file either for All Modules or for an individual menu in Manager General Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment See the Project Management manual for details File gt Exit Closes Manager You are prompted to save any unsaved data General gt Project Settings Toolbar Navigator Settings with the project selected Permissions None Procedure Project Settings page 28 Opens the Project Settings window letting you set various project wide settings Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Ga ShipConstructor Manager JASON_METRIC_TR Project Settings o E oO File General Structure Piping HV
375. lle Label Styles Export Checkbox used to select label styles when exporting to XML In Use Check indicates that the label style is referenced by other setting in ShipConstructor Typically this will be in BOM Definitions Label Style Name The name of the label style Insertion Mode When a label has a leader this setting controls how the leader will be attached to the label VIE Left Right Center Closest Horizontal 441 Appendix Production Command Reference Bubble Style The type of outline that will be around the text of the label wc fa Ad None Circle Square Triangle Octogon Rectangle Bubble Bubble Size Determines the size of the bubble The size of the bubble depends on the style of the bubble TEER Various types of bubble styles for labels They re shown with a bubble size of 8mm and a text size of 0 18 Size Calculation Diameter Text Height Bubble Size Length Bubble Size Height Base Length Bubble Size Width Height Bubble Size Height Text height 2 Bubble Size Width 2 Text Width Bubble Size Bubble Height Text Height Bubble Size 1 5 Number of Lines Width Text Height Text Width Bubble Size 1 5 Number of Lines Leader Whether or not the label has a leader pointing to the object that is labeled Acad Dimension Style The AutoCAD dimension style to use for some properties of the label The list is from Dimension Styles page 214 The text he
376. lly very small in the order of 1 10 of a degree Bends this small are not producible in a shipyard environment However over the length of the faceplate the total directional change is quite likely very large The Bend Tolerance lets you set a threshold above which the bend will be listed in the bend report When the accumulated values of directional change of the polyline segments exceed the Bend Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Tolerance value the directional change is listed Changing this value after faceplates have been made does not affect their bend data NC Pyros Export Interface to same options in Export To NC Pyros window See Structure manual Planar Group Tolerance The maximum distance that planes defined by additional geometry selected when creating a planar group can be offset from the plane that is used to define the planar group Sometimes geometry imported into AutoCAD from other software Is not exactly in one plane Plate Flange Default Text The default text to use on the label of a plate flange Plate Nesting Display FS Marking as Dashed Yes Far side marks the bottom side as it is shown in the nest drawing is shown using the SConDashed Linetype style No Far side marks are shown as they will be actually marked Nest Corner See Autonesting Options Nest Fit Method See Autonesting Options Nest Rotation Angle See Autonesting Options Nest Vertically See Autonesting Options Solid Creation Toler
377. lock the row order is determined by the field sort order specified of the BOM definition Collectors process the data for their respective objects according to the format specified by the BOM definition Therefore each block of collector data is sorted according to the field sort order specified by the BOM definition Item numbering is performed on the master list at the time of BOM update Tables inserted with the List Only Visible option retrieve their item numbering from the master list to ensure consistent numbering across all sheets Item numbers can have user defined prefix text for example SP 001 To understand how collector use works we will use an example You have a Pipe arrangement drawing that contains structure pipe and HVAC and you need two different bills of materials a pipe stock BOM and spool list The pipe stock BOM must list all pipe items HVAC items and connection accessories but not structure This can be achieved by creating two BOM definitions one for the stocks and one for the spool list The stock BOM should list the objects in a specific order Pipe objects HVAC objects Pipe connection accessories and then HVAC connection accessories To create a stock BOM that accomplishes the requirement a BOM definition is created that includes the following collectors Pipe Part HVAC Part Pipe Connection Accessories and HVAC Connection Accessories Order them as specified above the BOM lists the items in the order
378. logs that you want the stocks to belong to 5 Click OK to close the Edit Catalog Assignments window Specs A spec is a specification to which HVAC stock conforms You use specs to limit the use of stocks for a specific system This ensures that later when modeling a system the only stocks that are available to the designer are stocks assigned to the same spec to which the system Is assigned For example if your system must conform to a certain fire specification create a fire spec and assign to it only those HVAC stocks that adhere to this specification When modeling create a system that only uses this fire spec to ensure that the designers are limited to the HVAC stocks that conform to the fire Spec To open the edit HVAC specs window 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose HVAC gt Stock Catalog to open the HVAC Catalog Stock Editor 3 Click the HVAC Stocks tab 4 Click Edit Specs to open the Edit HVAC Specs window 143 HVAC Library Setup Edit HVAC Specs Export In Use Spec Description F v Engine Cooling desc C of Fresh Air desc Pe Ea Create a Spec To create a spec 1 Open the Edit HVAC Specs window See Specs page 143 2 Click New Spec to create a new spec 3 Entera name for the spec and press Enter 4 Click OK to close the Edit HVAC Specs window Assign a Stock to a Spec To assign stocks to a spec 1 Open the HVAC Stocks window See S
379. luminum 5086 You must set up the materials you plan to use in the project In ShipConstructor a material is actually a grouping of material grades For example the 30 material Aluminum might contain the grades 5086 6061 and 5052 Create a Material To create a material 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Materials page 302 to open the Materials window ff hwlaterials Export In Use Material Density aC se ca gt Aluminum f Brass fh Bronze Cast iron F Copper F Insulation z E MDF E Stainless Steel z A Steel AB st 35 0 AB 5t 37 0 AB St 37 2 AB gal AB Grade 4 AB RS5t 37 2 lt 4 SSS Bee 3 Click New Material 4 Type a name for the material and press Enter Create a Grade To create a grade 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Materials page 302 to open the Materials window 3 Select the Material in which to create a grade oc fe Density Uniks poven maternal Koos m E Show All Columns Lk Cancel Library Setup Click New Grade Enter a name for the grade and press Enter Make sure Density Units is set to the units you want to use to specify the density SO SS Double click the Density field for the new grade enter a value measured in the Density Units and press Enter Sh
380. lumn heading to order the list by that setting For example to order the stock list by weight click the Weight column heading To reverse the order click the column heading again Create a Stock You can use naming conventions for all your stocks or name each stock individually See Naming Conventions page 40 for more details Using naming conventions in the stock creation process cuts down the time it takes to create stocks and helps organize your stocks To create a stock 1 Open the HVAC Stocks window See Stocks page 102 2 Click New Duct or click the down arrow beside the button and choose the type of stock to create Note The button name changes after you choose a stock type For example if you choose an Elbow then the button changes to New Elbow Thereafter you can create stock of that type by clicking the button Tip There is also a right click menu for each stock type in the list which you can use to create the stock of that type The Edit HVAC Stock window appears 103 HVAC Library Setup Note The new stock will either copy all its properties from the stock you have selected in the main stock list or will use default values if no relevant stock was selected in the main stock list 3 Set the values See General Properties below See Ducts page 106 Elbows page 107 Transitions page 108 Branch Fittings Tees page 111 Branch Fittings Laterals page 120 Branch Fittings Crosses page 126 and Br
381. lveiesli 225 Set Up a Producton Drawing TEI Bl Ate caiara 225 Create a Drawing Template imiona ean ine EUA ONAA TAT AA 226 Insert Keyword into a Production Drawing Template ccssssessssssssssrssssssssssrssesessrsseseeseserseesasseseesaesaserseesansesensansates 226 Insert a BOM Table into a Production Drawing Template ccecsssssssrssssssrssrsssssssrssessesesersesesseseesaesaserseesaesesersensates 227 E OIE BOM Collector ODEN ONS errana iran A OEA EAO AEA AOA 229 SEF UD IW OES re A E E uatvedevsadansesnadueriaeacuaiaentvatinend 230 set UR Dra wih ODUN S nren N AAA ANA A AANA AAA 231 Set Up Viewpon Display ODU ONS sssicossesniicasvne wcoscees sans ne e O 232 SEE WO Ma DEMING S O a a a E aes 233 Set Up NONSHIDCONSHUCIONSEIINGS iisiw ici tro tanita AA dain alana nina iead 234 Weld Symbol Table in an Assembly Drawing Template ccecssssssessssssssssrssesssesssrssesesersrsaeseserseesaeseserseesatsesersatsates 234 Predetned ASSEMmDIYFONTIAT coriaria dan leslie alloca aaa eaten stolen fedaoeabfuustoleanii 234 VOUM CS eccisccuduotvansuaiectinetuacatnucuata a E aaa aOR 235 Volume Manage Fei tte eile it ele hoa rede aaa ale E EEIE 235 Creating Producton Dra Wi GS Siinne E EOE EE A E NA 236 EdICProdUctHon DAWNO S anana a a a 236 Insert an Orientation Icon into an Assembly Drawing csecsscessessssssssssrssessssessrseesaserseesaeseseeseesassesersaesesersersatsesensansates 236 Mark an Assembly s CG Position in an Assembly DraWINd sesss
382. ly SCCONSPOOL Permissions Pipe gt Spools gt Pipe Spools Edit Procedure Label Connecting Spool Assembly page 287 Inserts a label where the spool connects to another spool not in the drawing Bending Data XML Output 502 ShipConstructor can export XML bending data for pipes XML was chosen as the primary intermediary for export because its format can be verified against a schema the ability of translation through XSLT and simply because there are a great number of readers that are able to parse XML such as Excel Two target formats are currently supported for Bending information Raw and Formatted The information that is contained within the files is listed as follows Part name Raw Raw indicates that the information is in its most native form The information is highly normalized and is presented in millimeter length units and degrees angular units The information is prepared and validated against schema that is installed in the install directory in the following path XMLSchemas Output Piping SC PipeBendingDataV2011 1 xsd The following diagram shows the primary schema definition for the Raw bending data Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Censor sheep in mm aed angles in deg a Ilj E fsciend2Green Straights t Pipe Bending Data schema outline 503 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference 504 attributes 7sc Rotation Rot
383. ly If there are none an error is reported and the saddle creation is aborted Unless only one possible connection exists and was used automatically select the desired connection and click OK The saddle end and connection are created If routing a fitting continue from Step 6 of the To insert a fitting in end mode procedure See End Mode page 163 otherwise continue from Step 4 of the To insert a straight duct or To insert a bent duct procedure see Straight Duct page 160 or Bent Duct page 161 Create a saddle connection between existing ducts l f 3 4 5 Create both parts that will be involved in the saddle connection They should be where you wish them to be after Saddle creation with the exception of the branch part s end you will have the option to move that end along its own axis to achieve a desired extra material length in steps 5 and 6 Run the SCSADDLE command You are prompted to select the branch part that will connect to the new saddle end Click on the branch part You are prompted to select the header part on which the new saddle end will be created Click on the header part You are prompted whether or not you wish to adjust the branch part s end location to achieve a desired amount of extra material Enter Y or N for Yes or No respectively If you select No skip entering the amount of extra material If you select Yes you are prompted to enter an amount of extra material 173 HVAC Modeling
384. ly The Find window can also be used to search for assemblies and or Spools The Find window appears E Find Find what Look for 4 Assemblies 4 Spools J Supports Parts Cancel Enter the full or partial name of the part Click OK ShipConstructor selects the part 5 Ifthe slected part is not the one you were searching for you can choose Tools gt Find Next or press F3 to select the next part in the tree that contains the specified search word To zoom in to a part in the drawing 1 Inthe Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 select the parts or assemblies to zoom in to 2 Right click on any of the selected parts or assemblies and choose Zoom To 3 Ifthe parts are in the current drawing ShipConstructor will zoom the drawing view so the parts fill the view To remove parts from a drawing Warning If you remove parts from a planar group drawing or curved group drawing the parts will be deleted 1 Inthe Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 select the parts or assemblies 2 Right click on the selected parts and assemblies and choose Unload ShipConstructor removes the parts from the current drawing To hide or show parts in the drawing 1 Inthe Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 click the light bulb beside the part or assembly WV Part is in the current drawing and it is visible e T Partis in the current drawi
385. ly appear except that all Revision columns are reset to a blank value To delete a revision 1 Choose BOM Revisions gt Delete All BOM Revisions from Current Layout page 483 or BOM Revisions gt Delete All BOM Revisions from All Layouts page 483 2 All revisions are deleted 3 revisions deleted in layout Master BOM Or 3 revisions deleted in 2 layouts List Revisions Information about the revisions in the current layout can be printed to the command line Revisions are listed with their name description user and date time of creation To list revisions 1 Choose BOM Revisions gt List BOM Revisions page 483 2 Choose R or enter to display the revisions Select what to list Revisions Operations All lt Revisions gt 3 Choose N or enter to avoid seeing a long list of parts changed per revision ISL SEIS ING SS lt Nos gt 4 Therevisions are then listed at the command line Inspect a Plotted Assembly Drawing After plotting an assembly drawing visually inspect the plotted drawing for format and content Make sure things like 3D orientation icons and weld symbols are included and that every part is annotated Getting Started with Production Update Production Drawings This command will allow the update of multiple production drawings at once As this is a time consuming process the only user input required is the initial setup and once started the update will continue without user input until complete 1 E
386. lying parallel to the ship s decks frames or longitudinal bulkheads respectively When there are 2 directions that result in the chosen alignment which is usually the case ShipConstructor will arbitrarily choose one of them and then ask you if you would like to use the other direction instead e Align to WCS Aligns the NavAid such that its spikes are directed along world axes only available in certain cases when the NavAid already lies in a world plane Offset routing options These options affect your current routing offset see Offset Routing page 175 e xXOffset YOffset Prompts you to type the new X or Y component of the routing offset respectively e Choose offset Allows you to choose a routing offset visually you will type the letter corresponding to one of several named points on the bounding box of the duct s profile at the current end Creating Connections While Routing In End Mode Whether routing straights bents or fittings connection creation is initiated by clicking an existing free duct end when picking the first point The choices you are prompted to make is dependent on whether or not there are connections defined between the two involved end treatments and if you are in On the Fly mode or not In stock non OTF mode In stock mode duct ends can connect if their profiles match and if at least one connection is defined between their end treatments If the end you are routing by cannot connect but a diff
387. m 400 SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set System HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set System Toolbar HVAC gt lt i Command SCHvacSetSystem Permissions None Procedure Set Up HVAC Systems page 149 Lets you assign a duct to a different branch SC HVAC gt Saddles gt Create Saddle R HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Saddles gt Create Saddle None Command SCSaddle Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Create a saddle connection between existing ducts page 173 Inserts a saddle into an existing duct SC HVAC gt Saddles gt Remove Saddle HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Saddles gt Remove Saddle None SCRemoveSaddle Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Remove a Saddle page 174 Removes an existing saddle SC HVAC gt Insulation and Finishes gt Add Insulation HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Insulation and Finishes gt Add Insulation Toolbar None Command SCAPPLYINSULATION Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Insulation Reference page 431 Adds Insulation to a part Appendix B HVAC Command Reference 401 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference 402 SC HVAC gt Insulation and Finishes gt View Finishes HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Insulation and Finishes gt View Finishes None Command SCVIEWFIN
388. mand SCAddSpoolBrk Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Add and Remove Spool Breaks page 197 Adds a spool break to a connection 399 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove Spool Break HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Spool Panel SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove Spool Break Ei pi Toolbar Distributed Systems Utilities gt Command SCRemoveSpoolBrk Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Add and Remove Spool Breaks page 197 Removes a spool break from a connection SC HVAC gt Spools gt Un spool Connected Parts None SC HVAC gt Spools gt Un spool Connected Parts None Command SCUSCP Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Unspools a connected part SC HVAC gt Systems gt System Manager HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Systems gt System Manager Toolbar HVAC gt Command SCHvacSystemM anager Permissions None Procedure Set Up HVAC Systems page 149 Opens the System Manager letting you create and edit HVAC systems SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set Current System From HVAC Part HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set Current System From HVAC Part Toolbar HVAC gt i Command SCHvacSetSystemFromPart Permissions None Procedure Set the Current System page 151 Set the current system of the model drawing by selecting a part that is assigned to the desired syste
389. mand line Part Views 56 A Part View is a Snapshot of a part that can be loaded into any drawing to be used for reference or for enhanced display capabilities Part Views cannot be edited and changes made directly to the Part View will not affect the parts they were created from Part View Advantages e Load a view of any part into any ShipConstructor drawing e Improved Live Sectioning support e Flexible to support many loading strategies ie Load via Assembly Extents Relationships ect Supported ShipConstructor Entities e All Structure Parts e All Pipe Parts e All HVAC Parts e Equipment Library Setup e Supports e Standard Assemblies as individual parts e Hangers Licensing User will need to have a valid Universal Structure Pipe Equipment HVAC or Electrical license and up do date ShipConstructor subscription to run any of the PartView commands Loading Part Views When Part Views are loaded any parts which currently exist in the current or any M Linked drawings will not be created as Part Views If a Part View Is loaded into a drawing in which there is already a Part View in the drawing for the same contained part then the existing Part View will be updated and a new Part View is not created Export Export a ShipConstructor Drawing to an AutoCAD only Drawing You may wish to open a ShipConstructor drawing on a machine that does not have ShipConstructor To facilitate this ShipConstructor has a command that
390. manufacturer you want 4 Click Usage Log ShipConstructor displays a list of all stocks using the selected manufacturer a Manufacturer LENNOX Usage 23 04 2013 10 54 36 tet Notepad Administrator File Edit View Settings D GAH S A aB al BQ Q See oe z Shipconstructor 2014 Manager 23 Usage Report For Manufacturers LENNOX 4 Log Date 23 04 2013 10 54 36 5 PLEER ELTERE ELTERE ELLERT ELTELTE EL EEEE LERE EREA ELEELE PED PLO 6 7 z Equipment Classes 075 085 Coll Sell 429 bytes CR LF INS Default Text 33 Library Setup Finishes 34 Parts often have a finish applied to them for example paint You must set up the finishes you plan to use in the project A finish type is a group where you can set up similar types of finishes For example you may have a finish type named Paint that contains finishes like antifouling primer and enamel Create a Finish Type To create a finish type 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Finishes page 304 to open the Finishes window 3 Click New Type 4 Type a name for the finish type and press Enter Create a Finish To create a finish 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Finishes page 304 to open the Finishes window 3 Select the finish type that the new finish will belong to 4 Click New Finish 5 Type a name for the finish and press Enter Rename a F
391. may be useful if for example a polyline is slightly out of plane or if you defined objects on the thickness throw UCS and now want them in the construction UCS To convert a 3D object to a 2D object 1 Choose SC Utilities gt 3D to 2D page 356 2 Select the objects to convert Project Shapes You can project a shape from an orthogonal plane frame deck longitudinal bulkhead to a skewed plane along the X Y or Z axis of the world coordinate system Note Projected circles that produce elliptical shapes are converted to line segmented polylines To project shapes from an orthogonal plane to a skewed plane 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Orthographic Projection page 357 2 Select the objects you want to project 3 Type the projection direction in the world coordinate system X Y or Z Reduce the Number of Vertices on Polylines Some polylines may contain a large number of vertices You can reduce the number of vertices on a polyline by removing vertices that are below a certain tolerance value You may want to do this for various reasons e Display speed Polylines that contain a large number of vertices take longer to display Reducing the number of vertices on polylines can speed up your display This is especially important when displaying solids If you create a solid from polylines that contain a large number of vertices then the solid will also contain a large number of vertices and will slow down your display e Compu
392. mber for the regenerated names For example you change a naming convention to remove the part side element The part whose name is Unit01 Port 436 will be renamed to Unit01 436 if that name is available Otherwise it will take the next available name This feature is also beneficial because when regenerating names if the naming convention definition has not been changed parts that already have a generated name will not have their name changed There are two additional checkbox options on the Generate Names window e Generate Names for Items without Currently Generated Name e Use Active Name Convention Selecting the Generate Names for Items without Currently Generated Name option will generate names for all ShipConstructor entities that match the groups selected in the tree regardless of whether or not they have an existing generated name If the Use Active Name Convention option is not set entities that have an existing generated name have their names regenerated using the Name Convention their name was last generated with Entities that do not have a generated name will have a name generated using the current Active Name Convention Selecting the Use Active Name Convention option will cause all generated names to be generated using the current active Name Convention for their category Naming Convention Concepts Understanding Seeding Seeding allows you more control over how your names are generated This is best illustrated by an example Su
393. me The descriptive name of the project that will appear in report headers and title pages Standard Assemblies Structure Allow Remote Profile Cutouts Include cutouts from Profiles in different units when adding cutouts to a plate AutoOrient Text When looking at text in structure parts the text can be viewed as being always readable no matter your viewpoint This is not the default AutoCAD behavior You may be more used to the AutoCAD behavior to verify you are looking from the back side 0 0001 Nw WLN_1000 0 D Oo oO D Brd 4 faa 109 0A cBo4 FR45 A04 PO1 gt BLK 80000 00008 ALE V x _ AutoText Off x _ AutoText On The difference on the text when viewing from the back side AutoOrient Text 3D PDM This setting affects the text while in any product model drawing Arrangement Drawings This setting affects the text while in pipe HVAC or equipment arrangement drawings Assembly Drawings This setting affects the text while in assembly drawings Nest Drawings This is always on because marked text should always be readable Spool Drawings This setting affects the text while in pipe or HVAC spool drawings Bend Tolerance deg The minimum angle in degrees at which a curved faceplate is considered to have a bend A curved faceplate following the hull is usually represented by a polyline with small straight line segments The directional change from segment to segment is usua
394. me of the selected accessory type Enter a name for the accessory and press Enter Enter a Description and Weight for the accessory Copy an Accessory Package To copy an accessory package 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Accessory Packages to open the Accessory Packages window 3 Set Type to the type of accessory packages to list Library Setup Tip Use the Spec Filter to filter the lists under Accessory Packages by spec 4 Select the accessory package you want to copy 5 Click Copy to copy the accessory package 6 Entera name for the copied accessory package and press Enter Delete an Accessory Package To delete an accessory package 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Accessory Packages to open the Accessory Packages window 3 Set Type to the type of accessory packages you want to list Tip Use the Spec Filter to filter the lists under Accessory Packages by spec 4 Select the accessory package you want to delete 5 Click Delete to delete the accessory package Delete an Accessory or Accessory Type To delete an accessory or accessory type 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Accessory Packages to open the Accessory Packages window 3 Under Accessories select the accessory or accessory type that you want to delete 4 Click Delete Add or Remove an Accessory To or From an Accessor
395. method you will select a sequence of points that form the path to which the segments of the bent duct will be aligned 161 HVAC Modeling 162 x 3 Choose SC HVAC gt Bent The first segment of a bent duct appears with the first end at the cursor Information about the duct is shown on the command line You are prompted to pick the start point of the bent duct or choose an option Please pick point or Stock Next end lt 1 gt XOffset YOffset Choose offset lt 0 0 gt Toggle mitered lt rounded gt Rotate sAddle Insulation If desired choose one of the available options see General Options page 168 for options not listed here e Next end Switches which end of the bent duct will be placed at the picked point e Toggle mitered Switch between rounded corners and mitered corners The current setting is shown in lt angle brackets gt If you switch to mitered corners you must specify the number of miter segments per corner e Rotate Rotates the duct around its own centerline the NavAid is not affected Click anywhere in the model to select the start point of the duct You may also connect to an existing unconnected duct end by clicking on its end point indicated by an arrow see Creating Connections While Routing In End Mode page 169 The NavAid appears at the selected point and the end point of the duct you are placing is anchored there If you click on a snap point of an existing AutoCAD polyline you are given
396. ming convention Delete Deletes the selected element from the selected naming convention Property Value Displays the properties and values of the selected element and lets you edit the values Understanding Seeding Seeding gives you more control over how your names are generated This is best illustrated by an example Suppose you have a naming convention defined with three elements Material System Auto number with the auto number starting at 1 and the increment being 1 The first part you create may have a name like this M1 FreshWater 001 In this example the part is made from a material named M1 and is in the Fresh Water system For this example we will assume that both the Material element and the System element are seeds If you create a new part that was also made from material M1 and in system Fresh Water the name will be as follows M1 FreshWater 002 If you create a third part that was made of material M1 but was in the Salt Water system ShipConstructor will generate a part name as follows 309 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands M1 SaltWater 001 Notice how the number has restarted at 1 This is because one of your seed elements has changed in this case the System If you create a fourth part this time back in the Fresh Water system but with material M2 ShipConstructor would generate a name as follows M2 FreshWater 001 Again the numbering scheme has changed because the combination of your two seed elements
397. mmation however and this is for the Length field It is not summed so that the BOM can produce output like a 6 485 16 PSMCS_00 75_40 AS3B Where each of the six pipes is 48 5 16 long Use the Total Length field and Alias the name to your company standards if you need to sum the lengths of the objects Merging Columns It is sometimes necessary to show information that is contained in different locations within objects in the same cell For instance an Assembly Bill of Materials may list assemblies spools structure parts pipe parts etc Rather than displaying multiple columns to display the relevant name information you can merge the data into the same column thereby reducing the total number of columns displayed in the BOM table In order to merge the columns the columns must e Have the same Field Alias Rename the field alias from the default to the required name Appendix Production Command Reference e Be consecutively ordered within the BOM definition e Contain mutually exclusive data i e only one of the fields will return data If more than one field returns values then varies will be displayed in the cell General gt Production Output gt Predefined Assembly Format Permissions General gt Manager gt Edit Predefined Assembly Format Procedure Predefined Assembly Format page 234 Predefined assembly format is a way to assign specific templates to assembly levels When an as
398. mong all the leaders on the line 3 Distribution mode Can be a Nearest Labels stay on positions along the line which are the closest possible to their represented parts Nearest mode is the default setting when a distribution line is created b Center labels are centered in the middle of distribution lines 263 Getting Started with Production M 11 r Led itt Win AeH Equidistant labels bubbles are evenly distributed on the line C WI m 34 rt me es iF f J i at ia l i 4 jy 1 a A K r if F Leader Insertion Mode This command is used to modify the insertion mode of all the labels connected to selected distribution lines To set the leader insertion mode i Choose Set Leader Insertion Mode page 485 Select distribution lines Select the distribution lines 2 lt B g parer an insertion moce lebt Right Center Closest Horizontal Enter the new insertion mode 3 Redistributing Leaders on a Distribution Line This command is used to redistribute leaders on the distribution line in one of the three modes To Redistribute Leaders 4 Choose Redistribute Leaders page 485 Select distribution lines Select the distribution lines oF 264 Getting Started with Production Enter a distribution mode Center Nearest Equidistant lt Nearest gt 6 Enter one of the three distribution modes Exporting Draw
399. mpts you to enter a second point Enter Point on plane 2 Choose a point on the second clipping plane whether it is the front or back clipping plane will be determined by ShipConstructor Note If the clipping planes are not to your liking you can remove them with the command SC Utilities gt Remove clip see below Remove clip To clear a viewport clip 1 Choose Remove clip from the SC Utilities menu 2 Select the viewport to clear the clip Export a BOM from an Arrangement Drawing to a Text File Use the AutoCAD command TABLEXPORT This command outputs a csv file Comma separated value to a location that you specify Labeling Automatic Labeling Automatic labeling places distribution lines around the extents of the geometry and places labels on the distribution lines The arrow points of the labels can optionally point to the piecemark point for parts without piecemarks this is the logical center of the part or to a visible edge of parts If a viewport has any existing distribution lines none will be created and the automatic labeling will use the existing line s Label to Visible Part Edges This option places label s arrow point on the edge of parts Visible refers to visible in the viewport when plotted The viewport s Shade plot property controls this Options Adjacent Part Edge Tolerance A labelling rule checks if a possible label point s distance to other part s visible edges If the distance is less than this t
400. mwte 390 SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double Reducing VS Seattle goede lg dalla eliotn ladon atuodes 391 SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double 2Segment TeC aranan lone nnedaieiondeaaidaaatoniodinns 391 SC HVAC Laterais Lateral eerren ai Eaa eea N EE aE E 391 SC HVAC gt Laterais gt Reducing Lea Le We ecu nana oa vi al eli aieiaa 391 SC HVAC gt Laterals gt 2 Segment Lateral siisiiicicvesisntasiccsincases ines ica cvicaesvs aieansdavileviviuaesiava uveutata aiasbaea viaain anniv anseuanedunnedeveiee 392 SE AVAG Sat Cf alS Double ACS aA van tvsseisisatvasuiinnaaansah a E liv aatunnesibuniuedbuinniiic aati Dinctctnn july nuun Don tisunnas tuinatiniRaetaha 392 SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double Reducing Lateral ccccsssssscsssssssessssessssessssessssessssesessesersesersesesaseesasersasersasersasersass 392 SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double 2 Segment Lateral cccecsssssssrsssssssrssrssssessrssrsasseserseesassesensaesessesersansessesersansesensensatens 392 SC AVAG CTOS ES OSS a AA tana UD ae nea 393 SC HVAC Crosses gt RECt RaAGIAN CrOSS sssini cas seus unos eens cts a E Eaa cau eaaa i sions ads Eaa E a TA A NS 393 SC VAG COSSA FCCC OSS acetate tenants dalla fen lel R O ARO EA RO E 393 SC HVAC gt Cro5565 gt 2 Segment COSS 2c cea aaa ak a EA AEO gate cat on ad ONENE Ea EN AREER eae AENEA ANNA 393 SC HVAC gt Crosses gt DOUPIE ChOSS vag sash aani a EAEAN ENEE 394 SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double Reducing CroSS es scxincaocnsducisrcuntaeS
401. n will be lost If a spool drawing was associated with the spool the drawing will be moved to the Deleted Spool Drawings folder under HVAC in the relevant unit 1 Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 2 Select the spools you wish to undefine and right click on a defined spool in your selection and choose Undefine Spool Note You cannot undefine a locked spool ShipConstructor moves the spool from the Defined Spools Modified Spools or Empty Spools category to the Undefined Spools category Note Empty spools occur when all the parts from a defined or modified spool are deleted They can be treated like a modified spool and usually should just be undefined to free up the spool name To undefine all spools in a category Warning You cannot undo this action and all information related to the spool database information will be lost If a spool drawing was associated with the spool the drawing will be moved to the Deleted Spool_ Drawings folder under HVAC in the relevant unit 1 Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 2 Right click on the Defined Spools header or the Modified Spools header and choose Undefine All Note You cannot undefine a locked spool ShipConstructor moves the spools from the Defined Spools or the Modified Spools category to the Undefined Spools category Note Empty spools occur when all the parts from a defined or modified spool are deleted They can be treated lik
402. n 10 4 Leader Length SUL model space Text style Standard a Text size O00 AIrOW ize 75 Orient To view Seale dimensions bo layout Paper space Label Layer TEXT Label Matris Text style Standard ha Text size 0 1 Test Laver TET Mate Layer MATARIA Precision Curent Units Dimension Points Picked Points C Paints Projected to Current UCS Bubble style The style of the bubble surrounding the letter label Bubble Size Bubble Margin Diameter The size of the bubble For the Bubble and Rectangle styles this is a margin between the text and the bubble If Scale dimensions to layout is checked then this value is in paperspace units otherwise it is in model space units Leader Length The length of the leader line between the picked dimension point and the label Text style The style of the text within the label Text size The size of the text within the label If Scale dimensions to layout is checked then this value is in paperspace units otherwise it is in model space units Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Arrow size The size of the arrow Setting this value to zero will suppress the displaying of an arrow If Scale dimensions to layout is checked then this value is in paperspace units otherwise it is in model space units Orient To View Orients the label to be facing you when you are looking from any viewpoint Scale dimensions to layout Pap
403. n grid Choose and order the Collectors page 448 that are appropriate for your BOM of op w Add BOM Fields by pressing the Add Remove button You can choose from a predefined set of production fields or choose from any of the user defined attributes that have been added to your project Note You can modify BOM definitions after they are in use and they will be updated the next time a BOM update is performed To create a BOM definition Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Production Output gt Bill Of Materials page 445 to open the BOM Definitions window Select the type of drawing in the BOM Definitions list that you want to create a BOM for Click New Enter the Style Name and fill in the remaining items in the BOM Definitions list With the style selected Click Add Remove in the Fields section oS SS a a Choose BOM Fields oc oC fan Production Fields Atribute Fields PEL User Attributes Field Module Include Field Types Description Angle String Alea AIBA Angle Approval tatus Area Area with Green The angle of the HVAC or pipe elbow stock curvature The approval status of the spool The area of one side of the part The area of the park including green 224 Assembly Bend Branch Catalogs Common H ame Cross Tier End Endcut Cross Tier Start Endet Curved Cutback Angle Drawing Drawing Path E
404. n tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Copy Label SCLABELCOPY Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Copy Label page 244 Lets you create labels that are copies of an existing label with the contents changed to reflect the first BOM column of the selected part The copied label will be created with the label text and styles from the BOM table and geometry information from the source label Label gt Label All Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Label All SCLABELALL Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Label All page 243 Generates labels for all new BOM items and places them on the ANNOTATION layer Labels are generated only once Subsequent commands only update the label text to reflect the Bill of Materials When label tracking is on even though labels are placed in paper space they now track the objects in model space so that if the user pans zooms or orbits in the viewport the labels track accordingly and remain synchronized to the objects that they represent Label gt Label Current Layout Button n Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Auto Label Layout SCLABELLAYOUT Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure P
405. naming convention used by the spool or by picking a different generated name using the spool s current naming convention Select the naming convention in the Properties section and change it via the dropdown control The next available name of the new naming convention Is used OR Click the button beside the spool name in the Properties section A list of available names appears Select a Name ColdWater 11 ColdWater 12 ColdWater 13 Cold Water 14 ColdWater 15 ColdWater 16 ColdWater 17 ColdWater 18 ColdWater 19 ColdWater20 Start At Number of Names Remember Range Get Names Cancel Select a name you want and click OK The current name will not appear in the list To change the hierarchy level l 2 3 4 Open the Spool Manager See Creating Spools page 193 Select the spool Make sure the properties section of the Spool Manager is open See Spool Manager Reference page 510 Click the button beside the hierarchy name HVAC Modeling A hierarchy tree appears SC Select Hierarchy Sl ie UOS Unassigned Pipe Spool QQ UnassignedHVAC Spool QQ Unassigned Equipment ff Unassigned Supports fA 0301 p 0302 jA 0303 H g 0304 f 0305 a pA 0306 7 Current unit only Cancel 5 Select a hierarchy level and click OK Note If you change the hierarchy level of your spool and your naming convention has a hierarchy level item in it the name will not be updated
406. nch Catalogs EL EQ H P String The name of the catalog Common H ame H P S String Same as part name For Structural parts Spools and Assemblies same as stock mame for everythin i PEL sd String O Varation of the cable support type Cross Tier End Endcut P Sking Endcut applied to the end end of the cross ters Cross Tier Start Endet P Sking Endcut applied to the start end of the cross ters Curved String Whether the plate partis curved Cutback amp nogle Angle The angle of the elbow fitting less the cutback amount on each end Drawing EU H F Sting The drawing the part i modeled in Drawing Path EQ G H HL F String Full path to the drawing the part is modeled iri Electrical Cable Court Integer The number of electrical cables Electrical Cable Length Length The length of the electrical cables C lakr l M ahl i aalt Sita tabl b The uieiabe AF RRA ALi a bl ed Production Fields Hardcoded list of BOM fields Attribute Fields The list of user defined attribute string fields PEL User Attributes The list of user defined attribute fields for the new style user defined attributes available for project equipment list parts Include Checkbox to indicate if the field is in the BOM table definition Field The name of the field Module The list of modules that this field applies to H HVAC P Pipe S Structure EQ Equipment EL Electrical
407. ncluded list back to the available collector list The following table lists the collectors and their functions Collector Additional Functionalit All Accessories Collects the accessories from all part types that can have accessories Equipment pipe connections HVAC connections Cable Supports Penetrations Pipe Hangers Assembly Collects parts that are in subassemblies based Include Standard Assemblies if checked on the primary product hierarchy this will collect parts in standard A row for each direct subassembly that contains assemblies parts is shown Filter Only Allows the collector to collect but not display the items in the BOM Useful if you want to only include items directly within the Assembly and not from sub assemblies Bending Info Lists information necessary to cut and bend pipe Typically links to Cutlist BOM in order to maintain consistent item numbering Cable Support Collects accessories from cable support parts Accessories Cable Support Part Collects cable support parts Corner Point Lists the end positions and change of direction Cannot currently include other fields or points within a run of pipe in pipe coordinates change column ordering Typically links to Global Point BOM in order to maintain consistent item numbering Distributed System Collects all parts that are part of supports This Support only included profiles and plates and not the pipe hangers Equipment Accessories Collects
408. nd SCHvacRectRadCross Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a rectangular radial cross duct SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Reducing Cross HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Reducing Cross Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Cross Flyout gt us Command SCHvacRedCross Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a reducing cross duct SC HVAC gt Crosses gt 2 Segment Cross HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Crosses gt 2 Segment Cross Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Cross Flyout gt pe Command SCHvac2SegCross Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a two segment cross duct 393 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double Cross HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double Cross Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Cross Flyout gt ce Command SCHvacDbICross Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a double cross duct SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double Reducing Cross HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Panel SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double Reducing Cross Toolbar HVAC gt HVAC Cross Flyout gt ce Command SCHvacDbIRedCross Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Fittings page 163 Inserts a double reducing cross duct SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double 2
409. nd click OK Transfer parts to another drawing unit The SCHEPTransferPartToDrawing command allows the moving of HEP parts from one drawing unit to another drawing unit To transfer parts 1 Enter SCHEPTRANSFERPARTTODRAWING command 2 Select all HVAC ducts that you want transferred Press Enter 3 Choose a drawing unit in the selection dialog and press OK to transfer the parts Copy parts to another drawing unit The SCHEPReplicateToDrawing command allows the copying of HEP parts from one drawing unit to another drawing unit To copy parts 1 Enter SCHEPREPLICATETODRAWING command 2 Select all HVAC ducts that you want copied Press Enter 3 Choose a drawing unit in the selection dialog and press OK to copy the parts HVAC Spools Creating Spools To create a spool drawing you must have at least one defined and approved spool When finished modeling it is easier to then start adding spool breaks defining no spool items and define spools The Spool Manager helps you do this The Spool Manager is a modeless window which allows changes in the model drawing while being open In ShipConstructor there is now no need to refresh the Spool Manager while modeling as it is automatically refreshed to reflect the changes made For instance if a part is added to a run of ducts it is automatically added to the correct grouping in the Spool Manager as soon as the part has finished being placed 193 HVAC Mod
410. nel Update BOMs SCUP DATEBOMS Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Update BOMs page 239 Updates all the BOM Tables in the drawing BOM gt Insert BOM Table Production tab gt BOM panel Insert BOM Table Command SCINSERTBOM Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Insert a BOM Table into a Production Drawing Template page 227 Inserts a BOM table using a wizard 474 Appendix Production Command Reference ES BOM Definition Wizard Step lof 2 Please Select BOM Definition BOM Definitions Fields E General E a ee Part Name Park Name OE Quy ty stock Name Shack Name Weight Length None Add Remove Colleckors Note Collector order is important Position determines BOM output Al Aecescories 1 Cable Support Accessories Cable Support Part gew macopy Def at Structure Part al Distributed System Support Equipment Part General Part Ga port Export MIL a l o AVAC Connection Accessories IRA m Mo Step 2 lets you select BOM types BOM functionality depends on the production drawing type All drawing types except for Nest and Profile plots require that the BOM be inserted in paper space only Nest and Profile Plots are inserted in model sp
411. nformation available in Spool drawings for bending tables consists of Bending Information End Corner Point Locations and Global Point Connectivity The latter two BOMs comprise what is termed Location Tables The following diagram shows the arrangement in the Spool location of the BOM Definition Manager 507 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference 508 Pipe Ay Parts Cutlist Bey Cutlist Location Tables Global Position GlobalPos Corner Point CornerPoint Bending Tables BendingInfo The BOMs that define these created almost like others except the fields and Collectors are not selectable but are chosen automatically when the BOM Definition is first created In the above image each of the items with the IE icon is a BOM definition and the other nodes are just grouping nodes Corner Point The Corner Point BOM is comprised of the Corner Point Collector and two fields Item alpha numeric and Position The position field is broken out as X Y and Z coordinates in the BOM table The X Y and Z values are converted to a spool coordinate system that is defined as follows the first pipe is aligned with the x axis and the z axis is as close to the WCS z axis as possible while maintaining an orthogonal coordinate system The origin is determined to be closest to the ship coordinate system origin sorted first by x distance then y and then z There is always on
412. ng and the layers For parts new bo the drawing Drawings Systems Assemblies Volumes Selected Sources Layers Drawings Layer os z Drawings Enter fi er text Enter fiter text i Boundary i H01 E C Structure C Frame v7 EP Ho1FR_oo n IEP HO FR_o1 iv EP HOLFR_o2 iv EF HOLFR_o3 IEP HOLFR_o4 Boundary HO1 Structure Frame HOIFR_OO HOIFR_O1 HOIFR_O2 HOIFR_O3 HOLFR_O4 HO1FR_O0 HO1FR_O1 HOIFR_ Oz HOIFR_ Os HOIFR_O4 HO1FR_OS HOIFR_O6 HOIFR_O HOIFR_ O06 HO1FR_O9 HOIFR_O0 HOIFR_O1 HOIFR_Oz HOIFR_Os HO1FR_O4 HOIFR_OS HOIFR_O6 HOIFR_O HOIFR_O6 HOIFR_O9 HO1 HOUSE HO1 HOUSESIDI 7 EP HO1FR_o5 HOIFR_O5 HO1 HOUSE HO1 HOLISESIDI gt EP Ho FR_o6 HOIFR 06 HOWFR oF Show spools F Spool Layers override conflicts AAi _ Relabel all 247 Getting Started with Production 3 All sources that currently make up the arrangement drawing are selected in the various source trees with the layers specified for those sources will be remembered from creation or the last time it was updated In addition a summary of all sources can be seen on the right side of the screen Add or remove sources as necessary You also set the destination layers for where new parts from these sources will be placed Existing parts will stay on their current layer Conflict
413. ng but is not visible Hidden e Part is not in the current drawing 74 Library Setup oi Assembly or spool with some hidden parts and some visible parts When you click on the light bulb ShipConstructor changes the part s or assembly s visibility in the current drawing You can also use SC Utilities gt Hide Objects SC Utilities gt Unhide Objects and SC Utilities gt Unhide All Objects to hide or show unhide parts Renaming Parts Parts with generated names can be renamed through a variety of methods The most common one Is being assigned to a new assembly Renaming or changing the level of an assembly that has parts assigned to it or any of its children will also regenerate the names of those parts Names will only be generated from the part assembly assignments in the primary product hierarchy Parts with user defined names such as Standard Parts will never be renamed Parts will be renamed only when the current user owns the parts for that unit and their naming convention requires it Only Structure parts and Hangers are affected by this because the other part types do not allow assembly elements in their naming conventions If a project is split in such a way that separate users have control of a unit s parts and that unit s product hierarchy then after modifying the product hierarchy those parts with naming conventions indicating that the parts need to be renamed due to the modification will not be renamed
414. ng shaded viewports centerlines are projected in front of the part geometry such that they are easily visible Show Wall Thickness When this option is checked the ducts will accurately show their wall thickness Unchecking this option may improve display performance 416 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference Show Insulation When checked the parts will display all the insulation applied to them Unchecking this option may improve display performance The same insulated part shown with insulation turned off left and with insulation turned on Draw Part Using Branch Color Uses the duct s branch system color for display If this option is unchecked the duct uses its AutoCAD color If you want to organize your duct colors by layer instead of system uncheck this option set all your ducts to use ByLayer coloring and apply the correct color to the layers on which the ducts reside It is very useful to color parts by system in your model drawings and to color them by layer in production drawings 417 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference 418 End Numbers End numbers can show up on a duct when the mouse is hovering over the duct They label which end is which This is very useful when trying to place a duct e Scaled To End Size When selected will scale the end numbers relative to the size of the duct s end by the amount entered e Fixed Height On Screen When selected will show the end numbers at a fixed height accordi
415. ng to the value entered e None When selected will not display the end numbers The same duct showing scaled end numbers left and fixed height end numbers right 2D 3D Wireframe Display Draw Line Mode Icons When checked will display the line mode icons that are associated with the duct s end treatments Double Line Display Defines whether the solid is drawn for HVAC parts Parts with a profile smaller than the specified value if using the For Profiles Smaller Than option or all parts if Never is chosen will be drawn in a single line display and show in the part color not the centerline color Draw Edges When checked edges of the each duct s solid geometry will be shown in 2D and 3D wireframe display modes Note Pipe and HVAC rendering has changed significantly since older versions of ShipConstructor 2006 2008 Instead of the old edge style options edge style is now controlled by the AutoCAD system variables similar to AutoCAD solids See the ISOLINES and DISPSILH variables Also Pipe HVAC models now obey AutoCAD s adaptive degradation and level of detail settings See the native AutoCAD display options Connections These are options that are related to connections Show Connections Displays geometry at all connected duct ends A small circle is used in 2D linemode and a line surrounding the connection in combination with small mesh covering the connection gap Is used in all other shademodes Ap
416. nge in the standards would change the physical properties of a part the drawings need to be opened and saved to update weight and center of gravity data Checking a unit will also check that template drawings used by any of those unit s drawings are both registered to the project and the drawing file exists If the option to repair errors is selected missing drawing files will be removed from the project and any drawings that are not registered will be Currently the template types checked are Assembly Pipe HVAC Equipment Arrangement and Pipe HVAC Spool To check a unit drawing 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Check gt Check Unit page 340 ShipConstructor checks the unit drawing and displays the following message when finished including a log file that contains a summary of the check P Unit Check 2006 07 19 16 13 00 txt Notepad File Edit Format View Help checking Unit drawing B Checking Unit Drawing Checking SCon Structure drawing information Done Checking Unit Drawing Checking Drawings exist in database Done Checking Drawings exist in database Checking Drawings in database exist as drawings Done Checking Drawings in database exist as drawings Cleaning unused numbers for naming conventions Done Cleaning unused numbers for naming conventions Checking Planar Group Model Drawings Checking Planar Group Model Drawing C ProjectsZ006 2006 102 Units B Structure LngBhd BL51400 dwg Checking SCon S
417. nly use a local lock OK Gets the selected licenses from the license servers ShipConstructor gt ShipConstructor Help Lets you access the ShipConstructor online help and individual manuals in PDF format 348 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands ShipConstructor gt About ShipConstructor Displays the ShipConstructor version numbers W SHIPCONSTRUCTOR COPYRIGHT 1990 2013 SSI SRipComstructor Software including Database Driven Relational bject Mode OOROM is the property of S515 It cannot be reproduced translated resold rented disassembled reverse engineered decompiled modifi ed transmitted or used to create derivative works and its we is restricted a set out in the SSI License Agreement All Rights Reserved ShipCanstructar is a registered trademark of SSI Sole project courtesy af Peters Shipyards NL Version Shiplonstructor 2014 Version The version of the ShipConstructor program SC Utilities Menu SC Utilities gt 3D Viewpoint Lets you select a 3D or 2D view from several pre defined standard views Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands SC Utilities gt Activate UCS SC Utilities tab gt Visual panel SC Utilities gt Activate UCS SCUCSLIST Permissions None Procedure Activate a UCS page 52 When this command is used in the structure module it enables the use of PlanarGroup Planes activates a UCS or PlanarGroup Plane or creates a new UCS
418. nnect to an existing unconnected duct end by clicking on its end point indicated by an arrow see Creating Connections While Routing In End Mode page 169 The NavAid appears at the selected point and the end point of the fitting you are placing is anchored there If you connected the fitting to another duct continue from Step 6 Otherwise you are prompted to pick a point indicating the direction of the end you just placed or choose an option Please pick the second point of the end axis or plaNE XRotate YRotate ZRotate SNap lt on gt See General Options page 168 for explanation of the available options 163 HVAC Modeling 5 Click anywhere in the model to specify the direction of the current end s axis i e the end axis will be parallel to the line formed by this point and the point that you clicked in Step 3 The fitting is now restricted to rotation about this axis Specifying the location and normal of End 1 You are prompted to pick a point indicating the direction of an orienting end of the fitting or to choose an option Please pick a point indicating a rotation about the defined end axis or Next end for orientation lt 1 gt Forward Aft Port Starboard Up Down DEck align FRame align Long align ALign to WCS ZRotate SNap lt on gt Depending which end you placed in Step 3 not all ends will be available as an orienting end while cycling through ends with Next end for orientation For example if you placed a
419. not be moved and Product Hierarchy split to another project is displayed in a tooltip window Library Setup Tools Options Descriptionl ll 0102 Lower Side Assem E EEN roi Shell B 551 0102 P01 P01 S51 0102 P01 P02 P02 POS P04 POS P06 PO P08 Poo P10 Pil rir Show Current Unit Only Product Hierarchy 55 Level PANEL Selected Parts 2 To assign parts to an assembly that is beyond the limits of the Product Hierarchy palette while dragging the parts move the cursor above or below the Product Hierarchy palette to scroll the display within the Product Hierarchy palette up or down To scroll to the top or bottom of the Product Hierarchy palette hold down the Ctrl key while dragging To scroll one page at a time hold down the Shift key You can assign an assembly to another assembly only if the moved assembly is below the level of the target assembly To assign parts to an assembly method 2 Note You cannot undo Edit gt Undo a product hierarchy assignment Select the parts and or assemblies to reassign Choose Tools gt Assign to Assembly The Select Assembly window appears Select the assembly to assign the object to Click OK ee Ee i a 73 Library Setup Find Zoom Remove Hide and Show Parts To find a part 2 Inthe Product Hierarchy palette see Set Up Assembly Levels page 67 choose Tools gt Find This option is also available if you right click on an assemb
420. not defined cccccscessssssessssessssssesssssscsseserssssseesaseesesesersaseteesaseess 451 DSTA RES TaD scecont carseat ceaeatrnont chron tesco E R 451 Produ EON AD acca en ew ea edge da ea cdo cc a OORT AETA 454 CORT AGS aarne EAE OAE OA A enewen ATE AEA 459 Edit Production Drawing P ermiSSiO Fs aiuvsnceatse vant deena ila ula ed wlan wee NACAR 459 REVISIONS Add Edit IP EIIiSS OM ik seaseecescace ace aelsasitiwlweuielstvsig econ cal tceseil nara a a N nE 459 REVISIONS REMOVE PSMMISSION rgangan aa E 460 ShipConstructor gt Manage gt Volume Managel cccscscssscsscsccsssccssescessssessecssseceseesesseseseesaseesaseesaseesaseesaseesaseesasersaseneass 461 Update Beale Pere tneT nrer TRC a aa erE Ty rey nr tr CE nn Nn enn RE te ern ener rN teeny AANA 462 DFA WING REVISIONS Palette iad icharvareviaseneuacieuavyhetiavchesiglavanetinavsnea canteen nntnhonaainonnaseliidntelNininledanlnlieatloigatelinn 464 Qent orn CO Fa ig cette tacts itor cor cen xenon atone rie nba to essen a binned ede rare atandeee knee 466 CP TM eee aie asp ee eS ah dhe deal ahh eae cae eae tld aldol dod 467 Production Utilities gt Update All KeywordS ccsessrssssssesssrssessssrssssseseserssesesseseesaesassesersansesersersaseesersanseseesansansesensansates 467 Drawing Options gt Edit All Drawing QDUODS sasiciiinansiccsinvaanchinswnteasinavn guainavigauineas niniiesduuiah ans inh cehiniinansbinnineeeesiinuntenninian 468 Drawing Options gt Structure Drawing OPtiOns
421. ns and so on There are many types of naming conventions ShipConstructor organizes them within a tree You can set up several different naming conventions within each category but only one naming convention in each category can be the active naming convention that is used by ShipConstructor A naming convention is composed of elements You set up a naming convention by choosing various elements arranging them in order and setting their values When ShipConstructor automatically generates a name it formats the name using the elements of the active naming convention Library Setup Naming Conventions Window Naming Conventions E New 9 Delete y Set Active Manage Aliases Y Generate Harmes ki Usage Log Mame Conventions Elements In Use Mame Conventions Active Element Type Summary Space Allocation Static Space Allocations Static Standard Assemblies Parts in Standard Skatic oe Spools in Standard Assembly Level Characters 4uto Start Point Beginning OFfset 0 TreeLevel P4NEL Standard Assembly Static Skructure AutoNumber Digits 2 Startvalue 1 Increment 1 H Nests Parts aee ee Corrugation New static Delete or tnp Default Corrugation Element Details E Faceplate FP tmp Default Faceplate Sour ce Value DE Assembly Plank Characters Auto Default Plank Start Point El Plate Offset Flate tmp Use as Name Seed E Stiffener TreeLevel Default StifFener y StifF trap Profile Plot Sam
422. nside the cell and change the text Part Properties 1 Part Name The name of the part 2 Stock Name The name of the stock that the part was created from 3 Stock Description A description of the stock that the part was created from Right Click Menu for the Spool Manager There are many small right click menus for the Spool Manager that are each based on what you have selected Undefined Spools Category Menu 1 Define All Changes all the undefined spool groups into defined spools see Define and Undefine a Spool page 198 2 Expand All Expands all the nodes in the tree beneath this category 3 Collapse All Collapses all the nodes to the undefined spool group level Undefined Spool Menu 1 Define Spool Defines the spool see Define and Undefine a Spool page 198 Undefined Part Menu 1 Set No Spool Part Sets the undefined part to a no Spool part see No Spool Items page 195 Defined Spools Category Menu 1 Expand All Expands all the nodes in the tree beneath this category 2 Collapse All Collapses all the nodes to the defined spool level Defined Spool Menu 1 Lock Spool Only available if spool is unlocked Locks the spool see Lock and Unlock Spools page 200 2 Unlock Spool Only available if spool is locked Unlocks the spool see Lock and Unlock Spools page 200 3 co Spool Only available if spool is unlocked Undefines this spool see Define and Undefine a Spool page Def
423. nstructor will attempt to do this automatically If there is one catalog assigned to the stock it will be chosen for the part and if all the stocks are set to be Deferred by Default or have been given a default value they will be set to the default If ShipConstructor cannot set all these values automatically the dialog below will be shown This dialog allows users to enter the custom attributes and will abort the parts routing if it is cancelled Using the arrows to select items in a drop down menu and enter to move to the next non deferred attribute and the OK button after all attributes have been entered the user can quickly supply all the values using only the keyboard F Define attributes for Cross Attributes Required Attribute Value No Catalog No Catalogs Assigned Yes Notes Yes TagNum Insulation Reference Insulation on a duct can be defined on a stock item a system a spool and on individual parts When defining a stock item in the library setup there is a general property called Insulation where you select the insulation that came with the stock item or an insulation you always apply to this type of stock duct See Insulation page 35 and Create a Stock page 103 for more information While laying down a duct there is an option on the command line to select insulation See Straight Duct page 160 or Bent Duct page 161 or while in an HVAC drawing you can right click on a part and choose Change Insulation Th
424. nt Names To define an alias l 2 3 4 5 Open the Alias Manager Select the Database Item you wish to create an alias for from the drop down box Double click under the Alias column the row corresponding to the item you wish to create an alias for Type your alias and press the Enter key Click the OK button Generating Names in Groups The Generate Names window is used for generating names for groups of items without having to open drawings To open the Generate Names window i 46 Click the Generate Names button in the Naming Convention window F Generate Names Generate Names BA PID Test E Bectrical e HVAC a Penetrations H E Pipe F Generate Names for Items without Currently Generated Mame Use Active Name Convention Library Setup The Generate Names window displays a hierarchy of ShipConstructor entities representing categories of nameable items in ShipConstructor To Regenerate Names for a Set of ShipConstructor Entities 1 Click the checkboxes in the tree corresponding to the ShipConstructor entities that you wish to regenerate names for 2 Click the Generate button For all of the entities contained in the groups selected in the tree ShipConstructor regenerates names using the Name Convention that was used to generate the original name Any entities that do not have an existing generated name will not have names generated for them ShipConstructor also attempts to keep the same auto nu
425. nter the command SCUPDATEPRODUCTIONDWGS 2 Select the drawings to update from the list a Check the Ignore up to date drawings to avoid calling update on any up to date drawings that are selected Update Production Drawings Select Drawings Drawings nl a Ce ese olfa r er Ernte Aifer ext I Tutorial ff DS Distributed Systems E Distributed Systems Pipe Spool aF Sip Spool Hi B Interference prr F Za Product Hierarchy Assembly mE uo2 mp m Uo2 Mo_P mp Output a Mest 9 u01 O uo F a PLio HE Profile Plot C Ignore Up To Date Cancel 3 Click Ok to begin updating drawings The updater will now open each drawing and call the silent update drawing command SCUPDATEDWGSILENT Once the process has completed a log file will be opened Production Drawing Revision Palette The Production Drawing Revision Palette is used to see the changes to the production drawing to know who and when someone changed the production drawing and what was changed The Production Drawing Revision Palette is a tool that Getting Started with Production Shows the history of changes to the current production drawing A list of all the part changes is shown and those changes can be visualized This palette will automatically refresh when the current drawing changes Show Out of Date Parts To show out of date parts 1 Choose Drawing Revisions Palette page 464
426. number the items causing existing labels to be incorrect BOM Revisions allow the user to save the current state of the Bills of Material in the drawing or layout so that when the BOM tables are updated they will be able to compare the new BOM data with the old BOM data and display those changes to the user To prevent the original BOM tables appearance from changing new items in the BOM are appended to the end of the table and removed items have their text changed to use strikeout Any changes to existing items are simply updated into their rows This allows the items to maintain their original item numbering preventing the user from having to relabel everything To use BOM revisions best a Revision column should be added to the BOM definitions This column will display one of three possible values nothing for when no revisions exist the current revision such as Rev 0 the modified state which is the current revision prepended with such as Rev 0 This state indicated that something in this row was modified during an update BOM Revisions can be defined for any paperspace layout in production drawings Alternatively the user can define a revision for the entire drawing all layouts instead of for just the current layout An example of how the BOM table evolves is shown PEN QO03 Collar E 9QOLR CS_02 0_SI A254 001 ns SE BORS_00 0 STAD BOR CS_0 0 STADE Sn L 8 PRCT BOASEAOOT This
427. o copy the objects to Click OK Move Objects from One Layer to Another To move objects from one layer to another 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Layer gt Move Geometry to page 359 2 Select the objects you want to move 3 Press Enter The Move Geometry to Layer window appears Select the layer to move the objects to Click OK Mirror Parts Mirror Parts About the Centerline You can mirror one or more parts about the centerline Each part automatically receives a new part name You can swap text strings in the mirrored parts as indicated in the window below To mirror a part about the centerline 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Mirror about Centerline page 360 2 Select all objects that you want to mirror and then press Enter The parts are mirrored to the desired side All mirrored parts are assigned new names automatically The project database is also updated with the new parts Using the above window as an example the word PORT will be replaced with STBD in the starboard versions of the parts Mirror Catamaran Hulls You can mirror parts for catamaran hulls saving hours of work when modeling twin hulled vessels The AutoCAD MIRROR command lets you mirror about any line Object Display Hide or Show Objects Sometimes it is difficult to select an object when many other objects are near it You can hide objects to make it easier to see or select the objects you are interested in This is especially helpful when many objects are on
428. o ua nde alone ua sland ER 508 SOOO MaMa GEN REI TENGO eiie a a stated stuceann E EE E AEE 510 Right Click Menu for the Spool MANAGEN eccecsssesssrssssssssssrsscssssrsersseseserseesessesersaesessesensacsesensansassesersansasersansansesensansates 513 Drag and Drop Feature for the Spool ManaQe csccssscsssecsssecssseessseessseeseseeesacsesasseseesesaesesassesassesassesansesansesaneesanss 514 SOO Properties REIGIONCO naai e r 514 Create Spool Drawing Wizard Reference ccecsssessssrssrssrssrssrssrssrssrsersersersersersorsesonsersnsorsersersersersensenss 517 SPOOLS MES MOM CING ae a a E E A E 519 CUERO dg Bil aalelacialacmeremrerenrrtertrree mercer reer E E er trrrtr errr errr er errrr ner rrr erent tr trt 522 EID OW Radius PIPVCIIS OM 2tiducicstedietictecaah eth ect denen ti htt arsdade Cec Gadt ekededbicn tad GaarcQa edt seta de beau Gilet aneRade tier Gade netic 523 PINGE ROLI OM PSS iranians aE 523 SOOO he WINGS Maes NCO E eieaa E E E EE 524 SOO Drawings Penetrations iniaa n E E E E EE EER 525 Index 527 ShipConstructor ShipConstructor ShipConstructor is a set of software tools for planning the production of ships and offshore structures designing and modeling hull structure piping HVAC penetrations and equipment and generating production documentation to enable efficient fabrication Assembly sequence ShipConstructor 3 p BEERE Pe eer a a aa E EREHE o AAAA EEE PERE TET a
429. o undefine a spool Drag a spool into the Undefined Spools category box To set a no spool part Drag a part into the No Spool category box To undefine a no spool part Drag a no spool part into the Undefined Spools category box Spool Properties Reference The Spool Properties window appears when you are defining one or more spools 514 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference ar spool Properties fon x Assemblies Spool Wane Naming Convention Eg EL oo on an 534 542 01 542 02 j s43 i 3050 543 5101 Mame 641 BLO7 00 f 2050 543 5202 i 2050 543 5203 3050 543 5c04 i equipment 550 IL 615 Property 525 Finishes m 537 Insulations p 641 MM 642 a nm E i rT Default Pipe Spool Oe amp MV Use next available starting at 1 Properties 4 Fle H i i Show Current Unit Only Show Parts Set From Park Kd Cancel Hierarchy Tree On the left hand side of the window is a hierarchy tree This is where you pick which hierarchy level you want the spool to go to Spool Name The list of naming conventions defined for spools are listed If the selected naming convention uses a hierarchy level as one of its elements the first available name will update for you when you select different hierarchy levels If you un check the Use next available starting at check box the Pick Name button is enabled By clicking Pick Name you can
430. objects showing the length of straight segments of bent pipes 921 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference I I I I I I I Straight Segment Labels Straight segment text labels generated in addition to the normal dimensions bent pipes only Cut Length Dimensions A cut length dimension uses a text style to define its appearance in a spool drawing oU SuL The style that the cut length dimension uses is chosen by the dimension style used in the spool style for that drawing 522 Spool Styles PIPE SPOOL Edit Styles Spool Style Properties Property Dimensioning Baseline Dimensioning Break Dimension at Branches Break Dimension at Connections Break Dimension at Saddles Dimension Offset mm Dimension Style Orientation Type Labeling ARS and Penetration Label Offset mm ARS and Penetration Label Style Radial Dimension Angle Radial Dimension Radius Radial Dimension ArcLength Show Penetrations Elbow Radius Dimension An elbow radius dimension s appearance is defined by the label style used in the spool style for that drawing The information displayed in the label can be selected in the spool styles The label can be set to display any of the 3 parts angle radius and arc length To not display the label uncheck all 3 check boxes in the spool settings when creating or updating the spool drawing or uncheck the boxes in Select Dimension Attributes dialog when re dimensionin
431. ocation manual for details Open Permissions Space Allocations gt Space Allocations Edit Model Opens the selected space allocation drawing New Permissions Space Allocations gt Space Allocations Edit Model Creates a new space allocation drawing Right Click Menu Lets you open rename or delete the selected space allocation drawing or create a new composite drawing Open New Rename Delete Rename Renames the selected space allocation drawing Delete Permissions Space Allocations gt Space Allocations Edit Model Deletes the selected space allocation drawing Output Page The Output page lets you create open and modify output drawings marinedrafting drawings and pipelink files Open Permissions Production gt Output Edit Permissions Production gt MarineDrafting Edit Opens the selected drawing PipeLink files do not require permissions to open New Output Permissions Production gt Output Create Delete Permissions Production gt Output Edit Creates a new output drawing 532 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands 334 New MarineDrafting Permissions Production gt MarineDrafting Create Delete Permissions Production gt MarineDrafting Edit Permissions Production gt Output Create Delete Permissions Production gt Output Edit Creates a new marinedrafting drawing Show Out of Date Shows a A next
432. oduct Hierarchy page 341 Production Utilities Panel E Update Drawing See Update Drawing page 462 Viewport Options K Update All Keywords See Production Utilities gt Update All Keywords page 467 hz Insert Keyword See Production Utilities gt Insert Keyword page 485 CG Point See CG Point page 467 A Orientation Icon See Orientation Icon page 466 BOM Panel Update BOMs See BOM gt Update BOMs page 474 E Insert BOM Table See BOM gt Insert BOM Table page 474 iti Edit Collector Options See BOM gt Edit Collector Options page 477 iE Toggle List Only Visible See BOM gt Toggle List Only Visible page 477 a4 Production Drawing Revisions Palette See Drawing Revisions Palette page 464 New BOM Revision in Current Layout See BOM Revisions gt New BOM Revision in Current Layout page 482 New BOM Revision in All Layouts See BOM Revisions gt New BOM Revision in All Layouts page 482 Ea List BOM Revisions See BOM Revisions gt List BOM Revisions page 483 F Delete BOM Revision from Current Layout See BOM Revisions gt Delete BOM Revision from Current Layout page 482 Delete BOM Revision from All Layouts See BOM Revisions gt Delete BOM Revision from All Layouts page 483 Appendix Production Command Reference 455 Appendix Production Command Reference pa Delete All BOM Revisions from Current Layout See BOM Revisions gt Delete All BOM Revisions from C
433. oint Toggle O Origin 4 Select the options for the UCS and click OK See Select UCS Options Reference page 438 for more information The UCS will now be activated based on the options selected To see a list of all the UCSs in your drawing open up the Activate UCS window again and you should see the UCS that you just created HVAC UCS Intersection The UCS Intersection utility is useful when trying to place Elbows and other fittings at corner points with ducts that transcend the current UCS Add HVAC UCS Intersection To add a HVAC UCS Intersection 1 Choose SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Add HVAC UCS Intersection page 404 2 Select the end on the HVAC part for which you want to create an intersection 3 If the end direction intersects the current UCS a circle will be drawn at the intersection point and a dotted line will be drawn between the center of the circle and the selected end 208 HVAC Modeling Toggle UCS Intersection Line To toggle displaying the dotted line drawn from the HVAC part to the intersection circle choose SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Toggle Highlight on all HEP UCS Intersection page 404 Erase HVAC UCS Intersection The UCS intersection can be erased by modifying the duct end that contains the intersection or by manually deleting the intersection To manually erase a HVAC UCS Intersection 1 Choose SC HVAC gt HVAC UCS Intersection gt Erase HEP UCS Intersection page 4
434. oject down to the spool s assembly lt SPOOL CG gt The Center of Gravity point of the spool 488 Appendix Production Command Reference lt SPOOL FULL SYSTEM gt The Spec System Branch of the spool lt SPOOL LCG gt The longitudinal component of the Center of Gravity point of the spool lt SPOOL NAME gt The name of the spool lt SPOOL PROPERTIES gt The rank immediate assembly weight center of gravity point and finishes lt SPOOL SHORT ASSEMBLY NAME gt The spool assembly and its direct parent assembly lt SPOOL SPEC gt The spec that the spool belongs to lt SPOOL SYSTEM gt The system that the spool belongs to See Spool Branch keyword for the Systems branch lt SPOOL TCG gt The Transversal component of the Center of Gravity point of the spool lt SPOOL VCG gt The Vertical component of the Center of Gravity point of the spool lt SPOOL WEIGHT gt The total weight of the spool lt User Defined Attribute gt User Defined Attributes of the spool one keyword for each UDA Keywords for Pipe Spool Template Drawings lt PIPE SPOOL CLASS gt The class of the system that the spool belongs to lt PIPE SPOOL RELATIVE DENSITY gt The relative density of the system that the spool belongs to lt PIPE SPOOL TEST METHOD gt The Test method of the system that the spool belongs to lt PIPE SPOOL TEST PRESSURE gt The Test pressure of the system that the system belongs to Keywords for HVAC Sp
435. olerance the label point will be rejected as a label point This value is in paperspace units The recommended value is the value of the thickness of a cross section of a plate in paperspace units Distribution Mode The distribution mode determines how the labels are distributed on distribution lines There are three possible distribution modes Nearest Center Equidistant Nearest is the recommended mode Equidistant Center Nearest Edge Corner Clearance Distance 242 Getting Started with Production This setting controls how close to the end of a part s edge that a label s arrow point can be The value Is in paperspace units Edge Determination Minimum Angle This setting controls how segments of a part are connected into edges Two Adjacent straight segments are connected when their angle is less than this setting R Angle E Remove Curved Plate Parts HLR This setting determines 1f curved plate parts will be included into the Hidden Line Removal HLR algorithm If curved plates are removed then the outline of curved plate is used instead This means that parts may be visible when they are indeed hidden If curved plates are not removed the time to generate labels can significantly increase It is recommended to set this to Yes Label All This command labels all the parts from the BOMs that are assigned to label a viewport across all layouts Labels are placed on the ANNOTATION layer The text in the label comes from
436. on If you are in SDI mode the last spool drawing generated will be open Edit Spool Drawings Rotate a Dimension The rotate dimension command provides you with an easy way to re orient your aligned dimensions in 3D The axis of rotation is defined by the two points that the dimension runs between You can drag the dimension so that it is rotated about this axis while adjusting the length of its extension lines You can also type an exact distance for the length of the extension lines To re orient a dimension 1 Choose SC Spool Drawing gt Rotate Dimension 2 You are prompted to pick an aligned dimension Select an aligned dimension to rotate Select one aligned dimension to rotate You are prompted to pick a point indicating the new location and orientation for the dimension 285 Distributed Systems Production Drawings Please pick point ZRotate SNap lt on gt If desired do any of the following e ZRotate To rotate the NavAid about the UCS Z axis according to the right hand rule type ZR for ZRotate and press Enter e Snap To turn on or off snapping of picked points to fixed angles the current setting appears in the command line in lt angle brackets gt type SN for SNap and press Enter 5 Pick a point to set the location of the dimension You can also type a length at the command line that will be used as the length of the dimensions extension lines while still using the rotation angle indicated by the mou
437. on from All Layouts Production tab gt BOM panel BOM Revisions gt Delete BOM Revision from All Layouts SCPRODREVDELALL Permissions Revisions Remove Permission page 460 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Delete Revision page 252 Deletes the current revision in all layouts BOM Revisions gt Delete All BOM Revisions from Current Layout Production tab gt BOM panel BOM Revisions gt Delete All BOM Revision from Current Layout SCPRODREVCLEAR Permissions Revisions Remove Permission page 460 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Delete All Revisions page 252 Deletes all revisions in the current layout BOM Revisions gt Delete All BOM Revisions from All Layouts Production tab gt BOM panel BOM Revisions gt Delete All BOM Revision from All Layouts Command SCPRODREVCLEARALL Permissions Revisions Remove Permission page 460 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Delete All Revisions page 252 Deletes all revisions in all layouts BOM Revisions gt List BOM Revisions Production tab gt BOM panel BOM Revisions gt List BOM Revisions Command SCPRODREVLIST Permissions None License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure List Revisions page 252 List the information about the r
438. oning e Baseline Dimensioning Not used at this time e Break Dimension at Branches When checked will break the dimensions at branch points of fittings e Break Dimension at Connections When checked will break the dimensions at connections e Break Dimension at Saddles When checked will break connections at saddles e Dimension Offset The offset of the dimension from the part s centerline Break at Saddle Break at Branch A Saddle Connection Tee Fitting Dimensions generated along a run of Pipe The offset as well as each break type are shown e Dimension Style The style of the dimension used This list is generated from the dimension style names that are set up in Manager If you have set up a dimension style in your template drawing that you want to use make sure the name is set up in Manager under Dimension Styles e Orientation The orientation selection of the dimensions e Ship Coordinate System Aligned to the world coordinate system e Best Fit ShipConstructor determines the most appropriate coordinate system to align the dimensions to e UCS Orients the dimensions to the coordinate system stored in the named UCS Spool When you originally create the spool drawing you have not yet had an opportunity to customize this UCS thus this option is usually only useful for re dimensioning In addition to the AutoCAD dimensions created based the above settings ShipConstructor will also create AutoCAD text
439. ons gt Penetration Construction Line Tools Flyout gt Command SCPENREMOVECONSTRUCTIONLINE Permissions Penetrations gt Modify Penetrations Procedure See the Penetrations manual for details on Penetrations SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Get Boundary Lines HVAC Ribbon Tab gt Penetrations Panel SC HVAC gt Penetrations gt Get Boundary Lines Toolbar Penetrations gt Penetration Construction Line Tools Flyout E Command SCPENGETALLBOUNDARYOBJ ECTS Permissions Penetrations gt Modify Penetrations Procedure See the Penetrations manual for details on Penetrations SC HVAC gt Pantsify End 406 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Pantsify End Toolbar HVAC gt 3 Command SCHvacP antsify Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Create a Pants End page 174 Inserts pants on an existing duct SC HVAC gt Connect HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Connect Toolbar Distributed Systems Utilities gt Fy Command SCHEP CONNECT Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure connect Ducts page 190 Connects two ducts together SC HVAC gt Disconnect HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Disconnect Toolbar Distributed Systems Utilities gt Ea Command SCHEP DisconnectAll Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Disconnect D
440. ool Template Drawings lt HVAC SPOOL AIR FLOW gt The air flow of the system that the spool belongs to Keywords for Pipe Support Construction Template Drawings lt Support CG gt The Center of Gravity of the support lt Support Full Assembly Name gt The full name of the assembly that the support is assigned to in the primary product hierarchy lt Support Name gt The name of the support lt Support TCG gt The Transversal component of the Center of Gravity point of the support lt Support Template Type gt The template type of the support lt Support Template gt The template name of the support lt Support LCG gt The Longitudinal component of the Center of Gravity point of the support 489 Appendix Production Command Reference lt Support VCG gt The Vertical component of the Center of Gravity point of the Support lt Support Weight gt The combined weight of all the component parts for a support 490 Appendix Production Command Reference Plate Nest Template Drawings lt NEST DATE gt Date of creation The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt NEST ESTIMATED TIME gt Estimated time to cut and mark this nest based on cut mark fast feeds and distances and piercing time lt NEST EXPORT DATE gt Date when the nest was exported The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt NEST EXPORT TIME gt Time when the nest was exported The value is forma
441. ooled Pipe 5 f Bulb Flat ef QQ Unspooled H AC pi Unassigned Pipe E Unassigned HVAC QQ Unassigned Structure i F HP240x10 0 Unassigned Standard Assembly I 48 Custom OQ Unassigned Cable Supports Remove en il 1 2 Pipe 267x10 C QB Unassigned Cable Flot Das m HAC lt Endeut Filter E 00 PENETRATIONS Check Uncheck All H 0 PIPING F Mo Endcut O0 Fer b a Gs o bekl f 3050 001 F68 11 3455mm aa a P 2050 U01 F68 12 3255mm V Straight Parts fF 3050 U01 F 68 13 2993mm V Bent Parts eM 3050 001 F68 414 2246mm F 3050 U01 F6815 1959mm Trim Filter ol FP 3050 U01 F68 16 598mm V Trimmed Parts eM ph 3050 001 F68 17 816mm j bej BP 3050 001 F68 40 3455mm Non Trimmed Parts P fF 3050 U01 F69 41 3255mm a 3050 U01 F68 42 29930 show fF 3050 U01 F68 43 2246mm V Std Assemblies ef BP 2050 001 F68 44 1959mm Purchased a E ie 3 y Dist Sys Supports aL it Feo Show Nests Nested Parts 14 selected 30643rm 92total 170156mm 92 remaining 170156m Wl Unissued Milesued W Cut Show Parts Nests of Type Lists the profile stocks used in the unit Select a profile stock to display a list of parts under Unnested Parts and a list of nests under Nests for that stock Endcut Filter Filters the Unnested Parts list based on endcut type Only parts having the selected endcut types at either end of the part are displayed You can also select No En
442. operty to use e f any of the HVAC parts are spooled a message box will be displayed to ask to continue If yes then the affected spools will be undefined and all the affected parts will be written out and displayed in a log file e f connections existed between the end parts of the selected HVAC parts and other HVAC parts these connections will attempt to be transferred to the new bent duct If the connections cannot be transferred but valid connections exist between the new bent duct and the other parts the connection dialog will appear to select which connection to use If no valid connections exist then parts will remain unconnected 191 HVAC Modeling To merge duct parts to a single bent 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Merge To Bent 2 Select the straight ducts bent ducts and elbows to merge to a single bent duct 3 If the HVAC parts belong to different systems select the system that the new bent duct will belong to 4 If any of the HVAC parts belong to spools click yes to undefine all the affected spools A log file will be displayed containing all the parts affected from undefining the spools 5 If selected straight and bent ducts are from different stocks the stock selection dialog will be displayed to select the stock of the new bent duct Enter a value to use for the corner radii If connections are to be created between the bent duct and other parts and valid connections exist the connection dialog will be d
443. or This is the color in which ducts will be displayed in ShipConstructor if they are part of this system You can choose whether ducts use the system or branch color or their own color by means of the Use Branch Color setting in the HVAC Options window Finish The finish or finishes applied to ducts in the system or branch Click Lil to open the Finishes window and use the left and right arrow buttons to select finishes from the list of Available Finishes The order of finishes in the Selected Finishes window Is the order in which the finishes will be applied to the duct Insulation The insulation applied to ducts in the system or branch Click haad to open the Insulation window and use the left and right arrow buttons to select insulation from the list of Available Insulation The order of finishes in the Selected Insulation window is the order in which the insulation will be applied to the duct Airflow Branch only The airflow for the branch Parts Using System Branch only The number of parts that are currently using the system HVAC Drawing Options SC HVAC gt HVAC Drawing Options opens the Hvac Drawing Options window The window has four tabs used to set the options for HVAC parts 415 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference Note These settings affect all viewports in the drawing To configure viewport specific versions of some of these options see Set Up Viewport Display Options page 232 The Display Tab a Hvac Dra
444. or a thorough understanding of the AutoCAD fields and how to optionally specify formatting see the AutoCAD help documents Getting Started with Production Fy Field Text a eR Ex Froperties SCEQUIPFMENT FRODUEB CR Select abject Properties Value General Dimension style Layer 641 Bilge and Ballast Standard dai Field kent PWES PROJECTUD1 PIPING 641 Equipr Part GUID Park GUID 4276 414 CF F 42 4F96 4160 6F 1 Surface Area lt AcObiProap Object S968 SS S056 7 1 Surface Grea 2000 mm Part Attributes Ca Point x 3r tan 0000 y 1750 0000 z Finishes lt None gt Insulations lt None gt Part Mame 5 70 50 175 Pipe End 1 Point x 37875 0000 y 1750 0000 z Pipe End 2 Point x 38000 0000 y 1750 0000 z 642 001 Connected Parts End 1 Conn Skatic 703 End 2 Conn Skatic 35 1 Product Hierarchy Ok Cancel po es idan hes lar Access the Part Property Label function through SC Utilities gt Property Label Properties Lists the properties for the selected object Values are shown for reference only and will be evaluated when the fields are updated Dimension Style Selects the dimension style for the AutoCAD leader object Field Text Double click the field or click the right arrow button to insert the field into Field text box Insertion occurs at the current cursor position You can add or edit the text inside the Field text box as needed 260 Getting Started with Produc
445. or hide Piecemarks 4 Inthe Save As window that appears choose a location and name for the exported drawing and click Save 5 The export will proceed and will open up the new AutoCAD drawing when it is complete Note Everything in the ShipConstructor drawing will be exported to the new drawing including any hidden objects or layers Export ShipConstructor Drawings to NavisWorks Drawings It is possible to export the current drawing to a NavisWorks NWC file To export ShipConstructor drawings to a NavisWorks drawing 1 Open a drawing with the drawing options you want to see in the exported files 58 Library Setup 2 Choose SC Utilities gt Export gt Export to NWC page 369 3 If any changes have been made to the current drawing you will be asked if you wish to save Click Yes to continue with the export 4 A window will appear where you can select the drawings from the ShipConstructor hierarchy that you wish to export 5 Click OK to continue 6 Each selected drawing from Step 3 will automatically be opened in ShipConstructor and exported to the chosen NavisWorks drawing format 7 The exported files are created in the same folder as the original drawing with the same name and NWC extension Unit Setup You must decide how you want to divide your vessel project into production units also Known as blocks The size of a unit is usually determined by the maximum weight that the shipyard can handle Once you have
446. or the bend points Note that he command prompt has extra options for further points HVAC Modeling Please pick point or XOffset YOffset Choose offset lt 0 0 gt Radius lt 200 gt World plane Initial plane paRT plane Align to part Forward Aft Port Starboard Up Down plaNE XRotate YRotate ZRotate SNap lt on gt If desired choose one of the available options see General Options page 168 for options not listed here e Radius Changes the corner radius of the bend being manipulated The current radius is shown in lt angle brackets gt e World plane Aligns the NavAid to the world coordinates e Initial plane Aligns the NavAid to the UCS that was active when the command started e Part plane Aligns the NavAid to the plane of the most recently placed segment of bent e Align to part Aligns the X Axis of the NavAid page 159 to the axis of the most recently placed segment of the bent e Unlock If you clicked on an existing end in step 5 to restrict your picked point to the axis of that end this option will remove the restriction To finish a bent duct press Enter To automatically route a bent duct along a polyline 1 Runthe command SCHVACPOLYROUTE You are prompted to select a polyline Please select a polyline to route the duct on The duct will be routed from the end of the polyline closest to the selected point 2 Selecta polyline If for any reason the duct cannot be routed exactly along the polyline an e
447. or the sheet stock the insulation and the end treatments e Weight per unit length If the auto calculation check box is unchecked you can enter a weight manually If you manually enter a weight ShipConstructor assumes that you include all weights for the duct and its end treatments Vanes Number of Vanes The number of vanes for bent ducts or elbows Note Vanes do not have a geometrical representation in the model and they are not taken into account when calculating a duct s weight automatically Notes Any notes regarding the vanes Profile The profile of each end of the duct Different properties appear for different stock types but there are some common Profile properties e Profile Shape The shape of the duct profile Rectangle Flattened Oval or Circle e Width Applies to the rectangle and flattened oval profiles The width of the profile e Height Applies to the rectangle and flattened oval profiles The height of the profile e Corner Radius Applies to the rectangle profile The corner radius of the profile e Diameter Applies to the circle profile The diameter of the profile Custom Attributes Any custom attribute properties are listed last See User Defined Attributes page 49 for details on how to create your own custom attributes to apply to stock Preview Control The preview window will display the abbreviations of each end near the corresponding end This allows the user to easily identi
448. orienting end as close as possible to up type U for Up and press Enter e Down To set the direction of the orienting end as close as possible to down type D for Down and press Enter e Snap To turn on or off snapping of picked points to fixed angles the current setting is displayed in the command line in lt angle brackets gt type SN for SNap and press Enter Or click on an end e Align to an existing end To set the saddle s direction and orientation to match that of an existing part s end click that end 5 6 HVAC Modeling picked point on tappable part parallel end axis picked free end A saddle with its direction aligned to an existing free end created by clicking the free end after specifying a point on the header part Pick a point indicating the direction of the saddle end You are prompted to enter an amount of extra material Enter the desired extra material length or extend to Centerline lt 0 0 gt Optionally enter the keyword e Centerline Places the branch part such that its centerline begins at the centerline of the header part Enter the extra material length The branch part s end placement is now fully determined If there is more than one possible connection you are prompted to select one The branch part s end treatment in combination with the selected connection determines the saddle s end treatment If there is only one possible connection it is used automatical
449. ort data Import a Product Hierarchy from another ShipConstructor project A product hierarchy can be imported from an xml file that was exported from another ShipConstructor project What is imported e Assemblies e Assembly Levels 63 Library Setup e Assembly User Defined Attributes Note If you are importing a Primary Product Hierarchy Units and Standard Assemblies will become Assemblies in the new Product Hierarchy To import a product hierarchy 1 Open the Product Hierarchy palette 2 From the menu select Tools gt Product Hierarchy gt Import 3 Provide the name of the xml file containing the importing Product Hierarchy If the import is successful a new Product Hierarchy will be created To export an existing product hierarchy from the command line 1 Run the SCProductHierarchylmport command 2 Provide the name of the xml file containing the importing Product Hierarchy If the import is successful a new Product Hierarchy will be created To view this new product hierarchy open the Product Hierarchy palette Set Up Product Hierarchy Drawings A product hierarchy drawing contains all the parts for a unit including structure equipment piping HVAC and so on You usually set up a product hierarchy drawing for a unit so you can see the parts as you develop a product hierarchy You can make a specific assembly visible and check that all required parts are in that build stage or change the parts involved ina build s
450. ose SC HVAC gt Connect page 407 2 Select the first free end to connect 3 Select an end to connect to the first selected end This is the part that will be moved by the multi part transform engine to facilitate the desired connection if it is necessary OR 3 If you chose two coincident ends in step 2 choose the part you wish to be moved to make the connection if it is necessary HVAC Modeling Mark All Exceeding Maximum Length The Behavior tab in the Hvac Drawing Options page 415 window lets you choose whether or not to automatically cut ducts to the maximum allowable stock length If you choose to not cut ducts to the maximum length you have the option of labeling all ducts that exceed maximum length To label all ducts that are exceeding their maximum length 1 Choose SC HVAC gt HVAC Drawing Options page 410 2 Select the Behaviour tab 3 Check the Create warning labels for items exceeding stock length checkbox Cut to Maximum Length The Behavior tab in the Hvac Drawing Options page 415 window lets you choose whether or not to automatically cut ducts to the maximum allowable stock length To cut a duct to its maximum allowable length 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Cut to max length page 403 2 Select all ducts that you want to cut to their maximum allowable length Press Enter 3 ShipConstructor will attempt to cut each duct to maximum stock length For each selected duct you will be prompted to
451. ot Panel Draw Border See Structure manual Draw Web Area View See Structure manual Replace Legacy Keywords See Structure manual ProfileSheet Panel Draw Border See Structure manual fi Draw Area See Structure manual E Replace Legacy Keywords See Structure manual Appendix Production Command Reference 453 Appendix Production Command Reference 454 Production Tab Main Panel F a k a Navigator See ShipConstructor gt Navigator page 311 471 E Edit All Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt Edit All Drawing Options page 468 Structure Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt Structure Drawing Options page 469 i Pipe Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt Pipe Drawing Options page 469 HVAC Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt HVAC Drawing Options page 469 3 Equipment Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt Equipment Drawing Options page 469 Hanger and Support Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt Hanger and Support Drawing Options page 470 kr Save Drawing Options 40 See Drawing Options gt Save Drawing Options page 470 E See Drawing Options gt Load Drawing Options page 470 40 Load Drawing Options tee Model Link See ShipConstructor gt Model Link page 338 Fa 3D Viewpoint See SC Utilities gt 3D Viewpoint page 349 zq Product Heirarchy See ShipConstructor gt Pr
452. ou can export connections to an XML file for example to import into another project or to edit using other software 147 HVAC Library Setup 148 To export connections l 2 3 4 5 Open the HVAC Connections window See Connections page 145 Check the Export check boxes for the connections to export Click Export XML to open a File Browser Enter a name for the XML file Click Save HVAC Modeling HVAC Modeling This section of the manual explains how to use the tools provided in the HVAC module to take the stocks connections and other items you defined in the HVAC library and place them in a system model drawing to create an HVAC model HVAC Drawings You model HVAC within HVAC drawings For more information on drawings see Drawings page 13 Create an HVAC Drawing Before modeling an HVAC drawing you must create one See HVAC Page page 317 for more details Upon Opening an HVAC Drawing When opening an HVAC model drawing if connected to the database a synchronization occurs between the drawing and the database If there are parts that are not in the database but are in the drawing a window will appear asking if you would like to explode these parts ShipConstructor The Following objects were Found in the drawing which were not Found in the Database Would vou like to explode these objects 1 SonHYyacBent If Yes is clicked the selected objects will be exploded If No is clicked the s
453. outs regardless of whether List All or List only visible is chosen Wrap Properties Choices are enabled when a value greater than zero is entered in the Maximum number of rows per table field Label Options The labeling procedure works in conjunction with the BOM Only objects that are referenced by a particular BOM are Spacing Space between newly created tables Table wrap direction Direction that new tables should be added labeled Label text is retrieved from the first column specified by the BOM definition The label style used for labeling is defined in the BOM definition You can specify one main one for the BOM definition and one for each collector The collector label style overrides the BOM definition label style if one is specified Appendix Production Command Reference ShipConstructor marks viewports that you select with AutoCAD xdata Once selected the objects in the viewport will be labeled by any of the part labeling commands You can manage selected viewports in two ways e Using the BOM Definitions Wizard a Select viewports choose the viewports that you want to be labeled b Highlight selected Highlights viewports currently selected for labeling e Using the SCVPORTOPTIONS command If not viewport is selected then the BOM table will not label any parts BOM gt Edit Collector Options Production tab gt BOM panel Edit Collector Options SCTWEAKBOMOP TIONS Permissions Edit Production Dra
454. ov _utaack elbows YES Show Peqetraticns ves lt beck Anish Cancel The last page of the wizard is where you select which spool style to use Select a spool style under Spool Styles When a spool style is selected the properties of the style are shown under Spool Style Properties If there are no spool styles defined and you have permission to create one click on the Edit Styles button to create a spool style See Spool Styles Reference page 519 for more details Note Baseline Dimensioning is not yet implemented in ShipConstructor Spool Styles Reference Spool styles are used in the dimensioning and labeling of spools Note If you do not have permission to edit spool settings the window controls are disabled and the title bar displays READ ONLY 519 Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Zool sug So Spool Styles Properties HAC SPOOL Dimensioning ARS and Penetration Label Style Label Offset i0 mm Break Dimension ak Branches cs Label Style ARS label Break Dimension ak Connections Break Dimension at Saddles Orientation Ship Coordinate System Best Fit Dimension Style PIPE SPOOL UCS Dimension Offset 200 mm MS Units 2D Slope Hatch Penetrations 6 Nuriber of lines 10 Show Penetrations Approximate spacing 0 mm MS Units Racial Dimensions CG Point v Angle E Display CG Point v Radius v Arc Length A Label Wone Cutb ack Elbows Spool Styles The list
455. ow Thickness 0 false 1 true SCDwgOptionsHVACSetShowWallThickness Set Show Insulation 0 false 1 true SCDwgOptionsHVACSetShowlInsulation Set Draw Part Using Branch Color 0 false 1 true SCDwgOptionsHVACSetDrawPartUsingBranchColor Set Draw Line Mode Icons 0 false 1 true SCDwgOptionsHVACSetDrawLineModelcons Set Draw Line Edges Min Size SCDwgOptionsHVACSetDrawEdgesMinSize Set Draw Line Edges 0 always 1 above min size only 2 never SCDwgOptionsHVACSetDrawEdges Set Show Connections 0 false 1 true SCDwgOptionsHVACSetShowConnections Set Local Connection Color Index SCDwgOptionsHVACSetLocalConnectionColor Set Local Connection Size SCDwgOptionsHVACSetLocalConnectionSize Set Remote Connection Color Index SCDwgOptionsHVACSetRemoteConnectionColor Set Remote Connection Size SCDwgOptionsHVACSetRemoteConnectionSize Set Show Free End Arrows 0 false 1 true SCDwgOptionsHVACSetShowFreeEndArrows Set Free End Arrows Color Index SCDwgOptionsHVACSetFreeEndArrowsColor Set Free End Arrows Size SCDwgOptionsHVACSetFreeEndArrowsSize Set Show Spool Break 0 false 1 true SCDwgOptionsHVACSetShowSpoolBreak Set Spool Break Color Indescx SCDwgOptionsHVACSetSpoolBreakColor Set Spool Break Size SCDwgOptionsHVACSetSpoolBreakSize Appendix B HVAC Command Reference Set Show No Spool Icon 0 false 1 true SCDwgOptionsHVACSetShowNoSpool
456. pConstructor com that lets you open ShipConstructor drawings in AutoCAD You may also generate a document from your original ShipConstructor drawings that can be opened without ShipConstructor installed or the ShipConstructor Object Enabler page 24 there are a number of methods depending on what you wish to produce e Export To Dwg A function to export a single ShipConstructor drawing e Export Documents An Exported Document that includes the entities from one or more original ShipConstructor drawings e Bound Approval Drawings An Approval Drawing that has been exported into native format to avoid modifications to the source drawings modifying it and to allow it to be viewed independent of ShipConstructor Export To Dwg The Export To Dwg feature provides you with the ability to export a ShipConstructor document to a native AutoCAD document that can be viewed without the use of ShipConstructor or the ShipConstructor Object Enabler The user is given the ability to select what elements of a drawing are exported and separate the elements of complex ShipConstructor parts onto separate layers in the new document Any parts that are MLinked into the drawing being exported will have local copies created out of native AutoCAD entities using the same settings to determine what elements of parts are included and the layer they are placed upon 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Export gt Export To Dwg page 369 or type SCEXPORTDWG at the command
457. package to To remove an accessory package from a spec uncheck its check box 7 Click OK to close the Accessory Package Specs window Import Accessory Packages You can import accessory packages from another project or from an XML file that was exported from another project To import accessory packages Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager Choose General gt Accessory Packages to open the Accessory Packages window Click Import to open a File Browser Select a project file PRO or XML file XML Click Open Click OK to close the Accessory Packages window oh P ee oe TS Export Accessory Packages You can export accessory packages to an XML file for example to import into another project or to edit using other software To export accessory packages 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Accessory Packages to open the Accessory Packages window 3 Set Type to the type of accessory packages you want to list Tip Use the Spec Filter to filter the lists under Accessory Packages by spec Check the Export check boxes for the accessory packages you want to export Click Export XML to open a File Browser Enter a name for the XML file Click Save Click OK to close the Accessory Packages window oS SS Naming Conventions 40 Naming conventions control how ShipConstructor automatically names elements of your project such as drawings parts spools penetratio
458. parts to the selected layers Update Arrangement Drawing Wizard Reference The Update Arrangement Drawing Wizard appears when an arrangement drawing is updated It lets you add and remove sources for ShipConstructor parts as well as sources for non ShipConstructor geometry 274 Getting Started with Production Update Arrangement Drawing Wizard Step 1 of 2 Please select the sources for your drawing and the layers For parts new bo the drawing Selected Sources Layers Layer E Drawings infer fi er text Enter fiter text i Boundary i i H01 Structure HO1FR_ oo HO1FR_ Ot HO1FR_o2 HOLFR_O3 Boundary HO1 Structure Frame HOIFR_OO HOIFR _O1 HOIFR_O2 HO1IFR_O3 HO1FR_O0 HO1FR_O1 HOIFR_ Oz HOIFR_ Os HO1FR_O4 HOIFR_OS HOIFR_O6 HOIFR_OF HO1FR_ Oi HOIFR_O9 HOIFR_OO HO1FR_O1 HOIFR_Oz HOIFR_Os HO1FR_O4 HOIFR_OS HOIFR_O6 HOIFR_O HOIFR_O6 HOIFR_O9 HOLFR_o4 HO1FR_O4 HOWFR_ OS HOIFR_O5 lv EP HOLFR_o6 HOLFR _O6 Show spools HOLFR_O HOLFR_OF Spool Layers override conflicts HO1LFR 0S H01FR_08 F Relabel all HO1 HOUSE HO1 HOUSESID HO1 HOUSE HOI HOUSESIDI All sources that are currently used to populate this drawing are summarized under the Selected Sources heading In addition the sources are also pre selected in the main source trees with the layer specified entered in the Layer column and the appropriate nodes expanded for easy visual identification To ad
459. pendix C HVAC Modeling Reference 420 Local Connection Color Option to set the color and size of a local connection e Color You can change the color of the connection symbol e Size You can change the size of the symbol A default size of 0 indicates automatic sizing Remote Connection Color Option to set the color and size of a remote connection e Color You can change the color of the connection symbol e Size You can change the size of the symbol A default size of 0 indicates automatic sizing Show Free End Arrows When checked displays an arrow pointing at all free duct ends Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference A part displayed in 3D wireframe and in shaded mode e Color You can change the color of the free end arrow e Size You can change the size of the arrow A default size of 0 indicates automatic sizing Spool Show Spool Break When checked displays a large spoked outline at each spool break 421 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference e Color You can change the color of the spool break symbol e Size You can change the size of the symbol A default size of 0 indicates automatic sizing Show No Spool Icon When checked displays a small cross at the center of each duct that is a No Spool item e Color You can change the color of the no spool icon e Size You can change the size of the icon A default size of 0 indicates automatic sizing Show Elbow Corner Icon When checked dis
460. pick a connection to use to join the resulting segments If the end treatments of a stock cannot be connected then ducts using that stock are split but the resulting segments will not be connected together Extract Center Line Extracts the centerlines from a selection of HVAC parts and places them as polylines on a centerline layer The extracted centerlines can be used to create new HVAC parts along the same path as the original parts On the corners of bents dotted lines will be drawn to the corner position so that a new bent can be easily placed in the same position as the old bent by selecting the same start point the corner points and the same end point To extract centerlines 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Extract Center Line page 403 2 Select all the HVAC parts that you want to extract the centerline from 3 Press Enter Merge To Bent Merge to Bent is used to create a single bent duct out of a selection of straight ducts bent ducts and elbows The new bent duct will follow the same route as the original selection of parts For a selection of HVAC parts to be used to create the bent e They have to be connected to each other e They must not form a loop e They must not be anchored or locked When creating the bent duct e If all the parts have similar properties then those properties will be used to create the new bent duct If the parts have different properties then the user will be asked to pick the appropriate pr
461. plays a small elbow icon along the tangents of each elbow part 422 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference e Color You can change the color of the elbow corner icon e Size You can change the size of the icon A default size of 0 indicates automatic sizing Restore Defaults The restore defaults button when clicked will change all the display settings back to the original default values 423 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference The NavAid Tab l Hvac Drawing Options E ENE A Display MavAid Transform Routing Behaviour Radius 2 Duct Dimension Static Radius Fads Snap Tae ance Increment Text C Relative bo Sireen Sie 1 9 Duet or Pipe Dimension Restore Defaults ee ee Radius Controls the size of the NavAid e 2X Duct Dimension The NavAid becomes twice the size of the duct s dimension e Static Radius The NavAid has a constant radius that you specify Snap When checked snaps the NavAid to angles based on the Tolerance and Increment settings e Tolerance Controls the size of the snap zone For example if the Tolerance is 15 degrees then the snap zone is 15 degrees on either side of a snap point as in the image below 424 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference e Increment The angle between each successive snap point Snap points appear as spikes on the NavAid For example if the Increment is 45 degrees then the NavAid will have eight spikes as in the image above Text
462. ple Mame 3050 UNIT P4EL 01 Beginning The Naming Conventions window consists of three information views e Naming Conventions tree left e Naming Convention Elements list top right e Element Details list bottom Naming Conventions Tree The Naming Conventions tree displays all the ShipConstructor entity types that names can be generated for and the naming conventions created for those entities For each naming convention ShipConstructor uses the Active column to show if the naming convention is the active naming convention for the entity type Through the InUse column ShipConstructor shows if there are any entities in the project that have a name generated with each naming convention Naming conventions can be defined at any level in the tree and apply to an entity type and all of its children entity types For example you define a naming convention PartNameConvention convention A for Structure gt Parts and a naming convention PlateNameConvention convention B for Structure gt Parts gt Plate 41 Library Setup 42 l Structure Nests Parts Corrugation Default Corrugation Faceplate Default Faceplate Plank Default Plank Plate Default Plate E Stiffener Default Stiffener Profile Plot SN IN NS If you create a part of any type other than Structure gt Parts gt Plate ShipConstructor will use naming convention A to generate the name If you create a Structure gt Parts gt Plate ShipConst
463. ppose you have a naming convention defined with three elements Material System Autonumber The auto number starting number is one and the increment Is one The first part you create may have a name like M1 FreshWater 001 In this example the part is made from a material named M1 and is in the Fresh Water system For this example we will assume that both the Material element and the System element are seeds If you create a new part that was also made from material M1 and in system Fresh Water the name will be as follows M1 FreshWater 002 If you create a third part that was made of material M1 but was in the Salt Water system ShipConstructor will generate a part name as follows M1 SaltWater 001 Notice how the number has restarted at 1 This is because one of your seed elements has changed in this case the System If you create a fourth part this time back in the Fresh Water system but with material M2 ShipConstructor would generate a name as follows M2 FreshWater 001 Again the numbering scheme has changed because the combination of your two seed elements does not match anything we have seen previously If you now create a fifth and sixth part made from material M2 and in system Fresh Water ShipConstructor will generate the names as follows M2 FreshWater 002 M2 FreshWater 003 To further illustrate the nature of seeding consider the following example To make things simple pretend that you are again working with a fresh
464. project and have not generated the names above You define a name convention identical to 47 Library Setup the one in the example above Material System Autonumber except that instead of both the Material and System elements being seeds only the Material is a seed element Following the same procedure as above your part names will look as follows M1 FreshWater 001 M1 FreshWater 002 M1 SaltWater 003 Notice how even though the system changed from Fresh Water to Salt Water the numbering scheme did not change it continued counting up This is because the system is not a seed element If you create two more parts the names will be as follows M2 FreshWater 001 M2 SaltWater 002 Notice how the numbering scheme changed the first time because the material element changed but continued counting up the second time Database Elements 48 The power in naming conventions lies in the ability to generate names based on entity attributes stored in the database The following are descriptions of all the database elements currently supported by ShipConstructor Assembly Assembly returns the primary build strategy assembly name of an ancestor assembly of your entity Which level s assembly name Is returned depends on which Assembly Tree Level you select from the Tree Level drop down list The list of assembly levels depends on how you structure your Product Hierarchy tree Note If the part is in an assembly with a level higher than sel
465. ption of the profile properties e End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 e Throat Length End 2 The additional length applied to the end e Cone Length End 2 The length of the cone segment Side Branches Profile The profile of each end of the branch See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties HVAC Library Setup Throat Length The additional length applied to the end Branch Offset How much the branch is offset from the first end of the main body End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the branch See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length p 2 Throat Length Side Branch 2 F Cone Length Pf Length t Main Body Branch Offset Side Branch 1 Branch Offset Throat Length Side Branch 2 Side Branch 1 Branch Fittings Wyes There are three defined types of wyes 1 Wye A normal wye 2 Rectangular Wye A wye that is rectangular 133 HVAC Library Setup 3 Rectangular Radial Wye A rectangular wye with one curved branch 134 Attribute General eee Stock Mame Description Measurements Sheet Stock Insulations Finishes E weight 4uto calculation Value Vanes Mumber of vanes Motes Overall Properties Shape Height Base Length Profile Corner Radius width End Treatment Branch 1 Length E Profile Corner Radius Width Rotation Angle End Treatment
466. quipment gt cal Command SCINSEQUIPMENT Permissions Equipment gt Equipment Models Edit Procedure See the Equipment Manual for details Inserts an equipment part 396 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Equipment gt Equipment Drawing Options Multi Discipline Ribbon Tab gt Main Panel SC HVAC gt Equipment gt Equipment Drawing Options Toolbar Equipment gt Command SCDWGOPTIONSEQUIP Permissions Equipment gt Equipment Models Edit Procedure See the Equipment Manual for details Brings up a dialog to modify the Equipment drawing options SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Project Equipment List Multi Discipline Ribbon Tab gt Equipment Panel SC HVAC gt Project Equipment list gt Project Equipment List None Command SCP RO ECTEQUIPMENTLISTSHOW Permissions None to view Procedure See the Equipment Manual for details Brings up the Project Equipment List SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Create PEL Item Multi Discipline Ribbon Tab gt Equipment Panel SC HVAC gt Project Equipment list gt Create PEL Item Toolbar Equipment gt Command SCEQUIPPELCREATE Permissions Equipment gt Project Equipment List gt Project Equipment List Items Create Procedure See the Equipment Manual for details Creates a PEL Item SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Insert PEL item Multi Discipline Ribbon Tab gt Equipment Panel SC HVAC gt Project Eq
467. r ShipConstructor inserts a spool break at the connection To add another spool break select another connection Note You can also window select Window select will only select connections Tip To make choosing a connection easier use the OPM to see the properties of the connection The properties list the part names of the connected parts To stop adding spool breaks press Esc Note There is also the menu command SC HVAC gt Spools gt Add Spool Break page 399 and there is a toolbar button in the Distributed Systems Utilities toolbar If breaks are added that split defined spools a prompt to select which section of the spool to remain spooled is displayed Select a single part from each split spool Note This step also is needed when deleting a connection in the middle of a defined spool 197 HVAC Modeling To remove a spool break from a spool 1 Inthe Spool Manager click Remove under Spool Break ShipConstructor minimizes the Spool Manager and prompts Pick select a Connection to remove a Spool Break 2 Select the HVAC connection that has the spool break you want to remove Parts that are not connections are temporarily locked to make selecting a connection easier To remove another spool break select another connection Note You can also window select Window select will only select connections To stop removing spool breaks press Esc Note There is also the menu command SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove
468. r types of accessories For example you can define an accessory type named bolts After defining accessory types you can then define specific accessories Finally you create accessory packages and add accessories to them For PipeLink drawings fill in the PipeLink component filed for accessory types and the bolt diameter and bolt length if applicable for accessories Create an Accessory Type To create an accessory type 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Accessory Packages to open the Accessory Packages window 3 Under Accessories click New Type to create a new accessory type 4 Enter a name for the accessory type for example Bolts Gaskets Nuts or Washers and press Enter Create an Accessory Package To create an accessory package 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Accessory Packages to open the Accessory Packages window 3 Set Type to the type of accessory package you want to create 4 Click New to create a new accessory package 5 Enter a name for the accessory package and press Enter Create an Accessory To create an accessory 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Accessory Packages to open the Accessory Packages window 3 Under Accessories select the accessory type 4 Click New Acces to create a new accessory of the selected type Note The New Access button changes to the na
469. r a second point Bmeer Point On plane 2 Choose a point on the second clipping plane whether it is the front or back clipping plane will be determined by ShipConstructor Note If the clipping planes are not to your liking you can remove them with the command SC Utilities gt Remove Clip see below 354 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Y Before clipping Y After clipping SC Utilities gt Remove Clip This command removes the AutoCAD clipping planes SC Utilities gt Clip Current View page 353 from the currently selected viewport 355 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands SC Utilities gt 3D to 2D Structure Modeling tab gt Modeling Utilities panel gt 3D to 2D SC Utilities gt 3D to 2D SCCONV Permissions None Procedure Convert a 3D Object to a 2D Object page 77 The direction of projection for the 3D to 2D command This command works on the following object types e Lines e Arcs e Circles e Polylines e 3D Polylines e Text MText e Points e Solids not 3D solids User Construction Lines 356 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands SC Utilities gt Orthographic Projection Structure Modeling tab gt Modeling Utilities panel gt Orthographic Projection SC Utilities gt Orthographic Projection SCP RO ECTONTOUCS Permissions None Procedure Project Shapes page 77 Projects a shape onto the cu
470. r each module are discussed in the module s display option documentation Layer Templates The Layer Template feature allows you to separate elements of the drawing out onto separate layers based on what option it is related to and the original layer it was placed upon The default setting for a layer template lt Source Layer gt means that that element will be left on exactly the same layer as it is in the original drawing If you wish to create an exported document that has all of the Structure solids on a layer called SOLIDS then replace the layer template for Structure gt Plate gt Solids with _SOLIDS If the layer does not already exist a new layer with that name will be created and all solids from structure elements will be placed upon it Note that while the Stiffener Green is also a solid it is dealt with separately and if you wish it to be on the _SOLIDS layer it will also need to have the same Layer Template You may place as many or as few options on the same layer as you wish Exporting ShipConstructor Drawings Example If an entity on layer REV is exploded with the template SCEntity lt Source Layer gt it will be placed on the layer SCEntity REV Note lt Source Layer gt is a special token in a Layer Template it refers to the Source Layer and it will be replaced with the name of the source layer The buttons on the bottom left of the window are used to manage configurations e Use Current Display Opts will re
471. r of names can take a long time Spool Finishes This is a list of finishes that will be applied to the spool To change the finishes for the spool click the button that appears when in the cell The Select Finishes window appears letting you select finishes for the spool See Finishes Reference page 432 Spool Insulation This is a list of insulation that will be applied to the spool To change the insulation for the spool click the button that appears when inside the cell The Select Insulation window appears letting you select insulation for the spool See Insulation Reference page 431 User Defined Attributes Every user defined attribute that is assigned to this spool type Is listed here If the user defined attribute is required a will appear next to the attribute name to indicate that it is required to have a value Edit the values simply by clicking inside the cell and typing Set From Part This button allows the user to assign where in the product hierarchy the spool goes by choosing any part or structure that s already assigned to an assembly from within the drawing Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference Create Spool Drawing Wizard Reference The Create Spool Drawing wizard is a tool for generating spool drawings teate Spon Mraming Cten af 3 Please Sert a Spool TenplaF a PIPE SPOOL METRIC A4 Tenplate Presies a PIPE SPCOL METRIC 4 1 Fe Fps Spool et
472. r three things e Visualizing the current UCS e Modifying the current UCS in a way convenient for routing ducts e Snapping input points to fixed angles When visible the NavAid is located at the current UCS origin aligned to the UCS XY plane The angle displayed by the NavAid is the polar angle of the current input point The center of the NavAid is indicated by a small cross with the longer axis in the X direction 0 angle 159 HVAC Modeling Required Custom Attributes After routing the duct if there are any required custom attributes or if catalogs are assigned to the stock used the catalog and custom attributes for this part must be set ShipConstructor will attempt to do this automatically If it cannot be done automatically the dialog below will open See Required Custom Attributes Reference F Define attributes for Cross Attributes l Required Attribute Value No Catalog No Catalogs Assigned Yes Notes Yes Taghum Straight Duct To route a straight duct you will select a stock and then provide two points indicating the start and end points of the duct 160 HVAC Modeling To insert a straight duct 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Straight A straight duct appears with the first end at the cursor Information about the duct is shown on the command line 2 You are prompted to pick the start point of the duct or choose an option Please
473. rary Setup 6 Double Tee There are four ends to this tee Two of the ends protrude the main branch on the same side 7 Double Reducing Tee A double tee with the main branch as a reducer 8 Double Two Segment Tee A double tee with the main branch consisting of two segments 113 HVAC Library Setup 5C New Double Tee General Stock Mame Description Measurements Sheet Stock Insulations H Finishes E Weight L duto calculation z Yanes Number of Yanes Motes l Main Body Length Profile Shape Diameter End Treatment 1 End Treatment 2 l Side Branch 1 E Profile E Shape Diameter Throat Length Branch Offset End Treatment Side Branch 2 E Profile oS Shape Diameter Throat Length Branch Offset End Treatment 114 HVAC Double Tee 93 Metric T 7 455979 kg 400 mm Circle 200 mm diameter Circle 200 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm x 20 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mmx 20 mm Circle 150 mm diameter Circle 150 mm 20 mm 100 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mmx 20 mm Circle 150 mm diameter Circle 150 mm SQ mm 300 mm BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm x 20 mm Component Preview Optional modes Unrestricted Mode Conical OF Fsetable Operations Flip Profiles gt Ex MBI HVAC Library Setup For descriptions of the General properties see Create a Stock page 103 Square Tee and Square Radial Tee Overall Properties Shape Applies to Square Te
474. rawings Create Delete Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling OR Permissions HVAC gt HVAC Arrangements Create Delete Permissions HVAC gt HVAC Arrangements Edit Deletes the selected drawing Support Page The Support page lets you create open and modify support and hanger model drawings See the Pipe manual for details Open Permissions Distributed Systems Supports gt DS Support amp Hanger Drawings Create Delete Opens the selected support and hanger drawing New Permissions Distributed Systems Supports gt DS Support amp Hanger Drawings Create Delete Creates a new support and hanger drawing Right Click Menu Lets you open rename or delete the selected support and hanger drawing or create a new composite drawing Open New Rename Delete Rename Renames the selected support and hanger drawing Delete Permissions Distributed Systems Supports gt DS Support amp Hanger Drawings Create Delete Deletes the selected support and hanger drawing Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Pipe Spool Page The Pipe Spool page lets you create open and modify pipe spool drawings See the Pipe manual for details HVAC Spool Page The HVAC Spool page lets you create open and modify HVAC spool drawings belonging to the registered unit EH ShipConstructor Navigator Demo09 U03 sg Demo Drawing Preview E Structure ag Hv02 ar Distributed Systems J Pipe
475. rawings In production drawings you will want production objects to look a specific way like don t show spool break symbols Setting up the drawing options in the templates reduces the amount of work that has to be done in each production drawing To set up drawing options 1 Choose Drawing Options gt Edit All Drawing Options Getting Started with Production Edit All Drawing Options Option Structure Part General Show Bevel Solid stiffener Green Plate Part Production Bevel Text Cuts Marks Markline Text Profile Part Start and End Labels Hangers Geometry Show 20 Seometry show Show 30 Geometry Show Hanger Colors Hanger Color iz By Laver Hanger Color Type Global olor Pipe 22 30 Wireframe Draw Line Mode Icons Line Mode Icon Override Stock Double Lines Solid Dis play Show or hide Piecemarks 2 Change the settings and click OK Set Up Viewport Display Options In some cases you want one viewport to show the parts differently than other viewports Some drawing options can be controlled at the viewport level To set up viewport display options 1 Choose Viewport Display Options gt Set 232 FI View port Display Options Structure Part General Piecemarks Plate Part Production Bevel Text Cuts Marks Markline Text Profile Part Start and End Labels Pipe 2B 30 Wirelrame Draw Line Mode Icons Line Mode Icon Override Stock Do
476. rcement This option enforces minimum stock length constraint for all ducts When constraint enforcement is off you will be able to modify a duct so that its length is less than minimum stock length To toggle the current constraint enforcement mode 1 Click the constrain enforcement mode icon a on the transform toolbar isl Constraint Enforcement On Constraint Enforcement Off Break a Duct Straight and bent ducts support the AutoCAD s native break command See AutoCAD documentation for further information ShipConstructor registers a command through LISP called SCBAP that automatically splits a duct object at a given point leaving two full length pieces The SCBAP command also allows for the Spacebar or Enter keys to repeat the command unlike the AutoCAD toolbar command To break ducts 1 Select the Duct object that you want to split 2 RunSCHVAC gt Break Duct at point page 407 3 Choose point to split duct Disconnect Ducts When choosing to disconnect a part note that the command will disconnect the part from all its connections it will not disconnect just one connection If only one connection is needed to be disconnected just delete the connection object the adjoining parts will automatically be in a disconnected state To disconnect ducts 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Disconnect page 407 2 Select all ducts that you want to remove connections from 3 Press Enter Connect Ducts To connect ducts 1 Cho
477. reate a AUT CEU ON acsasinisnae aia aaia don espace che aaaea ankaa aaaeeeaa 32 View Manufacturers UsdgEnneniiriiniseuiiie a i a a 33 FINIS NOS anann A N E ENE E E N E A EL N ENA 34 Crea TMS iN YDE ee E E EAA ae a lean eal SER tn Maen aenean 34 Create Sh EUS iinoa naa unalone cuea cat aacaa a uasiaat nena N aa Nn 34 Renamed FIMISIMSOl FIAISI TYDE cuirean aiuto Bian Bis BS iBaiilteditinbninan Dt 34 PNM FES VSS and FETUS lf tantric lal aia ea ted ao en tai wae leat adnnbeabsia 34 Export Finishes and FINISH TYDES waaidaianaiinaninnainadiiia Winn ena nadi nai naAdii nid AAA 34 D let ea EVASION FISH VCs nan vat osiuny oleh wiguavaasel oe AAE A AENA 35 VEW ISIS SIS ACh actin a e bad aes a a kane ae a beams badenutmentesta 35 Naisveleuatelgaarmrerererrrrrncmrrr errr rrr rr rcs rence tren ener ern renter ener erent ern ener erent ney ener rene nee 35 ChE ate ral IMSUIACION TYDE srein E E oBiseensrane nin D euiinteeascBaatinbabede 35 Create an IASULATOM CALA OG oiir nevaaies usd veseasads eg stad versa AT AT 35 Create a NINSUIATON a 0iesi sh ivcito cece thee A adenine nian enaiien een 36 Rename an Insulation or Insulation TYDG eccecssssssrssssssssssrssssssseserssesessesersassessrseesansesersaesesersersansesersersassesersansanensensatsass 36 import ASU OM and Mns lation IYVIDGS scoeteatue celeste snus alsdeatela tenn lei E E EREA REE ETERNO 36 Export Insulation and Insulation Types siccresearscesuests taeueetvestusaaiasescud acon cit vaceresd cassu del ie ve
478. rent planes or toggle through the different points 439 Appendix Production Command Reference Appendix Production Command Reference Production Menu in Manager General gt Production Output gt Label Styles General gt Production Output gt Label Styles None Permissions General gt Manager gt Edit Label Styles Procedure Label Styles page 215 Label styles are used to define annotations in production drawings Label styles are used to define structure part piecemarks E Lebel Styles o 2 LeLel Ivko Exper n abel style Mame Lnsertion Moda Bubble Style Bubble size mmi eader acad Oreraon siyle Mar begmerts stake oo Wewpork tinent bowen Jozode wupeout F wo Osrembly ides erter Lrike LU YaF gt ORL AKL L wo Mo Mo Sc OrrgeeLebles Joses Honzcrta u zF e es a a yf NSC GrrgeeLEtles losest Honzerta Bubble gy Age L wo Y N s npo r one mn Pr yf Tac dries Joses Honzcrta orie LU Yaz 4325 L wo VEE Mo Export TA y Wor AAL Joses Honzcrta keztangle L Yaz A325 L wo Mo Mo SS e Arct Bubble Joses Honzcrta U z Yar he es zage J e Arct Bubb Joses H ta Bubble ay Ago Loo Y M Uzag af Spe Arrcercle Joses Honzcrta orie LU Yaz 4325 L wo VEE Mo y ALPE HiL Joses Honzcrta Bubble 5 yaz 4325 L wo Vee Mo Ife 5poo Loners Joses Honzcrta Bubble b YaF gt 21 0MDAKLI L wo Vee Mo OF ai JFE Spoo Lace 3279 Joses Honzcres Lie b VEE SI OMDAHL L Wo Wes Mo a ER f ee a Ca
479. ributes to hold arbitrary data associated with a part for example model number process codes or custom identifiers making it easier to manage parts You can set up user defined attributes for Structure Pipe and HVAC Attributes assigned to parts can have four states not required required and deferrable required and not deferrable and finally required default deferred Stock attributes have two required or not required 49 Library Setup The same attribute can be assigned to different object types each with their own required state and default value Create a User Defined Attribute To create a user defined attribute 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt User Defined Attributes page 307 to open the User Defined Attributes window j User Defined Attributes General In Use Available Attributes Description In Use Attributes Required Default E Category Standards a a va E Description Assembly Description fe Material Grade vo E Description2 Assembly Description va f Min Rectangular Heigt Stores the minimum ce v A E Min Rectangular Leng Stores the minimum ce Model Number Import UEA s OK Cancel Click New Enter a name for the attribute and press Enter Optionally add a description Click OK to close the User Defined Attributes window on moe N Assign a User Defined Attribute to a Material Grade To assign a user defined attrib
480. right to use the License in object code form those program modules application programming interface API any other materials provided by SSI under this Agreement and all upgrades revisions fixes updates or enhancements to any of the foregoing Licensed Materials specified in the Licensee s purchase order or request Invoice solely on the software and hardware listed in the Licensed Materials manual System Configuration 2 Academic Institutions Trial Versions A 363338 2013 07 In the event that the Licensee qualifies as an academic institution user in accordance with SSI s specifications an Academic Licensee the Academic Licensee and its faculty employees and students may use the Licensed Materials for the singular purpose of either teaching training users or undertaking research provided that the Licensed Materials and all copies of the Licensed Materials remain at all times at the Academic Licensee s premises and the Licensed Materials are used for no other purpose than that set forth above The above restrictions are in addition to the restrictions on use set out in Section 5 below In the event that the Licensee receives a trial version of the Licensed Materials for evaluation purposes the terms and conditions of this Agreement excluding Sections 15 19 shall continue to apply subject to the following provisions a the License pursuant to Section 1 above shall terminate
481. roduct Hierarchy al Interference i Weld Management Assembly Open Read Only ell Composite Approval Ts Esport Open Permissions General gt Edit Composite Drawings Opens the selected composite drawing New Permissions General gt Edit Composite Drawings Creates a new composite drawing Right Click Menu Lets you open rename or delete the selected composite drawing or create a new composite drawing Open New Rename Delete Rename Permissions General gt Edit Composite Drawings Renames the selected composite drawing Delete Permissions General gt Edit Composite Drawings Deletes the selected composite drawing Approval Page The Approval page lets create open and modify approval drawings 329 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands shipConstructor Mavigator Tutorial UDI Drawing Last Modified Date Preview val 4 22 2013 344 37 AM 2 Lo Pipe Spool El Be HYAC 5 pool E Support Construction d Equipment 5 Electrical vee Ba Product Hierarchy al Interference i Weld Management Assembly Read Only W Composite Approval Esport Open Permissions General gt Edit Approval Opens the selected approval drawing New Permissions General gt Edit Approval Creates a new approval drawing Right Click Menu Lets you open rename or delete the selected approval drawing or create a new approval drawing Open New Rename
482. roperties to define for the profile e Width The width of the profile e Corner Radius Applies to the rectangle shape only The corner radius of the profile End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the base end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Rotation Angle Applies to Wye The angle that the branch makes with the main body HVAC Library Setup Rotabon Ange Branch 7 Rotaton Ange Branch 1 Length Length Base Branch 2 Width Branch 2 Width Branch 1 Overall Width Base Height 137 HVAC Library Setup Throat Length Ange Branch 1 Throat Length Base Throat Length Branch 2 Side Branch Rectangular Radial Wye Profile Since the shape of the wye is already defined there are not many properties to define for the profile e Width The width of the profile e Corner Radius Applies to the rectangle shape only The corner radius of the profile Throat Length The additional length applied to the base end Throat Radius The radius of the inner curve Mitering This property sets whether the branch curve is mitered or rounded e Miters The number of segments if the branch curve is mitered End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the base end of the branch See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length Throat Straight Branch Length _ Side Branch r A Throat A Radus Ange Throat Length Base Edit Stock When you need to c
483. rposes and shall be subject to SSI s prior written consent 35 Successors and Assigns This Agreement will bind and enure to the benefit of the parties and their respective successors and permitted assigns 36 Severability In the event that any provision of this Agreement is declared invalid illegal or unenforceable by a court having jurisdiction then the remaining provisions shall continue in full force and effect 37 Force Majeure Except as related to Licensee s obligation to make payments to SSI neither party shall be liable for delays or non performance if such delays or non performance are beyond such party s reasonable control A delayed party shall promptly notify the other party in writing stating the cause of the delay and its expected duration and shall use commercially reasonable efforts to remedy a delay or non performance as soon as reasonably possible 363338 2013 07 38 Survival The provisions of Sections 3 5 11 13 14 17 and 20 30 shall survive the expiry or termination of this Agreement 39 Language It is the express will of the parties that this Agreement and related documents have been prepared in English C est la volont expresse des parties que la presente Convention ainsi que les documents qui s y rattachent soient r diges en anglais 363338 2013 07 Contents Contents ShipConstructor 1 Getting Started 7 Stat SHIPCONSIMUICLOL muita NN DNDN 7 CHEEK YOUR SYSECIMT TOME SIZO caciseisenss
484. rrent UCS You choose the direction to project from one of the three orthogonal world directions X Y or Z Projection Direction ae Current UCS Plane oo The direction of projection for the orthographic projection command This command only works on lines SC Utilities gt Remove Vertices Below Tolerance Structure Modeling tab gt Modeling Utilities panel gt Remove Vertices Below Tolerance SC Utilities gt Remove Vertices Below Tolerance SCBELOWTOL Permissions None Procedure Reduce the Number of Vertices on Polylines page 77 Reduces the number of vertices on a polyline by removing vertices within a given tolerance and converting the segment to a Straight line If line segments form an arc and are within the tolerance an arc is inserted into the polyline 357 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands o o Oo m i E c a m mi o i m M ae p a o E E De ii E H m p s Original Without Fit Arcs With Fit Arcs This command is helpful in reducing the complexity of some curves or sections that will be used in the model Since the NC machine cannot usually cut any more accurate than 0 01 there is no need to have a model more accurate SC Utilities gt Convert Ellipse Spline to Polyline Structure Modeling tab gt Modeling Utilities panel gt Convert Ellipse Spline to Polyline SC Utilities gt Convert Ellipse Spline to Polyline Command SCCONVELLIPSE Permissions None Procedure
485. rted are also imported if they don t exist SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Remove Style Override Production tab gt Production Utilities panel SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Remove Style Override SCRLINEREMOVESTYLEOVERRIDE License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Permissions Edit production drawing if in a production drawing or edit model drawing if in model drawing Reference lines can have properties that differ from the style they are derived from when they are edited from the property palette This command removes any overridden values of a reference line and reverts the values back to the style s values SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Update Locations Production tab gt Production Utilities panel SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Update Locations SCRLINEUP DATE License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Permissions Edit production drawing If in a production drawing or edit model drawing if in model drawing Updates reference line locations if the location groups have changed SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Edit Location Groups Button Ribbon ShipConstructor Tab gt Manage Panel SC Utilities gt Reference Lines gt Edit Location Groups SCEDITLOCATIONS License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Permissions Hull gt Edit location groups Edits th
486. rted with Production Eta Create Output Drawing Wizard Step 3 of 3 Please select sources for the Output drawing Dring Selected Sources Drawings Enter Filter Text wo New Volume 1 s ptg spalli 6 Select sources for the output drawing Choose from drawings Systems Assemblies and Volumes Click Finish Volumes are created using the Volume Manager page 235 Update Output Drawings You can change the sources of the output drawing or refresh the output drawing by updating it 1 When in an Output drawing type SCUPDATEDWG to bring up the Update Output Drawing Wizard 258 Getting Started with Production Update Output Drawing Step 1 of 1 Please select sources for the Output drawing Selected Sources 3 Sources Drawings ansc mp m Wi A aw Structure gw Deck amp AA om Distributed Systems oE Pipe E E g Pl rig P Con HE HVAC m Space Allocation E Drawings New Volume 1 New Volume 2 Change sources if needed Click Finish Part Property Labels ShipConstructor supports extraction of part properties for display in production drawings Information normally displayed in the AutoCAD properties window can be displayed in label form ShipConstructor provides the means to select AutoCAD fields for insertion into a user editable MText block that is then optionally attached to an AutoCAD label The MText block uses AutoCAD fields to extract information from ShipConstructor objects F
487. rties End Treatment 1 End Treatment 2 The treatment that is applied to the ends of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Side Branch Side Branch 2 Double Lateral Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the ends of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length The additional length applied to the end of the duct 123 HVAC Library Setup 124 Branch Offset How much the branch is offset from the first end of the main body Rotation Angle The angle of the branch from the main body Throat Length Rotation Angle Branch Offset Reducing Lateral and Double Reducing Lateral Trunk Length The overall length of the trunk main body End 1 End 2 The ends of the trunk e Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties e Throat Length The additional length applied to the end e End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Side Branch Side Branch 2 Double Reducing Lateral Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length The additional length applied to the end Branch
488. ructor drawings Part View Load via Selected Object Extents SCPARTVIEWLOADBYSELECTEDEXTENTS SC Utilities gt PartView gt Load Selected Extents SC Utilities gt PartViews gt Load By Selected Extents SCPARTVIEWLOADBYSELECTEDEXTENTS Permissions none Procedure None Similar to Load via Extents this command takes a selection set as input and loads all supported ShipConstructor parts which reside in or intersect the specified WCS extents of the objects in the selection set Part View Load Associated Structure Parts SCPARTVIEWLOADASSOCIATED SC Utilities gt PartView gt Load Associated SC Utilities gt PartViews gt Load Associated SCPARTVIEWLOADASSOCIATED Permissions none Procedure None Loads all parts that are related to the selected parts directly or indirectly via a mirror or an identical relationship This command only works within a structure model drawing Part View Refresh Part Views in Drawing SCPARTVIEWREFRESH Button d Ribbon SC Utilities gt PartView gt PartView Refresh SC Utilities gt PartViews gt Refresh Command SCPARTVIEWREFRESH Permissions none Procedure None Refresh all Part Views in the current drawing from the database Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Part View Delete All Part Views in Drawing SCPARTVIEWDELETEALL Button g3 Ribbon SC Utilities gt PartView gt PartView Delete All SC Utilities gt PartViews gt Delete All SCPARTVIEWDELETEALL Permissions
489. ructor will apply naming convention B You can define multiple naming conventions for each entity type Depending on the type of entity ShipConstructor may or may not allow you to pick a name convention to use when creating entities In cases where you are not offered a choice the Active naming convention is used Naming Convention Elements List A naming convention consists of elements that can be added removed and re ordered The elements list shows the elements of a naming convention and their order The elements list shows element properties in the selected naming convention Changing the properties of an element is done using the Details list There are three types of elements 1 Static strings 2 Database items 3 Auto Incrementing numbers Static strings are user entered text such as a word or a symbol for example a hyphen to separate other elements Database items are a property of the entity for which the name is being generated For example the spec that an HVAC duct belongs to or the thickness of the plate stock that a plate part is made from There are many different types of database items to choose from depending on the entity type that you are defining a naming convention for The properties of a database item element are as follows e Number of characters The maximum number of characters to display from the database item string e Start Point The position to start counting the number of characters from The op
490. s If a curved plate solid is created from a Rhino file its production geometry will be shown as invalid See Curved Plate Creation in Stucture manual If the part remains invalid then the only other option is to delete and re create the part Also note that any commands run on the invalid part may not function as expected Checks Check Interferences Interference checking is a vital step in ShipConstructor that is used to detect part collision problems or to add penetrations for pipe and HVAC through structure The interference drawing can also be used as a virtual reality fly through 82 Checks Create an Interference Drawing To create an interference drawing 1 In Navigator select the Interference page 2 Click New Open New Drawing Template template I01 template_I02 3 Choose a template from which to base the appearance of the new drawing 4 Entera name for the interference drawing and click OK The New Interference Drawing window appears 83 Checks Select Model Drawings Select Drawings Drawings Datar Citar Tact Enie iter exi Tutorial E Structure 9 Frame LngBhd O Deck Arbitrary 9 Curved QPS Distributed Systems Pipe r Equipment 3 Frame O LngBhd JO Deck m Arbitrary O Curved 32 Distributed Systems aE Space Allocation Cancel 5 Click the check box beside the drawings you want to include in the interference draw
491. s Pipe HVAC Outfitting Create Parts Create Plate Parts Stifeners faceplates ec Dither de cinlines can reference Siruchure recede Detall Parts Insert Penetrations Insert pipe and HYAC penetrations Add camer treatments cutouts and a Insert pipe and AVAC penetrations into siructure parts i other details to parts into structure parta Check Unita assambles and madal drawings Generate Reports Assembly Drawings Plate Nesting Profile Plots Profile Nesting Generate assembly drawings Aranga parta eet patas tor NC UIT Generata Prothe plots for stittener Aranga POT parta onto 6tock lengths fabrication Exporting ShipConstructor Drawings 27 Library Setup Library Setup Overview Each project contains various libraries with all the stocks materials and standards that you will use in the project Before you begin work on a project you must set up these project libraries You can also import project libraries from another project or from an XML file that you have exported from another project Virtually all the settings can be changed after parts have been modeled Supplied Libraries ShipConstructor comes with three template XML files that contain sample standards and stocks By default these files are found at C Program Files ShipConstructor2009 ProjectTemplates e MetricTemplate XML metric stocks and standards e ImperialTemplate XML imperial stocks and standar
492. s Motes Duct Specific E Profile Rectangle 500 mm 300 mm Profile Shape Rectangle width S00 mm Height 300 mm Corner Radius O mm Operations Max Length 2000 mm Min Length 100 mm End 1 End Treatment BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm x 20mm End 2 End Treatment BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm x 20 mm Custom Attributes Tag Number For descriptions of the General properties see Create a Stock page 103 Duct Specific Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties 106 HVAC Library Setup Max Length Min Length The maximum and minimum allowable length for ducts created from this stock End 1 End 2 End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Elbows New Elbow Attributes Component Preview b al Hvac Elbouy 4 Description Measurements Sheet Stack Insulations Finishes Weight Auto calculation Value 6 513136 kg Vanes Number of Yanes Motes Elbow Specific Elbow Type Mitered 7 a Angle Throat Radius Segments E Profile Rectangle 300 mm 500 mm Profile Shape Rectangle Flip Values width Height Corner Radius End Treatment BR ASTM 4 105 Sram x 20 mm Throat Length End 2 E Profile Rectangle 300 mm 500 mm Profile Shape Rectangle Width Height Corner Radius End Treatment BR ASTM 4 105 3 mm x 20 mm Throat Length Elbow Offset Cancel For descriptions of
493. s arising from parts being brought in from multiple sources with different layers will be resolved later Click Next Note You can optionally not show spools as a source with the Show Spools check box You can also force spools to override any possible layer conflicts caused by parts existing in multiple selected sources with the Spool Layers override conflicts check box Update Arrangement Drawing Wizard Step 2 of 2 Please select all the drawings From which you wish bo import QutoC4D geometry and the layers to place them on Drawings Layer Enter Aifer text inter Alter text wi H01 HOL Structure Structure J Frame Frame EA Ho1FR_o3 HO1FR_03 E EF H0iFR_07 HO1FR_07 F EF H0iFR_02 HO1FR oO 7 BP HOiFR_o1 HOIFR_O1 MEA HO1FR_os HOiFR_ O18 M GP HO1FR_o9 HOLFR OF E EF Ho1FR_o4 HO1FR _04 E EA Ho1FR_oo HO1FR_00 T EF Ho1FR_os HO1FR_05 M EF H01FR_06 HO1LFR_D6 7 4 LngE6hd LngBhd F BP HO1LNs_soo HOLLNG_500 lt oe 4 ShipConstructor automatically determines all the drawings to collect parts from to populate the arrangement drawing In addition to ShipConstructor parts you can also import non ShipConstructor geometry All drawings that you currently have imported non ShipConstructor geometry from will be checked Select all drawings that you also want to import non ShipConstructor geometry from and set destination layers for all non ShipConstructor geometry
494. s drawing the text styles you created appear in this list Text Size The size of the text Rotation The rotation of the text Note If a keyword does not seem to update when you have created your spool drawing your project settings may not be fully set up For example if you chose 4J OB NUMBER gt as one of your keywords and this keyword still shows the same text as the template in your generated spool drawing this means that the project settings for the job number have not yet been set To complete the settings go to Manager gt General gt Project Settings You can update specific keywords manually by selecting a keyword right clicking and selecting Update from the right click menu Appendix Production Command Reference Common Keywords lt LAST UPDATE DATE AND TIME gt The date and time of the last update of this drawing The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt LAST UPDATE DATE gt The date of the last update of this drawing The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt PROJ ECT DESCRIPTION gt Project Description from Project Settings gt Reports lt PROJECT NAME gt Project Name from Project Settings gt Reports lt REVISION DATE AND TIME gt The date and time of the last revision for the layout the keyword Is on The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt REVISION DATE gt The date of the last revision for the layout the keyword is on T
495. s eNews HVA SPOOL LABELS JX Delete PIPE SPOOL K UsageLog STANDARD ancel New Creates a new dimension style link Delete Deletes the selected dimension style link If the dimension style is In Use then deletion will be denied Usage Log Generates a log file that shows where the selected dimension style is used General gt Production Output gt Bill Of Materials Permissions General gt Manager gt Edit Bill Of Materials Procedure Bill Of Materials page 212 ShipConstructor integrates all Bill of Materials management through the BOM Definitions manager The BOM Definitions manager lets you create and edit existing BOMs for all production drawing types Access the BOM Definitions manager through Manager gt General gt Production Output gt Bill of Materials 445 Appendix Production Command Reference 446 E BOM Definitions nce t Ea BOM Definitions Fields Export Definition Name Acad TableStyle Label Style Row prefix a Field name Alias visible Sort details Merge Field props General Item is Assembly Part Name Part Name Yes AscjOrder 1 Yes String f Assembly BOM Bill of Material f AssemblyBOM Assembly Circles Quantity Qty Yes None No Integer Field width Opl x MarineDrafting Stock Name Stock Name Yes None No String T E Parts Parts Standard Pipe Arrgt Bubbles Weight Weight Yes None No Weight kg Decimal Precision 0
496. s should be set up to your company standards Weld Symbol Table in an Assembly Drawing Template You can insert a table object into the template drawing which will contain all the weld symbols and their corresponding scenarios The table in the template drawing is a simple 1x2 empty table that will automatically be filled in during the creation update of the assembly drawing To insert a Weld Symbol Table 1 Inthe assembly drawing template activate paper space 2 Choose Insert Weld Symbol Table TET Table Style Assembly BOM Weld Symbol Scale 10 AutoF it Cell Alignment Middle Center o K Cancel Select a table style scale for the Weld Symbols and an alignment for the table s cells Click OK Select a location for the empty table Predefined Assembly Format Assembly Drawings Only When creating an assembly drawing you can choose to use predefined templates The predefined assembly format allows you to set up which template drawing is used for each assembly level Setting up the predefined templates requires an assembly template drawing To set up predefined templates 1 In Manager choose General gt Production Output gt Predefined Assembly Format page 451 to open the Predefined Assembly Drawing Format window Getting Started with Production Predefined Assembly Drawing Format select Product Hierarchy PRIMARY Levels Template PROJECT Assembly Metric B UNIT Assembly Metric B ASSEMBLY
497. s the intersection of the tangent lines defined by the centerline and the two end points of the elbow HVAC Modeling Profile Corners Object Snaps Profile corner snaps are located on distributed systems ends These points are the corners of the bounding box of the profile see the points labeled Top Left Top Right Bottom Left and Bottom Right in Offset Routing page 175 Profile Edges Object Snaps Profile edge snaps are located on distributed systems ends These points are the mid points of the edges of the bounding box of the profile see the points labeled Left Right Top and Bottom in Offset Routing page 175 Modify Ducts Edit Part This command gives the user the freedom to edit an already placed part completely A new stock is generated for any change that is made so the original stock used for the part is not updated or translated to multiple ducts using the stock unintentionally To edit a part 1 Right Click on an HVAC part to edit and select Edit Part 2 Edit properties and click OK Anchor a Duct Anchored ducts do not move when you perform a transform To anchor a duct 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Anchor Part page 408 179 HVAC Modeling 2 Select all ducts that you want to anchor 3 Press Enter The anchored ducts are marked with the anchor icon Note An anchored duct will not provide grips when selected Unanchor a Duct To unanchor ducts 1 Choose SC HVAC gt Unanchor Part page 408 2 Se
498. s to save the changes or Done to save the changes and close the window Edit End Treatments To edit an end treatment 1 Open the End Treatments window See End Treatments page 94 2 Double click the property field and enter a new value or select a new item from the drop down list The end treatment properties appear red indicating that they have been modified Note If you change the end treatment Type ShipConstructor will move the end treatment to the appropriate section of the end treatments list 3 Click Apply Changes to save the changes or Done to save the changes and close the window Import End Treatments You can import end treatments from another project or from an XML file that was exported from another project To import end treatments 1 Open the End Treatments window See End Treatments page 94 2 Click Import to open a File Browser 3 Select a project file PRO or XML file XML 99 HVAC Library Setup 4 Click Open to open the Import End Treatments window 5 Check the import check boxes of all the end treatments you want to import 6 Click OK Export End Treatments You can export end treatments to an XML file for example to import into another project or to edit using other software To export end treatments i 2 3 4 5 Open the End Treatments window See End Treatments page 94 Check the Export check boxes for all the end treatments you want to export Click Export XML to open a Fi
499. se Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Label Reset Automatic Settings page 245 Resets the automatic label generation settings in the current drawing to use the project settings BOM Revisions gt New BOM Revision in Current Layout Production tab gt BOM panel BOM Revisions gt New BOM Revision in Current Layout SCPRODREVNEW Permissions Revisions Add Edit Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure New Revision page 251 Creates a revision in the current layout BOM Revisions gt New BOM Revision in All Layouts Button veces Ei BOM Revisions gt New BOM Revision in All Layouts Command SCPRODREVNEWALL Permissions Revisions Add Edit Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure New Revision page 251 Creates a revision in all layouts BOM Revisions gt Delete BOM Revision from Current Layout Production tab gt BOM panel BOM Revisions gt Delete BOM Revision from Current Layout Command SCPRODREVDEL Permissions Revisions Remove Permission page 460 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Delete Revision page 252 Deletes the current revision in the current layout 482 Appendix Production Command Reference BOM Revisions gt Delete BOM Revisi
500. se pointer Align Dimension Text to View When changing the view angle of a spool viewport you may still like the location of the dimensions but wish to re align their text only Choose SC Spool Drawing gt Align Dimension Text to Current View to do this Re dimension a Spool Drawing After the initial creation of a spool drawing you may re dimension your drawing with different settings or a different view angle To re dimension a spool drawing 1 Choose SC Spool Drawing gt Re dimension ed select Dimension Attributes Override Spool Style Dimensions Dimensioninig Dimension Offset 200 mm M5 Units Dimension Skyle PIPE SPOOL 10 0 mm MS Units ARS and Penetration Label Style Label OrFset 10 mm Label Style ARS label Crientatian Warning Update required to recreate penetrations cancel 2 If desired click Override Spool Style Dimensions to make changes to the dimensioning options See Spool Styles Reference page 519 for details on the dimensioning options 286 Distributed Systems Production Drawings 3 Click OK Label Connecting Spool Assembly If the spool in the spool drawing Is connected to one or more spools labeling the connection ends where these spools connect is a good idea By running the Label Connecting Spool Assembly command each end that connects a spool outside the drawing can be selected to have a label generated for it The label just contains the name of the spool that
501. selected finish A check mark in the In Use column indicates that the finish is being used by parts To list all parts using a specific finish 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Finishes page 304 to open the Finishes window 3 Select the finish you want 4 Click Usage Log Insulation Insulation is not used by the Structure module Some stocks include insulation If you plan to use stocks with insulation you must define the various insulation You must set up the insulation you plan to use in the project An insulation type is a group where you can set up similar types of insulations Create an Insulation Type To create an insulation type 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Insulation page 305 to open the Insulation window 3 Click New Type 4 Type a name for the insulation type and press Enter Create an Insulation Catalog To create an insulation catalog 1 Open the Insulation window 2 Click Edit Catalogs to open the Insulation Catalogs window 3 Click New to create a new insulation catalog 4 Entera name for the insulation catalog and press Enter 35 Library Setup Create an Insulation To create an insulation l 2 3 4 5 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager Choose General gt Insulation page 305 to open the Insulation window Select the insulation type
502. sembly drawing is created it uses the template assigned to its level Predefined Assembly Drawing Format select Product Hierarchy PRIMARY Lewels Template PROJECT Assembly Metric B UNIT Assembly Metric E ASSEMBLY Assembly Metric E Staged Assembly Metric B Stage Assembly Metric B Assembly Metric E Assembly Metric B feeembhe Metri A Select Product Hierarchy The list of product hierarchies in the project Levels List Levels List of all levels for the selected product hierarchy Template The assembly template drawing assigned to the assembly level The list contains all registered assembly template drawings in the project Ribbon Tabs page Error Bookmark not defined Template Tab General Panel F g k a Navigator See ShipConstructor gt Navigator page 311 E See Drawing Options gt Edit All Drawing Options page 468 Edit All Drawing Options 451 Appendix Production Command Reference 452 Structure Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt Structure Drawing Options page 469 Pipe Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt Pipe Drawing Options page 469 d HVAC Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt HVAC Drawing Options page 469 a Equipment Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt Equipment Drawing Options page 469 a Hanger and Support Drawing Options See Drawing Options gt Hanger and Support Drawing Options page
503. sessesseeasereen ShipConstructor gt Update Production DrawidS ccsesssssesessssserserssesssersersatseserseesates ShipConstructor gt Product Hierarchy isi cccivsGiecstiiiuniecstiininedvoniasniaaedunitnvedesistonivantmeiwenbueriunt ShipConstructor gt Profile NESTING ssiciawvarcizeaviannieeawuviicisvwstevciaunntensicluuelevstduittehusiicdvteueloaduuiitcneu ShipConstructor gt REVISIONS ia sicsiitasvncaiaanvacuniasvveweveranivaviesintaageseniuaianncaianimacsanvansenaaiinaniiin SID COMSURELO FL ICSMS ING arska TE ANTAA AAA ShipConstructor gt ShipConstructor Help cessesssssssssssrssrssssessrsesessesersaesessesensatsesersensates ShipConstructor gt About SHIPCONStIrUCTOM cccceeeescssessssessssessesersasersasersasersasersesersasersans Se ME HSS ME a A AAAA SC Utilities gt 3D VIS WOON mrn nasaan a a iia E O EAT At SC Utilities gt Actvate UCS ernen ONANAN SC UTINUES CS gt FI WIGS Xiana SG UTS UES SFIDUCS Toneriai aE ET T T EE SC Utilities gt UCS gt Swab UCS XY AX S ssssssesssssrsrsrsrsrrsnsnsrnrnrnnnnnnnsnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnnnnnnnnnnnas SC Utlities gt FIGS ODJECE sieaa a E EE SC Utilities gt Unhide Objects s sssssrsrsrsrsrssssssrsrsrnnnnnnnnnsnnrnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnna SC Utilities gt Unhide All Objects s s sssrsrssssssssrsrsrnrsnnnnnnsrsnnnnrnnnnnnnnnsnsnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnsnnrnnnnnnnns SC UMITES gt CD CULERE VEW sesa T A ANAA SC Utilities REMOVE CW yarisipiaie a N SD e e
504. shes for the part or view all the finishes applied to the part See Finishes Reference page 432 for more details Extract Center Lines This command will extract the center line from the selected part Merge To Bent This command will merge a selection of HVAC parts into a single duct Show Flow Direction Use this command to toggle the visibility of the parts flow direction arrow Switch Flow Direction Use this command to toggle the flow direction of the entire HVAC run up to a branch Rotate Line Mode Icon This command will rotate the line mode icons of this part by 90 degrees Set Line Mode Icon Size Running this command will give you command line options to change the size of the individual parts line mode icons Don t Show Max Length Warning This command will toggle the visibility of max length warnings if they are enabled in the HVAC drawing options and the part is over the max length On the Fly Command Line Reference When routing HVAC parts in On the Fly mode you will see several command line options in addition to the usual ones These options allow quick modification of various typically geometric properties of the part you are routing The options are dependent on the type of part you are routing Options not specific to a part type e Edit Displays a dialog similar to the one used to edit HVAC stocks allowing you modify both geometric and non geometric properties e Autofit If the part being routed suppor
505. sion in the lock is lower than the software needs If your Subscription is up to date contact your dealer License is not WorkShare If the project is a WorkShare formerly Project Split amp Merge project project has a split project only licenses which support WorkShare will be able to be used on this project Subscription Expired The Subscription expiry date is older than the release date of this version of the software Contact your dealer in order to renew your Subscription Part Count Exceeded The License has a part count limit that is exceeded by the part count in the project Contact your dealer to upgrade the level of the license Release Date The date that the software was released Project Type Indicates if the project is a WorkShare project or not Server The name of the license server computer Lock Name The name of the lock This usually contains the serial number as well Expiry Date The date when the lock expires Days Left The number of days until the lock expires Subscription Expiry Date The subscription expiry date stored in the lock You are permitted to install software that has release dates prior to this date Type Indicates if the lock is an ordinary ShipConstructor lock or a WorkShare formerly Project Split amp Merge lock Show this window during Project Register Displays the Licensing window whenever you register a project Turn this option off if you always get the same licenses or o
506. slavalenisedavalvaiouleesenicutiotaslenthinuiced neni cdbe eied setenv olen ten sedleabidvoteatyulieteahiien 477 BOM TOJE LIST ONIY VISIOIG aain AA A nie Adenia AAA 477 Labe Manyal Ae essen acerca Seis stair seo een BeBe a sl a pnd din aD cated unelied anonttatoenen eds 477 PAN te OS rca etree neta lame alee leat eel ete deal aad eal eal lea E 478 PSN AOA aca aaa eae aS eat aaa ea cece na A anal alg AAO A 478 Label gt LabelCurnent La VOU ssn Mancinbennaaiidceoti Mann daiona Niediichol i ibeleicaota dhol saonubibelines 478 EATS LSI SWISS es tratrncutwtenn actresses tt cnt te ano si et econ panto 478 Label gt Label Viewports from BOM acaiiaiiantinnwanniniancaaina danncinniinadianiinadinaieaudedanneain 479 Lapel gt Label TITAN AUS seca sca a st cecilia i ab cll a alae daa sted ase lah 479 EA Del gt ack a Dl POSIE OMS vise cpe ses ecinntontacisaes dict E esac eh EER ER 479 LON DST SAA EO STS ein eres esac I ea acacia lend TA 479 Label gt Delete Labels in Current La VOU Ess sesciscicretcadsceeiadeues adtewts aduanss i adiveat hadiatas tadaet adi aas advert adap adie elena adie 480 kabel Lapel on Visible Edge On OF vainnsirwnsnaieundnrentiinadieaihiania nisin maiinn dannii Innes 480 Label gt Curved Plates in Visible Edge Detection On Off ccsesssssssserssssssssssrssessssrsseseesesseseeseseesersaesasersersansesensensates 481 Label gt Adjacent Part Edge Tolerance isciscccacivess kacwutes cidverssiadieats cacuanss bacuutehiadiawss uavetestadi
507. spools that you want to create a spool drawing for You should see all the spools that you have selected on the right side of the wizard Note Each spool that you select will generate its own drawing 6 Click Next 284 Distributed Systems Production Drawings e crete Spoo Drawing EJ Etcp 3of3 Please Eckeck a Spool Sz ings Style pud Shes Spud Slrle Properlics HvA EPL PEDET MeL Dimensioning Baseine Dimensioning Mo used Break Dimension a Brarches YES Freak Dimension a Connections ro Break Dimension Saddles YES Cimension O Pset irr C Cimension Style FIFE S400L Orientation ype Eestrit Labeling OKs and Fenecraton Lasel offset ravi LL OKs and Fenecraton Lavel style ARS lazel Hadal Jimersian Angl YES Radial Jimersisn Eads YES Radial mersin Arc Lencth YES Auto W3da7e Cia point ro Labe Mov _utaack elbows YES Shou Pe eEPaticns Bs a gt Evil Slyles ui lt beck Ansh Lancel 7 Selecta Spool Style and click Finish The last used Spool Style will be selected by default Note There must be a spool style defined If you have no spool style defined click Edit under Spool Styles to create one This requires that you have permission to edit spool settings See Spool Styles Reference page 519 Note If a spool drawing with the same name exists already you will be prompted to overwrite it You will see your spool drawings being generated If you are in MDI mode all the spool drawings will open after generati
508. srssrsssssserssrsassesersaesesersersassesersersatsesersansates Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Nandoon enU aaa saa seasae seuhenanchatee a eaten tte tetaee aceasta SIMO CONMSEMICUOR MONU i cicsisdsdcatstedadecebudsdindsixsshuccactubcvani stat vindsiuaeextogetentceabutcdmeentnien S MID COMSEEUCTOR INV IG ALO aaaeaii AEAT E ShipConstructor gt Manager sci sities vicina cacirvaveanradrnnnssnaansaiiacuuanudananmanainiandii ShipConstructor gt Project gt New Project cssssssssssssssrssssssesersssseserserseesesersersatsesersensates ShipConstructor gt Project gt COPY Project s s srsrsrsrssssrsrsrsrnrnnnnrsnsrsrnnnnnnnnnnnnnsrnrnrnrnnnnnns SMIDCONSTHUICLOR gt MOGS I ENIK saindaschinuniusreoltuajvesmvealaleletanvilunsicain E ShipConstructor gt Planar Group gt Transfer Objects tO Group s ssssesrerererererrsrsrerererens ShipConstructor gt Penetration Manager csscsesssssssserssssssssssrssesessrserseeseserseesatsesersensates ShipConstructor gt Check gt Check Proje ct ccccsscssssesssessssessssessrsessrsassrsssrsasersasereass ShipConstructor gt Check gt Check Unit ccessssscssssssssrsssssssessrssessssesersasseseesersatsesersensases ShipConstructor gt Check gt Check TeMplates cccccsesssssessssssssersssersasersserssersasersass ShipConstructor gt Check gt Fix Duplicate Drawing NAMES ccessssesesersseeserseesates ShipConstructor gt Update Model and System Drawing cccecssses
509. srsssssssrssrssesesersesessesersassessesersaesesensaesassesersanseseesensansesensansates 151 Deleted System or BUCH enrenar een a a A A A A A A TA G 151 setthe Curent Syste nnrir n AA T A AAAA AATA 151 Changethe Systemi FON DUCTS upa O 151 Set Up HVAC Defaults Display and PErfOrMance c cecsessscssssrsssssrssrserssrserssrssrsersrsrsorsersersersrsersersersenss 152 IIS Dla Y OMUOMS TOF DUC iiare a a a a a toe tme ac eoietnetoaen adeoneneasiiwess 152 Na vA old elatnecameme ATTERT Tarren ny ett nN eT nnn meen ee mene nant eran TEE AA EKANA tana te ent 153 setthe Transformi OPE OINS sivas siasnaasicncanan vocuc vis vaca E ON A A T A nica uaeai annua nua 153 SOU TIS ROUUNG ODUONS sinuit e E nw nce pcos oa tion antec tera eae EEE Ea 154 SEU the BENA vor CTI ONS anaran an an an leslie AT EAT AAAA AT 155 on TIS FIY OLF ennai EEN E EE OT NEN A 156 Contents VST AE DAES EAA E dani A EA EA A 156 NSSE CUS cnnan a i a i i e a i i e 158 Selecting an HVAC Part to Insert NON OTF MOde cccssscsesssssecsssessssessssessssesessecseseseseseeseseeseseesasesesrsasersasersasensass 158 Creating an HVAC Patt in OTF MOde initia naiinwe wanda nani adda dana dinaiinn da nadinacinui 158 INVA Gace rare Soha pr ct hci acento dada led chant acti call nda cheb abit Mao dele 159 COUPEE CUSTOM ATT DUTSS cost cies celeron taint rene esrb EE natn einige ha tegatana 160 SPN IC Lester ue get taro acto esha eah lass eae ot else dan tdoseah MtdadenlodatanldeNoben 160 BO PME UCU
510. ssesserssssssssssrssessssrseeseeseserseesasseseesaesesersersatsesersensates 237 Change the View in an Assembly Drawing sssssssssssssssrssssssseserssessssessrsaesesrsersaesessesensassesersensassesersanseseesensansesensensatees 237 Rotate an Assembly in an Assembly Drawing sssecsssssssssrsssssssrssrsseseserseesecsesersaesessesersacsesenseesassesersansasersarsansesensansates 238 Insert a Quality Control Matrix Into an Assembly DraWwind sesscsssssrssssssssssrssessssrsersessesrseesessesersaesaseesersatsesersansates 238 Upda i BOMS i scar cas coerce beet cece acest awenrtetoneun du caaesta naar aeat aaueeca ack uetet eaccean eanuces aaneses aauveestaguieauearuiea tates 239 WIG WO OIE CIID IG essre a ay aenin iaania a a bande uutansa a emah enLNeNTA Da OEE aA be REN aa IO 239 ER IO SC Ieee anv Noten ett voce ATA ATAT EATE 242 LECH IDE TIEN O esnan A E A A A 242 PATON NAS el SUI Chatto APAA N ON AA A AAA A AA P eset aed A A A A A A AAAA AAAA 242 Label t Visible Part EJES nasunosnunsnsnsnnaronann n an AAAA AAAA AAE hain AA AE 242 Faber A A O 243 Manual La pelnos EAE cas oc i nn cia EEEE 243 vii Contents CODY AD Gl essan nign E E A R EE ER E E Ea 244 tapel Curent Layo Utrina EEEE ONEAN OOE AEAN 244 Bella s 0 Laer ee eT eT AA A AAAA A 244 FADE MIEWDOIES TORT OM iiusicasssnionnsiesnintahicaststnenin dein iinds snonsediteessionds T e T a aN a Dind 244 HAS HO Ih ted teste neoclassical ee na ed aia eaten af lee ead nates vip alae ah la ote
511. ssssessesersessessesrsasseseesoesassesersansassesersansaseesersansesensensatens 409 SC AVA gt Tansier Pall Siisciciis oeimuavsnevarvsaciaeys tess itoveun steel wubevcinnnatan wanionnviaina sehen A N 409 SC AVAC IV AS Drawing OPON S nated anaa uel lula E OEA EAO 410 SC HVAC 0n The FIY Mode annasa aaa A aaO cast avert EAA Eaa AE Ea TAAA uaa eat 410 SCAHVAC gt HVAC OIF Default Data aorin ER T 410 SC HVAC gt Get HVAC OTF Default Data front Patt iisscoiinsiencetsciitunsdeniienoinshovciiusiteneiwannniaanerianineseah eani EEan in 410 SC HVAC gt Change Connection Accessory PaCKaQe cssssccssscssscssecsssessssessssessssessssesesseseseserseseesasersasersasersasersasersans 411 Individual Drawing Display Settings COMMANAS cesessssssssssssrssrssrssrssrserssesersersersersorsersersersersnsersenses 412 Shared HEF COMMANA S secs scesecee scar sccasceaecenssuatctanseatacaec eacataucen sedans a a i a 413 SCHEPRepicateTODrAWINO auien anaa AAAA ONE AA AOO A EN 413 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference 415 SeN VAR OM eei EE EEE EE cdc dete Gale E EREE E E E O 415 FAY GAA IG ODEO N aaa a oes cane Coren Cae iene Cae cea aeel aes eek cual yeckae ene Chest nestatas 415 The Display Weel sass aaastencai gs ara ese seas oS cata n AAAA 416 TAE INGVAIG Ta Dipnoi E Ansan ini Bi etinBavnsuienDaltinDilngsdpditonsiandstenennstiteceninin 424 xii Contents TG TAS TONY Wel tices erctsonc passin eatin E Dawei vaasnis fede A e 426 MVS FS OEMS TAD rarae aANT EOU ATEAN ONE
512. stance to offset the distribution lines from the extents bounding box when automatic labeling the selected viewport The value is in paper space units 471 Appendix Production Command Reference Distribution Lines n Minimum Leader Length Label Spacing The distance between labels on new distribution lines created when automatic labeling The data entered in the window is saved as Xdata on the viewport object The value is in paper space units The label Spacing is applied to the distribution line A472 Appendix Production Command Reference Label Spacing Te S ah D o H u A i 1 m N o i TRENY we i Viewport Display Options gt Set Configure the viewport specific display options for a specific viewport Viewport Display Options gt Save Saves the selected viewport s display options to a file An SCDO file is created and it can be used either the drawing options or the viewport display options 473 Appendix Production Command Reference Viewport Display Options gt Load Production tab gt Production Utilities Assembly gt Viewport Display Options gt Load SCLOADVIEWP ORTDRAWINGOP TIONSFROMFILE Permissions None License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure None Loads display options from a selected SCDO file and applies them to the selected viewport BOM gt Update BOMs Production tab gt BOM pa
513. style settings are changed any reference line that uses that style is updated to reflect the style change except where properties are overridden 363 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands J Daturmline style Mariager Lurrant Stuls Ueck lransverse Slyles Pieve of Deck Lorngiladinal n Set Current Deck Longitudiral Deck Transversa Frame Trensverse Frame Veitical Lorg Longitudinal Lorg Yertcal Stardard Styles Lists all the reference line styles in the current drawing Set Current Sets the current reference line style New reference lines use the current style New Create a new reference line style Modify Modifies the properties of the selected reference line style Delete Deletes the selected reference line style If a reference line style is in use or the Current Style or the Standard style then you can t delete it 364 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Modify Datumline Style Standard Ticks Label Preview Common Tick Alignment Centered Ler ation Group Filter Frame Primary Text Height 250 Text Margin 100 BASELINE Text Style Standard TE Test Position Below F ight Text Orentation Parallel to line Tick Size n Location Group None gt a Secor ary Tick Size 100 Loc ation Group lt M ore bd Canca Ticks Ticks are small segments on the reference
514. subtracting part and remnant weight from the nest stock weight lt NEST SIZE gt Length x Width of the nest lt NEST STOCK AREA gt Area of the item used to create the nest lt NEST STOCK LENGTH gt Length of the item used to create the nest lt NEST STOCK NAME gt Name of the item used to create the nest remnant name if created from a remnant or the plate stock name if created from raw stock lt NEST STOCK PLATE LOCATION gt Indicator keyword for the location of the stock plate in the nest template drawing lt NEST STOCK SIZE gt Length x Width of the item used to create the nest lt NEST STOCK UTILIZATION gt Percentage of the area that is parts and remnants over the area of the item used to create the nest lt NEST STOCK WEIGHT gt Weight of the item used to create the nest lt NEST STOCK WIDTH gt Width of the item used to create the nest lt NEST TIME gt Time of creation The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt NEST USER gt The user who created the nest lt NEST UTILIZATION gt Percentage of the area of all parts over the area of the item used to create the nest 492 Appendix Production Command Reference Profile Plot Template Keywords lt MIN_HEIGHT gt The minimum height for the offsets dimensions used in the offsets view lt OFFSETS POSITION gt The lower left corner of the offsets view lt OFFSETS SPACING gt The offsets spacing value used to dimension the offsets view lt P
515. t lt Source Layer gt which will be replaced with the name of the layer the source entity is on The line lt Source Layer gt can be included anywhere in the layer template and can be included multiple times If the new layer does not exist it will be created and the new entity or entities will be placed on it Source Layer Layer Template Final Layer _Parts ExportedParts ExportedP arts _Parts lt Source Layer gt _Parts _Parts ExportLayer lt Source Layer gt ExportLayer Parts _Parts lt SourceLayer gt A lt Source Layer gt B _PartsA PartsB To export a drawing 1 Open the drawing you want to export 2 Choose SC Utilities gt Export gt Export to DWG 3 The drawing being exported will be closed when the export drawing is created If you have made changes that haven t been saved ShipConstructor will bring up a window asking to save those changes Getting Started with Production Creating an export drawing will close the current drawing Do you want to save changes Save changes Save changes and export the current drawing Discard changes Export the current drawing and discard changes 266 Getting Started with Production Fl Export To Drawing Configuration c Load Gy Save eS Reset Layer Template Part General Piecemarks lt Source Layer gt Solid lt Source Layer gt Bevel Solid Stiffener Green lt Source Layer gt Plate Part Production lt Source Layer gt Profile Part Start and
516. t Production Output gt Bill Of Materials page 445 to open the BOM Definitions window 3 Select an existing BOM 4 Click Delete A window will prompt to confirm Set Up a Production Drawing Template You can control the layout of all production drawings using drawing templates ShipConstructor includes one default drawing template that you can use or modify Note There must be at least one drawing template defined before you can create a production drawing of the same type Getting Started with Production 226 Create a Drawing Template To create a drawing template i 2 3 4 oS Choose ShipConstructor gt Navigator to open the Navigator Select the Templates page Select the folder for the drawing type you want to create a template drawing for Click New lt type gt to open the New Drawing window Where lt type gt is the type of drawing The button changes text based on the selected folder Mew Assembly Template Drawing File Mame Template Drawings BBs AssemblyType LE Assembly 150 44 M Open New Drawing LE Assembly Metric B 4 Multipage cnet Enter a name for the drawing and click OK Insert your company title block or create one Set up as many viewports as you need Set up the properties of the viewports The Shade plot property is a property that is used by labeling if project setting Labels Point to Visible Edges Is Yes Insert Keyword into a Production Drawing Template You can inser
517. t Rotate 3D Type all and press Enter to select all objects Press Enter to finish selecting objects Type the axis to rotate the assembly about and press Enter Press Enter to accept the default rotation point 0 0 0 Type the angle to rotate the assembly and press Enter Se er ee oS Insert a Quality Control Matrix into an Assembly Drawing A quality control matrix is a table of dimensions that you can insert into an assembly drawing and that production can use to verify the accuracy of an assembly after its fabrication After fabrication production can measure the distances between points on the physical assembly and enter the values into the empty fields of the quality control matrix Note You can insert a quality control matrix into any ShipConstructor drawing but they are most useful for assembly drawings To insert a quality control matrix into an assembly drawing 1 Inthe assembly drawing double click within the main viewport to switch to model space 2 Choose SC Utilities gt Create Quality Matrix page 361 to open the Quality Matrix Options window Quality Matrix Options Label Bubble style Bubble r Bubble Margin 104 Leader Length S00 model space Test style Standard ha Text size 00 AIrOW SIzZe FA Onent To View C Scale dimensions bo layout Paper space Label Layer TEXT Set the options and click OK Getting Started with Production biati Text style Standard
518. t Color Color of lines that will be cut by the NC machine Part Mark Color Color of lines that will be marked by the NC machine Part NoProcess Color Color of lines that will not be processed by the NC machine Profile Part Colors Part Green Color When adding Green to a stiffener or faceplate the green is represented by a solid using the Part Green Color Twisted Stiffener Import Units The units of STR stringer files from ShipCAM or Maxsurf when creating new twisted stiffeners Use Surface Name for Part Name Creating curved plate parts can be named from the surface name in the Hull drawing or the DXF filename if using Curved Plates gt New If this is set to No a new autonumbered name is generated Weld Shrinkage Icon Size The default size of the weld shrinkage icon Weld General gt User Permissions General gt User Permissions Toolbar Permissions General gt Edit User Permissions Procedure User Permissions page 29 Opens the User Permissions window letting you set up user permissions and permission groups See User Permissions in the Project Management manual for details General gt Materials General gt Materials Toolbar Permissions General gt Manager gt Edit Materials Procedure Materials page 30 Opens the Materials window letting you create and edit materials Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands E Materials com fame Density Uniks as gt Alum
519. t Show Max Length Warning Add Selected ale Select Similar Yh Deselect All Anchor When selected this option anchors the part This part will not move when you execute a multi part transform Complex transformations can be bounded and made into much simpler transformations by strategically anchoring parts that should not move See Single Part Transforms page 182 MultiPart Transforms page 183 and Anchor a Duct page 179 for more information Lock When selected will lock a part This part will not be able to change Disconnect This command removes all connections between this part and any other parts No Spool Use this command when you want to make this part a no Spool part or to make a no spool part normal Set System This command is the same as SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set System page 401 Use this command when you want to change the branch that this part belongs to See Set Up HVAC Systems page 149 for more information Edit Part This command lets you change the stock of the part By editing the part you are creating a new On the Fly stock Change Insulation Use this command to bring up the Select Insulation window where you can change the insulation on the part or simply view the insulation that is applied to the part See Insulation Reference page 431 for more details Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference Change Finish This command brings up the Select Finishes window where you can change the fini
520. t and irces inside exhension ines the first thing to move Outside thee exbersion ines ts Either text or amoris best fit ANON i Test Both text and anors Always keep ket betvanen ext ines Suppress arrows if they dort fit meide axtencion ines Scale for dimension healures Text placement Annotative i Vien test is nol inthe default postion place amp Beside the dimersion line Seale dimensons bo layout O Over dimension line wilh leader Use overall scale of 0 0000 Ove dimension line valhout leader ine burr C Place text marua V Draw dm line between ext lines Label sizes are affected by scaling settings of the associated dimension style BOM Definitions Manager ShipConstructor integrates all Bill of Materials management through the BOM Definitions manager The BOM Definitions manager lets you create and edit existing BOMs for all production drawing types Access the BOM Definitions manager through Manager General gt Production Output gt Bill Of Materials page 445 Assembly Drawing Naming Conventions Assembly drawings are the only drawings that require a naming convention be configured You will need to set up the product hierarchy level prior to setting up the naming convention 220 Naming Conventions C New 9X Delete y SetActive gt Manage Aliases oF Generate Mames Usage Log Mame Conventions Elements Name Conventions Active Element Type Summary Getting Started with
521. t have been added or removed Right Click Menu Lets you open reattach rename or delete the selected product hierarchy drawing or create a new product hierarchy drawing Open New Rename Delete Reattach New Rename Delete 324 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Reattach Permissions General gt Edit Product Hierarchy Drawings Reattaches an existing drawing to a registered product hierarchy drawing that has its drawing file missing The selected drawing is checked to ensure it is a product hierarchy drawing Rename Permissions General gt Edit Product Hierarchy Drawings Procedure Rename a Product Hierarchy Drawing page 66 Renames the selected product hierarchy drawing Delete Permissions General gt Edit Product Hierarchy Drawings Procedure Delete a Product Hierarchy Drawing page 66 Deletes the selected product hierarchy drawing Interference Page The Interference page lets you create open and modify interference drawings shipConstructor Mavigator Tutorial UDI Drawing Last Modified Date Previews O A Interference el sample 4723 2013 3 17 11 PM ie Pipe Spool Be HVAC S pool E Support Construction HP Equipment 5 Electrical Ma Product Hierarchy E Interference oo Weld Management Assembly open Read Only AN Composite Approval Her Show Out of Date Esport Open Permissions General gt Edit Interference Opens the select
522. t various keywords into a production drawing template When you generate a production drawing ShipConstructor automatically replaces the keyword with the appropriate information Keywords are updated any time the drawing is updated To insert a keyword into a production drawing template i In the production drawing template activate paper space Choose Production Utilities gt Insert Keyword page 485 to open the Insert Keyword window Getting Started with Production ee Insert Keyword Seas Keywords Text Style aT S JULES LEAL Standa ASSEMBLY C gt SASSEMBLY LCa zASSEMBL Y LEVEL gt Text Size lt A 55EMBLY MAME gt ASSEMBLY PROPERTIES gt SASSEMELY Toa lt A55EMBLY YTG ASSEMBLY WEIGHT 0 degrees COMPANY MAME gt FILE MAME lt FILEP4TH gt lt FULL ASSEMBLY MAME gt HULL WUMBER lt JB NUMBER gt lt L45T UPDATE DATE AMD TIME gt lt L45T UPDATE DATE gt lt PROJECT DESCRIPTION gt lt PROJECT MAME lt REVISION DATE ANO TIME 4 mm PS Units Rokation Cancel The list of available keywords depends of the type of production drawing you are in 3 4 Select the keyword to insert Change the text properties now in this window or later using AutoCAD Keywords are based on AutoCAD text objects SO all the properties of text objects are available Click OK Select the location for the keyword The keyword is created as a new ShipConstructor keyword object Note
523. tabase Rename Allows you to rename the selected UCS in the list For Planar Group Planes you cannot rename the prefix Delete Deletes the selected UCS in the list Activate Activates the selected UCS in the list 351 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands SC Utilities gt UCS gt Flip UCS X SC Utilities tab gt Visual panel SC Utilities gt UCS gt Flip UCS X SCFLIPUCS Permissions None Procedure None Changes the current UCS so that the X Axis is pointing towards the X Axis direction SC Utilities gt UCS gt Flip UCS Y SC Utilities tab gt Visual panel SC Utilities gt UCS gt Flip UCS Y SCFLIPUCSY Permissions None Procedure None Changes the current UCS so that the Y Axis is pointing towards the Y Axis direction SC Utilities gt UCS gt Swap UCS XY Axis Button E Ribbon SC Utilities tab gt Visual panel SC Utilities gt UCS gt Swap UCS XY Axis Command SCSWAPUCSXY Permissions None Procedure None Changes the current UCS so that the X Axis is pointing towards the Y Axis direction and the Y Axis is pointing towards the X Axis direction SC Utilities gt Hide Objects SC Utilities tab gt Visual panel SC Utilities gt Hide Objects SCHIDE Permissions None Procedure Hide or Show Objects page 55 Hides the objects selected Hidden objects are remembered in the order you hid them while you are in the current drawing Appendix A Menus Tools amp Comman
524. tage by dragging them to another build stage Create a Product Hierarchy Drawing To create a product hierarchy drawing 1 In Navigator select the Product Hierarchy page Ship Constructor Navigator Tutorial U 1 E Tuvia NE Last Modified Date Preview te 1 PEE i brochure Nye Pipe Spool Be HVAC Spool E Support Construction iP Equipment Eq Electrical aa Ta Product Hierarchy E Interference ie Weld Management Assembly Open MI Composite Approval New show Out of Date E pork n i Reel By ket tte Read Only ll Space Allocation 2 Output 5 Nest E Profile Plot LS Templates 2 Click New 64 Library Setup Ka New Product Hierarchy Drawing i Product Hierarchy Drawings v Open New Drawing Template template_PH02 Choose a template from which to base the appearance of the new drawing Enter a new drawing name and click OK The New Product Hierarchy Drawing window appears 65 Library Setup Select Model Drawings Select Drawings Drawings infer ier Text E Tutorial aft DS ttt UO E Structure O Frame J LngBhd Deck L O Arbitrary H O Curved 3 Distributed Systems Pipe ar Equipment gt Frame 4 LngBhd O Deck 4 Arbitrary 9 Curved A 3 Distributed Systems aE Space Allocation Cancel Select the drawings to include in the product hierarchy drawing Click OK Note If any parts are created af
525. te Leader Distribution Line page 484 Attach to Viewport Tracking See Attach to Viewport Tracking page 484 amp Redistribute Leaders See Redistribute Leaders page 485 i Set Leader Insertion Mode See Set Leader Insertion Mode page 485 w Adjust Leader Spacing See Adjust Leader Spacing page 484 Transfer Leaders to Other Line See Transfer Leaders to Other Line page 485 Property Label Panel Property Label See Property Label gt Property Label page 497 p g Copy Field Label See Property Label gt Copy Field Label page 497 Tes Copy Field Label Quick See Property Label gt Copy Field Label Quick page 497 of amp Edit Field Label See Property Label gt Edit Field Label page 498 fa Replace Object References See Property Label gt Replace Object References page 498 24 Set Single Click Field Label See Property Label gt Set Single Click Field Label page 498 Spool Panel Rotate Dimension Appendix Production Command Reference 457 Appendix Production Command Reference See SC Spool Drawing gt Rotate Dimension in Pipe of HVAC Manual i Align Dimension Text to Current View See SC Spool Drawing gt Align Dimension Text to Current View in Pipe of HVAC Manual py Re Dimension See SC Spool Drawing gt Re Dimension in Pipe or HVAC manual VY Label Connecting Spool Assembly See SC Spool Drawing gt Label Connecting Spool Assembly in Pipe or HVAC
526. te sisccusss sade caiscacuegsscncusas vacant uneveseutaduasestadvedistacasictnseasununear sew asdvesepuadiiasestadutipeadagies a secdununcuesesaduivenuels 484 Attach to VIEWDOIE TRACKING Assisi MI A A AA Aaa 484 Create Leader Distribution TS ssc rece eset seinen nchtoctent E ealdeoseatralot 484 Set Pea Gen mMmserton ModE sisirain a eoan aE EES ntact hades nates ada eas AE cada OEE tales AN GTA 485 RedistiDuUte Leaders issin RAA A EEA A A AAAA 485 TrANSTER Leaders tO Other EN Esenionuiea ie datpenatdaermessiderundedudeBiaeadddcaieadiiconctesdeninde 485 Production Utilities gt TS SU ICY W ONCE aseisiin iE AEAU 485 Update from a Previous Version s ssssssssrsrsrsnssssrsrsrsnnnnnnnnsrnnnnnnnnntanntnnnrnnnNANANAEAEAESENENENANAEAENENESEENANAEAEAESESEEnENAnnnnnnnnn rann Ena 494 Develop Product Hierarchy cvs stevesovsrcvsa ves n E ANAN AAA A 494 Lapeling gt Glopal Dimension TOP ONE serraria iie NE NIRAN 495 Property Label gt Property Labelarricsomnsnsnsamninen ienaa a a a a a aa a vai a 497 Property Label gt Copy Field Cael renia E TEE daca betes a flash 497 Properly Label Copy Field Eabel QUICK vicscsesiosnnsteonestinacwentictnnwebice ea a EER haan tones taeewaenbnaaiwosn 497 Property La Del EGIC Fe Label airesivset siete teva conv oleae Nalini 498 Property Label gt Replace Object References cecscsssssssssssessssscssseessssessseeseseeseseeseseesesaesesassesassesassesassesansesansesansesanss 498 Property Label gt Set Single Click Fi
527. tees 397 SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Associate Equipment with PEL Item ccesscsesersssssersersssssserssrstsesersersatens 398 SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Dissociate Equipment from PEL Item csecsesserssssseeserssessserserseesesersersaeees 398 SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Create PEL All Equipment ccccsesssssssserssssssssserssesssersersesesersersetsasersersatens 398 SCPNVAG Seb PAE soit te terete aed lol ee lt aaa ie ale dae ied dated tld ded nad dene 398 SC HVAC gt Spools gt Spool Manager nanigas aaa a a a A a Aa 399 SC HVAC SP00 gt SCENO SPOOL ozsa aAa aAA 399 SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove NOS 00 bircevicicescntansnsidiaryaemevsintenn de doaenenloedicestalreustnduaoiesnlloneavnliaoeiven lve toledidiatodaneunnlidcdealidods 399 SC HVAC S SDOOIS gt Add Spool Breaka nirea A AEE 399 xi Contents Contents SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove Spool Break ccccesssssssssssssssecsssessssecsssessssesessecessesessecseseseeseeeesecsesaeeesasesasersassrsasnsasersass 400 SG VAG SP00 Un Spool GC OMMECECG Partson aan ESEO EI SEO EE 400 SC HVAC Systems System Manageri acct e AAA na A AA 400 SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set Current System From HVAC Palt ccccccsesscssssssssseceessescesessesseeserssessaeserseessessenseeseaneaess 400 SOA ig AYE AN ioe ho NES aSo e E AAA AAA A A N A er A A AA A AAA A AA A AS 401 SC HVAC gt Saddles gt Create Sadd Ecmnopiannaasiri ain aa AA AA 401 SC HVAC
528. tem Manager page 400 2 Set Current System From HVAC Part SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set Current System From HVAC Part page 400 CA Set System of HVAC Part SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set System page 401 A HVAC Drawing Options See SC HVAC gt HVAC Drawing Options page 410 On The Fly Mode See SC HVAC gt On The Fly Mode page 410 Sr OTF Default Data See SC HVAC gt HVAC OTF Default Data page 410 gt Get OTF Data See SC HVAC gt Get HVAC OTF Default Data from Part page 410 Distributed Systems Utilities Toolbar Puc 2 Connect Parts See SC HVAC gt Connect page 407 z Disconnect Parts See SC HVAC gt Disconnect page 407 cet F Poo ee Extract Center Line See SC HVAC gt Utilities gt Extract Center Line page 403 Anchor Part See SC HVAC gt Anchor Part page 408 5 Unanchor Part See SC HVAC gt Unanchor Part page 408 Lock Part See SC HVAC gt Lock Part page 408 Unlock Part See SC HVAC gt Unlock Part page 409 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference Appendix B HVAC Command Reference See SC HVAC gt Toggle Transform Mode page 409 E Toggle Constrain Enforcement See SC HVAC gt Toggle Constrain Enforcement page 409 Pi Set No Spool See SC HVAC gt Spools gt Set No Spool page 399 7 l Remove No Spool See SC HVAC gt Spools gt Remove No Spool page 399 Add Spool break
529. ter you create a product hierarchy drawing the new parts will not appear in the drawing unless you update it Rename a Product Hierarchy Drawing To rename a product hierarchy drawing 1 In Navigator select the Product Hierarchy page 2 Right click the product hierarchy drawing and choose Rename 3 Enter a new name and press Enter Delete a Product Hierarchy Drawing To delete a product hierarchy drawing 1 In Navigator select the Product Hierarchy page 66 Library Setup 2 Right click the product hierarchy drawing and choose Delete Set Up Assembly Levels To set up assembly levels Note You may want to create a product hierarchy drawing before setting up assembly levels see Create a Product Hierarchy Drawing page 64 The product hierarchy drawing will help you see the parts as you develop a product hierarchy You can make a specific assembly visible and check that all required parts are in that build stage or change the parts involved in a build stage by dragging them to another build stage If you open an old product hierarchy drawing any parts that have been created after the drawing was created or updated do not appear in the drawing 1 Do either of the following e Within a product hierarchy drawing choose ShipConstructor gt Product Hierarchy page 341 e Within any drawing click on the Assembly Toolbar The Product Hierarchy palette appears Tools Options Descriptionl fel F PROJECT i F uo wM
530. terials that become effective in the event that the Licensee has failed to comply with its payment obligations hereunder and as set out in SSI Invoices 24 Effect_ of Termination Upon termination of this Agreement Licensee shall immediately cease using the Licensed Materials and within 14 days of termination return all Hardware Keys to SSI 25 CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES IN NO EVENT SHALL SSI BE LIABLE FOR ANY LOSS OF DATA OR PROFITS ECONOMIC LOSS OR SPECIAL INDIRECT INCIDENTAL CONSEQUENTIAL OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES WITH RESPECT TO THIS AGREEMENT OR THE LICENSED MATERIALS HOWEVER CAUSED EVEN IF SSI HAD OR SHOULD HAVE HAD ANY KNOWLEDGE OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES 26 DAMAGES LIMITATION THE MAXIMUM LIABILITY OF SSI FOR ALL CLAIMS AND DAMAGES OF ANY KIND WHETHER FOR FUNDAMENTAL BREACH OR ANY OTHER CAUSE UNDER THIS AGREEMENT SHALL BE LIMITED IN THE AGGREGATE TO THE TOTAL OF ALL FEES PAID BY LICENSEE 27 LIMITATION OF NON APPLICABILITY IN SOME JURISDICTIONS THE EXCLUSION OR LIMITATION OF WARRANTIES OR LIABILITY MAY NOT BE APPLICABLE AND IN SUCH JURISDICTIONS SSI HEREBY LIMITS ITS LIABILITY TO THE FULLEST EXTENT PERMITTED BY LAW 363338 2013 07 28 Applicable Law This Agreement shall be subject to and construed in accordance with the laws of the Province of British Columbia Canada excluding its conflict of laws rules and the application of the UN Convention on Contracts for the International Sale of Goods 29 References SSI sha
531. tessede ratattnanteats od uate ara e a e a a vdveldlene 56 HI CEI ING annaa anaa aa a siiiensta tis a A A oni daca aaa aMaaea mia alata anes 57 EO AGING PAVE VIEWS seanina enn iena ea T spa eat anodes Sein aie Baia Bag Ba eBid eB aleaiD 57 EXPONE dascencatn casa sasn set ease tacdsadatued ned iued can ANE AE EAE E E E E TA 57 Export a ShipConstructor Drawing to an AutoCAD only DraWinnd sessssssesserssssssssssrssesssersersaeseserseesateeserseesasensensateass 57 Export ShipConstructor Drawings to NavisWorks DrawindS ssssssssssssssssserssssssssersesessrsrsaeseserseesatsesersansatensensateass 58 UNITS o UDan TE N NI T NA E E NE EN R 59 EEEIEE NS A A A A A A E AA E A A N AAA A A A cat A teeteats 59 pelete UNS omana aa a A A 60 Product AIGA NIOS arara Svseuurdavayustvuraen tiutisuttavautiiurenstutivutieanttindtd 60 Setting UP M ltiple Prod ct Hierarchies annttndntasnidwnnktnhiniinhnidanntinhintasanidshnhinhintiintdahnhd 61 CODY POGUE Fl Slat CIN eas meta cucu tals caawestn vacate aaucleyencutels eacesin aaautses eacuaseytaauceesiacutane mute ennte 62 Export a Product Hierarchy to another ShipConstructOr Project ccssccssssessssessssssssscsssecsseeseseessseesesersesersasersasersasereass 63 Import a Product Hierarchy from another ShipConstructOr Project ccccessesesssccssssssssscssssssseessseeseseeseseesasersasersasereass 63 SetUp Prod ctHierarchy TF WNO Sessan e delle Da an aatsel vinlcnina a a 64 Contents Contents SEC UO
532. the Edit EndTreatment Types window To create an end treatment Open the End Treatments window See End Treatments page 94 Select an end treatment style Bar Plain or Slip on row for the new end treatment or select an end treatment of that style in the main list Click New End Treat to create a new end treatment Note The new end treatment appears in blue until you click Apply Changes or Done Set the properties for the new end treatment Types The end treatment types Material The type of material that this end treatment is made from Description A description of the end treatment Thickness Applies only to the Bar type The thickness of the end treatment Height Applies only to the Bar type The height of the end treatment Units Applies only to the Bar and Slip on types Units for the end treatment The choices are imperial or metric Length Applies only to the Slip on type The length of the slip on Outset Applies only to the Slip on type The amount that the slip on is outset female or inset male Note The Outset value can only be a positive value If a male slip on is needed specify a positive number for the Outset property and specify the Male Female property to Male Male Female Applies only to the slip on type The type of slip on HVAC Library Setup Thickness ra Height Outset Length From left to right Slip on Male and Bar 5 Click Apply Change
533. the General properties see Create a Stock page 103 Elbow Specific Elbow Type The type of elbow either Mitered or Rounded Angle The angle between the two ends of the elbow Throat Radius The radius of the curve from the inside of the elbow 107 HVAC Library Setup 108 Note In the case of a reducing elbow where one end profile is smaller than the other the throat radius is defined as the smallest measurement that is the end with the larger profile Segments The number of segments for a mitered elbow segments Throat Radius Angle Mitered elbow 90 degree angle 5 segments circle profile End 1 End 2 Profile The profile of each end of the duct See Create a Stock page 103 for a description of the profile properties End Treatment The treatment that is applied to the end of the duct See End Treatments page 94 Throat Length Additional length applied to the end of the duct In ShipConstructor2005 this property was known as additional end length Elbow Offset End 2 only The magnitude of the offset Positive and negative offsets are allowed Transitions There are five basic types of transitions 1 Transition A regular transition Both ends have different profiles Can have a horizontal and a vertical offset 2 3 4 5 HVAC Library Setup Reducer A transition where the edges of both ends are on the same plane Both ends have different profiles _ ooo Curved Re
534. the SCPIPEEXPORTBENDINGDATA command Appendix E Distributed Systems Production Reference The select pipes window is presented where you can choose pipes based on drawing system and assembly Choose the output type raw or formatted and also choose the file location The file name is automatically generated and a time date stamp is appended to the name Salect pipes Availabe sures Selecced soLrces TIVirniy2 S yal Aves ullis rawings Pe SLaLit 1 158 Skakic J171 iF Ds static 14 22 3 Pipe Static 1507 E lee ven fling and sourding pipes 5tatic 15 1 a E EA zs5_5upoer system Itatic 19 0 E S22 Fue ul fling Lra ter amp over lew syssla aie R 2 La Fg E 974 Drk and waste cil e We 542_Fresh cooling waker Main Engines static 41 4 NEP 542 Freshwater coolirg 514 Static 2581 EA 542 Freshwater coolirg svxilaties Shatic 2583 IEP SCO Exhaust system Ilali 2565 _ habir SR EP bls Colkec water ae a2 aParir Fi tput Mupu fls AA ProerkA s SI Tubaria leit SPa endings IPFRE RG Aaa a 4 25 2111 3_4 5R Ph hil Opli IES Funmalfile CosFrogii F les55 hpo salu S hip Eurl ada ZIJIA LS chanmas Ou pul P ings appr gS Cpe Ber wirigl ala OF Cencel Once you are satisfied with the selected pipes the file name and the output type choose OK and the XML file will be generated Bend Information and Location Tables The i
535. the color of the parts that are unaffected by the update of the drawing 463 Appendix Production Command Reference Show Removed Parts If you do want to see parts that are being removed from this drawing This is useful if you have removed an entire source and do need to know exactly what is being removed Show Preview Checked Parts If you do want to see parts that you deleted intentionally from this drawing When enabled all the parts with their checkboxes checked with appear in the drawing using the User Deleted color Unchecking will hide all checked parts Refresh Preview If the list of checked parts has changed and you want to preview any parts added to that list Drawing Revisions Palette Production tab gt BOM panel Drawing Revisions Palette SCPRODREWIEW Permissions None License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Show Out of Date Parts page 254 Shows the Production Drawing Revisions Palette for the current drawing The information is stored in the drawing 464 Appendix Production Command Reference 906 4050 504303 Olle acon usw peson etal pe Safer fter text Enter fiter fext Enter filter text Enter filter text 12 91 9999 2 F Updated Drawing James kirok 63 parts 411 2013 9 57 19 Pl 1 Created Drawing zach quinto 63 parts 4112013 9 52 20 PI Enter fieren enter fiter tent enter iterfext ere id Penetration Penetration a FEM 004 Remov
536. the desired fitting you want to insert from the SC HVAC menu The fitting appears at the cursor and information about it is shown on the command line If end mode is active switch to intersection mode see step 2 of End Mode page 163 otherwise continue with Step 3 You are prompted to pick the location of the intersection point or choose an option Please pick the first point OE the vend axis 3 or Select stock cOmmects TOs Next end lt 1 gt neXt point lt 1 gt End mode Insulation If desired choose one of the available options see General Options page 168 for options not listed here e Next end Switches which end of the fitting will be aligned to the axis formed by the first two points you will choose in steps 4 and 6 e Next point Switches which intersection point of the fitting you want to place in step 4 You may not see this option if a fitting has only one intersection point e g a non offset elbow or basic tee e End mode Switches the routing interface to end mode See End Mode page 163 Click anywhere in the model except a free end to specify a location for the current intersection point You are prompted to pick a second point defining the axis to which the current end of the fitting will be aligned or to choose an option Please pick the second point of the end axis 3 or orienting end lt 1 gt plaNE XROtTate YROTEaTE ZRotate SNap lt on gt If desired choose one of the available options see
537. the option to automatically route the duct along the path of that polyline If you choose No continue from Step 4 If you choose Yes the bent duct is routed along the polyline if for any reason the duct cannot be routed exactly along the polyline an explanation will be printed to the AutoCAD console The end of the duct that you are routing by is placed at the end of the polyline closest to the snap point you selected If the duct is successfully routed you are done routing the duct and are given the option to delete the polyline You are prompted to pick the second point or choose an option Please pick point or Forward Aft Port Starboard Up Down plaNE XRotate YRotate ZRotate SNap lt on gt See General Options page 168 for explanation of the available options Note If you created a connection to another duct by clicking on a free end or by creating a saddle connection several of the options shown above do not apply for example the direction options and will not be available Click anywhere in the model to select the second point of the duct If you connected the duct in step 3 any point you pick including OSNAPs is projected onto the axis of the end you connected to To choose a point along the axis of an existing end click the existing end Your next input point will be restricted to the axis The NavAid appears at the selected point and the first duct bend appears To create a bend in the duct repeat Steps 4 and 5 f
538. the same layer 55 Library Setup Note When you hide an object ShipConstructor does not move it to a hidden layer Instead ShipConstructor simply does not display the object To hide objects 1 Select the objects to hide 2 Choose SC Utilities gt Hide Objects page 352 To show objects 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Unhide Objects page 353 ShipConstructor shows the objects one at a time that you most recently hid If you choose SC Utilities gt Unhide Objects page 353 again ShipConstructor will continue showing objects in the reverse order that you hid them To show all objects 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Unhide All Objects page 353 Display Objects in Wireframe Hidden Line or Shaded Mode You can control whether objects in your drawing are displayed in wireframe hidden line or shaded mode To display objects in wireframe hidden line or shaded mode 1 Choose the mode you want from View gt Visual Styles Display Information for an Object within an MLinked Drawing You can list information on an object within a model linked mlinked drawing providing more information for the designer during modeling checking or reviewing of a particular area in the 3D product model To display information for an object within an mlinked drawing 1 Choose SC Utilities gt List Item within Block Xref page 369 2 Select the object within your drawing that you want to see information about The information appears within the com
539. ting speed Computer calculations such as interference checking take longer for solids containing many vertices e File size ACIS solids containing many vertices use enormous amounts of disk space e NC machine limitations Many cutting machines will move erratically or start and stop at each polyline segment if there are too many vertices spaced closely together 71 Library Setup 78 Two identical frame sections The upper frame section has many vertices tolerance 1 mm The lower frame section has fewer vertices tolerance 3 mm To reduce the number of vertices on a polyline 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Remove Vertices Below Tolerance page 357 2 Select the polyline you want to reduce 3 Press Enter Neo fit arces Tolerance lt 0 05 2 4 To change the fit arcs option type N for no fit arcs or F for fit arcs and press Enter Enter a tolerance value Tip In general a 0 1 mm 1 32 tolerance is a good compromise between speed and accuracy 6 Press Enter Convert an Ellipse or Spline to a Polyline NC machines do not understand ellipses or splines You must convert them to polylines To convert an ellipse or spline to a polyline 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Convert Ellipse Spline to Polyline page 358 The default tolerance appears in the command line 2 To change the tolerance type T and press Enter Then type the tolerance and press Enter A good tolerance value is about 0 1 mm 1 32 Select the el
540. tion The behavior of insertion is dependent on the cursor position with the field text If the position is within a field then the field will be replaced by the new one If the cursor is not within a field then the field is inserted at the cursor position Select Object Allows selection of other objects for field selection This does not replace the object references currently inserted within the fields rather it updates the field list This allows for the creation of MText blocks that reference multiple objects Placing Field Labels To Place a Part Property Label 1 Choose SC Utilities gt Property Labels gt Property Label 2 Select the property that you wish to insert from the property list Double click or use the right arrow button to insert the property into the field text box The field is shown in raw field form allowing the experienced user to edit the details directly Add any additional text as required to the label text and then click the OK button once complete Select the leader origin Select the leader tail position The MText will be attached once command is completed Note Step 4 can be skipped if the ShipConstructor variable ScSet SingleClickFieldLabel Issetto lt 1 gt When the option is toggled on then the first leader point is the item selection point When labeling in Model Space the behavior may not be as desired the UCS projected selection point when labels are placed in Model Space Copying Field Labels F
541. tion icon into a production drawing The orientation icon can be 3D for iso drawings or 2D for 2D drawings The style of the icon is not changeable after it is inserted t A Orientation Icon General Options 2000 Axis Size mm 200 Axcis label Size rr Create Arrows Show in Current viewport Only 466 Appendix Production Command Reference Axis Size The size of the icon in project units Axis Label Size The size of the direction text Create Arrows Decides if there are arrows at the end of the axis lines Type 3D 2D PURT FWI 3D 2D Show in current viewport only If checked will place the icon on a layer that is only visible in the current viewport CG Point BUONE amp Production tab gt Production Utilities CG Point Command SCINSERTCG Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Procedure The command inserts a SConCGPoint object at a center of gravity CG position of the current assembly The SConCGPoint is exactly like an AutoCAD point object except you cannot move it The command also changes the current Point style to P 34 You can change the style of the CG point by using the point style options The orientation of the point is based on the orientation of the current UCS If a SConCGPoint already exists in drawing it will be moved to the correct CG position Note Running Update Drawing page 462 will move the SConCGPoint to the updated CG position
542. tions are Beginning or End e Offset The number of characters to skip from the offset before including the number of characters e Use As Name Seed Indicates whether or not to use this element when determining the next autonumber choice This will be explained in more detail below Library Setup Element Details value Source System Characters Auto Start Point Beginning Offset T Use as Mame Seed Ves TreeLevel Branch Auto Incrementing numbers are used to facilitate the creation of unique names The properties of an auto incrementing number are the following e Number of digits A number representing the minimum number of digits used to display the auto number Can be set to Auto to automatically use as many digits as the number consists of For example if the generated number is 56 and the number of digits is set to 4 the auto number would display as 0056 If the number of digits was set to Auto the number would display as 56 e Start Value The auto number of the first generated name e Increment The incremental value to add to each autonumber to calculate the next number For example an increment of 1 would create 6 7 8 9 and an increment of 3 would create 6 9 12 15 e Recycle Numbers A yes or no value If you set the value to yes then any entities that are renamed or deleted will have their name go back into a pool to be re used again For example if you have recycling enabled and you create plate p
543. to begin creating the saddle and then press Enter You are prompted to select the header part on which the saddle end will be created Please select a Header part 3 Click on an existing header part on which the saddle will be created You are prompted to pick a point on the header part This point is the intersection between the header part s centerline and the connecting end axis of the branch part or closest point between those two lines in the case that offsets are applied in later steps Pick closest point on center line s or Point om OCS Z axis Optionally enter one of the keywords e Point on OCS z axis To specify a point relative to an object coordinate system on the header part type O for OCS and press Enter The object coordinate systems on the header part are displayed with their z axis tangent to the part s centerline Click the desired object coordinate system You are prompted to enter a z value in the selected object coordinate system a positive or negative value is valid HVAC Modeling F unselected OCS X origin selected OCS origin 2 object coordinate systems and the z axis of the selected one on which a point is specified Or click on an end e Align to an existing free end To set the saddle s location direction and orientation to line up with those of an existing part s end click on the end If it is not possible to create the saddle such that it is aligned with the existing end an
544. to save the changes To define default parts data from existing part 1 From the SC HVAC menu select Get HVAC OTF Default Data from Part OR 1 Open up the Default data dialog and click pick from part OR From the HVAC toolbar select Get OTF Data eo 2 Select an existing HVAC part 157 HVAC Modeling Insert Ducts You create an HVAC model by inserting ducts into HVAC drawings There are two types of ducts that you can insert into your model Catalog ducts or stock ducts are stock items that you purchase from a supplier On the Fly ducts are custom items that are created as needed You define the properties of stock ducts before inserting them into your model You define the properties of On the Fly ducts as you insert them into your model Routing a duct typically involves selecting a stock and then providing geometric input that determines where the duct is located and how it is oriented You will provide geometric input by clicking points in the model and using the command line options Information about the current stock that you are routing will appear on the command line Selecting an HVAC Part to Insert non OTF Mode Before laying down any duct you must first select which duct to use By clicking on the type of part you want the Select Stock window will appear letting you select a stock of that type from the stocks you made in the HVAC Stocks page 102 Catalog To select a stock to insert 1 From the SC H
545. toCAD Plot Scale that can be set in the Page Setup dialog affects the overall scale of the entire layout view Getting Started with Production E Flot Layouti 7 Learn about Plotting Page setup Plot style table pen assignments Mame lt None gt acad cth m Printer plotter Shaded viewport options Mame E O Ww G To PDF pes Properties Legacy hidden Plotter CW S To POF PDF ePlot by Autodesk 79 HM Where File Description Plot options Plot to file Plot in background Plot object lineweights Paper size Number of copies e Plot transparency ANSI d6 11 00 x 17 00 Inch l l E expand Bi nches W Plot with plot styles Plot area Plot scale V Plot paperspace last what to plat E Fit to paper Hide paperspace objects Window window a Plot stamp on Save changes to layout Plot offset forigin set to printable area mm E v 0 00 mm L Center the plot unit Portrait E Landscape y 00 Scale lineweights Plot upside down toni to ara Sane Ge Dimension styles have their own scaling that affect the text size 219 Getting Started with Production _ 7 amp Modify Dimension Ste LABELS Lines Symbols and Arrows Text rE Primary Units Akemate Lit Tolerances Fit ophons li there ient enough oom to place both tes
546. tocks page 102 2 Select the stocks you want to assign to a spec 3 Click Edit Spec Assign to open the Edit Spec Assignments window EH Edit Spec Assignments Eg Engine Cooling _ Fresh Air 4 Check the check boxes for the specs to which you want the stocks to belong 5 Click OK to close the Edit Spec Assignments window 144 HVAC Library Setup Import Specs You can import specs from another project or from an XML file exported from another project To import specs Open the Edit HVAC Specs window Click Import to open a File Browser Select a project file PRO or XML file XML Click Open to open the Import HVAC Specs window Check the import check boxes of all the HVAC specs you want to import Click OK oy a pe Ee a Export Specs You can export specs to an XML file for example to import into another project or to edit using other software To export specs 1 Open the Edit HVAC Specs window 2 Check the Export check boxes for the specs to export 3 Click Export XML to open a File Browser 4 Enter a name for the XML file 5 Click Save Connections A connection is a definition of how two end treatments from two different stocks can connect together Connections let you control the types of connections possible between stocks making it faster for modelers to connect ducts and fittings and modify connected ducts or fittings with fewer errors When setting up connections you first define conn
547. tribute To export a user defined attribute 6 Open the User Defined Attributes window See HVAC User Defined Attributes page 100 7 Click Import UDAs button 8 Browse to the selected xml or pro file 9 Click OK Stocks An HVAC stock is a standard duct or fitting that you are able to purchase and that you want to use in your project To open the HVAC stock window 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose HVAC gt Stock Catalog to open the HVAC Catalog Stock Editor 3 Click the HVAC Stocks tab 7 HVAC Catalog Stock Editor End Treatments HVAC Stocks Connections Stock Name Description Sheetstock Insulation Finishes Weight Catalog p Duct Both Stock Name Description Sheetstock Insulation Finishes Weight Catalog Sp Catalog Functi Z p Elbow Catalog Assign Stock Name Description Sheetstock Insulation Finishes Weight Catalog SE at Transition Transition Stock Name Description Sheetstock Insulation Finishes Weight Catalog Q Reducer Stock Name Description Sheetstock Insulation Finishes Weight Catalog Assign To Spec g Curved Reducer E Offset wf Curved Offset ye Branch Fitting Tees Square Tee Stock Name Description Sheetstock Insulation Finishes Weight Catalog amp Square Radial Tee Stock Name Description Sheetstock Insulation Finishes Weight Catalog P Tee P Reducing Tee OP Two Segment Tee F Double Tee F Double Reducing Tee FF Double Two Segment
548. tructure drawing information Done Checking SCon Structure drawing information Checking UCSes Done Checking UCSes Checking Drawing layers Done Checking Drawing layers Checking construction lines 87 Checks Note This log file can be rather long Any errors and warnings can be easily found by searching using Notepad s Edit gt Find for either Error or Warning Update Model and System Drawings You can use the Update Model and System Drawings command to recreate drawings in your project or update them if they are out of date using information from the database This is especially useful if you do not have the permissions required to edit or create drawings since otherwise the drawing would have to update itself every time it is opened To update model and or system drawings 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Update Model and System Drawings page 341 2 The Select Drawings to Update window appears select Drawings ta Update co E fee Select Drawings Template Drawings Drawings Drawing Mame Enter Fifer Text Pipe VP Metric pp Tutorial E fs Tutoria HVAC HVAC LWP MEtric m H iis Structure Structure Ternplate vE U01_ExLay 7 uo1_FR s JEJ uo1_FRe 6 7 u01 _FR67 7 u01 _FR 8 7 J uci _FR69 FILE U01 _FR 70 J 001 _FR71 JE U01 _FR72 7 E 001 _FR72 170 7 001 _FR73 7 WL FR 7 voi _Fr7s 7 U01 _FRr6 7 U01 _FR77 wor_FRs 7 E 001 _FR79 V E 001 _FR80 TIE 001
549. ts this option you will be prompted to select existing ends in your model The part s geometric properties and location will automatically be set such that the part fits appropriately between the chosen ends If the part cannot be appropriate modified a description of the problem will be displayed in the command line output An example of when Autofit can be useful is the case of routing of a transition to connect two existing HVAC parts the necessary profiles offsets and length of the transition are computed automatically Options available for straights bents transitions offsets and elbows e MakeRectangular Makes both ends rectangular e MakeRectangular2 Makes the end opposite to the one you are placing rectangular e Width Sets the width of both ends e Width2 Sets the width of the end opposite to the one you are placing e Height Sets the height of both ends e Height2 Sets the height of the end opposite to the one you are placing e CornerRadius Sets the corner radius of both ends e CornerRadius2 Sets the corner radius of the end opposite to the one you are placing e MakeRound Makes both ends round e MakeRound2 Makes the end opposite to the one you are placing round 435 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference e Diameter Sets the diameter of both ends e Diameter2 Sets the diameter of the end opposite to the one you are placing Options available for transitions offsets and elbows e Throats
550. ttach rename or delete the selected weld management drawing or create a new weld management drawing Open New Rename Delete Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Reattach New Rename Delete Reattach Permissions Weld Management gt Weld Edit Reattaches an existing drawing to a registered weld management drawing that has its drawing file missing The selected drawing is checked to ensure it is a weld management drawing Rename Permissions Weld Management gt Weld Edit Renames the selected weld management drawing Delete Permissions Weld Management gt Weld Edit Deletes the selected weld management drawing Assembly Page The Assembly page lets you create open and modify assembly drawings See Structure manual ShipConstructor Navigator Tutorial UDI Drawing Last Modified Date Preview EAG Assembly 17187 2012 5 49 25 PM 4 22 2013 12 00 25 PM Be HVAC Spool i E Support Construction ie Equipment Greate Show Dut of Date Update Keymap Open Permissions Structure gt Assembly Drawings Edit Opens the selected assembly drawing 327 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Create Permissions Structure gt Assembly Drawings Edit Creates a new assembly drawing Update Keymap Creates or updates the drawing KEYMAP that contains the HullTrace construction lines for the current unit The keymap drawing is referenced in assembly
551. tted using the region settings on the computer lt NEST ISSUE DATE gt Date when the nest was issued The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt NEST ISSUE TIME gt Time when the nest was issued The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt NEST ISSUE USER gt The user who issued the nest lt NEST LENGTH gt Length of the nest lt NEST LIKE MIRROR gt The LIKE alias if a single nest or the LIKE MIRROR alias if a Like Mirror nest lt NEST NCCODE GENERATE DATE gt Date when the nest s NCCode was generated The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt NEST NCCODE GENERATE TIME gt Time when the nest s NCCode was generated The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt NEST NCCODE GENERATE USER gt The user who created the nest s NCCode lt NEST NCCUT DATE gt Date when the nest was cut The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer lt NEST NCCUT TIME gt Time when the nest was cut The value is formatted using the region settings on the computer 491 Appendix Production Command Reference lt NEST REMNANT NAME gt Name of the remnant this nest was created from lt NEST REMNANT WEIGHT gt Weight of all remnants created from this nest lt NEST SCRAP UTILIZATION gt Percentage of the area that is not parts over the area of the item used to create the nest lt NEST SCRAP WEIGHT gt Remaining weight after
552. tyle click the Delete Global Dimension Style button The list of available styles will be displayed select the style to delete and click the Delete Global Dimension Style button Click OK to confirm the deletion of the style To select the planes closest to the selected point click the Select Closest Planes button The planes closest to the point will be selected and all other previously selected ones will be unselected The UCS s called also be saved as datum planes These datum planes are used to store a UCS in each direction so that they can be easily reloaded and used for MOC 20other global dimensions To store a UCS as a datum plane check the plane in the grid to use as datum planes right click on the grid and select Save as Datum Plane To reload the datum planes click the Select Datum Planes button Property Label gt Property Label Production tab gt Property Label panel gt Property Label Property Label gt Property Label SCOB FIELDLABEL Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 or edit model drawing if in model drawing License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Inserts a leader containing a field The fields are a list of properties from a selected part Property Label gt Copy Field Label Production tab gt Property Label panel gt Copy Field Label Property Label gt Copy Field Label SCFIELDLABELCOPY Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission
553. uble Lines Solid Dis play End Numbers Mode Scaled Size Park Bend Direction Centerline Ends Connections End Direction Free End Arrows 2 Change the settings and click OK Set Up Labeling Settings Getting Started with Production Use Global Option Y alue Mo show SMO Show Show show Hide Hide show Always show Show Hide show In some cases using the default label settings for the project may need to be overridden Settings can be stored in the drawing to override the project setting To set up label on visible edge 1 Choose Label gt Label on Visible Edge On Off page 480 Labels point to visible edges Yes No Project Setting gt s 2 Type Yes If the project setting was set to Yes then no need to overwrite it 233 Getting Started with Production 234 To reset label settings to use the project settings 1 Choose Label gt Label Reset Automatic Settings page 482 This command will reset all label settings back to Project Settings continue Yes No lt No gt 2 Type Yes Set Up Non ShipConstructor Settings To have all the settings preconfigured before anyone generates a production drawing maintains standards and speeds up the process AutoCAD settings like text styles dimension styles plot settings VIEWRES LTSCALE object snaps layers linetypes dimensions detail and symbol block
554. uctor Start ShipConstructor To start ShipConstructor 1 Do either of the following e From the Windows Start button choose Start gt All Programs gt ShipConstructor 2014 gt ShipConstructor 2014 e On the Windows Desktop double click the ShipConstructor shortcut icon Do not use the AutoCAD shortcut Make sure you see the ShipConstructor and SC Utilities menu in the menu bar If not contact your system administrator or see the Installation Guide for troubleshooting information Check Your System Text Size ShipConstructor s windows are designed for the Smaller 100 default text size in Windows 7 If you are using the Medium 125 or Larger 150 text size in Windows 7 some ShipConstructor windows will not display properly To check your system font 1 Choose SC Utilities gt 3D Viewpoint page 349 to open the Select View window If you are using the small system font the circles are aligned with the 3D grid points Getting Started Description PLAN LOOKING DOW Point Smaller 100 text size If you are using the medium or large text size the circles are misaligned with the grid Getting Started Description PLAN LOOKING DOWN Paint 0 0 1 Medium 125 text size To set your system font in Windows 7 1 Right click on your Windows Desktop and choose Personalize then Display or from the Windows Start menu choose Start gt Control Panel to open the Control Panel then double click the
555. uctor Menu ShipConstructor gt Navigator ShipConstructor tab gt Navigation panel gt Navigator ShipConstructor gt Navigator SCNAVIGATE Permissions None License Opens the Navigator letting you create and open drawings and perform other drawing elated functions Note You must use Navigator to create open or move drawings so that ShipConstructor can keep track of them Do not use Windows Explorer or ShipConstructor will not be able to properly associate the drawings with the project 311 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands Navigator Last Modified Date Preview ae Project 4 2201 3 2 51 26 PM Preview Distribute 4 4 2 2013 2 52 18 PH z 4 27 2013 25225 PM F tan 4 2 20 9 2 52 34 PM ip Support Bi 4 2201 3 2 52 33 PM Ye Pipe Spool T 8 UO1_FRES 272013 2 52 42 PH Be HVAC S pool o oB eee sar Fj Support Construction 3 a Equipment 52 Electrical am u PaT 25215 PM Ea Product Hierarchy r E Interference af u FRF 4 2 2013 2 53 23 PM pip Veld Management 0 ShioConstuctor 4 23 2013 4 24 16 PM Rea i Assembly A Uo1_FR 6 4 2 7201 3 2 53 25 PM nih Composite ile UO1_FR 4 2 2013 2 53 40 FM i approval ea UO1_FR 8 4 9 9013 2 53 47 Ph Fag Export lB UFRS 4 2 2013 2 53 49 PM f Hull lJ Un FRSO p13 2 54 00 Ph a Allocation File Only Drawing B13 2 54 09 PM utpu Je z Bd Nest 4 2 7201 3 2 54 22 PM Profile Plot i 47272013 253 47 PM E Templates Si at LngEhd i Drawing L
556. ucts page 190 Disconnects two or more ducts This command leaves the ducts at their current locations but removes the logical connection between the ducts SC HVAC gt Break Duct at point None SC HVAC gt Break Duct at point Toolbar Utilities gt Z Command SCBAP Permissions None Procedure Break a Duct page 190 Splits a part into two at the point specified 407 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Toggle Close HVAC end Q HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Toggle Close HVAC end Toolbar HVAC gt a Command SCHVACTOGGLECloseEnd Permissions None SC HVAC gt Anchor Part HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Anchor Part Toolbar Distributed Systems Utilities gt Command SCANCHOR Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Anchor a Duct page 179 Anchors a part SC HVAC gt Unanchor Part HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Unanchor Part Toolbar Distributed Systems Utilities gt Command SCUNANCHOR Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Unanchor a Duct page 180 Unanchors a part SC HVAC gt Lock Part HVAC Ribbon Tab gt HVAC Modeling Utilities Panel SC HVAC gt Lock Part Toolbar Distrubuted Systems Utilities gt E Command SCLOCK Permissions HVAC gt Modeling gt Modeling Procedure Lock a Duct page 180 Locks a part 408
557. uipment list gt Insert PEL Item Toolbar Equipment Command SCINSPELEQUIPMENT Permissions Equipment gt Project Equipment List gt Insert Project Equipment List items into Model Procedure See the Equipment Manual for details Inserts a PEL item into a model drawing 397 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Associate Equipment with PEL Item I Multi Discipline Ribbon Tab gt Equipment Panel SC HVAC gt Project Equipment list gt Associate Equipment with PEL Item Toolbar Equipment 5 Command SCEQUIPPELASSOCIATE Permissions Equipment gt Project Equipment List gt Insert Project Equipment List items into Model Procedure See the Equipment Manual for details Associates an Equipment part with a PEL item SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Dissociate Equipment from PEL Item a i Multi Discipline Ribbon Tab gt Equipment Panel SC HVAC gt Project Equipment list gt Dissociate Equipment with PEL Item Toolbar Equipment gt at Command SCEQUIPPELDISSOCIATE Permissions Equipment gt Project Equipment List gt Insert Project Equipment List items into Model Procedure See the Equipment Manual for details Dissociates an Equipment part with a PEL item SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Create PEL All Equipment Multi Discipline Ribbon Tab gt Equipment Panel SC HVAC gt Project Equipment list gt Create PEL All Equipment Toolbar Equipment gt
558. unebyttnnbwesosbucind nnlncliteedawssrsnehadhitvaebutinionturnankacsiomeinesietts 394 SC HVAC gt Crosses gt Double 2 Segment CrosSS cccssssssscsssecsssessssesessecssesssseesssesseseseeseseeseseesaseesassesasersasesasesanansass 394 no OW a AV Ge WyVES SNYE Ane Rene RE ke Nr ee ee ee ee eee 394 SC AVAC gt WyesS gt RECE WC vecsbiccssces tess cet vera bebe ceeed R EER E becca ads uc aan EER E AEN tense bara ARENE Nai 395 SC HVAC Wes Rect Radial Wye cansson o A 395 SC HVAC gt Transition Transito N iara EAN AEE NA AE IA EA EEEN a 395 SC AVAG gt Iahston REQUCE srmn CO AAAA AANER 395 SC HVAC Transition gt Curved REGQUCEN iainko anian aiina ieaie iania aaia eaaa T aAa Eaa E aTa aR 396 SC HVAC gt Transition gt Ofset A A AA AA 396 SC HVAC Transtion CUE ONSE Taoniinae AAAA AAAA A 396 SC HVAC gt Equipment gt Msent Eg ipMe N wissiet iit t i 396 SC HVAC gt Equipment gt Equipment Drawing Options ccscssssssssrssssssssrssrsssessrsersesseserseesassesersaeseseesersansasensensatees 397 SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Project Equipment LiSt ccesessssessssssssserssrsesseserseeseseesersaeseseesersatsasersensatees 397 SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Create PEL Item cccesesssssssssrsssssssrssrsssessrssesasseserseesessesersaesessesersansesersensasees 397 SC HVAC gt Project Equipment List gt Insert PEL iter csssssssssssssrssrsssssssrserssssesersoesasseserseesessesersansessesersansesensensa
559. unnests any parts within them Issue Selected Nests Marks the selected profile nests as issued indicating that it is available for production to cut Un issue Selected Nests Removes the selected profile nests issued status Cut Selected Nests Marks the selected profile nests as cut indicating that the physical plates have been cut Un cut Selected Nests Removes the selected profile nests cut status Check All Visible Nests Checks all nests listed under Nests to see if any parts have been changed that the parts still fit on the nests and their remnants and if the stock of any of the parts has been changed If any part properties have changed ShipConstructor displays a text file containing a list of the changes Show Nests Filters the Nests list to display Unlssued nests Issued nests and Cut nests ShipConstructor gt Revisions ShipConstructor tab gt Manage panel ShipConstructor gt Revisions Command SCREVISIONS Permissions None Procedure See below oJ Project Revisions Category aE 3 Al Revisions HE BA Drawings aW 3 Electrical E Equipment H C Genera nel gA i lul Z V A Hvar Revision Type E Fj All Types W approval Hemoved Wf Approved Fram F 2013 01 23 00 00 00 Te 2013 04 23 00 00 00 Date Sort Order Descending Ascending Object User Name Rows Per Page 32000 Search This window queries revisions in the current project Each revision has t
560. uns already exist i Choose the desired fitting you want to insert from the SC HVAC menu The fitting appears at the cursor and information about it is shown on the command line If end mode is active switch to intersection mode see step 2 of End Mode page 163 otherwise continue with Step 3 You are prompted to pick the first point or choose an option from the Intersection Mode line Please priek tche first point OE the end axis s or Select stTOCk COnnects lo Next end lt l1 gt neXt point lt 1 gt End mode Insulation If desired choose one of the available options see General Options page 168 for options not listed here e Next end Switches which end of the fitting will be aligned to the axis of the end you will select in step 4 e Next point You will be picking an existing end in step 4 and not directly placing an intersection point this option is not relevant to this routing method e End mode Switches the routing interface to end mode see End Mode page 163 Click any free end in the model to indicate the end axis you want to place the fitting on The fitting is now restricted such that its end is aligned with the end you clicked on You are prompted to pick a point indicating how far along the axis chosen in step 4 the fitting should be placed Please pick a point indicating distamce trom the existing end 3 cr Next end fer orientation lt 4 gt If more than one end is available for orientat
561. urrent Layout page 483 FE Delete All BOM Revisions from All Layouts See BOM Revisions gt Delete All BOM Revisions from All Layouts page 483 Labeling Panel Manual Label See Label gt Manual Label page 477 A Auto Label All See Label gt Label All page 478 7 Auto Label Layout See Label gt Label Current Layout page 478 i Auto Label Parts Label gt Label from Parts page 479 5 Label Viewports See Label gt Label Viewports page 478 I Label Viewports from BOM See Label gt Label Viewports from BOM page 479 Delete All Labels See Label gt Delete All Labels page 479 a Delete Labels in Current Layout See Label gt Delete Labels in Current Layout page 480 S Copy Label See Label gt Copy Label page 478 S Label on Visible Edge On Off See Label gt Label on Visible Edge On Off page 480 Curved Plates in Visible Edge Detection On Off See Label gt Curved Plates in Visible Edge Detection On Off page 481 ca Adjacent Part Edge Tolerance See Label gt Adjacent Part Edge Tolerance page 481 Corner Clearance See Label gt Corner Clearance page 481 Edge Determination Minimum Angle See Label gt Edge Determination Minimum Angle page 481 Label Reset Automatic Settings See Label gt Label Reset Automatic Settings page 482 Track Label Positions See Label gt Track Label Positions page 479 wo Create Leader Distribution Line See Crea
562. ute to a part or stock 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager page 338 to open Manager 2 Choose General gt User Defined Attributes page 307 to open the User Defined Attributes window 3 Select the attribute on the left side of the window 4 Select the part or stock on the right side of the window 5 Click the right arrow button gt The attribute is now listed beneath the part or stock Note To remove an attribute from a part or stock select the attribute on the right side of the window and click the left arrow button Set the Required state Optionally set a default value Click OK to close the User Defined Attributes window When you add a user defined attribute to stocks or a stock size the attribute will appear as an additional column in the stock list or stock size list Required attributes appear with a after their name When you add a user defined attribute to parts the attribute will appear on the User Attributes tab of the Part Properties window Required attributes will already be assigned to the part 50 Library Setup Default Values on Required User Defined Attributes Required user attributes do not have to have a default value with one notable exception If the attribute is either required for stocks and stock sizes or required not deferrable for parts and those objects already exist then a default value must be provided For example if an attribute is assigned to the plate part
563. vel 3 allows you to work on projects with a maximum of 5 850 total parts e For Pipe and DistSystemSupport the number of pipe parts per level is 400 For example Level 3 allows you to work on projects with a maximum of 1 200 pipe parts 347 Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands e For Equipment the number of parts per level is 150 For example Level 3 allows you to work on projects with a maximum of 450 equipment parts e For HVAC the number of parts per level is 400 For example Level 3 allows you to work on projects with a maximum of 1 200 HVAC parts e For Electrical the number of cable support parts per level is 100 For example Level 3 allows you to work on projects with a maximum of 300 cable support parts e For Penetrations the number of penetrations per level is 150 For example Level 3 allows you to work on projects with a maximum of 450 penetrations e P amp ID DesignValidation and PipeLink do not have levels They require a Pipe license Lic Avail The number of licenses available that is the total number of licenses minus the number of licenses currently in use Lic Total The total number of licenses Status Shows information about a license The following is a list of statuses and what they mean All the licenses for this module are used up by other users You cannot get a license until another user gives up their license or you force release that license using LicenseMonitor Old version The ver
564. ver you make changes to the project settings in Manager Revisions Displays changes made to the current project See ShipConstructor gt Revisions for details Unit Page The Unit page lets you open a unit drawing Structure Page The Structure page lets you create open and modify structure drawings planar group drawings and curved plate drawings See Structure manual Appendix A Menus Tools amp Commands shipConstructor Mavigator Tutorial UDI Drawing Last Modified Date a Preview 4 2201 3 2 54 42 PM HAE Lrgbthd i y UO CL 4 2201 3 25445 PM 47272013 25445 PM 4 4 2013 4 45 59 PM a 4 2 2013 2 55 12 PM Nar 4 2201 3 2 55 05 PM oo poo D 4 27 2013 2 55 13 PM E Support Construction o 4 2 42013 2 55 22 PM 3 cadet 4 2 2013 2 55 30 PM of Electrica 4 2 2013 2 55 30 PM a Ba Product Hierarchy 4 27201 3 2 55 33 PM oof Interference z 4 27201 3 2 54 53 PM eE Weld Management Qj Um L50000 se 4272013 2 55 01 PM pase Spa Be Deck AMT Composite g UO1HOR_KEEL 4 2701 3 2 55 03 PM Approval ea Um MD 6700 4 2 2019 2 56 01 FM Export gS UOI_STR 2540 4 2 2013 2 56 07 PM 47272013 2 56 20 PM iog Um TWD 4100 4 2720135 2 56 47 PM Ey Arbitrary ag UOI_LSEC_F7OF 2 4 2 2013 2 55 33 PM pi 4 2 2013 2 56 26 PM ap UO1_LSEC_F 4 F83 SB 47272013 2 56 41 PM FsCo Curved in CCMDOCO 479 2901 7 7 ERED Dkd 4 F Properties Open Opens the selected structure drawing New Permissions
565. vided later Required attributes are automatically assigned to a part during creation The deferred state is set if the attribute is required default deferred The default value will also be set if one was provided Attributes set as required and not deferrable must have a value before the properties window can be closed This also applies to any required and deferrable or required default deferred attributes without the deferred state set and no value Providing a value allows the user to continue or simply set the deferred state for those attributes that can be deferred The deferred state checkbox Is gray for required and not deferrable attributes The left side of the properties window lists all the available attributes Only non required attributes can be in the list Default values will be used if set Providing editing the value for a deferred attribute will clear the deferred state The right side lists all the attributes assigned to this part along with their required and deferred states and attribute value Only non required attributes can be removed from this list The following is an image of the User Attributes page in the Part Properties window 51 Library Setup Se Plate Prope rties Flate Product Hierarchy Finishes User Attributes Svallable U ser Attibutes Assigned User Attributes Attribute F Required Defered Attribute Commercial Width Commercial Length 504 Al
566. vision Top Leg Width mm Bottom Leg Height me Delete Division Add a new Division The type of division to add e Vertical button Adds a vertical division e Horizontal button Adds a horizontal division Edit an existing Division You can edit an existing division to your specification e Left Leg Width The width of the left pant from the division to either the next division on the left if any or the end of the profile on the left e Right Leg Width The width of the right pant from the division to either the next division on the right if any or the end of the profile on the right e Delete Division This button lets you delete a division Number of Ends Created The text just above the OK and Cancel buttons indicate the number of connectable ends that are going to be created Select UCS Options Reference The Select UCS Options window is an interactive window that will help you to see exactly how your new UCS will look 438 Appendix C HVAC Modeling Reference _ Select UCS Options fx UCS Plane Deck Plane LGBH Plane OQ Pick 3rd Point For Plane UCS Origin Point Part Point Toggle O Origin UCS Plane Depending on the part selected and what end you are currently on there will be different choices for the UCS Plane The choices for the UCS Plane that could show up are as follows e Deck Plane Working plane will be in the Deck plane e Deck Like Plane Workin
567. w revision To create a revision 1 Choose BOM Revisions gt New BOM Revision in Current Layout page 482 or BOM Revisions gt New BOM Revision in All Layouts page 482 2 Provide a name for the revision mEarcer a name for Che new revyviLsiLon s 3 Provide a description for the revision this can be left blank Enter a description for the new revision lt none gt 4 The revision is created in the specified layouts Revision Rev A created in layout Master BOM Or 251 Getting Started with Production Revision Rev A created in 2 layouts Delete Revision When deleting revisions only the current revision can be deleted Any BOM item with the current revision is changed to be the previous revision with the identifier If no previous revision exists then the Revision column is left blank Using the all layouts command to delete revision requires that the current revision in all those layouts have the same name To delete a revision 1 Choose BOM Revisions gt Delete BOM Revision from Current Layout page 482 or BOM Revisions gt Delete BOM Revision from All Layouts page 483 2 the current revision is deleted Revision Rev A deleted in layout Master BOM Or Revision Rev A deleted in 2 layouts Delete All Revisions Instead of deleting each revision one by one the user can simply delete all revisions The BOM tables will not be restored to the original state but will be left as they current
568. w up here e User Deleted Parts Parts that have been manually deleted out of the production drawing Select the parts using the checkbox beside them to re insert them To re insert multiple parts select all the parts that are to be re inserted Click the checkbox for one of the selected parts the checkboxes for all the selected parts will be checked Deleted parts can be previewed using both the Show Preview Checked Parts and the Refresh Preview controls View The view options control what happens when you click on a part in the updating part list e Center Centers on all selected parts e Highlight Highlights all selected parts e Zoom Zooms to all selected parts Part Color overrides To visually aid in identifying parts all parts that are not affected by the update process are temporarily displayed in a light grey color All affected parts have custom color overrides that control how the parts appear while the Modified Part Information window is visible e New Set the color of the parts that have been newly added to this drawing e Modified Set the color of the parts that are being updated because any of their attributes or their geometry has changed e Removed Set the color of the parts that are being removed from this drawing e Deleted Set the color of the parts that have been deleted by the user from this drawing This corresponds to the list of User Deleted Parts from the modified parts table e Unchanged Set
569. wal Cancel 79 Library Setup 80 3 4 Browse for the source file shiplonstructor A Overwrite existing styles Choose Yes to overwrite existing styles if the names match Choose No if you do not want to overwrite existing reference line styles Imported 7 Reference Line Styles The number of styles that were imported is output to the command window Set Up Snapping ShipConstructor includes several snap settings that make it easier to work in three dimensions To set up snapping l 2 Choose SC Utilities gt Snap page 370 to open the Drafting Settings window jra Draftin g settings Quick Properties Selection Cycling SApLon Snap E Project into UCS Absolute Ortho Orthagonal Automatic O Longitude Longitude D Transverse 0 Transverse O vertical C vertical Shiplonstructor Object Snap On Shirt F3 Pipe HY AC Equipment Custom snaps F all Ends Free Ends End 4xis Intersections E E F Profile Corners F Profile Edges Cancel Help Set the options Library Setup e Project into UCS Projects the picked point into the current UCS For example when drawing a line that you want in the UCS you can pick points at elevation and they will be projected down onto the UCS You can choose to project perpendicular to the plane Orthogonal along the WCS X axis Longitude along the WCS Y axis Transverse or along the
570. when the drawing has no assembly sources lt ASSEMBLY NAMES gt The name of each assembly source for the arrangement drawing A row for each assembly will be shown The rows are sorted by the name of the assembly The value will be N A when the drawing has no assembly sources lt ASSEMBLY ser Defined Attribute s gt The user defined attribute value of each assembly source for the arrangement drawing A row for each assembly will be shown The rows are sorted by the name of the 487 Appendix Production Command Reference assembly The value will be N A when the drawing has no assembly sources One keyword for each User Defined Attribute lt FULL ASSEMBLY NAMES gt The full path of the assembly tree that this assembly belongs to of each assembly source for the arrangement drawing A row for each assembly will be shown The rows are sorted by the name of the assembly The value will be N A when the drawing has no assembly sources lt SHORT ASSEMBLY NAMES gt The name of the assembly and its direct parent of each assembly source for the arrangement drawing A row for each assembly will be shown The rows are sorted by the name of the assembly The value will be N A when the drawing has no assembly sources Keywords for Assembly Template Drawings Product Hierarchy lt LEVEL Assembly Level The level rank name of the assembly in every build ASSEMBLY NAME gt strategy A keyword is available for each level in all pro
571. will default to using the global option even if other options are overrode unless the Use Global Option check box is unchecked the global option for that value will be used If the Use Global Value option is unchecked then the value of that row will be used to determine the display settings for that viewport 1 Choose Viewport Display Options gt Set page 473 2 If you were previously inside of a model space viewport the options for that viewport will be displayed else you will be prompted to select the viewport that you wish to configure 19 Drawings FI View port Display Options Option Use Global Option Value Structure Part General Piecemarks Fj Show Plate Part Bevel Text Show E Cuts Fj Show Marks Fj Show Markline Text El Show Profile Part Start and Ered Labels Fi Hide Pipe z2D 30 Wireframe Draw Line Mode Icons Hide Line Mode Icon Override Stock Show F Double LinesSolid Display Fl Always End Numbers Mode Scaled Size Part Bend Direction Centerline 7 Show Ends Connections Fl Chow End Direction Ed Hide Free End Arr ows Fj Show Show or hide all production related output OF Cancel 3 Once a viewport has been selected the Viewport Display Options window will appear The option grid has three columns e Option The names of the different options as well as categories under which the options are organized e Use Global Option If checked th
572. wing Options Dizalay Nav id Transform Routing Behaviour General Display Connections g Show Connections Show Centerline BB by Layer Local Connectian Color HB seen Shi Wall Thickness She insulation Remote Connection Color HD creen Draw Park Using Branch Cobar Show Free Erd Arrows E tue View Dependent Symbols Speal L End Direction Show Spool Break MB red Bend Carescti E dinih Show No Spadl Icon BB ped C End Numbers C Show Elbow Comer Ion white Scaled To End Size Ci Fised Height On Soren Performance Tips Ci None The DISPSILH system variable has a large impact on deplay performance i in shaded modes such as Realistic and Conceptual Setting it to 0 in these modes may yield a significent improvement you may need to run the REGENS command to apply the change Futher improvement may result From tuming off drawing options you do not need Shor Wal Thickness and Show Insulation for instance can both greatly affect the Draw Line Made Icons amount af geometry that must be displayed Double Line Display 20 30 Wireframes Cisplay Always C For Profiles Wider Than gt Never Mote Edge display is now controlled in the same Way 26 For Autol AD solids sme the TSOLINES and DISPSILH variables Restore Defauits General Display Show Centerline When checked displays a line along the center of each duct e Color You can change the color of the centerline Note When plotti
573. wing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Edit BOM Collector Options page 229 Allows the user to change the BOM Collector options BOM gt Toggle List Only Visible Production tab gt BOM panel Toggle List Only Visible Command SCTOGGLELISTVISIBLE Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Toggles the variable in the BOM to list only those parts visible or not Requires an update to the BOM table to show the change Label gt Manual Label Production tab gt Labeling panel Label gt Manual Label SCLABELMANUAL Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Manual Labeling page 243 Manually label parts from a BOM This is an alternative method to automatic labeling The label style and text contents are used from the selected BOM The selection of the leader arrow is the pickpoint where you selected the part The number of leader segments follows the label style setting This command can be used in conjunction with Copy Label from BOM so complete the labeling If you select a part that has been previously labeled then the previous label is removed 411 Appendix Production Command Reference Label gt Copy Label Productio
574. with general engineering principles 6 Delivery and Installation All Licensed Materials will be delivered in an electronic format by media or method as SSI may elect and will be sent to the Licensee s designated email address or shipping address as specified in the Invoice Licensee agrees to be responsible for installation of the Licensed Materials 7 Term of License The License term commences on the delivery of the Licensed Materials to the Licensee and subject to Section 2B above is either perpetual if so requested on the Order or on a month to month rental or lease basis If Licensee chooses a lease option the license converts to a perpetual term on Licensee s payment of the balance of the perpetual License fee prior monthly payments receiving 80 credit All Licenses are subject to termination in accordance with this Agreement 8 System Configuration Operation of the Licensed Materials requires use of the specified System Configuration which Licensee shall acquire and implement SSI Shall not be responsible for any operational problems caused by the System Configuration 9 Security The Licensed Materials includes security elements which support the detection of unauthorized use or copying of the software and which may a report such unauthorized use or copying to the Licensee and b if applicable based on Licensee s configuration may report back specific user information such as User name and email address 10 Hardware
575. xplanation will be printed to the AutoCAD console You are asked if you would like to delete the polyline used to route along Delete source polyline Yes No lt No gt 3 Enter a response The duct appears and routing is complete Fittings There are two means by which fittings can be placed End Mode involves placing a fitting by specifying a location and orientation for one of its ends Intersection Mode lets you place a fitting where two runs of duct will meet End Mode When placing a fitting in end mode you initially only need to consider which end you are placing or connecting to another duct To insert a fitting in end mode 1 Choose the desired fitting you want to insert from the SC HVAC menu The fitting appears at the cursor and information about it is shown on the command line You are prompted to pick the first point or choose an option from the end mode command line Please piek tche rirst point OE the end axis s or Select stock cOnnects Now Next end lt 1 gt inTersection mode XOffset YOffset Choose offset lt 0 0 gt sAddle Insulation If desired choose one of the available options see General Options page 168 for options not listed here e Next end Switches which end of the fitting will be placed at the picked point e Intersection Mode Switches the routing interface to intersection mode see Intersection Mode page 165 Click anywhere in the model to select the start point of the fitting You can co
576. y Drawing When you change the view of an assembly all annotations will not move This is because annotations are always in paper space To change the view in an assembly drawing 1 Double click on a view to activate model space 2 Use the view controls to change the view Getting Started with Production 238 Rotate an Assembly in an Assembly Drawing You may want to rotate the assembly within an assembly drawing to view the assembly from a different angle For example you may want to rotate an assembly so it appears upside down if that is the way it will be assembled The preferred procedure is to orbit around to the correct view position instead of rotating parts When you create assembly drawings only visible sub assemblies are annotated If you later rotate the assembly you may expose otherwise hidden and un annotated sub assemblies After rotating an assembly you must re auto annotate the drawing to ensure that all components are labeled Note The SConCGPoint object will not be rotated when the parts are rotated You can move the CG point by exploding it However updating the drawing will not update the exploded CG point To rotate an assembly in an assembly drawing Note Before rotating an assembly make sure you mark its CG position see Mark an Assembly s CG Position in an Assembly Drawing page 237 In the assembly drawing double click within the viewport to switch to model space Choose Modify gt 3D Operation g
577. y Package To add or remove an accessory to or from an accessory package 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Accessory Packages to open the Accessory Packages window 3 Set Type to the type of accessory packages you want to list Tip Use the Spec Filter to filter the lists under Accessory Packages by spec 4 Select the accessory package you want to add or remove an accessory to or from Accessories that currently belong to the accessory package are listed under Spec Filter 5 To add an accessory to the accessory package under Accessories select the desired accessory and click Add Note To add several of the same type of accessory add the accessory once and set the Qty value To remove an accessory from the accessory package under Spec Filter select the desired accessory and click Remove Add or Remove an Accessory Package To or From a Spec To add or remove an accessory package to or from a spec 1 Choose ShipConstructor gt Manager to open Manager 2 Choose General gt Accessory Packages to open the Accessory Packages window 39 Library Setup 3 Set Type to the type of accessory packages you want to list Tip Use the Spec Filter to filter the lists under Accessory Packages by spec Select the accessory package you want to add or remove to or from a spec Click Assign Spec to open the Accessory Package Specs window Check the check box of the specs you want to add the accessory
578. ype The type of part Part Name The name of the part 465 Appendix Production Command Reference Change The change in state of the part between the selected actions Override All Part Colors If checked the colors of the parts will change from their current colors to the color scheme of New Modified Removed Unchanged Parts will not lose any information if the color overriding is turned on Center Centers the selected part in the current viewport Highlight Highlights the selected part Zoom Enables the zoom slider to zoom into the selected part Reload The icon in the upper right hand comer Ea gets the latest action data from the current drawing MarineDrafting drawings can contain multiple 2D Views the drop list allows you to zoom to a part in a specific view View E Override All Part Colors Mew E sreen us Modified MB blue FRAME 59000 LNGBHD 3000 Removed E Red L Zoom Unchanged color 254 Zoom to 2D View Show Hide View panel button minimizes the View panel in the palette Colors are still togglable on the panel header while minimized Orientation Icon Production tab gt Production Utilities panel Orientation Icon SCASSORIENT Permissions Edit Production Drawing Permission page 459 License Universal Structure Pipe HVAC Equipment Electrical or MarineDrafting Procedure Insert an Orientation Icon into an Assembly Drawing page 236 Inserts an orienta
579. ystem Manager See SC HVAC gt Systems gt System Manager page 400 G Set System See SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set System page 401 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference 377 Appendix B HVAC Command Reference Set System from HVAC See SC HVAC gt Systems gt Set Current System From HVAC Part page 400 ey Straight See SC HVAC gt Straight page 388 EP Bent See SC HVAC gt Bent page 389 Elbow See SC HVAC gt Elbow page 389 Lateral See SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Lateral page 391 4 Reducing Lateral See SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Reducing Lateral page 391 2 Segment Lateral See SC HVAC gt Laterals gt 2 Segment Lateral page 392 Double Lateral See SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double Lateral page 392 Double Reducing Lateral See SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double Reducing Lateral page 392 a Double 2 Segment Lateral See SC HVAC gt Laterals gt Double 2 Segment Lateral page 392 es Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Tee page 389 A Square Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Square Tee page 389 lt Rect Radial Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Rect Radial Tee page 390 D Reducing Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Reducing Tee page 390 D 2 Segment Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt 2 Seqment Tee page 390 e3 Double Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double Tee page 390 eS Double Reducing Tee See SC HVAC gt Tees gt Double

HVAC

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents